Toshiba Answering Machine Dk14 User Manual
726+,%$  
Telecommunication Systems Division  
Digital Business Telephone Solutions  
Programming Manual  
Software Release 3.1  
Software Release 4.1  
Software Release 4.1  
and ACD  
May 1999  
Contents  
Introduction  
Organization..........................................................................................................................................vii  
Conventions..........................................................................................................................................viii  
Related Documents/Media.....................................................................................................................ix  
Chapter 1 – Overview  
Numerical Program Listing..................................................................................................................1-1  
Alphabetical Program Listing ..............................................................................................................1-7  
How to Program a Strata DK System ................................................................................................1-10  
First-time Programming.....................................................................................................................1-14  
Programming Examples.....................................................................................................................1-16  
Chapter 2 – Initialization & Test  
Program 91-9 – System Initialization ..................................................................................................2-2  
Program 90 – Initialize Programs 00~*99 ...........................................................................................2-4  
Program 91-1 – Automatic PCB Recognition and Port Renumber......................................................2-6  
Program 91-2 – Data Transfer from Temporary Memory to Working Memory.................................2-8  
Program 92 – Initializing Misc. Backup RAM ....................................................................................2-9  
Program 00 – Part 1: Software Check................................................................................................2-12  
Program 00 – Part 2: Processor RAM Test........................................................................................2-15  
Chapter 3 – System & Station  
Program 01 – Station Logical Port Display and/or Change.................................................................3-1  
Program 02 – Station Physical Port Display and/or Change................................................................3-2  
Program 03 for DK14 – Slot Assignments ..........................................................................................3-3  
Program 03 for DK40i – Flexible PCB Slot Assignments...................................................................3-4  
Program 03 for DK424 – Flexible PCB Cabinet Slot Assignments ....................................................3-6  
Program *03 for DK424 – Cabinet Type Identification ....................................................................3-11  
Program 04 – Station Logical Port [PDN] Assignment.....................................................................3-12  
Program *04 – [PhDN] and Distributed Hunt [DN] Assignments For Internal and Tie Line Calls..3-17  
Program 05 – Flexible Access Code Numbering...............................................................................3-19  
Program *05 – Call Park Pickup Abbreviated Dialing......................................................................3-22  
Program 09 – Built-in Auto Attendant Prompt / Station Assignments..............................................3-23  
Program *09 – [PDN], [PhDN], DH, ACD or Modem DID Ext. Assignments ................................3-25  
Program 10-1 – System Assignments, Part 1 of 3 .............................................................................3-27  
Program 10-2 – System Assignments, Part 2 of 3 .............................................................................3-30  
Program 10-3 – System Assignments, Part 3 of 3 .............................................................................3-35  
Program *10 – Enhanced 911 Operation ...........................................................................................3-39  
Program 12 – System Assignments, Basic Timing............................................................................3-41  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
i
Contents  
Chapter 3 – System & Station  
Program 13 – Defining the Message Center ......................................................................................3-43  
Program 15 – Ground/Loop/Tie/DID Line Options...........................................................................3-44  
Program *15 – CO Line Tenant Assignments ...................................................................................3-47  
Program 16 – Assign CO Line Groups (or Dial 9) ............................................................................3-48  
Program 17 – DID/Tie Line Options .................................................................................................3-50  
Program *17 – DID Intercept Port Number (Vacant or Wrong Number) .........................................3-53  
Program 19 – Alternate Background Music Source Slot Assignment...............................................3-54  
Program 20 – Computer and Data Interface Unit Configuration.......................................................3-55  
Program 21 – Modem Pool Port Assignments...................................................................................3-58  
Program 22 – RPCI and DIU Station Hunting for Data Calls ...........................................................3-60  
Program 23 – Built-in Auto Attendant (AA) Primary Announcement Assignments ........................3-61  
Program 24 – Built-in AA Secondary Announcement Assignments.................................................3-61  
Program 25-1 – Built-in AA Incoming Call Overflow Time.............................................................3-62  
Program 26 – Built-in AA Camp-on Busy Time ...............................................................................3-63  
Program 27 – DKT Handset/Headset Receiver Volume Level .........................................................3-65  
Program 28 – DSS Console/Attendant Telephone Assignments.......................................................3-66  
Program 29-1~8 – DSS Console and Number Button Assignments..................................................3-68  
Program *29 – Add-on Modules Button Assignments ......................................................................3-71  
Program 30 – Station Class of Service...............................................................................................3-73  
Program *30 – Telephone Group Page Assignments ........................................................................3-79  
Program 31 – Station Class of Service...............................................................................................3-80  
Program *31 – Group Pickup Assignments.......................................................................................3-86  
Program 32 – Automatic Preference..................................................................................................3-87  
Program *32 – RS-232 Voice Mail Message Center Port .................................................................3-89  
Program 33 – [PDN]/ [PhDN] Station Hunting (Voice Calls Only)..................................................3-90  
Program *33 – [PhDN] Owner Telephone Assignment ....................................................................3-92  
Program 34 – Hold Recall Timing.....................................................................................................3-94  
Program *34 – Station Class Of Service............................................................................................3-95  
Program 35 – Station Class of Service...............................................................................................3-97  
Program 36 – Fixed Call Forward....................................................................................................3-101  
Program *36 – System NT Button Lock Password Changing Station Assignment ........................3-102  
Program 37 – Ring Transfer (Camp-on) Recall Time .....................................................................3-103  
Program *37 – Park Recall Timing..................................................................................................3-104  
Program 38 – Digital and Electronic Telephone Keystrip Type......................................................3-105  
Program *38 – Standard Telephone Ring-Down Destination..........................................................3-109  
Program 39 – Flexible Button Assignments ....................................................................................3-111  
Program *40 – Distributed Hunt Group Member Assignments.......................................................3-120  
Program *41 for DK424 – T1 Assignment Series (Part 1)..............................................................3-122  
Program *50 – Caller ID Circuit Assignments to CO Line PCBs...................................................3-126  
Program *51 – Station Memory Allocation.....................................................................................3-128  
Program *52 – Caller ID/ANI Abandoned Call Number Station Owner Assignments...................3-130  
Program 58 – DK424 Attendant Console Series (Part 1) ................................................................3-132  
Program 59 – Attendant Console Flexible Button Codes................................................................3-135  
Program 60-1 – SMDR Data Output Options..................................................................................3-139  
Program 60-2~7 – SMDR Output/Account Code Digit Length ......................................................3-140  
Program 60-8 – Call Forward External (Remote Change, Security) ID Code.................................3-142  
Program 69 – Verified Account Codes............................................................................................3-143  
Program 70 – Verified Account Code Toll Restriction Assignments..............................................3-145  
Program 71 – DNIS..........................................................................................................................3-147  
Program *71~*73 – [DN] to [DN], Tie to [DN], and DID to [DN] Ringing Assignments.............3-152  
ii  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
Contents  
Chapter 4 – Toll Restriction  
Program 72 – DNIS Number Network Table Assignments.............................................................3-154  
Program 74 – System NT Button Lock Password ...........................................................................3-156  
Program 76-1(X-Y) – DK14, DK40i, All RCTUs...........................................................................3-157  
Program 76-2 (X-Z) – WSIU, TSIU and RSIU / RSIS / RMDS Transmission Rates.....................3-158  
Program 77-1 – Peripheral Options (Door Phones).........................................................................3-159  
Program 77-2 – Door Phone Busy Signal/Door Lock Assignments................................................3-163  
Program 77-3 – Night Ringing Over PIOU External Page Zones ...................................................3-165  
Program 77-4 – RSIU Open Architecture Interface (OAI) Data Output Assignments....................3-166  
Program 78 – CO Line Special Ringing Assignments.....................................................................3-168  
Program 79 – Door Phone Ringing..................................................................................................3-170  
Program *79 – Door Phone to [DN] Flashing Assignments............................................................3-172  
Program 80 – EKT and DKT Ringing Tones (CO Line Calls)........................................................3-173  
Program *80 – Call Forward Station Ring Assignment...................................................................3-174  
Programs 81~89 – Ground/Loop Start/CO Line Station Ringing....................................................3-175  
Programs *81, *84, and *87 – Ground/Loop Start/CO Line to [DN] LED Flash Assignments......3-179  
Program 93 – CO Line Identification...............................................................................................3-183  
Program 97 – Printing Program Data through SMDR.....................................................................3-185  
Chapter 4 – Toll Restriction  
Toll Restriction Methods......................................................................................................................4-1  
Toll Restriction Features......................................................................................................................4-1  
Completing the Toll Restriction System Record .................................................................................4-3  
Program 40 – Station CO Line Access ................................................................................................4-4  
Program 41 – Station Outgoing Call Restriction .................................................................................4-6  
Program 42-0 – CO Line to PBX/Centrex Connection & Access Codes ............................................4-8  
Program 42-1~8 – PBX/Centrex Access Codes.................................................................................4-10  
Program 43 – 0 + Credit Card Dialing Option...................................................................................4-11  
Program 44-1~8 – Toll Restriction/Traveling Class Override Codes................................................4-13  
Program 44-91~93 – Emergency Bypass of Forced/Verified Account Codes ..................................4-14  
Program 45-1 – LCR/Toll Restriction Dial Plan................................................................................4-15  
Program 45-2 – Toll Restriction Disable ...........................................................................................4-19  
Program 45-3~6 – Special Common Carrier Numbers and Authorization Code Digit Length.........4-20  
Program 45-8~9 – Toll Restriction Override Code............................................................................4-22  
Program *45-1 (1~4) – Toll Restriction for Office Codes.................................................................4-23  
Program *45-2 (1~6) – LCR/Toll Restriction Bypass .......................................................................4-24  
Program *45-3 (1~9) – LCR/Toll Restriction Bypass For Special Numbers that Begin with */# ....4-26  
Program *45-4 – Special Code Dialing Sequence with LCR ............................................................4-28  
Program 46-2~4 – Toll Restriction Allowed/Denied Area Codes by Class ......................................4-30  
Program 46-6~8 – Toll Restriction Allowed/Denied Local Office Codes Assigned by Class..........4-31  
Programs 46-10~80 – Toll Restriction Class Parameters ..................................................................4-33  
Programs 46-11~46-81 – Toll Restriction Class (1~8) Parameters...................................................4-35  
Program 47 – Toll Restriction Exception Office Codes Assigned by Area Codes (Tables 1~16) ....4-36  
Program 48 – Station Toll Restriction Classification ........................................................................4-38  
Chapter 5 – Least Cost Routing  
LCR Features .......................................................................................................................................5-1  
LCR Conditions ...................................................................................................................................5-2  
LCR CO Line Programming Reference Table.....................................................................................5-3  
Program 50-1 – LCR Parameters.........................................................................................................5-4  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
iii  
Contents  
Chapter 6 – Automatic Call Distribution  
Program 50-2 – LCR Home Area Code...............................................................................................5-5  
Programs 50-3 (1~5) – LCR Special Codes.........................................................................................5-6  
Program 50-4 – LCR Long Distance Information (LDI) Plan Number...............................................5-7  
Program 50-5 – LCR Local Call Plan Number....................................................................................5-8  
Program 50-6 – LCR Dial 0 (Zero) Time-out......................................................................................5-9  
Program 51 – LCR Area Codes .........................................................................................................5-10  
Program 52 – LCR Office Code Exceptions for Specified Area Code..............................................5-12  
Program 53 – LCR Schedule Assignments for LCR Plans................................................................5-14  
Program 54 – LCR Route Definition Tables......................................................................................5-17  
Program 55 – LCR Modified Digits Table ........................................................................................5-19  
Program 55-0 – Delete Number of Digits From the Front of Dialed Number...................................5-20  
Program 55-1 and 2 – Add Digits Before and/or After the Dialed Number......................................5-21  
Program 56 – LCR Station Group Assignments................................................................................5-23  
Chapter 6 – Automatic Call Distribution  
Program 03 – RSIU, RSSU, PIOU, PIOUS ACD/MIS Slot Assignments ..........................................6-2  
Program 09 – Auto Attendant Prompt/ACD Group Assignments.......................................................6-3  
Program *09 – ACD Group DID Line Digit Assignments..................................................................6-5  
Program 10-4 – ACD/ISDN Parameters..............................................................................................6-6  
Program 11 – ACD Timing Assignments............................................................................................6-8  
Program 14-0 – Loop/Ground Start Line Direct to ACD Group Assignments..................................6-12  
Program 14-1 – ACD Agent Identification Code Assignments.........................................................6-13  
Program *14-1 – Auto Answer with Zip Tone Assigned to Agent ID ..............................................6-14  
Program 18 – Agent Names for SMIS/MIS Assignments .................................................................6-15  
Program 14-2 – ACD Supervisor Passwords.....................................................................................6-17  
Program *14-2 – DID, Tie, DNIS, ANI Line After Shift/Overflow Substitution Destinations ........6-18  
Program 14-3 – Announcement/Music Port and Queue Pattern........................................................6-20  
Program 14-4 – Queue Time Out Overflow Destination...................................................................6-23  
Program 14-5 – Overflow Point and Ring No Answer Routing Destination.....................................6-25  
Program 14-6 – After Shift Service Destination................................................................................6-29  
Program 14-71 – Queue Size for Alarm, Immediate Assignments....................................................6-31  
Program 14-72 – Queue Size for Alarm 1 .........................................................................................6-32  
Program 14-73 – Queue Size for Alarm 2 .........................................................................................6-33  
Program 14-8 – Alarm Pattern Assignments .....................................................................................6-34  
Program 14-9 – Work Unit Assignments...........................................................................................6-35  
Program 15 – Ground/Loop/Tie/DID Line Options...........................................................................6-36  
Program 17 – DID/Tie Line Options .................................................................................................6-36  
Program 35 – Station Class of Service...............................................................................................6-36  
Program 71 – DID/Tie/DNIS/ANI Lines...........................................................................................6-36  
Program 39 – Flexible Button Assignments for ACD Telephones....................................................6-37  
Chapter 7 – ISDN  
System Programs Overview.................................................................................................................7-1  
ISDN Related Programs.......................................................................................................................7-3  
Trunk Programs Overview...................................................................................................................7-5  
Program 16 – Assign CO Line Groups ................................................................................................7-6  
Program *16 – ISDN Trunk Group Type Assignment ........................................................................7-7  
Program *42 – Clock Source ...............................................................................................................7-8  
Program *42-1 – Primary Timing Reference Assignments (Release 3.1 and earlier).........................7-9  
iv  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
Contents  
Chapter 8 – E911  
Program *43-1~3 – D-Channel Control and NFAS Assignments.....................................................7-10  
Program *43-2 – Non-Facility Associated Signaling (NFAS) Assignment ......................................7-11  
Program *43-3 – Network PRI Interface Assignment .......................................................................7-12  
Program *44 – BRI Service Profile Identifier (SPID) Parameters ....................................................7-13  
Program *60 – BRI Line/Station Operation Assignment ..................................................................7-14  
Program *61 – Analog Trunk Services for ISDN..............................................................................7-15  
Program *62 – Non-ISDN Station Bearer Service ............................................................................7-16  
Program *63 – ISDN Dialing Parameters..........................................................................................7-17  
Program *64-1 – Direct Inward Dialing Parameters..........................................................................7-18  
Program *64-2 – Number of DID/DNIS Digits for Trunk Groups....................................................7-19  
Program *65 – ISDN Channel Group Assignment............................................................................7-20  
Program *66-1 – Channel Group Number Parameters ......................................................................7-21  
Programs *66-2 and *66-4 – Call-by-Call Trunk Group Codes and Network ID.............................7-22  
Program *66-3 – Channel Group/Trunk Parameters .........................................................................7-24  
Program *66-5 – Line Directory Number (LDN) Registration .........................................................7-25  
Program *66-6 – LDN/Trunk Group to Channel Group Assignments..............................................7-26  
Program *66-7 – LDN/Trunk Group Assignments............................................................................7-27  
Program *67-1 – Trunk Group Call Direction...................................................................................7-28  
Program *67-2 – Call Types for ISDN Trunk Group Supported.......................................................7-29  
Program *67-3 – ISDN Trunk Group Minimum Channel Reservation.............................................7-30  
Program *67-4 – ISDN Trunk Groups Maximum Channel Reservation...........................................7-31  
Program *67-5 – Multiple Time Zone Settings .................................................................................7-32  
Program *68-1 – Calling Number ID Presentation Parameters.........................................................7-33  
Program *68-2 – Outbound CNIS Parameters...................................................................................7-34  
Program *69-1 – CNIS Presentation Parameters...............................................................................7-35  
Program *69-2 – Special Number Assignment..................................................................................7-36  
Chapter 8 – E911  
Operation Overview.............................................................................................................................8-1  
SMDR ..................................................................................................................................................8-2  
Programming Overview.......................................................................................................................8-3  
Program *11-0 – E911/CAMA Trunk Assignments............................................................................8-4  
Program *11-1 – CAMA Trunk Group Line Assignments..................................................................8-6  
Program *11-2 – CAMA Trunk Group Hunting Assignments............................................................8-7  
Program *11-5 – CAMA Digits Sent on 911 Calls..............................................................................8-8  
Program *11-6 – E911 Interdigital Timer............................................................................................8-9  
Program *11-8 – 911 Special [DN] Notification Assignments .........................................................8-10  
Program *12 – CESID Station Information.......................................................................................8-11  
Program *13 – Station To CAMA Trunk Group Assignment...........................................................8-13  
Glossary .......................................................................................................................................... GL-1  
Index.....................................................................................................................................................IN-1  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
v
Contents  
Chapter 8 – E911  
vi  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
Introduction  
This manual provides for programming the Strata DK14, DK40i, and DK424 digital business  
telephone systems. It is intended for qualified service technicians and system programmers. At the  
time of this printing, this book contains Release 4.1 information for the DK424. It also contains  
some pre-release information for software beyond Release 4.1.  
Important! Information beyond Release 4.1 is preliminary and given prior to product release.  
Be careful when using this information as the software will change and updates/  
additions will be required upon final release.  
This manual uses simplified, generic system record sheets that have legends that show you specific  
port configurations for Strata DK14, DK40i and DK424 systems.  
After using the legends, copy the generic record sheets as required to accommodate your system  
ports and settings.  
The Installation and Maintenance (I&M) Manual, a companion book, covers the installation and  
maintenance information and instructions for the Strata DK systems discussed in this book.  
Organization  
This manual is organized as follows for your convenience:  
♦
Chapter 1 – Overview includes general programming information and basic instructions on  
how to program the system with a 20-button LCD digital or electronic telephone.  
♦
♦
Chapter 2 – Initialization & Test includes information for initializing and test programs.  
Chapter 3 – System & Station includes programming information for the entire system and  
individual stations.  
♦
♦
♦
Chapter 4 – Toll Restriction includes programming information for Toll Restriction.  
Chapter 5 – Least Cost Routing includes programming information for Least Cost Routing.  
Chapter 6 – Automatic Call Distribution includes ACD programming for DK424 (ACD  
does not apply to the RCTUA processor).  
♦
♦
♦
Chapter 7 – ISDN includes programming instructions and record sheets for Integrated  
Systems Digital Networking features for the DK424 and DK40i.  
Chapter 8 – E911 includes programming information for connecting the DK424 to Enhanced  
911 CAMA trunks.  
Glossary/Index  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
vii  
Introduction  
Conventions  
The programs in each chapter are given in numerical order (except Initialization and Test which is  
given in order of importance). The “*” programs are located behind the program of the same name  
(e.g., Program *09 follows Program 09).  
Conventions  
Conventions  
Description  
Elaborates specific items or references other information. Within some  
tables, general notes apply to the entire table and numbered notes apply to  
specific items.  
Note  
Important!  
CAUTION!  
WARNING!  
[DN]  
Calls attention to important instructions or information.  
Advises you that hardware, software applications, or data could be  
damaged if the instructions are not followed closely.  
Alerts you when the given task could cause personal injury or death.  
Represents any Directory Number button, also known as an extension or  
intercom number.  
Represents any Primary Directory Number button (the extension number  
for the telephone).  
[PDN]  
[SDN]  
Represents any Secondary appearance of a PDN. A PDN which appears on  
another telephone is considered an SDN.  
[PhDN]  
$ULDO#%ROG  
Courier  
“Type”  
Represents any Phantom Directory Number button (an additional DN).  
Represents telephone buttons.  
Shows a computer keyboard entry or screen display.  
Indicates entry of a string of text.  
Indicates entry of a single key. For example: Type progthen press  
Enter.  
“Press”  
Shows a multiple PC keyboard or phone button entry. Entries without  
spaces between them show a simultaneous entry. Example: Esc +  
Enter. Entries with spaces between them show a sequential entry.  
Plus (+)  
Example: + .  
# 5  
Tilde (~)  
Means “through.” Example: 350 ~ 640 Hz frequency range.  
Denotes the step in a one-step procedure.  
Denotes a procedure.  
➤
➤
Used in a programming sequence to denote a variable LED button. A  
number on the black button represents a specific LED button.  
36  
Indicates continuation of a series of numbers entered.  
Grey words within the printed text denote cross-references. In the  
electronic version of this document (Library CD-ROM or FYI Internet  
download), cross-references appear in blue hypertext.  
See Figure 10  
viii  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
Introduction  
Related Documents/Media  
Related Documents/Media  
Note Some documents listed here may appear in different versions on the CD-ROM, FYI or in  
print. To find the most current version, check the version/date in the Publication  
Information on the back of the document’s title page.  
The following documents and CD-ROMS can be used to reference further information about the  
Strata DK systems.  
♦
Digital Telephone User Guide provides all the procedures necessary to operate Toshiba-  
proprietary digital telephones, including Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) features. It also  
includes instructions for using the add-on module/DSS console.  
♦
♦
♦
Digital Telephone Quick Reference Guide provides a quick reference for frequently-used  
digital telephone features.  
Digital Single Line Telephone User Guide provides all the procedures necessary to operate  
Toshiba-proprietary digital single line telephones.  
Electronic Telephone User Guide explains all the procedures necessary to operate Toshiba-  
proprietary electronic telephones, including all LCD features. Does not apply to the Strata  
DK14 system. It also includes instructions for using the electronic DSS console.  
♦
♦
♦
Electronic Telephone Quick Reference Guide provides a quick reference for frequently-  
used electronic telephone features. Does not apply to the Strata DK14 system.  
Standard Telephone User Guide explains all the procedures necessary to operate rotary dial  
and push-button standard telephones.  
Strata AirLink External Wireless Handset User Guide shows how to use the wireless  
handset configured to standard ports of the Strata DK telephone system and many non-Toshiba  
systems.  
♦
♦
♦
♦
Strata AirLink External Wireless Quick Reference Guide contains instructions for  
operation of commonly used Strata AirLink External Wireless Handset features.  
Strata AirLink Integrated Wireless Handset User Guide shows how to use the wireless  
handset configured to digital ports of the Strata DK telephone system.  
Strata AirLink Integrated Wireless Quick Reference Guide contains instructions for  
operation of commonly used Strata AirLink Integrated Wireless Handset features.  
System Administrator Guide gives instructions for the System Administrator to manage the  
system. Contains instructions for Station Relocation, System Speed Dial, and other features  
only activated by the System Administrator.  
♦
PC/Data Interface User Guide explains all the procedures necessary to operate stand-alone  
data interface units while in the data mode for printer sharing and modem pooling. Also  
provides instructions on connecting to a Personal Computer with Telephone Application  
Programming Interface (TAPI).  
♦
♦
♦
Cordless Telephone User Guide provides instructions on using the DKT2004-CT cordless  
digital telephone as a single unit or in conjunction with a digital telephone.  
PC-DKT User Guide provides installation and operation information for the Personal  
Computer Digital Key Telephone system.  
Strata DK Feature Description Manual describes each feature associated with the Strata  
DK424, DK40i and DK14. Also provides descriptions of compatible Toshiba-proprietary  
telephones and peripherals.  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
ix  
Introduction  
Related Documents/Media  
♦
Keyprint 2000 User Guide provides instructions for the Keyprint 2000 software printing  
package which allows you to print and store custom button label keystrips for Strata DK 2000-  
series 10-button or 20-button digital telephones, 20-button add-on modules, and 60-button  
digital DSS consoles.  
♦
♦
Strata DK Programming Manual provides all instructions necessary to program the system  
and system record sheets, including ACD.  
Strata DK Installation & Maintenance Manual provides installation instructions for  
configuring and installing the Strata DK14, DK40i and DK424. It also includes T1/DS-1  
interface installation and configuration instructions, as well as fault finding flowcharts to  
troubleshoot the systems. An ACD Section provides instructions for installing ACD into the  
Strata DK424.  
♦
♦
Strata AirLink External Wireless System Installation Guide provides step-by-step  
hardware and software installation instructions. It includes examples of system configurations,  
information on performing a site survey, and troubleshooting techniques.  
Hospitality Management Information System (HMIS) General Description provides an  
overall view of the system’s hardware, software, applications and features. The HMIS is a PC-  
based solution, designed to meet the specific operational needs of small- to medium-sized  
hotel/motels and includes both the PC and software.  
♦
♦
Hospitality Management Information System (HMIS) User Guide describes the product’s  
many software features and gives step-by-step instructions for using them.  
Strata DK Library CD-ROM enables you to view, print, navigate and search publications  
for Strata DK14, DK40 and DK424 digital business telephone systems. It also includes Strata  
DK424 ACD Documentation, including the Strata DK424 Call Center Solutions General  
Description, ACD Agent Guide, ACD Supervisor’s Guide. ACD Installation and Programming  
instructions are included in the Strata DK Installation and Maintenance Manual and  
Programming Manual.  
♦
♦
Strata DK HMIS CD-ROM contains a copy of all HMIS documentation/bulletins and  
enables you to view, print, navigate and search publications.  
StrataControl CD-ROM contains the StrataControl software, that enables viewing,  
downloading, editing, and uploading Strata DK programmed data on a PC. This software also  
provides a method of creating custom lists and user guides based on information from the  
Strata DK system.The CD-ROM contains the StrataControl User Guide.  
♦
♦
DKQuote CD-ROM contains the DKQuote application and the DKQuote User Guide, that  
shows how to use this interactive software to assist you with Strata DK Systems configuration  
and pricing worksheets.  
DKAdmin/DKBackup CD-ROM includes the programs that let you easily and quickly  
custom program and/or update the Strata DK14/DK40/DK424 with a user-friendly PC display.  
The CD-ROM also contains the DKAdmin/DKBackup User Guide, that explains how to use  
the DKAdmin/DKBackup interactive software applications. The current version does not  
support DK40i.  
The following documentation and media applies to the Strata DK424 system only.  
♦
Strata DK424 Call Center Solutions General Description provides a system overview,  
including hardware and feature information. Highlights the technology employed in operating  
the ACD Strata DK424 system.  
♦
♦
ACD Agent Guide describes the ACD agent feature operation along with step-by-step  
procedures for using features.  
ACD Supervisor Guide provides instruction on how to use the ACD supervisor features.  
x
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
Introduction  
Related Documents/Media  
♦
♦
♦
Insight DK CD-ROM which includes Insight DK software, the upgrade to Insight DK Plus,  
Demo software, Insight DK documentation and training modules.  
Insight DK Installation Guide explains how to set up the network, install the server software,  
install clients and explains how the data files are organized.  
Insight DK Supervisor Guide provides instructions for using the Strata DK Insight and  
Insight DK Plus MIS for the Supervisor of a call center. Instructions for creating and using  
Real Time Displays, Reports, Alarms, and Wallboards are also included.  
♦
Insight DK inView Quick Reference Guide provides instructions for viewing and  
customizing the on-screen wallboard and large character views of the real time call center  
data.  
♦
♦
♦
PC Attendant Console User Guide explains the procedures necessary to operate the PC  
Attendant Console.  
PC Attendant Console Quick Reference Guide provides a quick reference for frequently-  
used PC Attendant Console features.  
Call Center Viewer User Guide describes how to install and operate the Call Center Viewer  
application on a PC. It explains how to view and customize ACD group and agent status  
information.  
♦
Software MIS (SMIS) Supervisor Manual provides descriptions, examples, and instructions  
on using the Software MIS application.  
For authorized users, Internet site FYI (http://fyi.tsd.toshiba.com) contains all current Strata DK  
documentation and enables you to view, print, and download current publications.  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
xi  
Introduction  
Related Documents/Media  
xii  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
Overview  
1
Numerical Program Listing  
The following numerical listing gives you the Strata DK program numbers, titles and program  
types.  
Program Title  
00  
Part 1: Software Check/Remote Maintenance Security Code  
Assignments  
X
00  
01  
Part 2: RCTU: Random Access Memory (RAM) Test  
Station Logical Port Display and/or Change  
Station Physical Port Display and/or Change  
Flexible PCB Cabinet and Slot Assignments  
Cabinet Type Identification  
X
X
X
02  
03  
X
X
X
*03  
04  
Station Logical Port Primary Directory Number Assignment  
[PhDN] and Distributed Hunt [DN] for Internal Tie Line Calls  
Flexible Access Code Numbering  
X
X
*04  
05  
X
X
X
X
X
05  
Call Park Pickup Abbreviated Dialing  
Built-in Auto Attendant Prompt/Station Assignments  
[PDN], [PhDN], DH, ACD or Modem DID External Assignments  
System Assignments, Basic Timing  
*
09  
X
X
*09  
10-1~3  
10-4  
X
X
ACD Parameters and ISDN PRI and BRI T-wait Timers  
E911 Standard Telephone Ports Assignment  
E911 Standard Telephone Ports Assignment  
E911 Interdigital TImer  
X
*10-11  
*10-12  
*10-91  
X
X
X
X
10-92  
E911 Pause Before Send TImer  
*
11  
*11-1~9  
12  
ACD Timing Assignments  
X
CAMA Trunk Assignments  
X
X
System Assignments  
*12  
ANI Station Information  
X
X
X
13  
Defining the Message Center  
*13  
Station Group Information  
14-0  
14-1  
Loop/Ground Start CO Line Direct Ring to ACD Group Assignments  
ACD Agent Identification Code Assignments  
X
X
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
1-1  
N
mer  
c
l
g
Program Number  
i
Initialization & Test  
System  
Station  
Toll Restriction  
Least Cost Routing  
ACD  
ISDN  
Program Number  
Initialization & Test  
System  
Station  
N
Toll Restriction  
Least Cost Routing  
ACD  
m
ric  
o
ISDN  
Lis  
n
w v i e e r O v  
N
mer  
c
l
g
Program Number  
i
Initialization & Test  
System  
Station  
Toll Restriction  
Least Cost Routing  
ACD  
ISDN  
Program Number  
Initialization & Test  
System  
Station  
N
Toll Restriction  
Least Cost Routing  
ACD  
m
ric  
o
ISDN  
Lis  
n
w v i e e r O v  
N
mer  
c
l
g
Program Number  
i
Initialization & Test  
System  
Station  
Toll Restriction  
Least Cost Routing  
ACD  
ISDN  
Overview  
Alphabetical Program Listing  
Alphabetical Program Listing  
This alphabetical program listing gives you features/topics and the corresponding Strata DK  
program numbers that relate to the topic  
Feature or Topic  
Program Number  
10-1, *15, *31, 39  
10-1  
Feature or Topic  
Program Number  
Call Pickup  
Account Codes  
15, 70, 39, 69, 30, 60  
Call Transfer with Camp-on  
Caller ID  
03, 09, *09, 10-4, 11,  
14-0, 14-1, *14-1, 14-2, *14-2,  
14-3, 14-4, 14-5, 14-6, 14-8, 14-  
9, 14-71, 14-72, 14-73, 15, 17,  
18, 35, 39, 71-1~3  
03, 10-3, 20, 39, *50, *51, *52,  
59, 60-1, 77-4, (DK 14 only: 76-1,  
76-2)  
ACD  
Camp-on  
10-2, 31, *34, 37  
42-0, 42-1~8, *45  
10-1  
Add-on Module  
Alarm Sensor  
*29  
Centrex/PBX Compatible  
Centrex Ringing Repeat  
39  
05, 10-2, 31, 39  
39  
All Call Voice Page  
Alert Signal  
CO/Centrex/PBX Feature  
Buttons  
39, 42-0, 42-1~8  
Alternate Point Answer  
10-1  
CO Line Access  
39, 40, 41  
Amplified Conference  
(External)  
10-2, 10-3  
CO Line Alpha Identification  
CO Line Groups  
93  
16  
10-3, 20, 39, *51, *52, 59, 60-1,  
71-0~5), 72, 77-4  
ANI  
CO Line Reseize Guard Time  
CO Line Queuing  
10-1, 42-0  
Attendant Console  
03, 58-1, 58-2, 58-4, 58-5, 59  
05, 16  
Auto Attendant (Built-in)  
Automatic Busy Redial (ABR)  
Automatic Callback  
09, 10-3, 23~26, 78, 81~89  
CO Line Ringing  
78, *80, 81~89, *81, *84, *87  
10-1, 10-2, 10-3,15  
43, 60-7  
10-1, 16, 30, 39  
Conferencing  
05, 39, 10-2  
Credit Card Calls (0 + dialing)  
Data Port/DIU Configuration  
Automatic Hold  
35  
34  
91  
32  
20, 21, 22, 39  
Automatic Hold Recall  
Automatic PCB Recognition  
Automatic Preference  
10-2, 78, 81~89, *80, *81, *84,  
*87  
DAY/NIGHT Mode  
Delayed Ringing  
*80, 82, 83, 85, 86, 88, 89  
03, 27, 30, 38, 39, 80, 92-5  
*09, 15, 17, *17, 30, 71, 72  
Digital Telephone  
Automatic Release Hold/VM  
Port  
15  
Direct Inward Dialing (DID)  
Background Music  
05, 10-2, 19, 39  
Direct Inward System Access  
(DISA)  
15, 10-1, 60, 78  
29-1~29-8, 39  
Busy Override  
05, 31  
35  
Direct Station Selection  
Buttons  
Busy Station Transfer/Ringing  
Cabinet Type Identification  
Call Blocking (VM Ports)  
*03  
31  
04, *04, *33, 39, 71-(0-3), *71,  
*72, *73, 79, *79, 81-89, *81, *84,  
*87  
Directory Number  
Call Forward Blocking with  
Handsfree  
35  
Directory Number Buttons  
DISA Code Revision  
39  
04, 05, 30, 40, 41  
10-2, 80  
Call Forward External  
05, 12, 15, 41, 60-8  
Distinctive Station Ringing  
Call Forward Station Ring  
(ground/loop start lines)  
80  
*
*04, 33, *40, 71-(0-3), 81-89, *81,  
*84, *87  
Distributed Hunt  
DKAdmin  
Call Forwarding (all types)  
Call Park Orbits  
10-2, 36, 39, 40  
77-1  
*05, *37, 39, 58-4, 59  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
1-7  
Overview  
Alphabetical Program Listing  
Feature or Topic  
Program Number  
Feature or Topic  
Program Number  
12, 17, 20, 60-1, 71-(0-5), 72,  
77-4  
03, 50-1, 50-2, 50-3, 50-4, 50-5,  
50-6, 51, 52, 53, 54, 55-0, 55-1/2,  
56, 60-2,  
DNIS  
HMIS  
60-3, 76-1  
Do Not Disturb  
39  
05, 30  
10-1, 10-4, 16, *16, *42-1, *42-2,  
*43-1~3, *44, *60, *61, *62, *63,  
*64-1, *64-2, *65, *66-1~7, *67-  
1~4, *68-1, *68-2, *69-1, *69-2  
Do Not Disturb Override  
Door Lock Control  
Door Phones  
ISDN  
39, 77-1, 77-2  
05, 77-1, 77-2, 79, *79  
03, 28, 29-1~29-8, 10-2  
28  
Handsfree Answerback  
Hold/Park Recall Timing  
Hunting, Station  
17, 31  
34  
DSS Console Features  
DSS DKT/EKT  
10-2, 22, 33  
DTMF and Dial Pulse  
Assignments  
10-1, 15, 30, 39  
03, 12, 15  
10-1  
Immediate Transfer with Soft  
Key  
10-2  
DTMF Receiver (QRCU3,  
K5RCU, RRCS) Operation  
Initialization (system  
programs)  
91-9, 91-1, 90  
91-9, 92  
DTMF Signal Time, CO lines  
(80/160 ms)  
Initialization (system/personal  
memory)  
DTMF Signal Time, VM Ports  
(80/160 ms)  
10-2  
Keystrips  
38  
Least Cost Routing  
*45-2, *45-3, *45-4, 50~56  
DTMF Tone/No Tone/Padded  
Tone Return  
10-2  
Liquid Crystal Display  
Features  
10-2, 35, 39  
DTMF Continuous Tone  
(2000-series DKT)  
35  
Logical Port Display/Change  
RAM Memory Test  
01  
00 (Part 2)  
13, *32  
Emergency Numbers  
Enhanced 911 (E911)  
44-91~93  
*11-0, *11-1, *11-2, *11-5, *11-6,  
*11-8, *12, *13  
Message Center  
Message Waiting/Flash  
Microphone Control  
Modem Pool Port Assignment  
Music-on-Hold  
05, 10-2, 12, 35, 39  
30, 39  
Exclusive Hold  
10-1  
05, 10-2, 30  
10-2, 77-1, 77-3, 78  
05, 77-1, 77-3  
36, 39  
Executive Override  
External Page Interface  
External Zone Paging  
Fixed Call Forwarding  
Flash Key Assignment  
Flash Timing  
20, 21  
77-1  
Night Pickup Code  
05  
Night Ringing over External  
Page  
39  
77-1, 77-3, 78  
12  
Night Transfer  
29, 39, 59, 77-1, 78  
*36, 39, 59, 74  
03, 30, 31, 39  
32  
Flexible Access Code  
Numbering  
05, *05  
Night Transfer Lock  
Off-hook Call Announce  
On-hook Dialing  
Flexible Button Assignments  
Flexible Directory Numbering  
38, 39  
04, *04, 05, 39  
Outgoing Call Restriction  
41  
Flexible Line Ringing  
Assignment  
81~89  
Paging-DKT/EKT (Also see  
Group Paging and External  
Paging)  
31, 39  
00  
Flexible PCB Slot  
Configuration  
91-9, 91-1, 03  
15, 30, 60, 39  
Passwords-Remote  
Programming  
Forced and Voluntary Account  
Codes  
Pause Timing  
PBX Access Code  
PBX Backup  
12, 39  
42-1~42-8  
42-0  
Group Paging  
Group Pickup  
05, *30  
*31  
1-8  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
Overview  
Alphabetical Program Listing  
Feature or Topic  
Physical Port Display/Change  
Pooled CO Lines  
Program Number  
Feature or Topic  
T1 Assignments  
Program Number  
*41, *42  
02  
16, 39  
16, 39  
31  
Tandem CO Line Connections  
Tenant Service  
10-1, 15  
Pooled Line Buttons  
*15, *36, 39, 77-3, 74  
03, 04, 15, 17, 30, 37, 71, 72  
10-1, 30, 35, 41~48, *45-1~3  
10-1  
Pooled Line LED – No Flash  
Tie Lines  
Port/Station Number  
Assignment  
Toll Restriction  
04  
Toll Restriction Override  
Privacy/Non-Privacy  
Privacy Override  
31, 30, 39  
10-2, 30, 31  
00 (Part 2)  
39  
Toll Restriction Override Code  
Revision  
30  
RAM Test (see Memory Test)  
Redial Last Number  
Toshiba Proprietary VM  
Interface  
03, 10-2, 13, *32  
Transfer Privacy  
10-1  
44-1~8  
Remote Administration and  
Maintenance  
00, 03, *09, 77-1, 78  
Traveling Class  
Repeat Last Number Dialed  
Ring Transfer  
39  
Traveling Class Code Revision  
Verifiable Account Codes  
30  
10-1, 37  
15, 30, 39, 60, 69, 70  
Ringing Repeat  
10-1  
Verifiable Account Codes  
Revision  
30  
Ring Tones  
80  
Voice Mail Interface  
10-2, 31, 33, 39  
05, 10-1, 10-2  
Ring Flash Assignments  
Ringing Line Preference  
*71~*73, 81~89, *81, *84, *87  
32, 81~89  
Voice or Tone Signaling  
Volume Reset (Digital  
Telephones)  
92-5  
03, (41, 42, 43, 49), 20, 76, 77-1,  
77-4  
RS-232 Interface  
Volume Set (Digital  
Telephones)  
27  
39  
Saved Number Redial  
Security Code (CF-EXT.)  
Security Code (DISA)  
39  
Voluntary Account Codes  
60-8  
05, 30, 60-6  
Security Code (R.  
Maintenance)  
00  
Slot Assignment  
03  
Software Version  
00  
Speakerphone Assignment  
Speed Dial  
30  
10-1, 30, 39  
Speed Dial Clear  
92  
Speed Dial Entry Timeout  
Standard Telephone Options  
Station Class of Service  
Station Hunting (Data Calls)  
Station Hunting (Voice Calls)  
10-3  
10-2, 30, *34, 35  
30, 31, *34, 35  
22  
33  
Station Message Detail  
Recording (SMDR)  
03, 60-1~60-7, 76, 97  
10-1  
Station-to-Station Volume  
SMDI VM Interface  
03, 10-2, 10-3, 13, 31, *32, *40,  
76  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
1-9  
Overview  
How to Program a Strata DK System  
How to Program a Strata DK System  
Fill out the record sheets that are provided, then enter this data using a 20-button LCD digital  
(DKT) or electronic (EKT) telephone. Strata DK enables you to enter data from an on-site or off-  
site PC with Toshiba DKAdmin software. Toshiba highly recommends this easier method of  
programming.  
DK14/DK40i: the programming telephone must be any 20-button LCD DKT (or EKT, DK40i  
only). The DKT must be connected to a Base KSU, PDKU, RDSU, QCDU, or KCDU digital port.  
An EKT must be connected to a PEKU port.  
DK424: the programming telephone must be a 20-button LCD DKT or EKT connected to circuit 6  
of a PDKU or PEKU installed in cabinet slot 11 and/or slot 12.  
Note Telephones connected to an RDSU or PESU cannot be used to program DK424.  
Programming Section Layout  
Each programming section within a chapter begins with the program’s number and title, followed  
by processor and program type, initialized default, program sequence, then record sheets. A  
program overview and additional program information are given after the record sheets  
(see Figure 1-1).  
Note Some common program sections also include examples for your convenience.  
Program 30 Station Class of Service  
System Programs  
Program Overview  
Program 30 Overview  
Program 30 enables or disables features for individual telephones at the station level. The following text  
describes Program 30 LEDs.  
Brief description of program  
function(s).  
Privacy Override, LED 19  
Additional Program  
Information  
With Privacy Override enabled (LED 19 ON), a station can override calls and listen to a CO line  
conversation by pressing a common CO line button (not a [DN] button). You can set a warning tone for  
Privacy Override (see Program 10-2).  
Additional details on the program  
features that were given on the  
system record sheet.  
Program 30 Station Class of Service  
System Programs  
Program 30  
Station Class of Service  
Number/Title  
Processor Type  
Processor Type: DK14/DK40/DK424  
Program Type: System  
Gives the type of processor that is  
compatible with the given program.  
Be sure to read this information  
before attempting to use a program  
with your system application.  
Initialized Default: LEDs 01, 05 and 07 for all ports  
Program Sequence  
SELECT = Station Logical Port Number(s)  
Buttons/LEDs  
Light LEDs for the port specified in the  
last step. All LEDs marked with an “X”  
in the table below should be lit.  
Keystrokes for entering data  
from system record sheets  
follow a pattern, consisting of a  
five-step process described and  
illustrated in “Program  
Feature  
LED  
20  
19  
18  
17  
16  
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
10  
09  
08  
07  
06  
05  
Port  
Program Type  
Type of function the program  
performs. Can be: Initialization,  
Test System, Station, Toll  
Sequence” on Page 1-13.  
Record Sheet  
Restriction or Least Cost Routing.  
Provides a list of available  
features. The sheet is used to  
record the assignment of  
features or the operation of each  
program. Each sheet provides  
space to record data. This data  
will be referred to when  
Initialized Default  
Default configuration set by  
Program 91-9 “System  
Initialization” when the system is  
first installed or re-initialized.  
2174  
programming the system.  
Figure 1-1 System Record Sheet Sample  
1-10  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
Overview  
How to Program a Strata DK System  
Program Sequence  
Detailed data entry instructions are on the top of each record sheet (see Figure 1-2).  
➤ To use the program sequence on the record sheet  
1. From the programming telephone, enter the programming mode by pressing a series of shaded  
buttons. The shaded buttons represent the entry sequence for all programs.  
2. Enter the program number. This sequence is unique for every program. The buttons are white  
on every record sheet.  
3. Enter the program data. Again, this sequence is unique for every program. The buttons are  
white on every record sheet. To make another entry, repeat this step until ready to exit the  
current program.  
4. Exit the current program. This sequence never changes, and the buttons are always shaded.  
Upon exiting the current program, repeat Step 2 to enter another program, or continue with  
Step 5 to exit the programming mode entirely.  
5. Exit the programming mode by pressing the same button sequence as in Step 4. This sequence  
also never changes and is always shaded.  
Another Program  
More Data  
Step 1  
Step 3  
Enter Program Mode  
Enter Program Data  
(Do not press or [DN] button)  
Step 4  
Exit Current Program  
Step 2  
Enter Program Number  
Step 5  
Exit Program Mode  
or  
(LED Buttons)  
and/or  
1697  
Figure 1-2 Programming Button Sequence Overview  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
1-11  
Overview  
How to Program a Strata DK System  
Programming Data Variations  
There are two different ways to enter data in Step 3 (Figure 1-2) of a program: pressing the buttons  
on the dial pad and pressing the LED buttons. Many programs are multidimensional and involve  
both types of entry.  
Simple Programs  
Simple programs such as Program 00, only require data to be specified through the dial pad. Data  
entered from the dial pad displays on the programming digital or electronic telephone’s LCD,  
along with prompts and confirmations.  
Multidimensional Programs  
Once a program number is entered, the first dimension (usually a CO line number, a station port  
number, or a range of ports) must be specified. Upon specifying this first dimension on the dial  
pad, programming button LEDs 01~20 light in the default configuration.  
The status of each LED can be changed by pressing its associated button. Pressing the button while  
its LED is lit turns the LED OFF; pressing the button while its LED is OFF turns the LED ON. An  
example of multidimensional programming is Program 30.  
Range Programming  
Data can be entered for a range of stations, [DN] reference ports and CO lines with some  
programs.  
➤ To enter a range  
➤ Enter a “ ” between the starting point of a range and the ending point of a range.  
ꢀ
For example, to program the station range of 001~010 for Program 35, press ꢁꢁꢂꢀꢁꢂꢁ.  
♦
♦
♦
♦
When programming a range of station ports, the station’s programming LEDs indicate  
whether the data programmed matches for all items in the range:  
LED ON: Indicates that all ports in the range are programmed with the data choice that  
lights the particular LED.  
LED OFF: Indicates that all ports in the range are programmed with the data choice that  
does not light the particular LED.  
LED Flashing: Indicates that data is currently inconsistent for all ports in the range. Some  
may be programmed with the LED ON; some with the LED OFF.  
CO Line Programming  
Since the programming telephone only has 20 buttons, data can only be entered for 20 CO lines at  
a time.  
➤ To program another range  
➤ Press the 3DJH or 6FUROO button below the LCD.  
For example, to change from one range to another in Program 15, enter the program code, then  
press 6FUROO to advance or 3DJH to go back to another range.  
If the programming telephone is a digital telephone, all CO lines within a range can be  
activated or deactivated for a feature by pressing the 9ROꢃ▲/9RO ▼ buttons.  
➤ Press 9ROꢃ▲ to turn all LEDs ON; press 9RO ▼ button to turn all LEDs OFF.  
1-12  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
Overview  
How to Program a Strata DK System  
➤ To check the status of a CO line in Program 15  
1. Press the 0RGH button (below the LCD) after entering the program code.  
2. Then enter the CO line number to be verified.  
3. Press ꢄ to display the status of the CO line and to advance to the next CO line.  
Programming LED Buttons Keystrip Template  
You place a special buttonstrip template (see Figure 1-3) over the 20 flexible feature buttons of the  
programming telephone. The template assigns a series of numbers to each of the 20 buttons that  
correspond with tables found on the record sheets for programming purposes.  
Since each button represents more than one CO line, depending on the CO line range selected, the  
template assigns more than one number to each button.  
10  
09  
08  
07  
06  
05  
04  
03  
02  
01  
9 20  
8 19  
7 18  
6 17  
5 16  
4 15  
3 14  
2 13  
1 12  
0 11  
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
16, 36, 56, 76  
96, 116, 136,  
156, 176, 196  
17, 37, 57, 77  
97, 117, 137,  
157, 177, 197  
18, 38, 58, 78  
98, 118, 138,  
158, 178, 198  
19, 39, 59, 79  
99, 119, 139,  
159, 179, 199  
20, 40, 60, 80  
100, 120, 140,  
160, 180, 200  
30, 50, 70  
90, 110, 130,  
150, 170, 190  
40, 60, 80  
100, 120, 140,  
160, 180, 200  
11, 31, 51, 71  
91, 111, 131,  
151, 171, 191  
12, 32, 52, 72  
92 112, 132,  
152, 172, 192  
13, 33, 53, 73  
93, 113, 133,  
153, 173, 193  
14, 34, 54, 74  
94, 114, 134,  
154, 174, 194  
15, 35, 55, 75  
95, 115, 135,  
155, 175, 195  
29, 49, 69  
89, 109, 129,  
149, 169, 189  
39, 59, 79  
99, 119, 139,  
159, 179, 199  
06, 26, 46, 66  
86, 106, 126,  
146, 166, 186  
07, 27, 47, 67  
87, 107, 127,  
147, 167, 187  
08, 28, 48, 68  
88, 108, 128,  
148, 168, 188  
09, 29, 49, 69  
89, 109, 129,  
149, 169, 189  
10, 30, 50, 70  
90, 110, 130,  
150, 170, 190  
28, 48, 68  
88, 108, 128,  
148, 168, 188  
38, 58, 78  
98, 118, 138,  
158, 178, 198  
01, 21, 41, 61  
81, 101, 121,  
141, 161, 181  
02, 22, 42, 62  
82, 102, 122,  
142, 162, 182  
03, 23, 43, 63  
83, 103, 123,  
143, 163, 183  
04, 24, 44, 64  
84, 104, 124,  
144, 164, 184  
05, 25, 45, 65  
85, 105, 125,  
145, 165, 185  
27, 47, 67  
87, 107, 127,  
147, 167, 187  
37, 57, 77  
97, 117, 137,  
157, 177, 197  
1843  
26, 46, 66  
86, 106, 126,  
146, 166, 186  
36, 56, 76  
96, 116, 136,  
156, 176, 196  
1000-series digital telephone strip - shows programming button/LED  
assignment locations. Shown as reference only - not available as an  
individual strip.  
25, 45, 65  
85, 105, 125,  
145, 165, 185  
35, 55, 75  
95, 115, 135,  
155, 175, 195  
LED Buttons and CO line numbers (01~20)  
24, 44, 64  
84, 104, 124,  
144, 164, 184  
34, 54, 74  
94, 114, 134,  
154, 174, 194  
Last digit of EK port number for  
programs with a format like 71, 72, and 73  
23, 43, 63  
83, 103, 123,  
143, 163, 183  
33, 53, 73  
93, 113, 133,  
153, 173, 193  
*
*
*
22, 42, 62  
82, 102, 122,  
142, 162, 182  
32, 52, 72  
92, 112, 132,  
152, 172, 192  
CO line numbers (21~200)  
21, 41, 61  
81, 101, 121,  
141, 161, 181  
31, 51, 71  
91, 111, 131,  
151, 171, 191  
2000-series digital telephone strip - supplied with each Strata DK  
Programming Manual and each Documentation Package that ships with the  
system. Can also be used with 6000- and 6500-series electronic telephones.  
Figure 1-3 LED Buttons Programming Keystrips  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
1-13  
Overview  
First-time Programming  
First-time Programming  
Follow these general procedures the first time you install a system or after major hardware changes  
and/or you need to start from scratch.  
Step 1: Check Minimum Hardware Requirements  
A system must have the following minimum hardware installed for programming, as described in  
the Installation chapters of the Strata DK Installation and Maintenance Manual.  
➤ To check hardware requirements on the DK14 and DK40i  
1. Make sure the base cabinet power supply was tested and is functional.  
2. Make sure a 20-button digital LCD DKT telephone (equipped with a programming template)  
is connected to any digital telephone circuit (Base KSU, PDKU, QCDU, KCDU or RDSU  
digital port); or make sure that a 20-button electronic LCD EKT telephone is connected to a  
PEKU electronic port (not PESU).  
♦
DK14 and DK40i: make sure the Base KSU’s BATT jumper is in the ON position.  
➤ To check hardware requirements on the DK424  
1. Make sure the base cabinet power supply was tested and is functional.  
2. If using an RCTUE/F, remove the small jumper PCB (MBJU) from the front side of the  
DK424 base unit backplane (between slot R11 and the RCTU slot. All other RCTUs require  
the MBJU PCB.  
3. Make sure an RCTUA, RCTUBA, RCTUC/D or RCTUF is installed and that its BATT jumper  
is in the ON position.  
4. Make sure a PDKU or PEKU, is installed in Slot S11 or S12 in the base cabinet (S11 if RSIU  
is not installed, S12 if RSIU is installed in S11).  
5. Make sure a 20-button LCD DKT or EKT telephone (equipped with programming template) is  
connected to physical port 005 and/or port 013 (PDKU or PEKU - circuit 6/slot 11 and/or  
circuit 6/slot 12). Do not use RDSU or PESU.  
Step 2: Initialize the System  
1. From a 20-button LCD programming telephone, or from DKAdmin on a PC, run Program 91–  
9 twice in succession to initialize the system. At this point it is not necessary that all PCBs are  
installed. However, if they are, Program 03 codes are automatically assigned to the appropriate  
slots.  
CAUTION! If you run Program 91-9 while the system is in service, all program data is  
erased and all calls are dropped.  
Program 91-9 sets the following elements to initial default status:  
♦
♦
♦
♦
♦
Data for Programs 00~*99  
Speed Dial Memory  
Logical/Physical Port Locations  
Voice Mail Identification Codes  
Character Message Memory  
1-14  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
Overview  
First-time Programming  
♦
♦
♦
♦
♦
Timed Reminders  
Digital Telephone Volume Levels  
Call Forward Memory (Power OFF, then ON).  
Station Message Waiting Status  
Caller ID Lost Call Memory  
2. Install all PCBs. Run Program 91-1 to inform the software of the system hardware  
configuration.  
Step 3: Run Programs 03 and 19-1  
1. Run Program 03 for all PCBs that have options.  
2. Run Program 19-1 to inform the software of the system option Alternate BGM slot.  
Step 4: Run Program 00  
➤ Run Program 00 - Part 1 to assign remote maintenance security codes. Run Program 00 - Part  
2 to test the processor and RAM.  
Step 5: Set Date, Time and Day  
You can set date, time and day anytime - individually or all.  
1. Use DKT or EKT assigned to logical Port 000 or attendant console.  
2. Make sure the handset is on-hook.  
3. Set the date:  
[PDN]  
#
#
#
6
6
6
5
5
5
1
2
3
5HGLDO  
Date in year/month/day format  
(YYMMDD). If month or day is  
single digit, precede with a zero.  
4. Set the time:  
[PDN]  
5HGLDO  
Time in hours/minutes/seconds format (HHMMSS  
from 000000 to 235959). If any of these values is  
single digit, precede with a zero.  
5. Set the day:  
[PDN]  
5HGLDO  
Enter the digit for today’s day:  
= Sunday  
= Monday  
= Tuesday  
= Wednesday  
= Thursday  
= Friday  
= Saturday  
Step 6: Run Additional Programs as Required  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
1-15  
Overview  
Programming Examples  
Programming Examples  
Some commonly used programs have explicit examples (listed below). Refer to these pages to  
help familiarize you with running these programs.  
Program  
Page  
2-2  
Program 91-9—System Initialization  
Program 90—Initializing Programs 00~*99  
2-4  
Program 91-1—Automatic PCB Recognition and Logical/Physical Port Initialization  
2-6  
Program 92—Initializing Speed Dial Numbers, VM ID Codes, Character Message Memory,  
Timed Reminders, Digital Telephone Volume, and Call Forward Backup Memory  
2-9  
Program 00—Software Check  
2-12  
3-3,  
3-4,  
3-6  
Program 03—DK14 Slot Assignments and DK14/DK424 Flexible PCB Slot Assignments  
Program 04—Station Logical Port Primary Directory Intercom or Number Assignment  
Program 30—Station Class of Service  
3-12  
3-73  
3-90  
Program 33—Station Hunting  
1-16  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
Initialization & Test  
2
This chapter gives you information on the Strata DK’s Initialization and Test programs. The  
programs in this chapter are not given in numerical order, rather in order of importance. These  
programs include:  
♦
♦
♦
♦
♦
♦
♦
Program 91-9 – System Initialization  
Program 90 – Initialize Programs 00~99  
Program 91-1 – Automatic PCB Recognition and Port Renumber  
Program 91-2 – Data Transfer from Temporary Memory to Working Memory  
Program 92 – Initializing Misc. Backup RAM  
Program 00 – Part 1: Software Check  
Program 00 – Part 2: RCTU RAM Test  
Examples are also given for these programs - except Programs 91-2 and Program 00 - Part 2.  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
2-1  
Initialization & Test  
Program 91-9 – System Initialization  
Program 91-9 – System Initialization  
Processor Type: DK14, DK40i, All RCTUs  
Program Type:  
Initialization  
Initialized Default: See individual programs  
Repeat a second time after LEDs 01, 03, 05, 07, and 09 extinguish.  
Program Telephone Exits Program Mode  
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ  
Press Buttons 01, 03, 05, 07, and 09.  
LEDs 01, 03, 05, 07, and 09 must be ON.  
Enter programming mode.  
(Do not press [DN] button.)  
LCD Displays: SYSTEM INITIALIZATION  
Program 91-9 Overview  
Note Always run Program 91-9 before entering the customer database when first installing a  
system or when its software must be set to the default configuration, but not while system  
is in service.  
CAUTION! If you run Program 91-9 while the system is in service, it will erase all program  
data and drop all calls.  
Running Program 91-9 also runs Program 03 and assigns codes to all PCBs (except options)  
installed. It also erases all Program 03 option codes for piggyback PCBs, DSS consoles, RRCS,  
etc., except the RCOS PCB Code (17).  
Program 91-9 erases all random or programmed data in all Strata DK software programs and sets  
all program data to the default value. It automatically runs all other initialization Programs 90-  
00~ꢀ99, 91-1, and 92-1~9. It also brings back logical and physical ports to their initialized  
settings.  
If you are installing the system processor(s) for the first time, after initializing the system, test the  
RAM: run Program 00 Part 2.  
CAUTION! Running Program 00 Part 2 drops all calls in progress and interrupts telephone  
service for 15 seconds. This test will not erase programmed customer data.  
Important! Do not use Program 91-9 if you are only making minor programming changes and  
system programming is basically correct.  
Note Run Program 03 after Program 91-9 for: PCBs with options such as Dual-tone  
Multi-frequency Receivers K5RCU, QRCU3, RRCS, and DSS consoles, etc.  
...or if entering a customer database into system RAM memory before other system  
PCBs (stations, lines, options) are installed. Program 03 identifies which universal and  
option PCBs (e.g., RRCS, etc.) are to be installed in each cabinet slot.  
2-2  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
Initialization & Test  
Program 91-9 – System Initialization  
Program 91-9 Example  
Action (press buttons + LED Buttons)  
LCD Response  
1
1. Use the programming LCD electronic or digital telephone. (See  
No. N-N  
“Programming Examples” on Page 1-16.)  
Jan 20 Sun  
06:43  
Program Mode  
2.  
ꢀꢄꢀꢄꢂꢀꢅꢀꢆ  
Enter programming mode. (Do not press [DN] button.)  
Program = 91  
3. 6SNUꢃꢇ6SHDNHUꢈꢃꢉꢂꢃ+ROG  
Access Program 91. System beeps after 6SNUꢃꢇ6SHDNHUꢈ is  
Data Store  
pressed to indicate program number may be entered.  
91 Select =  
4. 6SNUꢃꢇ6SHDNHUꢈ  
Prepare the system for a station port selection.  
System Initialization  
System Initialization  
5. Press ꢉ  
6. Press LED Buttons 01, 03, 05, 07, and 09 (LEDs turn ON)  
No. N-N  
No. N-N  
7. Press +ROG  
The telephone will exit the programming mode and button LEDs 01,  
(Month Day Time)  
(Month Day Time)  
03, 05, 07, and 09 will go out after a short delay. Make sure all LEDs  
go out before proceeding to Step 8.  
8. Repeat Steps 1~7 a second time.  
1. N-N is the Program Telephone [DN].  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
2-3  
Initialization & Test  
Program 90 – Initialize Programs 00~*99  
Program 90 – Initialize Programs 00~*99  
Processor Type: DK14, DK40i, All RCTUs  
Program Type:  
Initialization  
Initialized Default: See individual programs  
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ  
Enter programming  
mode  
Programs to be initialized. Add  
a range of program numbers  
by entering XX*XX or XX**XX.  
End Program 90  
Exit programming mode  
LEDs 01 and 02 must flash  
Press LED Buttons 01 and 02  
LEDs 01 and 02 must be ON  
Program 90 Overview  
Program 90 enables you to clear all customer data and initialize individual programs or range of  
programs.  
Important! When installing the system, you must run Program 91-9 which runs Program 90  
(before running any other program); if you do not, the system could begin to operate  
erratically.  
Notes  
●
Running Program 91-9, automatically runs Program 90.  
●
To initialize all programs without dropping calls or erasing user names, speed dial numbers,  
voice mail ID codes, etc., enter ꢁꢁꢀꢀꢉꢉ as “Programs to be initialized.”  
Each “*” program record sheet immediately follows the program record sheet having the same  
number (example: *31 follows 31 record sheet). However, in system memory all “*” programs  
follow Program 99. Therefore, “ꢀ” program ranges must be initialized separately from non-  
star programs unless initializing all system Programs (00**99).  
●
For example, to initialize Programs 30, *30, 31, *31, and 32: initialize the range (30*32), for  
Programs 30, 31, 32; and the range (*30**31), for Programs *30 and *31.  
●
If you are installing the system for the first time, run Program 91-9 to erase random data from  
RAM (caused by battery jumper movement to the internal battery). You can then skip Program  
90, since Program 91-9 automatically runs Program 90.  
2-4  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
Initialization & Test  
Program 90 – Initialize Programs 00~*99  
Program 90 Example  
Action  
LCD Response  
1
1. Use the LCD programming phone per Minimum Hardware  
Requirements on -14.  
No. N-N  
Jan 20 Sun  
06:43  
Program Mode  
Enter Program mode by pressing ꢀꢄꢀꢄꢂꢀꢅꢀꢆꢊꢃ(Do not press  
2.  
[DN] button.)  
Program = 90  
3. 6SNUꢃꢇ6SHDNHUꢈꢃꢉꢁꢃ+ROG  
Access Program 90. System beeps after 6SNUꢃꢇ6SHDNHUꢈ is  
Data Store  
pressed to indicate program number may be entered.  
90 Select =  
4. 6SNUꢃꢇ6SHDNHUꢈ  
Prepare the system for the programs to be initialized.  
90 Select = 00**99  
Data Clr  
ꢀꢀꢉꢉ+ LED buttons 01 & 02  
5. ꢁꢁ  
Enter Program numbers individually, followed by #, or in a range. For a  
range, separate the low program number and the high program  
number with an asterisk.  
ꢁꢁꢀꢀꢉꢉ initializes all Programs 00~ꢀ99.  
Star ꢀ Program memory follows Program 97.  
90 Select = 00**99  
Data Programmed  
6. +ROG  
Secure data in system programming. LEDs 01 and 02 flash.  
90 Select =  
7. 6SNUꢃꢇ6SHDNHUꢈ  
Prepare system for another selection (go back to Step 5) or exit  
Program 90 (continue with Step 8).  
90 Select = ##  
Data Programmed  
8. ꢄꢄ+ROG  
Secure default data in system memory. LED 01 and 02 continue to  
flash.  
Program =  
9. 6SNUꢃꢇ6SHDNHUꢈ  
Exit Program 90. Enter another program number (see “Program 92  
Example” on Page 2-10) or exit programming mode (go to Step 10).  
System beeps to indicate it is exiting Program 90.  
No. N-N  
06:43  
10. ꢄꢄ+ROG  
Exit programming mode.  
Jan 20 Sun  
The system will not allow the 6SNUꢃꢇ6SHDNHUꢈ LED to light to re-  
enter the programming mode.  
1. N-N is the Program Telephone [DN].  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
2-5  
Initialization & Test  
Program 91-1 – Automatic PCB Recognition and Port Renumber  
Program 91-1 – Automatic PCB Recognition and Port  
Renumber  
Processor Type: DK14, DK40i, All RCTUs  
Program Type:  
Initialization  
Initialized Default: None  
Program Telephone Exits Program Mode  
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ  
Enter programming mode.  
(Do not press [DN] button.)  
Press LED Buttons 01 and 02.  
LEDs 01 and 02 must be ON.  
LCD Displays:91 SELECT = 1  
Renumber and Reset  
Program 91-1 Overview  
Program 91-1 makes slot code assignments to installed PCBs that do not have options - such as a  
PDKU without a Data Interface Unit or Off-hook Call Announce (OCA), the common control  
without a Dual-tone Multi-frequency Receiver (RRCS), K5RCU, QRCU3, etc.  
Program 91-1 also sets physical and logical ports to their initialized settings - even if you  
previously relocated them. (See Program 01 and 02 for initialized settings.). Programs 04, ꢀ04, 05,  
ꢀ05, ꢀ09, or 71 are not affected.  
CAUTION! Running Program 91-1 drops all calls.  
Important! To identify Program 03 PCB slot codes, run Program 91-1 after you install all  
PCBs.  
Notes  
●
You can run Program 91-1 after setting PCB option codes with Program 03; this does not erase  
option codes. For example, if Slot 00 is assigned code 92, Program 91-1 will not erase the  
codes previously assigned with Program 03.  
●
If you install PCBs before initializing the system with Program 91-9, it is not necessary to run  
Program 91-1 to assign the Program 03 PCB slot codes for the installed PCBs. You must  
always run Program 03 to identify PCB options such as K5RCU, QRCU3, and RRCS codes  
92, 93 and 94 and PDKU codes 61, 62, and 64, etc.  
2-6  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
Initialization & Test  
Program 91-1 – Automatic PCB Recognition and Port Renumber  
Program 91-1 Example  
Action (press buttons + LED Buttons)  
LCD Response  
1
1. Use the LCD programming phone per Minimum Hardware  
Requirements on -14.  
No. N-N  
06:43  
Jan 20 Sun  
Program Mode  
ꢀꢄꢀꢄꢂꢀꢅꢀꢆ  
2.  
Enter programming mode. (Do not press [DN] button.)  
Program = 91  
3. 6SNUꢃꢇ6SHDNHUꢈꢃꢉꢂꢃ+ROG  
Access Program 91. System beeps after 6SNUꢃꢇ6SHDNHUꢈ is  
Data Store  
pressed to indicate program number may be entered.  
91 Select =  
4. 6SNUꢃꢇ6SHDNHUꢈ  
Prepare the system for a station port selection.  
91 Select = 1  
5. Press ꢂ  
Renumber and Reset  
91 Select = 1  
6. Press LED Buttons 01 and 02 (LEDs turn ON)  
Renumber and Reset  
No. N-N  
7. Press +ROG  
The telephone will exit the programming mode and button LEDs 01  
(Month Day Time)  
and 02 will go out after a short delay.  
1. N-N is the Program Telephone [DN].  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
2-7  
Initialization & Test  
Program 91-2 – Data Transfer from Temporary Memory to Working Memory  
Program 91-2 – Data Transfer from Temporary Memory  
to Working Memory  
Processor Type: DK14, DK40i, All RCTUs  
Program Type:  
Initialization  
Initialized Default: See individual programs  
Program Telephone Exits Program Mode and Transfers Data  
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ  
Enter programming mode.  
(Do not press [DN] button.)  
Press LED Buttons 03 and 04.  
LEDs 03 and 04 must be ON.  
LCD Displays:91 SELECT = 2  
Programming  
Taking Effect  
Program 91-2 Overview  
Program 91-2 simulates turning system power OFF for five seconds then ON to transfer data from  
temporary memory to working memory.  
This power OFF / power ON sequence is required when programming with a telephone or when  
using DK Admin/DK Backup. In these cases Program 03, ꢀ41-2, ꢀ50 and 76-1 data must be  
transferred from temporary to working memory.  
Program 91-2 does not change or erase any programmed data including directory numbers set in  
Program 04 and *04 or logical/physical port assignments in Program 01 and 02.  
CAUTION! Running Program 91-2 drops all calls and renders the system inoperative for  
up to eight seconds.  
2-8  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
Initialization & Test  
Program 92 – Initializing Misc. Backup RAM  
Program 92 – Initializing Misc. Backup RAM  
Processor Type: DK14, DK40i, All RCTUs  
Program Type: Initialization - Includes: Initializing Speed Dial Number, VM ID Codes, Character  
Message Memory, Timed Reminders, Digital Telephone Volume, Called ID, ANI, and  
Call Forward Backup RAM  
Initialized Default: See individual programs  
Clear more data  
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ  
Enter programming  
mode.  
SELECT = Press appropriate  
buttons as shown below.  
End Program 92.  
Exit programming  
mode.  
Clears Station Speed Dial, Voice Mail ID Codes, and LCD memos  
assigned to Station Speed Dial numbers.  
Clears System Speed Dial and LCD memos assigned to System Speed  
Dial numbers.  
Clears Character Message Memory (Station and System) and User  
Name/Number Display.  
Clears Timed Reminders.  
Resets digital telephone volume levels to initialized settings, specifically,  
speaker volume levels for Internal Calls [DN], Tone/BGM, Busy Override  
(muted ring), and Ring volume to approximately mid-range on all DKTs.  
Program 92-5 does not affect digital telephone handset receiver volume  
levels. Use Program 27 to set off-hook digital telephone handset  
receiver volume levels.  
Power OFF 5  
seconds; then (all stations). Program 92-9 does not affect Call  
Power ON Forward External or Fixed Call Forward settings.  
Clears Call Forward and Message Waiting Memory  
Program 92 Overview  
Program 92 clears all previously entered or random data (of the type listed) but does not clear data  
in system Programs 00~ꢀ99.  
CAUTION! You must run Program 92 when first installing the system or an RCTU; if you  
do not, the system could begin to operate erratically.  
Running Program 91-9 automatically runs Program 92 (1~9) to erase customer  
data.  
Notes  
●
Running Program 92-5 does not affect digital telephone handset receiver volume levels. Use  
Program 27 to set off-hook handset receiver volume levels for digital telephones.  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
2-9  
Initialization & Test  
Program 92 – Initializing Misc. Backup RAM  
●
●
Program 92-9 does not affect Call Forward External or Fixed Call Forward settings.  
You must power the system OFF then back ON to clear telephone LCD Call Forward Displays  
and Call Forward button LEDs. Call Forward memory is cleared when you run Program 92-9,  
even if system power is not cycled.  
Program 92 Example  
Action (press buttons + LED Buttons)  
LCD Response  
No. N-N  
1
1. Use the programming LCD electronic or digital telephone. (See “Step  
1: Check Minimum Hardware Requirements” on Page 1-14.)  
Jan 20 Sun  
06:43  
Program Mode  
2.  
ꢀꢄꢀꢄꢂꢀꢅꢀꢆ  
Enter programming mode. (Do not press [DN] button.) System beeps  
after 6SNUꢃꢇ6SHDNHUꢈ is pressed to indicate program number may  
be entered.  
Program = 92  
92 Select =  
3. 6SNUꢃꢇ6SHDNHUꢈꢃꢉꢅꢃ+ROG  
Access Program 92.  
Data Store  
4. 6SNUꢃꢇ6SHDNHUꢈ  
Prepare the system for selection of programs to initialize. For new  
system installation perform all 1~4.  
92 Select = 1  
Each Dial Clr  
5. Select one of the following.  
ꢂ + LED Buttons 01 & 03  
Clears Station Speed Dial, Voice Mail ID codes, and LCD memos  
assigned to station speed dial numbers.  
or...  
92 Select = 2  
Common Dial Clr  
ꢅꢃ+ LED Buttons 01 & 04  
Clears System Speed Dial and LCD memos assigned to system  
speed dial numbers.  
or...  
92 Select = 3  
Msg Clr  
ꢆ + LED Buttons 02 & 03  
Clears Character Message Memory (station and system) and user  
name display.  
or...  
92 Select = 4  
Tmr Reminder Clr  
ꢋ + LED Buttons 02 & 04  
Clears timed reminders.  
or...  
92 Select = 5  
DKT VR Initial  
ꢌ + LED Buttons 01 & 05  
Presets the Ring, Speaker, Mute Ring, and Intercom Tone, BGM,  
volume levels of all digital telephones to approximately mid-range.  
or...  
92 Select = 9  
Back Up RAM Clr  
ꢉ + LED Buttons 03 & 04  
Clears Call Forward and Message Waiting (R3) Memory except Fixed  
Call Forward Memory.  
92 Select = (1~0)  
Data Programmed  
6. +ROG  
LEDs lit in Step 5 turn off to secure data in system programming.  
Repeat Steps 4~6 until Step is completed.  
1. N-N is the Program Telephone [DN].  
2-10  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
Initialization & Test  
Program 92 – Initializing Misc. Backup RAM  
Action (press buttons + LED Buttons)  
LCD Response  
92 Select =  
7. 6SNUꢃꢇ6SHDNHUꢈ  
Prepare system for another selection (go back to Step 5) or exit  
Program 92 (continue with Step 8).  
92 Select = ##  
Data Programmed  
8. ꢄꢄ+ROG  
Initialized data in system memory (LEDs got out).  
Program =  
9. 6SNUꢃꢇ6SHDNHUꢈ  
Exit Program 92. Enter another program number (see “Program 30 –  
Station Class of Service” on Page 3-73) or exit programming mode (go  
to Step 10). System beeps to indicate it is exiting Program 92.  
No. N-N  
06:43  
10. ꢄꢄ+ROG  
Exit programming mode.  
Jan 20 Sun  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
2-11  
Initialization & Test  
Program 00 – Part 1: Software Check  
Program 00 – Part 1: Software Check  
Processor Type: DK14, DK40i, All RCTUs  
Program Type:  
Test - Includes: Remote Maintenance Security Code Assignments  
Initialized Default: None  
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ  
Select = Code  
Password Codes (4 digits)  
Password or S/W  
Check Codes  
Select = Code  
Item  
LCD Display  
Version =  
ROM Version (not programmable)  
1st Level Password  
0
1
2
8
9
Password =  
Password =  
Sum =  
2nd Level Password  
Software RAM Checksum (not programmable)  
Power Cycle Counter (not programmable)  
Counter =  
DK424 software  
VER=  
R
A 3 X  
-
- K E Y X  
Indicates RCTU Type  
X = 1, 2, or 3  
ROM Version  
VER=  
T M A 4 X  
-
- K E Y 1  
Indicates DK40i  
Indicates KKYS  
installed  
ROM Version  
VER=  
W M A 4 X  
-
- K E Y 1  
Indicates DK14  
Indicates QKYS  
installed  
ROM Version  
1830  
DKT LCD Display  
WMA4  
RCTU Type  
Key Type  
KEY 1  
Description  
DK14  
AA: Indicates built-in Auto Attendant software  
(RKYS1, KKYS, or QKYS installed).  
DK40i  
ACD: Indicates Automatic Call Distribution  
software and AA (RKYS2 installed).  
TMA4  
KEY 2  
KEY 3  
RCTUA3  
ACD/MIS: Indicates Automatic Call Distribution,  
Management Information System Software, plus  
AA and ACD (RKYS3 installed).  
RAA3X  
RCTUBA3/RCTUBB3  
Open Architecture Interface (OAI) and AA, plus  
AA, ACD, and ACD/MIS (RKYS4 R3.2  
installed).  
RBA3X  
KEY 4  
RCA3X  
REA3X  
RCTUC3/D3  
RCTU E3/F3  
2-12  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
Initialization & Test  
Program 00 – Part 1: Software Check  
Program 00 Part 1 - Overview  
This program enables you to run various checks on the Strata DK System.  
DK14: the QKYS feature key must be installed on the QRCU3 PCB to allow AA.  
DK40i: the KKYS feature key must be installed on the K5RCU PCB to allow AA.  
DK424: the RKYS feature key must be installed on the RCTU to allow AA, ACD, and ACD/MIS.  
Code 0, ROM Version  
Code 0 displays the software version of the system common control unit (RCTUA, RCTUB,  
RCTUBA/RCTUBB and RCTUC/RCTUD, RCTUE/F, DK40i Base KSU, or DK14KSU) and if  
installed on the RCTU, the RKYS, KKYS, or QKYS key type. See the Program 00 Record Sheet  
for an illustration of software displays. This information cannot be altered with this program.  
Code 1, Level 1 Security Code  
Use to assign a Remote Maintenance security code that allows entry to all programs and data.  
Code 2, Level 2 Security Code  
Use this program to assign a Remote Maintenance security code that allows entry to Programs  
30~39, 77~89, and ꢀ30~ꢀ31.  
Important! When using a DK Admin PC, either Security Code (1 or 2) enables the DK Admin  
user full access to all Strata DK programs. Always change Security Code 1 and  
Code 2 to prevent unauthorized programming changes by DK Admin users that may  
try to log-in remotely with the default security code: 0000.  
Code 8, Software RAM Checksum and Code 9, Power OFF Counter  
For factory purposes only.  
Program 00 Part 1 - Example  
Action (press buttons + LED Buttons)  
LCD Response  
No. N-N  
1
1. Use the programming LCD electronic or digital telephone. (See “First-  
time Programming” on Page 1-14.)  
Jan 20 Sun  
06:43  
Program Mode  
Program = 00  
ꢀꢄꢀꢄꢂꢀꢅꢀꢆ  
2.  
Enter programming mode. (Do not press [DN] button.)  
3. 6SNUꢃꢇ6SHDNHUꢈꢃꢁꢆꢃ+ROG  
Speaker beeps to indicate when to enter program number. Access  
Data Store  
Program 00.  
00 Select =  
4. 6SNUꢃꢇ6SHDNHUꢈ  
Prepare system for a selection.  
5. Select one of the following attributes:  
00 Select = 0  
RNAXNN-Key X  
ꢁ
View the software version. This attribute can not be edited.  
or...  
Note NN = The actual version  
number and letter. See Program  
00 record sheet for details).  
X = 1, 2, or 3.  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
2-13  
Initialization & Test  
Program 00 – Part 1: Software Check  
Action (press buttons + LED Buttons)  
LCD Response  
00 Select = 1  
ꢂ1111  
Password = 0000  
Define the Level 1 remote maintenance security code from the System  
Record Sheet (four digits maximum). Level 1 allows remote access to  
all programs and data. Default Level 1 security code is “0000.”  
or...  
00 Select = 2  
ꢅ1111  
Password = 0000  
Define the Level 2 remote maintenance security code from the System  
Record Sheet (four digits maximum). Level 2 allows remote access to  
programs 30~39 and 77~89 only. Default Level 2 security code is  
“0000.”  
or...  
00 Select = 8  
ꢍ
Sum = XXXXXXXXX  
View the software RAM Checksum. This attribute can not be edited.  
The default checksum may change.  
or...  
00 Select = 9  
Counter = XXXX  
ꢉ
View the RPSU Power Cycle Counter. This attribute can not be edited.  
The counter indicates the number of times power is removed from the  
system after Program 00 was initialized via Program 90 or 91-9.  
00 Select = (0,1,2,8, or 9)  
Data Programmed  
6. +ROG  
Secure data in system programming. (Only works for “1” and “2”)  
00 Select =  
7. 6SNUꢃꢇ6SHDNHUꢈ  
Prepare system for another selection (go back to Step 5) or exit  
Program 00 (continue with Step 8).  
00 Select = ##  
Data Programmed  
8. ꢄꢄ+ROG  
Secure Program 00 data in system memory.  
Program =  
9. 6SNUꢃꢇ6SHDNHUꢈ  
Exit Program 00. Enter another program number (see “Program 91-1  
Example” on Page 2-7) or exit programming mode (go to Step 10).  
System beeps to indicate it is exiting Program 00.  
No. N-N  
06:58  
10. ꢄꢄ+ROG  
Exit programming mode.  
Jan 20 Sun  
1. N-N is the Program Telephone [DN].  
2-14  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
Initialization & Test  
Program 00 – Part 2: Processor RAM Test  
Program 00 – Part 2: Processor RAM Test  
Processor Type: DK14, DK40i, All RCTUs  
Program Type:  
Test - Includes: Remote Maintenance Security Code Assignments  
Initialized Default: None  
General RAM Test  
Note See “Program 00 Part 2 - Overview” on Page 2-16  
Tests RAM (15 seconds downtime)  
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ  
Programming Telephone LCD Displays:  
GENERAL RAM TEST  
Display General RAM Test Results  
Programming Telephone LCD Displays:  
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ  
DK424  
DK14/DK40i  
TEST 1 =OK  
or...  
TEST 1 X=OK Y=OK  
or...  
TEST 1 X=NG Y=NG  
X=00000 X=00000  
TEST 1 =NG  
Where:  
X
Y
=
=
RCTUA, RCTUBA, RCTUC  
RCTUD3, RCTUF  
OK = RAM is good  
NG = RAM is defective  
An X=NGor Y=NGRAM test result indicates a defective RCTU PCB; change  
the appropriate (X or Y) RCTU PCB and retest RAM on the newly installed  
RCTU.  
Replace the DK14 KSU or DK40i Base KSU if Test 1=NG.  
Backup RAM Test  
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ  
RCTU Tests RAM (15 seconds downtime)  
Programming Telephone LCD Displays:  
BACKUP RAM TEST  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
2-15  
Initialization & Test  
Program 00 – Part 2: Processor RAM Test  
Display Backup RAM Test Results  
Programming Telephone LCD Displays:  
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ  
DK424  
DK14/DK40i  
TEST 1 =OK  
or...  
TEST 2 X=OK Y=OK  
or...  
TEST 2 X=NG Y=NG  
X=00000 X=00000  
TEST 2 =NG  
Where:  
X
Y
=
=
RCTUA, RCTUBA, RCTUC  
RCTUD3, RCTUF  
OK = RAM is good  
NG = RAM is defective  
An X=NGor Y=NGRAM test result indicates a defective RCTU PCB; change  
the appropriate (X or Y) RCTU PCB and retest RAM on the newly installed  
RCTU.  
Replace the DK14 or DK40i Base KSU if Test 1=NG.  
Program 00 Part 2 - Overview  
Use this program to test the RAM on system processor. If a RAM test error occurs during this test,  
the processor causing the error should be replaced. In the case of two-PCB processors, isolation of  
a RAM failure is indicated on the programming telephone X or Y (see above).  
If the DK14 or DK40i processor fails the RAM test, the Base KSU must be replaced.  
CAUTION! Running each RAM test drops all calls and interrupts telephone service for 15  
seconds.  
Note Running Program 00 RAM tests do not change or erase any customer data.  
2-16  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
System & Station  
3
This chapter gives you programming information for the Strata DK system and its stations.  
Program 01 – Station Logical Port Display and/or  
Change  
Processor Type: DK14, DK40i, All RCTUs  
Program Type:  
Station  
Initialized Default: Logical port number = physical port number  
Program 90, 91-1, or 91-9 initializes Program 01  
To Save existing Logical Port  
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ  
SELECT = Physical Port Number  
Enter new Logical Port  
to change existing Logical Port  
The logical port number associated with  
the physical port displays after the  
physical port number is entered.  
Processor  
DK14  
[PDN] Port Range  
000~009  
Processor  
RCTUBA/BB  
RCTUC/D  
RCTUE/F  
[PDN] Port Range  
000~079  
000~239  
000~335  
DK40i  
000~027  
RCTUA  
000~031  
Program 01 Overview  
Program 01 enables you to enter a physical port to display the associated logical port. You then  
have the option to assign a new logical port to the physical port. (To return ports to their initialized  
settings, see Programs 90 and 91.)  
Note Record port locations on Program 04 record sheet.  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
3-1  
System & Station  
Program 02 – Station Physical Port Display and/or Change  
Program 02 – Station Physical Port Display and/or  
Change  
Processor Type: DK14, DK40i, All RCTUs  
Program Type:  
Station  
Initialized Default: Logical port number = physical port number  
Program 90, 91-1, or 91-9 initializes Program 02  
To Save existing Physical Port  
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ  
SELECT = Logical Port Number  
Enter new Physical Port  
to change existing Physical Port  
The physical port number associated  
with the logical telephone port displays  
after the logical port number is entered.  
Processor  
DK14  
[PDN] Port Range  
000~009  
Processor  
RCTUBA/BB  
RCTUC/D  
RCTUE/F  
[PDN] Port Range  
000~079  
000~239  
000~335  
DK40i  
000~027  
RCTUA  
000~031  
Program 02 Overview  
Program 02 enables you to enter a logical port to display the associated physical port. You then  
have the option to assign a new physical port to the logical port. (To return ports to their initialized  
settings, see Programs 90 and 91.)  
Notes  
●
Record port locations on Program 04 record sheet.  
●
The system allows only like ports to be reassigned (see below).  
Allowed  
Not Allowed  
Digital-to-Digital Ports (KCDU-QCDU-PDKU-  
PDKU-RDSU Ports)  
Attendant Console (DK424 only), DSS, BGM  
or Amplified Conference Ports should not be  
reassigned  
Electronic-to-Electronic Ports (PEKU-PEKU-  
PESU Ports)  
Door Phone Ports (004, 012, 020, 028) should  
not be reassigned  
Standard Tel to Standard Tel Ports (QSTU-  
KSTU-PSTU-RSTU-PESU-RDSU/RSTS)  
Tie/DID Line Ports – should not be reassigned  
PDKU to PEKU – cannot be exchanged  
PSTU to PDKU – cannot be exchanged  
PEKU to PSTU – cannot be exchanged  
●
RCIU/RCIS circuit assignments to CO lines are not affected by Program 01 and 02.  
3-2  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
System & Station  
Program 03 for DK14 – Slot Assignments  
Program 03 for DK14 – Slot Assignments  
When DK14 is powered ON, Program 03 automatically assigns the correct codes for installed  
PCBs. No record sheet is needed. Refer to the following table for PCB slot and slot code  
information:  
DK14 Base KSU  
COU  
and QCDU2  
WMAU  
DKU  
QSTU2  
None  
Slot Number  
PCB Code  
00  
11  
12  
13  
14  
91 or 92  
QRCU3  
62  
11  
00 or 31  
00  
PCB Type  
Options  
OCA/DIU  
000~007  
Station Numbers  
CO Line Numbers  
008~009  
001~004  
Notes  
●
In the DK14 software: QCDU2 digital ports are considered to be installed in slot 11. QCDU2  
CO lines are considered to be installed in slot 12.  
●
●
●
●
opt=QRCU3  
opt=Always assigns 8 ports (000~007), digital ports (OCA/DIU). No DSS allowed.  
Always assigns 4 CO lines  
Always assigns 2 ports (008, 009) standard telephone ports  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
3-3  
System & Station  
Program 03 for DK40i – Flexible PCB Slot Assignments  
Program 03 for DK40i – Flexible PCB Slot Assignments  
Processor Type: DK40i  
Program Type:  
System  
Initialized Default: PCB codes of PCBs installed prior to running Program 91-1 or Program 91-9  
Code 00 for empty slots (15~18), Base KSU has codes for PCBs  
more codes  
Turn System Power OFF (5 sec) then ON  
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ  
...or  
SELECT = Slot Number (00, 11~18)  
Run Program 91-2  
CARD = PCB Code (See Reference Table)  
PCB Code Reference Table  
DK40i Base KSU  
PCB Fixed Slot  
Code  
91  
Ports/Type  
Common Control  
None  
TBSU,  
TCOU  
or TDDU  
Common Control w/K4RCU3  
92  
4 DTMF/ABR  
5 DTMF/ABR  
TMAU2  
00  
DKU  
11  
KSTU2  
13  
TCIU2  
14  
Common Control w/K5RCU  
or K5RCU2  
98  
Slot Number  
PCB Code  
12  
PIOU/PIOUS/RSSU/PEPU  
PEKU  
41  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
31  
None  
8 EKT  
91, 92 or  
98  
62  
or  
64  
00, 11,  
16, or 77  
00  
or  
31  
00  
or  
81  
PEKU with EOCU  
PEKU with DSS  
8 EKT  
8 EKT  
PEKU with EOCU, DSS  
PESU  
8 EKT  
PCB Type  
Options  
2 SLT/4 EKT  
PESU with EOCU  
KSTU2/RSTU2/Stratagy DK  
Station/BRI  
Port Numbers  
4 SLT/8 SLT/  
8VM  
TCOU/PCOU/RCOU/RGLU2  
RCOU + RCOS  
11  
17  
61  
4/CO  
CO/DID/BRI  
Line  
Numbers  
8 Loop CO  
8 DKT  
Base Unit DKT CKTs, PDKU,  
and RWIU  
DK40i Expansion KSU  
Base Unit DKT CKTs  
& PDKU w/ DIU  
or SP-OCA  
62  
64  
8 DKT  
8 DKT  
Cabinet Label  
04  
05  
16  
06  
17  
07  
18  
Base Unit DKT CKTs and  
PDKU with DSS (w/ or w/o  
DIU or SP-OCA)  
Slot Number  
PCB Code  
PCB Type  
Options  
15  
KCDU  
65  
66  
27  
28  
2/CO, 4 DKT  
2/CO, 4 DKT  
4 DKT/4 SLT  
4 DKT/4 SLT  
KCDU SP-OCA or DIU  
RDSU (RSTS)  
RDSU (RSTS) with DIU or  
SP-OCA  
Station/BRI  
Port Numbers  
RDDU/TDDU  
REMU  
16  
13  
81  
77  
78  
4 DID Lines  
4-Tie Lines  
4 or 8 Caller ID  
2 BRI S/T  
CO/Tie/DID/BRI  
Line Numbers  
RCIU2/RCIS/TCIU2  
TBSU or RBSU  
RBSU/RBSS  
TSIU  
4 BRI S/T  
Notes  
No Code Required  
00 None  
●
For systems containing ISDN PCBs, immediately after running  
Program 03, make sure to run Program *60 to identify all station  
(NT) and CO (TE) BRI circuits for each RBSU/RBSS and TBSU  
installed. Program *60 causes station port and CO line shifting on  
PCBs installed in higher slots that follow the BRI PCBs.  
None  
●
Consult DK40i configuration section to check that the DK40i is  
configured properly.  
3-4  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
System & Station  
Program 03 for DK40i – Flexible PCB Slot Assignments  
Program 03 for DK40i - Overview  
Program 03 tells the system what type of optional PCBs are installed in the Expansion KSU. You  
must run Program 03 after installing PCBs with options such as OCA, DIU, etc. Also, run Program  
03 for each PCB slot when installing a PCB in that location.  
It is not necessary to run Program 03 for slots 00~14. The DK40i automatically assigns the Base  
KSU PCBs if they are installed when system power is turned ON. However, if DSS is required on  
the Base KSU’s DKT circuit 8, you must run Program 03 to assign code 64 to slot 11. If universal  
PCBs are installed, Program 91-1 and 91-9 automatically assign the appropriate PCB codes to the  
installed slots. But, Programs 91-1 or 91-9 do not assign option codes (such as OCA, DIU, etc.).  
Codes allowed in DK40i Expansion KSU: 11, 13, 16, 21~28, 31, 41, 61~62, 64~66, 77, 78, 91, 92,  
and 81.  
CAUTION! Running Program 91-9 erases Program 03 option codes; Program 91-1 does  
not.  
Important! After completing Program 03 set the configuration in memory by running OFF and  
wait five seconds before turning it back ON.  
The Program 03 record sheet is the main record for the hardware configuration of the entire  
system. It provides space to record station ports assigned to the station, Tie, and DID line PCBs  
and line numbers assigned to the ground loop start, CO, Tie, and DID line PCBs. Use the PCB  
Code Reference Table on the Program 03 record sheet to determine the proper option code for each  
PCB with an option.  
The DK40i Base KSU is divided into four fixed slots, even through the unit has no slots per se.  
♦
Slot 00 represents the system’s common control (TMAU2) and optional K4RCU3, K5RCU, or  
K5RCU2  
♦
♦
Slot 11 contains the KSU’s eight digital circuits/ports (DKU)  
Slot 12 contains the KSU’s four optional CO or DID line circuits (TCOU or TDDU) or two  
BRI (TBSU) circuits  
♦
♦
Slot 13 contains the four optional standard telephone circuits KSTU2  
Slot 14 contains four optional Caller ID circuits for TCOU (TCIU2)  
DK40i Slots 15~18 (Expansion KSU Assignment Criteria)  
♦
Allowed PCBs: PDKU, RDSU/RSTS, RSTU, RSTU2, PSTU, PEKU, PESU, KCDU, RCOU/  
RCOS, RGLU2, RCIU2/RCIS, RWIU, PCOU, RDDU, REMU, PEMU, PIOU, PIOUS,  
RSSU, PEPU, Stratagy DK.  
Note Some PCBs cannot be installed in slot 18 (see Chapter 2 – DK40i Configuration).  
♦
Expansion KSU PCBs must be installed in the slots specified in Tables 2-9~2-15 or the system  
may not operate properly. (See tables in Chapter 2 – DK40i Configuration of the Strata DK  
Installation and Maintenance Manual.)  
♦
Slots 15 and 16 support Speaker OCA and RPCI/DIU Data Switching; slots 17 and 18 do not.  
All slots support Handset OCA and RPCI-DI TAPI operation.  
♦
♦
On DK40i, RCIU2 must be installed in slot 17; RCIU1 cannot be used.  
The RWIU must be installed in slot 15 and slot 16 must be vacant to support 9 to 16 wireless  
handsets. It can be installed in any expansion slot to support 1~8 wireless handsets.  
♦
If the RWIU supports 9 to 16 handsets, program code 61 in slot 15 and 16.  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
3-5  
System & Station  
Program 03 for DK424 – Flexible PCB Cabinet Slot Assignments  
Program 03 for DK424 – Flexible PCB Cabinet Slot  
Assignments  
Processor Type: All RCTUs  
Program Type:  
System  
Initialized Default: PCB codes of PCBs installed prior to running Programs 91-1 or 91-9;  
Code 00 for empty slots  
more codes  
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ  
Turn System Power OFF (5 sec) then ON.  
SELECT = Slot Number (00, 01, 11~78)  
or...  
CARD = PCB Code (See Reference Table)  
Run Program 91-2  
DK424 Base Cabinet 1  
00  
(R11)  
01  
(RCTU)  
Slot Number  
S11  
S12  
S13  
S14  
S15  
S16  
PCB Code  
PCB Type  
Options  
Station/Tie/DID/ISDN  
Port Numbers  
CO/Tie/DID/ISDN Line Numbers  
DK424 Expansion Cabinet 2  
Slot Number  
PCB Code  
PCB Type  
Options  
S21  
S22  
S32  
S42  
S23  
S33  
S43  
S24  
S34  
S44  
S25  
S35  
S45  
S26  
S36  
S46  
S27  
S37  
S47  
S28  
S38  
S48  
Station/Tie/DID/ISDN  
Port Numbers  
CO/Tie/DID/ISDN Line Numbers  
DK424 Expansion Cabinet 3  
Slot Number  
PCB Code  
PCB Type  
Options  
S31  
Station/Tie/DID/ISDN  
Port Numbers  
CO/Tie/DID/ISDN Line Numbers  
DK424 Expansion Cabinet 4  
Slot Number  
PCB Code  
PCB Type  
Options  
S41  
Station/Tie/DID/ISDN  
Port Numbers  
CO/Tie/DID/ISDN Line Numbers  
3-6  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
System & Station  
Program 03 for DK424 – Flexible PCB Cabinet Slot Assignments  
DK424 Expansion Cabinet 5  
Slot Number  
PCB Code  
PCB Type  
Options  
S51  
S52  
S53  
S54  
S55  
S56  
S57  
S58  
Station/Tie/DID/ISDN  
Port Numbers  
CO/Tie/DID/ISDN Line Numbers  
DK424 Expansion Cabinet 6  
Slot Number  
PCB Code  
PCB Type  
Options  
S61  
S62  
S63  
S64  
S65  
S66  
S67  
S68  
Station/Tie/DID/ISDN  
Port Numbers  
CO/Tie/DID/ISDN Line Numbers  
DK424 Expansion Cabinet 7  
Slot Number  
PCB Code  
PCB Type  
Options  
S71  
S72  
S73  
S74  
S75  
S76  
S77  
S78  
Station/Tie/DID/ISDN  
Port Numbers  
CO/Tie/DID/ISDN Line Numbers  
DK424 PCB Codes  
PCB  
Code  
Ports/Type  
PCB  
Code  
Ports/Type  
RCOU, RGLU2  
RCOU/RCOS  
RDDU  
11  
17  
16  
13  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
28  
31  
4 Gnd./Loop Lines  
8 Loop CO Lines  
4 DID Lines/4 Stations  
4 Tie Lines/4 Stations  
8 Stations  
RDTU  
RDTU  
RDTU  
RCTU  
71  
72  
73  
91  
92  
93  
94  
00  
51  
49  
81  
31  
75  
8 T1 Channels  
16 T1 Channels  
24 T1-channels  
None  
REMU  
PEKU  
RCTU (with 4-CKT RRCS)  
RCTU (with 8-CKT RRCS)  
RCTU (with 12-CKT RRCS)  
NONE  
None  
PEKU (EOCU)  
PEKU w/DSS  
PEKU (DSS, EOCU)  
PESU  
8 Stations  
None  
8 Stations  
None  
8 Stations  
00  
6 Stations  
RATU  
4 Stations  
I/O Interface  
8 CKT, Caller ID  
8 VM Ports  
PESU (OCA)  
RDSU/RSTS  
RDSU/RSTS (OCA, DIU)  
RSTU2  
6 Stations  
RSIU  
8 Stations  
RCIU2/RCIS  
8 Stations  
Stratagy DK  
8 Stations  
RBUU without RBUS  
2 U Interfaces  
(4 stations/4 CO lines)  
PIOU, PIOUS/ RSSU, PEPU  
PIOU/PIOUS/RSSU  
PIOU/PIOUS/RSSU  
PDKU2, RWIU  
41  
42  
43  
61  
Remote Maintenance (TTY)  
MIS for ACD (TTY)  
SMDI VM Interface (TTY)  
8 Stations  
RBUU with RBUS  
RBSU without RBSS  
RBSU with RBSS  
76  
77  
78  
79  
4 U Interfaces  
(8 stations/8 CO lines)  
2 S/T Interfaces  
(4 stations/4 CO lines)  
4 S/T Interfaces  
(8 stations/4 CO lines)  
RPTU Interface Card  
PRI Interface  
(24 CO lines)  
PDKU2 (OCA, DIU)  
62  
64  
8 Stations  
8 Stations  
PDKU2 (DSS, OCA, DIU)  
See the following text for specific installation rules on the above PCBs.  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
3-7  
System & Station  
Program 03 for DK424 – Flexible PCB Cabinet Slot Assignments  
Program 03 for DK424 - Overview  
Program 03 tells the system what type of optional PCBs are installed.  
The Program 03 record sheet is the main record for the hardware configuration of the entire  
system. It provides space to record station ports assigned to the station, Tie, and DID line PCBs  
and line numbers assigned to the ground loop start, CO, Tie, and DID line PCBs.  
Use the DK424 PCB Code table on Page 3-7 to determine the proper option code for PCBs with  
options. You must run Program 03 after installing PCBs with options such as OCA, RRCS, DIU,  
etc. Also, run Program 03 for the slot of each new PCB when installing a new PCB in an existing  
installation.  
If universal PCBs are installed, Program 91-1 and 91-9 automatically assigns the appropriate PCB  
codes to the installed slots. But, they do not assign option codes (such as OCA, PDIU, RRCS,  
etc.).  
CAUTION! Running Program 91-9 erases Program 03 option codes; Program 91-1 does  
not.  
Important! After completing Program 03 set the configuration in memory by running Program  
91-2 or turn the base cabinet power supply switch off and wait five seconds before  
turning it back on.  
Expansion slots 7 and 8 can only be used if the following equipment is installed:  
DK424 Base (with RCTUE/F and MBJU removed) and the DK424 Expansion.  
See Chapter 4 – DK424 Configuration (Strata DK Installation and Maintenance  
Manual) to determine PCB slot placement.  
PIOU/PIOUS/RSSU  
Codes 41, 42, and 43 assigns PIOU/PIOUS RSSU TTY port as Remote Maintenance, MIS for  
ACD, and SMDI respectively; SMDR, Paging, Relay Control, and other miscellaneous options are  
active on the PIOU/PIOUS that has the lowest number code (41, 42 or 43) in the system. Codes set  
for RSIU/RSIS/RMDS in Program 76 have priority over codes 41, 42, and 43.  
Piggyback PCB / Speaker OCA / Data Interface Unit Options  
Run Program 03 to assign codes for all options except RCOS. Program 91-9 erases option codes  
assigned with Program 03; Program 91-1 does not erase option codes already programmed. After  
completing all Program 03 data entry, run Program 91-2 or cycle system power to transfer  
Program 03 data into working memory.  
3-8  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
System & Station  
Program 03 for DK424 – Flexible PCB Cabinet Slot Assignments  
RCIU/RCIS or RCIU2/RCIS  
When installing RCIU2/RCIS, enter the Caller ID circuit numbers on the record sheet in place of  
the CO line number. Each RCIU2/RCIS slot uses eight Caller ID circuits. RCIU2/RCIS circuit  
numbers are assigned automatically in numerical order (001~200) starting with the lowest slot  
number, to the highest RCIU2/RCIS slot number in 8-circuit increments.  
Important! If more than four circuits are needed, never install an RCIU without an RCIS.  
On DK424, RCIU2/RCIS can be installed in any universal slot except slot 11 or if RSIU is  
installed, slot 12; they do not have to be installed adjacent to corresponding CO lines. Refer to  
Program *50 to manually assign RCIU2/RCIS circuits to CO line circuits.  
RWIU  
RCTU  
Code 61 must be set for all RWIU slots including slots that are vacant because they support RWIU  
channels 09~32.  
The table below gives you slot locations and PCB Code Assignments for all RCTUs.  
RCTU Slot  
Cabinet 1  
PCB Code  
Assignment  
Processor  
R11 Slot  
Slot Code  
RCTUA  
RCTUB  
RCTUBA  
RCTUBB  
RCTUC  
RCTUD  
RCTUE  
RCTUF  
No  
No  
Yes  
Yes  
No  
00  
00  
00  
01  
00  
01  
00  
01  
91~94  
91~94  
91~94  
91  
Yes  
No  
Yes  
No  
Yes  
No  
91~94  
91~94  
91~94  
91~94  
Yes  
No  
Yes  
No  
Yes  
PCB Codes:  
91=No RRCS  
92=4 -circuit RRCS  
93=8 -circuit RRCS  
94=12 -circuit RRCS  
Note When using RCTUA, Slot 15 and 16 does not support Speaker OCA or DIU Data  
Switching. RCTUA does not support ACD, ACD/MIS, RS-232 Voice Mail Integration  
(SMDI), and attendant console features.  
RSIU  
If an RSIU is installed in base cabinet slot 11, you must connect the programming station to circuit  
6 in slot 12. In this case, a PDKU or PEKU should be installed in slot 12 and Station Port Number  
000~007 will be in slot 12.  
If an RSIU is not installed, you must connect the programming station to circuit 6 in slot 11 (Port  
005) and/or circuit 6 in slot 12 (port 013). The station must be a 20-button digital LCD or  
electronic LCD telephone. Also, if an RSIU is not installed, install a PDKU or PEKU in slot 11.  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
3-9  
System & Station  
Program 03 for DK424 – Flexible PCB Cabinet Slot Assignments  
Program 03 Example  
Action (press buttons + LED buttons)  
LCD Response  
1. Use an LCD programming phone per Minimum Hardware  
Requirements on Page 1-14.  
No. 205  
06:43  
Jan 20 Sun  
ꢀꢄꢀꢄꢂꢀꢅꢀꢆ  
2.  
Program Mode  
Enter programming mode. (Do not press [DN] button.)  
Program = 03  
3. 6SNUꢃꢇ6SHDNHUꢈꢃꢁꢆꢃ+ROG  
Access Program 03. System beeps after 6SNUꢃꢇ6SHDNHUꢈ is  
Data Store  
pressed to indicate program number may be entered.  
03 Select =  
4. 6SNUꢃꢇ6SHDNHUꢈ  
Prepare the system for a selection.  
5. Dial a PCB slot number (00~78 for DK424 or 00-18 for DK40i) using  
the dial pad.  
03 Select = (00~78)  
Card = (91, 62 or 00)  
The system defaults as follows:  
03 Select = 00 (Slot Number)  
Card = 91  
ꢁꢁ  
Initialized default assigns slot 00 and 01 to be a non-optioned RCTU  
without RRCS DTMF receivers, or DK40i Base without K4RCU3,  
K5RCU, and K5RCU2.  
03 Select = 11 (Slot Number)  
Card = 61  
ꢂꢂ  
Initialized default assigns slot 11 to be a non-optioned PDKU without  
DSS console or OCA (Code 61).  
03 Select = 12~78 (Slot  
Number)  
ꢁꢁꢎꢃꢁꢂꢎꢃꢂꢅaꢏꢍ (DK424), ꢁꢁaꢂꢍ (DK40i)  
Initialized default assigns slot 12~78 to be empty (Code 00).  
Card = 00  
03 Select = (00~78)  
Card = (00~97)  
6. ꢁꢁaꢉꢉ  
Dial the PCB code recorded on the record sheet. Refer to the PCB  
code reference table on Program 03 record sheet for a definition of the  
codes.  
03 Select = (00~78)  
Data Programmed  
7. +ROG  
Secure data in system programming.  
03 Select =  
8. 6SNUꢃꢇ6SHDNHUꢈ  
Prepare system for another selection (go back to Step 5) or continue  
with Step 9.  
92 Select = ##  
Data Programmed  
9. ꢄꢄ+ROG  
Secure Program 92 data in system memory.  
Program =  
10. 6SNUꢃꢇ6SHDNHUꢈ  
Exit Program 92 (system beeps). Enter another program number or  
exit programming mode (go to Step 11).  
No. 205  
06:58  
11. ꢄꢄ+ROG  
Exit programming mode.  
Jan 20 Sun  
12. To secure Program 03 entries, Power off for five seconds, then power  
on, or run Program 91-2.  
3-10  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
System & Station  
Program *03 for DK424 – Cabinet Type Identification  
Program *03 for DK424 – Cabinet Type Identification  
Processor Type: RCTUE/F only  
Program Type:  
System  
Initialized Default: All cabinets = 1  
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ  
ꢀ
SELECT = Cabinet No. (1~7)  
Turn System Power OFF (5 sec) then ON.  
or...  
CABINET = 1 or 2 (type)  
Type 1 (DK424)  
Type 2 (DK280)  
Run Program 91-2  
Expansion Cabinet Universal PCB Slot Availability  
SELECT =  
Cabinet Type  
(Cabinet No. 1~7)  
(1 or 2)  
Case 1  
1 (Base)  
RCTUE/F in DK424 Base Cabinet with MBJU removed  
2 (1st Expansion)  
3 (2nd Expansion)  
4 (3rd Expansion)  
5 (4th Expansion)  
6 (5th Expansion)  
7 (6th Expansion)  
Expansion Cabinet (max 6)  
Universal PCB Slots  
1~8 available  
DK424  
DK280  
1~6 available  
Case 2  
RCTUE/F in DK280 Base Cabinet  
Expansion Cabinet (max 5)  
Universal PCB Slots  
1~6 available  
DK424  
DK280  
1~6 available  
1 only  
Program *03 - Overview  
You must run this program when using the RCTUE/F processor. It identifies which type of  
cabinets are installed (DK424 or DK280). The RCTUE/F processor can be installed in a DK424 or  
DK280 base cabinet. The expansion cabinets can be any combination of DK424 and DK280 -  
except the seventh expansion cabinet must be a DK424.  
The DK280 expansion cabinet can only support six universal PCB slots in any possible  
configuration.  
The DK424 expansion cabinet supports eight universal PCB slots only if the RCTUE/F is installed  
in a DK424 base cabinet and the MBJU jumper is removed from the DK424 base cabinet  
backplane.  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
3-11  
System & Station  
Program 04 – Station Logical Port [PDN] Assignment  
Program 04 – Station Logical Port [PDN] Assignment  
Processor Type: DK14, DK40i, All RCTUs  
Program Type:  
Station  
Initialized Default: See [PDNs] in the record sheets  
DK14 Record Sheet  
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ  
SELECT = Station Logical Port Number(s)  
(see table below)  
[PDN] (1~4 digits)  
Port Type for Different Base Configurations  
Physical  
Ports  
Modular Jack  
Location Record  
Logical  
Ports  
[PDNs]  
(Initialized)  
KSU  
1st QCDU2  
2nd QCDU2  
QSTU2  
000  
001  
000  
001  
(10)  
(11)  
(12)  
(13)  
(14)  
(15)  
4 - Digital  
Telephone  
Ports  
0021  
0031  
004  
0021  
0031  
004  
2 -Digital  
Telephone  
Ports  
005  
005  
006  
007  
006  
007  
(16)  
(17)  
2 - Digital  
Telephone  
Ports  
008  
008  
(18)  
(19)  
2 - Standard  
Telephone  
Ports  
0092  
0092  
1. Supports a Digital Telephone or a DDCB Door Phone Control Box.  
2. Supports Alternate Background Music (BGM).  
DK40i Record Sheet  
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ  
Logical  
Ports  
(Initialized)  
SELECT = Station Logical Port Number(s)  
(see table below)  
[PDN] (1~4 digits)  
Important! Refer to Chapter 2 – DK40i Configuration before installing PCBs in slots 15~18.  
3-12  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
System & Station  
Program 04 – Station Logical Port [PDN] Assignment  
1
Expansion Slot Configuration Record : Slot 15 ______ Slot 16 ______ Slot 17 ______ Slot 18 ______  
Port Type for Different Base Configurations  
Physical  
Ports  
Modular Jack  
Location Record  
[PDNs]  
(Initialized)  
TCOU, TBSU2  
or  
Logical Ports  
TCOU or TDDU  
TBSU  
TBSU+KSTU2  
TDDU+KSTU2  
000  
001  
002  
003  
004  
005  
006  
007  
008  
000  
001  
002  
003  
004  
005  
006  
007  
008  
(10)  
(11)  
(12)  
(13)  
(14)  
(15)  
(16)  
(17)  
(18)  
Base Slot 11  
Base Slot 11  
Base Slot 11  
Base Slot 11  
8 - Digital  
Telephone  
Ports  
8 - Digital  
Telephone  
Ports  
8 - Digital  
Telephone  
Ports  
8 - Digital  
Telephone  
Ports  
Base Slot 123  
Base Slot 123  
Base Slot 13  
TBSU CKT 1  
2 Ports  
TBSU CKT 1  
2 Ports  
009  
010  
011  
012  
013  
014  
015  
016  
017  
018  
019  
020  
021  
022  
023  
024  
025  
026  
027  
009  
010  
011  
012  
013  
014  
015  
016  
017  
018  
019  
020  
021  
022  
023  
024  
025  
026  
027  
(19)  
(20)  
(21)  
(22)  
(23)  
(24)  
(25)  
(26)  
(27)  
(28)  
(29)  
(30)  
(31)  
(32)  
(33)  
(34)  
(35)  
(36)  
(37)  
4 KSTU2 Ports  
Base Slot 123  
Base Slot 123  
TBSU CKT 2  
2 Ports  
TBSU CKT 2  
2 Ports  
Base Slot 13  
4 KSTU2 Ports  
Expansion  
Slots 15~18  
Expansion  
Slots 15~18  
Expansion  
Slots 15~18  
Expansion  
Slots 15~18  
1. Expansion slots 15~18: See DK40i Configuration tables in Chapter 2 of the Strata DK Installation and Maintenance Manual.  
2. TBSU circuits configured for line-side BRI.  
3. If TBSU circuits that are set as station-side in Program *60, use two station ports per circuit. TBSU circuits that are set to line-side do not use  
station ports.  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
3-13  
System & Station  
Program 04 – Station Logical Port [PDN] Assignment  
DK424 Record Sheet  
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ  
SELECT = Station Logical Port Number(s)  
Press [PDN] or Button LED 01 to erase (1~4 digits)  
Processor  
RCTUA  
[PDN] Port Range  
000~031  
Initialized [PDNs]  
200~231  
DISA Port  
Reserved for Special Functions  
039  
089  
249  
344  
032~039  
080~089  
240~249  
336~349  
RCTUBA/BB  
RCTUC/D  
RCTUE/F  
000~079  
200~279  
000~239  
200~239  
000~335  
100~435  
Modular Jack  
Location  
Record  
Modular Jack  
Location  
Physica  
l Ports  
Logical  
[PDN]  
Ports  
Cabinet and Slot  
Number  
Physica  
l Ports  
Logical  
Ports  
Cabinet and Slot  
[PDN]  
Number  
Record  
Cabinet: ______  
Cabinet: ______  
Slot: ______  
Slot: ______  
Cabinet: ______  
Cabinet: ______  
Slot: ______  
Slot: ______  
Cabinet: ______  
Cabinet: ______  
Slot: ______  
Slot: ______  
Cabinet: ______  
Cabinet: ______  
Slot: ______  
Slot: ______  
3-14  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
System & Station  
Program 04 – Station Logical Port [PDN] Assignment  
Program 04 Overview  
Program 04 assigns the Primary Directory Number [PDN] to each telephone (logical port). [PDNs]  
can be one to four digits. [PDNs] must not conflict with Phantom Directory Numbers [PhDNs] or,  
DK424 Distributed Hunt Directory Numbers set in Program ꢀ04.  
[PDNs] can be changed using Program 04, but door phone and modem numbering cannot.  
●
Door phone standard numbering is #151~#159 and #161~#163; the internal modem (IMDU or  
RMDS) is #19 (DK40i and DK424).  
●
[PDNs] cannot begin with the digits 41~49 because 44 is the substitute code to rotary dial the  
“#” in feature access codes.  
Only the first digit of a feature code can be changed with Program 05. The system automatically  
assigns door phone station numbers if a door phone is specified in Program  
77-1. [PDN] assignments are flexible so that each station can have up to four assigned digits.  
All Strata DK telephone user guides are written using the standard default access codes and  
[PDNs]. If desired, a telephone accompanying a DSS console can have an [PDN] of 0 or 01, etc.,  
without conflict.  
If you make no assignment in Program 04, the system, upon powering up automatically assigns  
eight [PDNs] for each station PCB installed and four logical station ports for each PEMU, REMU,  
RDDU, and RATU PCB.  
Each DK424 RDTU, Tie, and DID channel is also assigned a station port. This is done in sequence  
of ascending slot numbers for station port numbers 008 and up.  
DK424 Attendant consoles rings on the ICI “ꢁ” button for Dial “0” calls, and on the [PDN] when  
the [PDN] assigned to the console (station) port in this program is dialed.  
Peripheral Devices other than telephones or DIUs can be connected to the ports listed below. If a  
peripheral device is connected to a Physical Port, the Logical Port must have the same port number  
as the Physical Port. See the following table.  
Logical &  
Physical Ports  
System  
Peripheral Device  
00  
02, 03  
04, 12, 20  
07, 015, 027  
10  
DK40i  
DK14  
DK40i  
DK40i  
DK14  
DK40i  
DK40i  
Digital telephone associated with DSS console.  
Digital Door phone/lock control unit (DDCB).  
Digital Door phone/lock control unit (DDCB).  
Digital Direct Station Selection Console (DDSS).  
DISA port number used for Toll Restriction Class and Verified/Forced  
Account Code assignment.  
35  
09  
Separate background Music Source (KSTU2 required in Base KSU).  
Digital telephone associated with DSS console (PDKU/Expansion Unit  
required).  
00, 08, 020  
DK40i  
Electronic telephone associated with DSS console (PEKU/Expansion Unit  
required).  
00, 13, 17  
DK40i  
DK14  
DK40i  
DK40i: Separate Background Music Source (PEKU, PESU, or PSTU/  
Expansion Unit required). DK14: QSTU2 required.  
09  
31  
IMDU modem.  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
3-15  
System & Station  
Program 04 – Station Logical Port [PDN] Assignment  
Program 04 Example  
Action (press buttons+LED buttons)  
LCD Response  
1
1. Use an LCD programming phone per Minimum Hardware  
Requirements in Chapter 1 - Overview.  
No. N-N  
Jan 20 Sun  
06:43  
2.  
Program Mode  
*ꢄ*ꢄꢂ*ꢅ*ꢆ  
Enter programming mode. (Do not press the [DN] button.)  
Program = 04  
3. 6SNUꢃꢇ6SHDNHUꢈꢃꢁꢋꢃ+ROG  
Access Program 04. The speaker beeps to indicate when to enter a  
Data Store  
program number.  
04 Select =  
4. 6SNUꢃꢇ6SHDNHUꢈ  
Prepare the system for a selection.  
04 Select = 000  
INT = N-N  
5. ꢁꢁꢁꢄaꢆꢆꢌꢄ  
Select a port number (use three digits plus #).  
04 Select = 000 ~239  
INT = XXXX  
6. ;;;;  
Enter the port’s station number (up to four digits) from the record  
sheet.  
Note  
Station numbers must not exceed four digits, or conflict with  
feature access codes listed in Program 05 record sheet.  
04 Select = (000~335)  
Data Programmed  
7. +ROG  
Secure data in system programming.  
04 Select =  
8. 6SNUꢃꢇ6SHDNHUꢈ  
Prepare the system for another selection (go back to Step 5) or  
continue with Step 9.  
00 Select = ##  
Data Programmed  
9. ꢄꢄ+ROG  
Secure Program 04 data in system memory.  
Program =  
10. 6SNUꢃꢇ6SHDNHUꢈ  
Exit Program 04 (system beeps). Enter another program number or  
continue with Step 11.  
No. N-N  
06:58  
11. ꢄꢄ+ROG  
Exit programming mode.  
Jan 20 Sun  
1. N-N = program telephone [PDN]  
3-16  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
System & Station  
Program *04 – [PhDN] and Distributed Hunt [DN] Assignments For Internal and Tie Line Calls  
Program *04 – [PhDN] and Distributed Hunt [DN]  
Assignments For Internal and Tie Line Calls  
Processor Type: DK14, DK40i, all RCTUs  
Program Type:  
Station  
Initialized Default: See the legend below  
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ  
ꢀ
SELECT = [PhDN] or DH [DN] Port Number  
(see table below)  
[PhDN] or DH [DN] assigned to port number  
(1~4 digits, see table below)  
To erase existing [PDNs], enter XXXꢀXXX  
[PDNs] cannot be done in this manner.  
Press LED Button 01 to erase [PhDNs] and  
DH[DNs].  
(low port ꢀhigh port). Adding a new range of  
Processor  
[PhDN] Port Range  
500~509  
Initialized [PhDN]  
50~59  
DH [DN] Port Range  
900~915  
Initialized DH [DN]  
850~865  
DK14  
DK40i  
500~527  
50~77  
900~915  
850~865  
RCTUA  
500~531  
500~531  
500~579  
500~739  
450~785  
900~915  
850~865  
RCTUBA/BB  
RCTUC/D  
RCTUE/F  
500~579  
900~915  
850~865  
500~739  
900~915  
850~865  
500~835  
900~915  
850~865  
Initialized  
[PhDN] or DH  
[DN] (YYYY)  
Initialized  
[PhDN] or DH  
[DN] (YYYY)  
Initialized  
[PhDN] or DH  
[DN] (YYYY)  
[PhDN] or DH [DN]  
Port XXX  
[PhDN] or DH [DN]  
Port XXX  
[PhDN] or DH [DN]  
Port XXX  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
3-17  
System & Station  
Program *04 – [PhDN] and Distributed Hunt [DN] Assignments For Internal and Tie Line Calls  
Program *04 Overview  
Program *04 assigns the system Phantom Directory Numbers [PhDNs] and Distributed Hunt (DH)  
Group [DNs].  
All DK systems provide 16 DH groups. [PhDNs] and DH [DNs] can be one to four digits.  
[PhDNs] and DH [DNs] cannot conflict with each other, or be the same as Primary Directory  
Numbers assigned in Program 04. [PhDNs] can not conflict with, or be the same as Distributed  
Hunt Directory Numbers assigned in this program. Default [PhDNs] and DH [DNs] are shown in  
the legend above the record sheet.  
Note  
●
[PhDNs] and DH [DNs] cannot have 41~49 as the first two digits because 44 is the substitute  
code to rotary dial the “ꢄ” in feature access codes.  
●
See Program ꢀ09 or 71 for DID line call routing to DH Groups; see Programs 81~89 or  
Ground/Loop start CO line call routing to DH Groups.  
3-18  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
System & Station  
Program 05 – Flexible Access Code Numbering  
Program 05 – Flexible Access Code Numbering  
Processor Type: DK14, DK40i, All RCTUs  
Program Type: System  
Initialized Default: See record sheet  
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ  
SELECT = Access Code (1~9)  
See the table below for standard  
access codes.  
SPECIAL DIAL = New Access Codes  
The first digit of access codes can be replaced by 2 digits.  
Press LED Button 01 to enter blanks.  
Default  
Access  
Code  
New  
Access  
Codes  
Features Affected  
(N/A = Not Affected/ Cannot Change)  
Unused  
0
Voice First/Tone First (Dial 1-N/A)  
Station LCD Messages (10~19-N/A)  
Door Phones: (#151~#159; #161~#163)  
Station Speed Dial (100~139-N/A) RCTUE/F  
1
IMDU or RMDS Access: DK424 and DK40i (#19)  
Station Speed Dial Set (10~49-N/A) RCTUA, BA/BB,  
C/D  
Default [PDNs] and Park Orbits (see Program 04)  
Default [PDNs] and Park Orbits (see Program 04)  
ACD Ports ( 04, 09, 71)  
*
*
Busy Override (Dial 2-N/A)  
Off-hook Call Announce (2-N/A)  
2
3
Do Not Disturb Override (Dial 2-N/A)  
RCTUE/F System Speed Dial (200~999)  
Default [PDNs] and Park Orbits (see Program 04)  
RCTUA~C/D External Page Zones 1~4 (#35~#38)  
Executive Override (Dial 3-N/A)  
Group Page (Internal) (#311~#318)  
Park + Page (Cnf+#331)  
All Call Voice Page (#30)  
All Call Voice Page with External Spkrs (#39)  
RCTUE/F Ext Page Zones #351~#358  
Park Pick Up [DN]+#331 (see Program 05)  
*
Park + Hold (Cnf+#332)  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
3-19  
System & Station  
Program 05 – Flexible Access Code Numbering  
Default  
Access  
Code  
New  
Access  
Codes  
Features Affected  
(N/A = Not Affected/ Cannot Change)  
Default [PDNs] and Park Orbits (see Program 04)  
T.R. Override/T. Class Code Input (Cnf + #47)  
Default [PhDNs] (see Program 04)  
BGM Over Stations ON (#481)  
BGM Over Stations OFF (#480)  
*
Automatic Callback (Dial 4-N/A)  
CO Line Queuing (Dial 4-N/A)  
Station Number Display (#401)  
Port Number Display (#402)  
Hold (#41)  
BGM Over External Speakers ON (#491)(Station Port  
000 only)  
BGM Over External Speakers OFF (#490)(Station  
Port 000 only)  
Cancel Message Waiting at Station (#409) from [PDN]  
or [PhDN]  
Hold Pickup (#42)  
Retrieve Message Waiting (#408)  
Automatic Busy Redial (Conf + #44)  
Automatic Busy Redial Cancel (Int + #44)  
4
Access Code/Speed Dial Prefix (44 or #)  
To store a CO line or feature access code in Speed  
Dial memory from rotary phones or phones without  
the Speed Dial and Redial buttons, enter 44 + 7XXX  
instead of # + 7XXX.  
Message Waiting Answer (#408) from INT, [PDN], or  
[PhDN]  
Display [PDN], [SDN], or [PhDN] on LCD (#407)  
Emergency Call to Attendant Console (#400)  
Start Trace #489 (Station Port 000 only)  
Stop Trace #488 (Station Port 000 only)  
Cancel Auto Call Back (#43)  
Standard telephone Redial (44) or dial # for feature  
access code  
Flash (Cnf + #45)  
Account Code Input (Cnf + #46)  
Call Pickup Station (#5+Station No.), Ringing CO or  
DID line (#59)  
Selected Group Pickup (#5+#320~#339)  
Own Group(s) Pickup (#5+#34)  
Pickup Ringing Line (#59)  
Directed Pickup of CO Line on Hold (#5+#7 XXX,  
XXX = 001~200),  
5
[DN] Pickup #5#2+XXX (XXX=[PDN] or [PhDN], DK  
Release 3.1 and above)  
Pick-up External Page (#5 +#30 or for Zone Page  
#5+#35~#38)  
Verified Account Codes (DK14, DK40i, RCTUA~C/D:  
Speed Dial + 50; RCTUE/F Speed Dial + 050)  
#5#79 Pick up Tandem Connection (Release 3.2 and  
above)  
3-20  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
System & Station  
Program 05 – Flexible Access Code Numbering  
Default  
Access  
Code  
New  
Access  
Codes  
Features Affected  
(N/A = Not Affected/ Cannot Change)  
Call Forward (#601, #602, #603, #604)  
Timed Reminder (#605~#609)  
T.R. Override Code Change (#654, #655)  
System Speed Dial  
M/W for Voice Mail ON (#63+Station No.)  
M/W for Voice Mail OFF (#64+Station No.)  
Voice Mail ID Code Set (Call Fwd, #656)  
Voice Mail ID Code Set (Ans. MW, #657)  
LCD Message Set (#68)  
(N/A 600~699 RCTUB, RCTUBA/BB, &  
RCTUC/D)  
System Speed Dial Set (N/A 60~99 - DK14, DK40i  
and RCTUA)  
LCD User Name (#621-Set, #620-Reset, TR dial plan  
Set #650 +6267 +7/8/9 Change  
DISA Security Code Change (#658)  
DKT Mute Ring Adjust (#6101)  
6
Verified Account Code Change (#659)  
Set LCD Messages (#68)  
DKT Ring Level Adjust (#6102)  
Port Swap/Station Relocation OFF (#6281)  
Station Relocation ON (#6282)  
System LCD Messages (N/A 60-99)  
Traveling Class Code 1~8 Change (#691~#698)  
Logical Port Swap (#627 + Destination Intercom No.)  
Physical Port Calling (#629 + Physical Port No.)  
Message Waiting Set/Cancel (N/A) (7) (77)  
Night Lock Password Change (#622)  
Logical Port Swap ON (#6283)  
Call Forward Ext Set or Remote Change Code (#670)  
Date Set (#651)  
Time Set (#652)  
Weekday Set (#653)  
CO Line Outgoing Calls (#7001~#7200)  
7
To store a CO line or feature access code in Speed Dial memory from rotary telephones or telephones without  
the Speed Dial and Redial buttons, enter 44 + 7XXX instead of # + 7XXX.  
CO Group Outgoing Calls (801~816)  
Default Distributed Hunt [DNs] (850~ 865)  
See Program *04  
8
9
Least Cost Routing or CO Group (9), Distributed Hunt Group Prog *04 Port Ref. (900~915)  
Program 05 Overview  
Program 05 enables you to change feature access codes. The first digit of a feature access code can  
be changed to a different digit or to two digits. Digits after this prefix cannot be changed. Some  
access codes cannot be changed (such as the code for Automatic Callback) and are shown with N/  
A on the record sheet.  
Notes  
●
●
●
Access code conflicts may exist if new access codes are assigned, and a new system  
numbering plan will have to be implemented.  
Be sure access code changes do not conflict with existing access code or station numbering  
schemes. Refer to Program 04 – Port/Station Number Assignment.  
If access codes are being changed to a number that is currently assigned, change the currently  
assigned code to an unused code first. In the initialized state, the only unused code is zero (0).  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
3-21  
System & Station  
Program *05 – Call Park Pickup Abbreviated Dialing  
Program *05 – Call Park Pickup Abbreviated Dialing  
Processor Type: DK14, DK40i, All RCTUs  
Program Type:  
System  
Initialized Default: Blank  
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ  
ꢀ
SELECT = 1  
DATA = 1 or 2 digit abbreviated  
dialing for Call Park Pickup.  
SELECT = Call Park type:  
1 = Change #331 Call Park Pickup Code  
2 = Change #332 Call Park Pickup Code  
It is only necessary to change one code, but  
each code can be changed to the same or  
Program 05 Overview  
ꢀ
This program assigns two Call Park Pickup abbreviated dialing codes to pick up parked calls. For  
dialing convenience, the 1- (or 2-) digit abbreviation for Call Park Pickup replaces the Call Park  
access codes #331 and #332. To park calls, Code #331 and #332 must still be used if the Program  
39ꢃ3DUNꢃLQꢃ2UELW buttons are not available on a telephone. Changing the #331 and #332 codes  
only applies to Call Park Pickup.  
♦
LED 01 blanks out the Call Park abbreviated dialing data.  
Example:  
If Park Pickup code #331 is changed to the digit “1”, Park Pickup functions by dialing 1XXX,  
where XXX is the orbit number in which the call is parked.  
3-22  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
System & Station  
Program 09 – Built-in Auto Attendant Prompt / Station Assignments  
Program 09 – Built-in Auto Attendant Prompt / Station  
Assignments  
Processor Type:  
DK14, DK40i, All RCTUs  
Program Type:  
System and ACD  
Initialized Default: Blank  
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ  
SELECT = Prompt  
AUTO ATT DIAL = (1~4 digits)  
Press prompt number offered  
to caller. First or second digit.  
Enter the station numbers, [PDNs], [PhDNs], DH  
[DNs], or #4 plus the ACD Group No. which will  
receive Auto Attendant calls. Could be ꢀ if  
establishing the first digit.  
Press LED Button 01 to delete data.  
Dialed Digit (Menu Prompts)  
Station Number [PDN]  
Department, Division, Etc.  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Program 09 Overview  
Program 09 tells the system where to direct calls after incoming Auto Attendant callers dial a  
digit(s) in response to the menu of dialing prompts offered by one of the Auto Attendant’s digital  
announcers.  
The exact dialing prompts along with their associated station numbers, [PDNs], [PhDNs],  
Distributed Hunt [DN] and ACD group numbers are assigned with this program. The actual  
announcements that are delivered to callers are recorded on customer-supplied digital announcers.  
The dialing prompts can either be all one-digit or all two-digits (or numbers of 1~4 digits).  
One digit dialing prompts can be used, but they cannot conflict with the first digit of the [PDN] in  
Program 04 or the [PhDN] and DH [DN] in Program *04.  
Two-digit dialing prompts are only used when it is necessary to stop the announcement to prevent  
errors in digit translation or when single-digit prompts conflict with [PDN], [PhDN], and DH [DN]  
numbering plans. Digit Translation errors occur sometimes when line transmission is low or the  
announcement voice frequencies are the same as a DTMF digit and the system RRCS, K4RCU3,  
K5RCU, K5RCU2, or QSTU3 circuit will not dial or misdials.  
The first digit of the two-digit prompts cannot conflict with [PDNs] in Program 04 or [PhDNs] and  
DH [DNs] in Program *04.  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
3-23  
System & Station  
Program 09 – Built-in Auto Attendant Prompt / Station Assignments  
➤ To create one-digit dialing prompts and to assign the associated destination station numbers  
1. Enter Program 09.  
2. When “SELECT” appears on the LCD, press the desired digit (prompt). Then “AUTO ATT  
DIAL” appears on the LCD.  
3. Enter the destination DH or station [PDN] (not Port number) number or ꢄꢋ plus the ACD  
group (per Note) associated with the prompts and then the +ROG button.  
4. Press 6SNU and repeat Steps 2 and 3 for more prompt-station entries.  
➤ To enter two-digit dialing prompts along with their destination station numbers  
1. Enter Program 09 and then see “SELECT” on the LCD.  
2. Press the desired leading digit then see “AUTO ATT DIAL” on the LCD.  
3. Press and then the +ROG button. The first digit will now be set, and “DATA PROGRAMED”  
ꢀ
will again appear on the LCD.  
4. Press 6SNU and press a second digit, and then see “AUTO ATT DIAL” on the LCD.  
5. Enter the destination station [DN] assigned to the two-digit prompt and then the +ROG button.  
6. To complete more prompt-station entries, repeat Steps 4 and 6.  
➤ To assign a digit (menu prompt) to an ACD Group  
➤ Enter ꢄꢋ;; in place of the [DN]) at the “AUTO ATT DIAL” LCD programming prompt,  
where XX is the ACD Group number 01~16.  
Note When transmission and DTMF levels are lower than normal or when the digital  
announcement voice frequencies match DTMF digital frequencies (talk-off), Auto  
Attendant efficiency may be improved with two-digit dialing options, instead of one-digit  
dialing options.  
3-24  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
System & Station  
Program *09 – [PDN], [PhDN], DH, ACD or Modem DID Ext. Assignments  
Program *09 – [PDN], [PhDN], DH, ACD or Modem DID  
Ext. Assignments  
Processor Type: See legend below  
Program Type:  
Station  
Initialized Default: See legend below  
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ  
ꢀ
SELECT = Port No. (see legend)  
DIAL = DID Extension Number (1~4 digits)  
Press LED Button 01 to erase extension  
numbers.  
To add a port range, enter XXXꢀXXX  
after entering a port range.) Then enter  
(low port ꢀ high port). (Do not press #  
the lowest DID Ext. number as the first  
Ext. number in the range.  
[PDN]  
Port  
Range  
[PhDN]  
Port  
Range  
[PDN]Ext.  
#
[PhDN]  
Ext. #  
DH Group DH Ext. #  
ACD  
Port #  
RMDS/IMDU  
Modem Port [PhDN] Ext. #  
Modem  
Processor  
ACD Ext. #  
Ports  
Default  
DK14  
DK40i  
000~009  
000~027  
000~031  
000~079  
000~239  
000~335  
10~19  
10~37  
500~509  
500~527  
500~531  
500~579  
500~739  
500~835  
50~59  
50~77  
900~915  
900~915  
900~915  
900~915  
900~915  
900~915  
Blank  
Blank  
Blank  
Blank  
Blank  
Blank  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
031  
035  
085  
245  
340  
N/A  
41  
RCTUA  
200~231  
200~279  
200~439  
100~435  
500~531  
500~579  
500~739  
450~785  
N/A  
N/A  
235  
285  
445  
840  
RCTUBA/BB  
RCTUC/D  
RCTUE/F  
090~097  
250~265  
345~360  
290~297  
450~465  
850~865  
[PDN],  
[PhDN], DH,  
ACD or  
[PDN],  
[PhDN], DH,  
ACD or  
[PDN],  
[PhDN], DH,  
ACD or  
[PDN], [PhDN], DH, ACD  
or Modem Port  
DID Ext. # (1~4 Digits)  
[PDN], [PhDN], DH, ACD  
or Modem Port  
DID Ext. # (1~4 Digits)  
[PDN], [PhDN], DH, ACD  
or Modem Port  
DID Ext. # (1~4 Digits)  
Modem Port  
Modem Port  
Modem Port  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
3-25  
System & Station  
Program *09 – [PDN], [PhDN], DH, ACD or Modem DID Ext. Assignments  
Program *09 Overview  
This program assigns the routing destinations for incoming DID line calls.  
Program ꢀ09 DID extension numbers can be routed to [PDNs], [SDNs], or [PhDNs], ACD  
Groups, or Distributed Hunt groups. Each [PDN]/[SDN] and/or [PhDN] can appear and ring  
(immediate, 12 sec. delay or 24 sec. delay with Program ꢀ71, ꢀ72 and ꢀ73) on up to 120  
telephones. A DID extension number can ring up to 120 telephones maximum.  
Any DID line can be assigned to route with Program 71 and 72 DNIS routing assignments, instead  
of Program ꢀ09 assignments, to provide all the DNIS call routing features to normal DID lines.  
Which program options (Program ꢀ09 or Program 71 and 72) DID line call routing will follow is  
determined for each DID line in Program 17, LED 05 and/or 07 (see Program 17 for more details).  
On DK424, DID calls will alternately ring all or selected Attendant Consoles (in the load share  
group, assigned in Program 81-89) when a DID Attendant Console extension number is assigned  
to ring any one of the Attendant Console ports in the load share group.  
3-26  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
System & Station  
Program 10-1 – System Assignments, Part 1 of 3  
Program 10-1 – System Assignments, Part 1 of 3  
Processor Type: DK14, DK40i, All RCTUs  
Program Type: System  
Initialized Default: LEDs 07, 08, 09, 16, 18, 19 and 20 are ON  
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ  
SELECT = 1  
Light the LED Buttons that are marked with an X in  
the table below.  
Button/  
LED  
X
LED ON  
LED OFF  
20  
Two-CO Line Conference/Allowed  
Not Allowed  
Two-CO line Conference must be allowed for Tandem Line, DISA,  
CF-EXT, and DNIS external routing operation. Also See Program  
15, Code 5.  
19  
18  
17  
Conference/Allowed  
Not Allowed  
Ring Detect Time-Normal  
Ring Detect Time-Short Rings  
No Station to Station Call PAD  
Station to Station Call Volume PAD (-  
8db)  
16  
15~13  
12  
BRI Standard Initialization (2 TEIs)  
Not Used  
None (TEI = 0)  
Not Used  
15 times  
ABR Cycles/10 times  
ABR Redial time/30 sec.  
11  
1 min.  
10  
System Speed Dial Override, Toll  
Restriction  
Restricted  
09  
08  
07  
Exclusive Hold/Allowed  
Not Allowed  
Alternate Point Answer  
Transfer Privacy  
Not Allowed  
Ring Transfer of CO Line Allowed  
If Ring Transfer is allowed, set Ring Transfer Recall time in Program  
37; if ring transfer is not allowed (LED 07 OFF), the station recalls  
immediately if transfer is attempted.  
06  
CO Line Repeat Ringing  
Standard Ring  
Standard ring pattern is 1 sec. on, 3 sec. off.  
05  
04  
Incoming Call Abandon 8 sec.  
6 sec.  
CO Line DTMF Signal Time 160 msec.  
80 msec.  
LED 04 DTMF Signal Time applies to manual and speed dial tones  
sent out of the system via CO lines. This applies when dialing from  
any Toshiba telephone, including the 2000-series Digital Telephone.  
LED 04 does not apply to Call Forward or Voice Mail ID DTMF tones  
sent to voice mail ports. (See Program 10-2, LED 06, for tones sent  
to Voice Mail ports.)  
03  
02  
Dial Pulse Make Ratio 33%  
40%  
0.45 or 1.5 sec. per Program 42-0  
CO Line Re-seize guard time 0.45  
CO line guard time is the time interval the system requires to release  
a CO line and reseize it. If LED 02 is off, all lines are set with 0.45  
second guard time; if LED is on, guard time is 0.45 or 1.5 seconds  
per Program 42-0.  
01  
Tone First (from SLTs, DKTs and EKTs)  
Voice First (from SLTs, DKTs and EKTs)  
This applies to [PDNs] not [PhDNs]; [PhDNs] are always tone first.  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
3-27  
System & Station  
Program 10-1 – System Assignments, Part 1 of 3  
Program 10-1 Overview  
You can make the following system assignments with Program 10-1:  
LED 20: Two-CO Line Conference  
Two lines can be conferenced with one or two telephones (digital, electronic, or standard).  
Conference (see LED 19) in this program to enable this feature. Also, Two-line Conference must  
be allowed for DISA, CF-EXT, and DNIS external routing use of outgoing lines. CO lines must be  
enabled for tandem connection with Program 15, Code 5.  
LED 19: Conference  
Gives stations the ability to enable (LED 19 ON) or disable (LED 19 OFF) any Conference.  
LED 18: Ring Detect Time  
Sets normal ring detect time (LED 18 ON). Only use the normal setting, except unless connected  
to CO/Centrex lines that send ring signals less than 120 milliseconds.  
LED 17: Station-to-Station Call Volume PAD  
ON reduces station-to-station talk path volume (-8 dB). LED 17 should be OFF in all cases except  
where extreme quiet room noise is expected.  
LED 16: BRI Standard or Non-initializing Terminal  
Determines the initialization process for BRI lines connected to the ISDN network. A normal  
sequence is followed if this is turned ON. If it is OFF, no initialization sequence is needed.  
LED 12: Automatic Busy Redial (ABR) Cycles  
If activated from an electronic or digital telephone, ABR retries dialing a telephone number on a  
line if a far end busy signal is detected. Turn LED 12 ON to have the system try up to 10 times;  
turn OFF for up to 15 attempts. This feature is not available with standard telephones and/or Tie or  
DID lines.  
LED 11: ABR Redial Time  
Upon detecting a far end busy signal on a line, ABR will retry either once every 30 seconds or  
once every minute. Turn LED 11 ON for 30 seconds; turn OFF for one minute.  
LED 10: System Speed Dial Override, Toll Restriction  
System Speed Dial can be chosen to override Toll Restriction if LED 10 is turned ON.  
LED 09: Exclusive Hold  
Exclusive Hold allows electronic and digital telephones to place calls on hold (by pressing the  
+ROG button twice) so that other stations cannot pick up the held call with a CO /LQH button. This  
feature can be disabled on a system-wide basis. Any station can pick up an Exclusive Hold call by  
using the call pickup code.  
LED 08: Alternate Point Answer/Transfer Privacy  
If Transfer Privacy is selected, a ring/blind transferred call can only be answered at the called  
station upon transfer of that call (after the transferring party releases the call). With Alternate Point  
Answer, any electronic or digital telephone with the appropriate CO line or [DN] button can pick  
up a call transferred to another telephone. In either case, Call Pickup will function from any  
station. Station [DN] and CO line transferred calls that occur on [DN] buttons are always Private.  
3-28  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
System & Station  
Program 10-1 – System Assignments, Part 1 of 3  
LED 07: Ring Transfer of CO Line Allowed  
This option defines station operation for transferring [DN] and CO line calls. If Ring Transfer is  
allowed, the system will allow “blind” transfers to busy or idle stations. The transferring station  
may release a transferred call before the called party answers. If not allowed, the system will allow  
supervised transfers only—the called station must answer before the transferring station releases.  
If Ring Transfer is not allowed, immediate recall occurs if “blind” transfer is attempted. The  
system denies Ring Transfer to stations in the Do Not Disturb (DND) mode, and immediate recall  
will occur if attempted.  
LED 06: CO Line Repeat Ringing  
If selected, the incoming ringing timing pattern at a station will be the same as the CO line ringing  
pattern. This is used mainly with Centrex or PBX systems which may vary the ring pattern to  
distinguish between internal and external incoming calls, etc. If Standard Ringing is chosen, CO  
line station ringing will cycle one second on, three seconds off regardless of the incoming ring  
pattern. This ringing option may be undesirable for some COs.  
LED 05: Incoming Call Abandon Timing  
The amount of time between incoming CO line ring signals determines when the system will  
discontinue (abandon) sending ringing tones to stations. The choice of six or eight seconds  
depends on the line ring pattern. This assignment has no effect if the Line Repeat Ringing (LED  
06) option is used.  
LED 04: Dual-tone Multi-frequency (DTMF) Signal Time  
DTMF signals sent out to CO lines can be either 80 or 160 msecs. in length. DTMF to QSTU2,  
KSTU2, RSTU, RSTU2, RDSU/RSTS, PSTU, PESU ports (including voice mail ports) are not  
affected by this assignment. See Program 10-2 for standard telephone port DTMF timing. This  
program pertains to manual dialing or speed dialing from all Toshiba telephones, with the  
following exception. When dialing manually from 2000-series telephones, signals last as long as  
the buttons are pressed (minimum 80 msec.).  
LED 03: Dial Pulse (DP) Make Ratio  
Dial Pulse timing sent out to CO lines can be changed from the normal 40% make ratio to 33%.  
This selection only applies to those CO lines assigned in Program 15 to signal dialing with dial  
pulse instead of Dual-tone Multi-frequency (DTMF).  
LED 02: Line Reseize Guard Time  
Should be set for 0.45 seconds for most installations. Set guard time for 1.5 seconds (using  
Program 10-1, LED 02 ON, and Program 42-0), if CO lines experience the following situations: no  
dial tone when a line is released and reseized immediately; or, when operating behind Centrex or  
PBX, false hookflash signals are sent to the CO when stations release and reseize the same line  
immediately.  
LED 01: Tone First/Voice First Signaling-Electronic and Digital Telephone  
With Voice First, a Directory Number call to an electronic or digital telephone will be preceded by  
a one-second burst of tone, followed by voice communication via the Handsfree Answerback  
function. For Tone First, repetitive Directory Number ring tone is sent in a one-second on, three-  
seconds off pattern. Conversion from one signaling mode to the other can be made by dialing an  
additional digit of 1 from the calling station. Voice First applies to called [PDNs] only; [PhDNs]  
are always tone first regardless of LED 01 setting.  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
3-29  
System & Station  
Program 10-2 – System Assignments, Part 2 of 3  
Program 10-2 – System Assignments, Part 2 of 3  
Processor Type: DK14, DK40i, All RCTUs  
Program Type:  
System  
Initialized Default: LEDs 02, 14, 15, and 16 are ON  
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ  
SELECT = 2  
Light the LED Buttons that are marked with an X in  
the table below.  
Button/  
LED  
X
LED ON  
LED OFF  
20  
19  
18  
17  
16  
15  
14  
Padded DTMF Tone Return  
When Dialing  
DTMF/No DTMF Per Prog 10-2, LED 11  
External Conference Amp  
Connected to PEKU  
No External Amplifier Connected  
No External Amplifier Connected  
“TRNS” Soft Key—Normal  
External Conference Amp  
Connected to PEKU  
“TRNS” Soft Key—  
Immediate  
Executive Override Warning  
Tone/ON  
Executive Override Warning Tone/OFF  
Not Included - see Button/LED 20 note.  
External Page included with  
All Call Page  
Privacy Override/Attendant/  
Supervised Loop Warning  
Tone/ON  
Privacy/Attendant Supervised Loop Override Warning Tone/OFF  
13  
Send Auto Callback Camp-  
on Tone  
No Callback Tone. Called party receives notification tone when calling party activates Auto Call  
Back.  
12  
11  
CO Line 3 min Beep Tone  
No Beep Tone  
No DTMF Tone Return When  
Dialing  
DTMF tone return when dialing  
10  
09  
08  
BGM connected to PESU,  
Circuit 8  
EKT connected to PESU, CKT 8  
EKT connected to PEKU, CKT 3  
BGM connected to PEKU,  
Circuit 3  
Elapsed Time Display 1 min.  
After Access or Answer a CO  
line  
Elapsed Time Display 15 sec. After Access or Answer a CO Line  
Standard Tel. CO Ring Distinctive  
07  
06  
Standard Tel. CO Ring per  
Prog. 10-1, LED 06  
VM ID Code DTMF Signal  
Time 80 ms  
160 ms  
05  
04  
Send Music-on-hold.  
Send Ringback Tone to the transferred party.  
MW cancel from VM: Automatic When Answer  
2 Ringing Modes  
MW cancel from VM: RS-232  
or dial #64 + [DN]  
03  
02  
3 Ringing Modes  
Hunt/C.F. override from DSS  
console's phone  
Hunt/C.F. override from DSS console  
01  
Tone First (from DSS  
Console)  
Voice First (from DSS Console)  
This applies to [PDNs] not [PhDNs]; [PhDNs] are always tone first.  
3-30  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
System & Station  
Program 10-2 – System Assignments, Part 2 of 3  
Program 10-2 Overview  
You can make the following system assignments with Program 10-2:  
LED 20: Padded Tone Return  
With some Central Offices, callers may experience clicking or squealing sounds or a loud DTMF  
tone return during or after dialing. To counteract this, it is recommended that padded tone return or  
no tone return be enabled (LED 20 ON) or No DTMF tone return (LED 20 OFF and LED 11 ON).  
If this option is not selected (LED 20 OFF), Program 10-2, LED 11 selects normal level DTMF  
Return or No DTMF Return.  
The optional padded DTMF frequency system tone is returned to callers at a lower-than-normal  
volume level with each digit dialed from the telephone dial pad or when speed dialing is used.  
The tones are also heard by callers routed to voice mail when DK sends VM ID codes.  
LED 19: Stations Use External Amplified Conference  
Enable this feature (LED 19 ON) only if an external amplifier (Program 10-3) is used for Two-line  
conference calls. This provides additional amplification to the station during a Two-line  
conference call. If Two-CO line conference/tandem call volume is low due to CO line loss,  
Toshiba recommends testing two-line Conference with LED 19 ON; if it improves the volume  
level and there is no hum noise, keep LED 19 ON.  
Disable this feature (LED 19 OFF) if an external amplifier is not switched into two-line conference  
calls in all cases. Do this because line unbalance may cause hum noise on the station talk path  
during Two-CO line conference calls.  
LED 18: Two-CO Line Conference  
LED 18 should be OFF whenever Two-line (Tandem, DNIS Network, External Call Forward,  
DISA) connection is allowed (in Program 15-5 and Program 10-1, LEDs 19 and 20) unless Two-  
CO line conference amplifiers are connected (Program 10-3, LED 01~04).  
This increases the volume level between the two outside parties on a tandem (two-line)  
connection, but it will not affect station volume if conferenced into the tandem connection. If Two-  
CO line volume is low due to CO line loss, test the volume level with LED 18 ON. If it improves  
without adding hum noise, keep LED 18 ON.  
LED 17: “TRNS” Soft Key Immediate Transfer  
If this feature is activated and a transfer is initiated with the “TRNS” Soft Key, the call will ring  
transfer (Camp-on Busy) immediately after the last digit of the called station (busy or idle) number  
is dialed. This feature does not apply to transfers initiated with the fixed &QIꢐ7UQ button or  
“CONF” Soft Key.  
LED 16: Executive Override Warning Tone  
Executive Override allows a station user (if assigned in ) to break into and listen to an existing  
station conversation. A warning tone can be set optionally to be heard by the conversing parties.  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
3-31  
System & Station  
Program 10-2 – System Assignments, Part 2 of 3  
LED 15: External Page Included with All Call Page  
External speakers and all electronic and digital telephones are paged by dialing: Directory Number  
[DN] + ꢄꢆꢉ. Theꢃ$OOꢃ&DOOꢃ3DJHꢃbutton is used to page all digital and electronic telephones only;  
external speakers are not included when using the button.  
If the All Call voice page access code (ꢄꢆꢉ) is entered, or if the paging number is dialed on  
incoming Tie, DID or DNIS lines, external page (all zones) may be included with All Call  
telephone speaker paging. This option does not affect the $OOꢃ&DOOꢃ3DJH button function, which  
activates electronic and digital telephone speakers only, never external page (See Program 17,  
LED 01 and Program 71).  
LED 14: Privacy Override Warning Tone  
Privacy Override allows a station user to enter an existing CO line conversation by pressing a CO  
/LQH button (if the called station is assigned in Program 30). A warning tone can be set optionally  
to be heard by the conversing parties.  
LED 13: Auto Callback Camp-on Tone  
A busy called digital or electronic telephone user may optionally hear a one-time beep tone (from  
the speaker) signifying that another station has tried to call and has activated the Automatic  
Callback feature.  
LED 12: CO Line Beep Tone  
If this LED is lit, a beep tone will be sent every three minutes to stations on outgoing line calls.  
LED 11: Dual-tone Multi-frequency (DTMF) Tone Return  
This option deletes DTMF tones that are returned to digital or electronic telephones when  
manually dialing or speed dialing. It also eliminates auto dial digits returned to callers when digits  
are automatically sent to voice mail ports on forwarded calls.  
LEDs 10 and 09: Background Music/Music-on-Hold Separation  
An alternate Background Music (BGM) source can be sent to digital telephone speakers,  
electronic telephone speakers, and external page speakers, while another Music-on-hold (MOH)  
source can be sent to lines or internal stations on hold.  
The alternate BGM source can be connected to either circuit 3 on a PEKU PCB, circuit 8 on a  
PESU PCB, or circuit 2 on a PSTU, KSTU2, RDSU, RSTU2, RSTU, or QSTU2. LEDs 09 and 10  
should be OFF for RSTU2, RSTU, RDSU, KSTU2, QSTU2, and PSTU alternate BGM. Also run  
Program 19 to assign BGM to a PCB slot number.  
♦
DK14, DK40i: The normal MOH source can be connected to the MOH RCA jack on the  
DK14 KSU or on the DK40i KSU.  
♦
DK424: The normal MOH source always connects to an RCTU. Also run Program 19 to  
assign BGM to a PCB slot number.  
When disabled (LED 10 OFF), deletes DTMF tones returned to digital and electronic telephones  
when dialing from dial pad or speed dialing; also deletes auto dial digits from callers that are call  
forwarded to voice mail. This does not affect the actual DTMF tones sent out to trunks or voice  
mail devices.  
When disabled (LED 09 OFF) BGM connected to the PEKU or PESU is sent to electronic and  
digital telephone speakers and external page (optional). To assign the BGM PCB slot number, see  
Program 19-1.  
PESU/PEKU can be in any universal slot assigned in Program 19-1.  
3-32  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
System & Station  
Program 10-2 – System Assignments, Part 2 of 3  
LED 08: Display Dialed Number Timing  
An LCD telephone will display a dialed number on outgoing calls and the CO line (Program 93)  
ID name, DNIS, ANI, or Caller ID information on incoming calls for either 15 or 60 seconds  
before the display changes to the elapsed time of the call.  
LED 07: Standard Telephone Distinctive Ring  
If Distinctive Ring is enabled (LED 07 ON) the CO line call ring pattern is standard: 0.2 seconds  
on, 0.4 seconds off, 0.2 seconds on, 3.4 seconds off; intercom ring is always 1 second on, 3  
seconds off. This does not apply to VM Ports (Program 31, LED 17 ON) which are always  
standard ring. The line call ring pattern to standard telephones can be made distinct from the  
intercom ring pattern.  
If Distinctive Ring is not enabled (LED 07 OFF), the pattern is per Program 10-1, LED 06.  
Intercom, Transferred, Tie, and DID calls, with or without Distinctive Ring enabled, ring with a 1-  
second on and 3-seconds off pattern.  
LED 06: Voice Mail Identification Code, Dual-tone Multi-frequency (DTMF) Signal Time  
DTMF digits automatically sent to RSTU/RDSU/RSTU2/RSTS/PSTU/PESU/KSTU2/QSTU2  
voice mail ports can be sent in either 80- or 160-millisecond bursts. This applies to digits sent via  
the voice mail identification code (ꢄꢑꢌꢑ/ꢄꢑꢌꢏ) set at each station. This also applies to manually  
dialed digits sent to voice mail ports from Toshiba telephones, including 2000-series digital  
telephones.  
LED 05: Music-on-hold or Ring Back Tone  
Prior to Release 3.2, transferred parties would either hear Music-on-hold (MOH) or silence. With  
Release 3.2 and higher, transferred parties can hear MOH or Ring Back Tone (RBT). Turn LED 05  
ON to play MOH for transferred parties; turn LED 05 OFF to send RBT. If MOH is not installed,  
and LED 05 has been turned on, the transferred party will hear nothing.  
LED 04: Voice Mail Message Waiting Cancel Via Dial #64/Automatic  
Set Voice Mail Message Waiting Cancel Via Dial ꢄꢑꢋ (LED 04 ON) if the Strata DK system is  
connected to a voice mail (VM) system that sets station Message Waiting (MW) LEDs by RS-232  
or by dialing ꢄꢑꢆ + Station number, [PDN] or [PhDN] or RS-232 signal. This ensures the message  
LED remains flashing and are not cancelled by the DK system until the VM machine cancels the  
Message LED by sending an RS-232 signal or pressing ꢄꢑꢋ + Station Intercom number, [PDN] or  
[PhDN].  
Also, when using RS-232 Voice Mail Integration (SMDI) LED 16 must be set to ON in Program  
31, for PGM 10-2 to function.  
Set to Automatic (LED 04 OFF) to cancel the flashing message waiting LED any time a station  
calls the VM machine and the VM machine answers.  
LED 03: Ringing Modes  
The Strata DK system can be set for either two-ringing mode or three-ringing mode operation. The  
Day and Night modes are available with the two-mode operation, and the Day, Day2, and Nights  
modes are available with the three-mode operation. Each ringing mode has distinct CO line ring  
assignments (Programs 71 (1~3), 78; 81~89 and ꢀ81, ꢀ84, ꢀ87).  
The three-mode selection is useful for alternate answering positions. Station users can change  
modes with the 1LJKWꢃ7UDQVIHU button on either a DSS console (Program 29), a telephone  
(Program 39) and/or Attendant Consoles (Program 59).  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
3-33  
System & Station  
Program 10-2 – System Assignments, Part 2 of 3  
This feature applies to loop and ground start lines, and also Tie, DID, and DNIS lines assigned  
with Program 17, LED 05 ON; these lines will use Program 71 (1~3) assignments. Tie and DID  
lines assigned with Program 17, LED 05 OFF cannot be routed to different destinations in the Day/  
Day 2/Night modes.  
LED 02: Call Forward/Station Hunt Override From DSS Console (DK424 and DK40i only)  
If a station has activated Call Forwarding or Station Hunting, all calls to that station—except for  
calls from the DSS console position—will forward or hunt to another number. You can Call  
Forward from the console itself or from the digital or electronic telephone assigned to it. You  
cannot Call Forward from both; it is an either/or choice. If the console calls (using the DSS  
console station buttons) are forwarded, the telephone attached to the console will not be  
forwarded, and vice versa. This allows the console operator flexibility in reaching a station user  
that has Call Forward or Station Hunt telephone options activated.  
Note This feature applies to both types of DSS consoles, the DDSS and the HDSS.  
LED 01: Tone First/Voice First-DSS Console  
The intercom call signal from a DSS console can be set for Tone First Signaling or Voice First  
Signaling. This setting is independent of the system-wide signal option in Program 10-1. Thus,  
DSS consoles and their attendant stations can ring with different signaling modes. Voice First  
applies to called [PDNs] only; [PhDNs] are always tone first.  
3-34  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
System & Station  
Program 10-3 – System Assignments, Part 3 of 3  
Program 10-3 – System Assignments, Part 3 of 3  
Processor Type: DK14, DK40i, All RCTUs  
Program Type: System  
Initialized Default: LEDs 11, 13 and 20 ON, all other LEDs OFF  
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ  
SELECT = 3  
Light the LED Buttons that are marked with an X in  
the table below.  
Button/  
LED  
X
LED ON  
LED OFF  
20  
SMDI Message Desk Number (001) is sent in SMDI  
packet.  
CO line number is sent in SMDI packet.  
Speed Dial Entry Timeout - 1 minute  
19  
18  
Speed Dial Entry Timeout- 3 minutes  
Auto Attendant: Normal Ringing Pattern After Camp-  
on  
Auto Attendant: Back to Announcement After Camp-on  
17  
16  
15  
14  
Auto Attendant: Ring Before Disconnect time  
Auto Attendant: Ring Before Disconnect time  
Auto Attendant: Sends MOH to Caller  
Auto Attendant: Ring Before Disconnect time  
Auto Attendant: Ring Before Disconnect time  
Auto Attendant: Sends RBT to Caller  
SMDI-Bellcore Standard VM Interface, per LED 09  
Below  
Not used  
13  
12  
11  
10  
09  
08  
07  
06  
05  
04  
SMDI-Station Number Digit Length (HEX-8)  
SMDI-Station Number Digit Length (HEX-4)  
SMDI-Station Number Digit Length (HEX-2)  
SMDI-Station Number Digit Length (HEX-1)  
Bellcore Standard 1985 Version (1-space)  
Caller ID/ANI numbers are sent out the SMDI port  
SMDI-Station Number Digit Length (HEX-0)  
SMDI-Station Number Digit Length (HEX-0)  
SMDI-Station Number Digit Length (HEX-0)  
SMDI-Station Number Digit Length (HEX-0)  
Bellcore Standard 1985 Version (2-space)  
Caller ID/ANI numbers are not sent out the SMDI port.  
PEKU Ports 33, 34-Amp, connected (RCTUBA/BB  
or higher)  
PEKU Ports 33, 34-stations connected  
03  
02  
01  
PEKU Ports 25, 26-Amp, connected  
PEKU Ports 17, 18-Amp, connected  
PEKU Ports 09, 10-Amp, connected  
PEKU Ports 25, 26-stations connected  
PEKU Ports 17, 18-stations connected  
PEKU Ports 09, 10-stations connected  
Program 10-3 Overview  
You can make the following system assignments with Program 10-3:  
LED 20: SMDI Message Desk Number  
For CO line calls answered by Voice Mail/Auto Attendant devices, either the three-digit CO line  
number (001~200) or the Message Desk number (001) can be sent in the Message Desk fields of  
the SMDI packet. The system distinguishes CO line number 001 from Message Desk number 001.  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
3-35  
System & Station  
Program 10-3 – System Assignments, Part 3 of 3  
LED 19: Speed Dial Entry Timeout  
Station users can either have up to one minute or up to three minutes to store a Speed Dial number  
or memo. If they do not store the number or memo within the set time, their station exits the Speed  
Dial-storage mode and returns to the normal idle state. The timer is required because of the User  
Programmable Feature Buttons feature, which allows the [PDN], +ROG, and &QIꢐ7UQV buttons to  
be programmed in Speed Dial Memory. The three-minute setting is recommended if station users  
frequently store memos with Speed Dial numbers using the 0RGH button below the LCD.  
LED 18: Built-in Auto Attendant Camp-on Busy/Ring No Answer Routing  
This option is designed for Auto Attendant configurations that have primary announcement  
devices, but no secondary ones tells the system where to route Auto Attendant calls that ring and  
are not answered or have been camped-on for a designated time (see Program 26). The calls can be  
sent back to the primary announcement device or to the station or stations assigned to the CO lines’  
normal ringing pattern (see Programs 81, 84, and 87).  
LEDs 16 and 17: Built-in Auto Attendant Disconnect Time  
If LED 18 is assigned for normal ringing, set LEDs 16 and 17 to tell the system when to disconnect  
Built-in Auto Attendant calls that have not been answered by the alternative stations.  
The time the Auto Attendant rings stations (per Program 81, 84, 87) after a loop start line caller  
does not dial and/or a ringing station does not answer. If a call is not answered before ring  
disconnect time period time-out, the call will disconnect. This prevents loop start lines from being  
locked-up when there is no CPC supervision from the central office after the outside caller hangs  
up.  
Set LEDs 16 and 17 for the desired time as follows:  
♦
♦
♦
40 seconds: LED 16 OFF, LED 17 OFF (Initialized default)  
120 seconds: LED 16 OFF, LED 17 ON  
240 seconds: LED 16 ON, LED 17 OFF  
LED 15: Built-in Auto Attendant MOH/RBT for Transfer  
Callers can hear ring back tone (RBT) or Music-on-hold (MOH) after being transferred from the  
Built-in Auto Attendant to a station, depending on the selection made with LED 15.  
LED 14: RS-232 Voice Mail Signaling Method  
The DK provides two types of RS-232 signaling: Bellcore Standard type (TR-TSY-000283, TR-  
NWT-000283) or Toshiba Proprietary. Refer to the VM machine installation documentation and  
contact the Toshiba and/or VM machine manufacturer for VM machine SMDI configuration.  
Notes  
●
Toshiba VP products require Release 7 software or above for Toshiba proprietary integration.  
●
Toshiba VP products require the SW-X0042 feature package (CO Centrex) for SMDI, but not  
for Toshiba Proprietary RS-232 Interface.  
●
Toshiba Stratagy products support SMDI only in the standard configuration, not Toshiba  
proprietary RS-232 interface.  
3-36  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
System & Station  
Program 10-3 – System Assignments, Part 3 of 3  
LEDs 13-10: SMDI Station Number Digit Length  
Set LED 10-13 ON so that the hex values add up to the Voice Mail station digit length for SMDI  
VM interface. (Example: For VP100 or Stratagy/Stratagy DK SMDI interface, set LEDs 10, 11,  
and 12 on for 7 digits (1+2+4=7).  
Do not set LED 10-13 OFF for Toshiba proprietary interface; it is no longer supported by DK  
systems.  
This refers to the station digit length that the SMDI voice mail system design requires. This  
parameter is set for the Voice Mail system digit length; not the DK station digit length. If the voice  
mail system SMDI is designed per the Bellcore Standard TR-TSY-000283, 1985 version, set this  
parameter to seven-digits (LEDs 10, 11, and 12 ON which is equal to Hex 7). Current VP and  
Stratagy voice mail SMDI systems are designed for this seven-digit operation.  
If the voice mail system SMDI is designed per the Bellcore Standard TR-NWT-000283, 1991  
version, set this parameter between 1-10 digits with LEDs 10, 11, 12, and 13. (See Program 10-3  
record sheet for LED-HEX values.) Digit length setting is not necessary with Toshiba Proprietary  
Interface (LED 10-13 OFF).  
LED 08: Caller ID / Automatic Number ID  
This option determines if Caller ID (CLID) and/or Automatic Number Identification (ANI)  
telephone numbers will be sent out the system SMDI port (SMDI only not Toshiba proprietary):  
♦
Turn LED 08, 10, 11, 12, and 13 ON if received Caller ID and/or ANI numbers should be sent  
out the system SMDI port.  
♦
Turn LED 08 OFF (initialized default) if received Caller ID and/or ANI numbers should not be  
sent out the system SMDI port.  
LED 09: SMDI Bellcore Standard Version  
Toshiba Proprietary and SMDI is available with RCTUB2 or RCTUC/RCTUD2 Release 2 and  
above only and is only for use with Toshiba VP systems, not with Toshiba Stratagy systems.  
Bellcore released two versions of the SMDI specification. Contact your voice mail machine  
vendor to determine which specification to enable with this program – TR-TSY-000283, Issue 1,  
July 1985 version, or the TR-NWT-000283, Issue 2, May 1991 version. Toshiba VP and Stratagy  
SMDI products currently use the 1985 version. In either case, the VM station digit length must be  
set with LED 10~13 as shown above.  
Also note that the 1985 and 1991 version Bellcore specifications use different space/character  
parameters for some call types which means the DK will not operate properly if the correct version  
is not selected. Select the 1985 version (LED 09 OFF) for Toshiba VP and Stratagy products. This  
selection is not needed with Toshiba Proprietary Interface.  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
3-37  
System & Station  
Program 10-3 – System Assignments, Part 3 of 3  
LEDs 01~04: Amplified Conference Assignments  
Light LEDs 01~04 to identify which PEKU ports should be connected to external amplifiers.  
External Amplified Conference is provided by customer-supplied two-way amplifiers connected  
to system PEKU ports to amplify “two-line” calls.  
♦
DK424 and DK40i: Up to four amplifiers can be connected, depending on the DK system  
type (two PEKU ports per amplifier). The number of simultaneous Two-CO line conferencing  
(three-party) calls varies according to the processor:  
DK40i: 4 calls (2 amplified)  
RCTUA: 4 calls (3 amplified)  
RCTUB, RCTUBA/BB and RCTUC/D: 10 calls (4 amplified)  
RCTUE: 20 calls (4 amplified)  
For DK424 and DK 40, amplifiers are switched into Two-CO line calls automatically, one  
amplifier for each call, starting from the lowest PEKU ports enabled to the highest (see  
Program 10-3 record sheet). Skipping ports is allowed. Two-CO line calls established after all  
amplifiers are in use will not be amplified.  
Example  
The first amplifier can be connected to PEKU ports 017 and 018, skipping ports 009 and 010. In  
this case, LED 02 should be ON and LED 01 should be OFF. (See Program 10-1, LEDs 19 and 20;  
Program 10-2, LEDs 18 and 19; and Program 15-5 for more information on Two-line Conference.)  
Important! The amplifiers used for supervised, Two-line Conference connections are switched  
in automatically starting with the first connection. Calls made when there are no  
amplifiers available will not be amplified. Unsupervised Two-line tandem  
connections are not limited to the numbers listed above (by processor), but are  
limited by the number of lines equipped in the system.  
Note External amplifiers also amplify two-line DISA, Call Forward External, DNIS externally  
routed calls, DID, and Tie line trunk to trunk calls.  
3-38  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
System & Station  
Program *10 – Enhanced 911 Operation  
Program *10 – Enhanced 911 Operation  
Processor Type: DK14, DK40i, all RCTUs  
Program Type:  
System  
Initialized Default: See each program  
Program *10 provides two QSTU2, RSTU, KSTU2, RDSU, PSTU, or PESU ports to be assigned  
to interface with central office E911 trunks.  
E911 enhanced operation provides locator information to the responding agency to provide more  
complete name and address information, including building, floor, etc. This is done by sending the  
station number of the 911 caller to the E911 emergency center. This locator information is then  
cross referenced with name/number/address data in the E911 central database, and the E911  
operator receives the precise location along with the basic information.  
The Strata DK14, DK40i and DK424 accomplishes this through a special interface between the  
KSU and the CO. This special interface takes the station number information and sends it through  
the public network in a format compatible with the central E911 database. This special interface is  
required in addition to sending software within the Strata DK.  
The required interface is an external device (Telident or Proctor) that interfaces to up to two  
standard analog station ports.  
Strata DK  
Central  
Office  
Tip/Ring E911 CKT #1  
Tip/Ring E911 CKT #2  
CAMA Trunk #1  
CAMA Trunk #2  
KSTU2  
QSTU2  
RSTU  
RDSU  
PESU  
Proctor or  
Telident  
E911 Interface  
E911  
Center  
1687  
E911 CKT 1 and 2 assigned in Program 10  
*
Figure 3-1 Physical Connection of E911 Interface  
Programs *10-11 and *10-12 – E911 Standard Telephone Ports Assignment  
Initialized Default: Blank  
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ  
ꢀ
First E911 Port = 11  
E911 RSTU/KSTU2 Port Number  
Second E911 Port = 12  
E911 RSTU/KSTU2/QSTU2 Port Number  
First Standard Port  
Second Standard Port  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
3-39  
System & Station  
Program *10 – Enhanced 911 Operation  
Programs *10-11 and *10-12 Overview  
Programs ꢀ10-11 and ꢀ10-12 assign which QSTU2, KSTU2, RSTU2, RSTU, RDSU, PSTU, or  
PESU standard telephone ports are connected to the E911 interface unit.  
Important! Program 04 Directory Number data must be blank for E911 QSTU2, KSTU2,  
RSTU2, or RSTU ports.  
Program *10-91 – E911 Interdigital Time  
Initialized Default: 15 seconds  
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ  
ꢀ
Interdigit Timer = 91  
01~15 seconds  
Interdigit Timer  
seconds  
Program *10-91 Overview  
10-91 assigns the time allowed to dial each digit after dialing 9 when using the E911 feature.  
ꢀ
This time will affect the time that LCR or CO Line dial tone is returned when dialing 9. However,  
a user can dial a 9+ (non-911) calls normally before receiving LCR or CO line dial tone and the  
DK will route the call appropriately.  
Program *10-92 – E911 Pause Before Send Timer  
Initialized Default: 0 - No pause  
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ  
ꢀ
Pause Timer = 92  
0 = No pause  
1 = 1.5 second pause  
2 = 3 second pause  
Pause Timer  
seconds  
Program *10-92 Overview  
10-92 assigns the time the DK will wait before sending the Station Primary Directory Number to  
ꢀ
the E911 SLT port after the E911 SLT port answers.  
3-40  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
System & Station  
Program 12 – System Assignments, Basic Timing  
Program 12 – System Assignments, Basic Timing  
Processor Type: DK14, DK40i, All RCTUs  
Program Type:  
Station  
Program Timing  
Code 1 15 secs.  
Code 3  
Initialized Default:  
1
2
0
1
4
Code 4  
Code 5  
Code 8  
Code 9  
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ  
SELECT = 1, 3~5, 8, 9  
Enter program code from  
the table below.  
DATA = Enter ring down time (00~60)  
SELECT CODE = Enter the 1 digit code which  
corresponds to the time listed in the table below.  
For Program Codes 8 and 9, the LCD responds with  
Program  
Code  
Required  
Code  
Function  
Code  
Time  
Standard Telephone Ring Down Timer (Release 4.0)  
XX  
1
XX = 2 digits. 00~60 secs.  
1.5 sec  
1
3
Pause Timing  
(Speed Dial)  
2
3.0 sec.  
Flash Timing  
1
0.5 sec.  
4
5
2
2.0 sec. (Not used in U.S.)  
0.2 sec.  
4
Pause After Flash  
(Voice Path Delay)  
0
no pause  
1
1.5 sec.  
2
3.0 sec.  
DNIS Ext. Network, External Call Forward, and DISA  
Disconnect Timer for Loop Start Lines  
0
no disconnect timer  
4 min. disconnect  
10 min. disconnect  
20 min. disconnect  
1~9 secs.  
1
8
9
2
3
QRCU3/K4RCU3/RRCS DTMF Inter-digital Release Time  
(Standard Phone)  
1~9  
Program 12 Overview  
This program assigns system times for ring down, disconnecting calls, pause times, flash times,  
auto attendant, DISA, Call Forward External, and DNIS and DTMF receiving decoding.  
Code 1: Standard Telephone Ring Down Timer  
This feature is available for Release 4.0 and higher. Code 1 assigns the number of seconds that a  
Hotline or Emergency standard telephone waits after going off-hook before automatically ringing  
a preassigned directory number. If a valid feature access code or [DN] is dialed prior to the ring  
down timer expiration, then ring down does not occur. Ring down applies only to standard  
telephone ports, not electronic or digital telephone ports. Ring down destination numbers are  
assigned in Program *38.  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
3-41  
System & Station  
Program 12 – System Assignments, Basic Timing  
Code 3: Pause Timing  
Code 3 enables station users to program short and long pauses in Speed Dial numbers. Applies to  
pauses inserted in Speed Dial numbers used for both telephone voice calls and data calls from data  
interface units. The short pause length can be set system wide for either 1.5 or 3 seconds with this  
program. The long pause is always 10 seconds.  
Code 4: Flashing Timing  
When on a CO line, a station user can press the )ODVK button (or enter access code &QIꢐ7UQꢃꢄꢋꢌ)  
and the line opens (flash) for 2 seconds, 0.2 seconds (not used in the USA), or 0.5 seconds  
depending on this assignment. This choice reflects whether to disconnect and regain dial tone (2  
seconds), or to use PBX or Centrex features which require a flash signal (0.5 seconds). It also  
applies to flashes inserted when dialing via Data Interface Units (DIUs).  
Code 5: Pause After Flash  
Some COs or Centrex facilities require a period of time after a flash signal before they can accept  
dialing signals. A selection of pause timing is available to automatically delay any dialing signals  
after flash. This timing applies to Speed Dial calls (with flash signals between the telephone  
number digits) as well as to manual dialing.  
Code 8: DNIS Ext. Network External, Call Forward, and DISA Disconnect Timer for Loop  
Start LInes  
Disconnects DISA, Call Forward External and/or DNIS Telephone Network routed calls when  
made on loop start lines. Calls can lock-up (keep busy indefinitely) if the CO does not send a  
disconnect signal (CPC or AR) when the caller hangs up. This timer prevents loop start lines from  
locking up by disconnecting the call automatically when the timer expires, 4, 10, or 20 minutes  
from the start of the call. Callers will hear a warning tone and can reset the timer repeatedly by  
dialing “0”. This disconnect feature is only needed for loop start lines.  
Code 9: QRCU3/K4RCU3/K5RCU/K5RCU2/RRCS DTMF Receiver Inter-digital Release Time  
With Code 9, one channel of the QRCU3, K4RCU, K5RCU, and K5RCU2 or RRCS Dual-tone  
Multi-frequency (DTMF) receiver is seized when it is needed for the decoding process, such as for  
a standard telephone with a DTMF dial pad. When placing outgoing calls with DTMF standard  
telephones, the talk path to the outside party is not “cut-through” until the DTMF receiver circuit is  
released. The DTMF receiver channel’s release time can be programmed for between one and nine  
seconds (initialized timing is four seconds)—this is the time it takes to release the DTMF receiver  
circuit after the last digit is dialed.  
The choice of timing is a trade-off between CO line time to connect and user speed. If the time is  
too long, the outside called party may answer before the voice path is “cut-through,” and the caller  
is not heard. If the time is too short, a standard telephone user inputting DTMF tones could be cut  
off prematurely from using other features, such as Speed Dial or Toll Restriction.  
Standard telephones can also defeat Toll Restriction if the seize time is too short and they are not  
required to dial outgoing calls via Least Cost Routing (LCR). Toshiba recommends that standard  
telephones should always be required to dial outgoing calls via LCR to prevent them from  
defeating Toll Restriction.  
Note If no digits are dialed after accessing an outgoing CO line, the DTMF receiver remains  
seized for 15 seconds and then drops; however, the line remains connected.  
3-42  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
System & Station  
Program 13 – Defining the Message Center  
Program 13 – Defining the Message Center  
Processor Type: DK14, DK40i, All RCTUs  
Program Type: Station  
Initialized Default: No port assigned  
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ  
SELECT = 1  
PORT = Station Logical Port Number  
Enter the station logical port number of the station  
to be defined as the Message Center.  
For RS-232 SMDI and In Band (DTMF) voice mail  
integration, enter the lowest QSTU2/KSTU2/  
RSTU2 standard telephone port connected to the  
VM device (see notes below.)  
Port Number  
Program 13 Overview  
This program assigns a station as the Message Center.  
Each digital, electronic and standard telephone can receive a maximum of four message waiting  
indications per [PDN] and each [PhDN] owned by the station. One of these four is reserved for the  
designated Message Center. The Message Center should be the customer’s main answering  
position.  
Typically, the Message Center is a voice mail device, attendant console, a digital or electronic  
telephone with a DSS console (DDSS or HDSS), or an add-on module. If incoming traffic to a  
DDSS or HDSS console attendant is heavy, another station can be assigned as the Message Center.  
Notes  
●
The Message Center is allowed to perform “Message Waiting,” even if disallowed on all other  
stations.  
●
Assign the Message Center to the customer’s main answering position: a station or the lowest  
port (in VM group) of the customer’s voice mail device (see Program 31 for voice mail group  
port assignments), whichever the customer specifies.  
●
When using RS-232 SMDI or DTMF voice mail interface, all stations must also be assigned to  
the message center port in Program ꢀ32 and Program 13. This should be the lowest standard  
telephone port (QSTU2/KSTU2/RSTU2) connected to the VM device. This is also the same  
(lowest) port assigned in the Program 31 VM group and the lowest standard telephone port  
assigned in the Program ꢀ40 VM Distributed Hunt Group. Do not assign the VM DH Group  
port number (900~915) as the message center port.  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
3-43  
System & Station  
Program 15 – Ground/Loop/Tie/DID Line Options  
Program 15 – Ground/Loop/Tie/DID Line Options  
Processor Type: DK14, DK40i, All RCTUs  
Program Type:  
System  
Initialized Default: All LEDs are OFF  
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ  
SELECT = Program Code  
LED Buttons = CO line  
Press Scroll to advance or  
to go back.  
Specify CO line by setting LEDs as defined by the  
table below. When you are finished, all LEDs with  
an “X” should be lit.  
To advance the CO line range, press  
located beneath the LCD. Press  
lower range.  
for a  
Processor Type  
DK14  
CO Line Range  
001~004  
Processor Type  
RCTUBA/BB  
RCTUC/D  
CO Line Range  
001~048  
DK40i  
001~012  
001~144  
RCTUA  
001~016  
RCTUE/F  
001~200  
Line  
Program  
LED ON  
LED OFF  
LED  
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20  
CPC on AR VM  
Calls and Voice  
Calls  
Detect  
DP  
Ignore  
DTMF  
10 PPS  
Ignore  
0
1
2
3
4
5
7
8
CO/DID/Tie Line  
Signal  
CO/DID/Tie Dial  
Pulse Rate  
(Pulse per sec.)  
20 PPS  
Detect  
AR Hold  
AR Timing  
Crossbar  
95 msec.  
ESS  
(electronic)  
450 msec.  
Tandem CO Line  
Connection with  
Station Dropout  
Enabled  
Enabled  
Not  
Enabled  
Forced Account  
Code  
Not  
Enabled  
Operation After CO  
Line Flash  
No DTMF  
receiver  
After Flash After Flash  
DTMF  
receiver  
3-44  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
System & Station  
Program 15 – Ground/Loop/Tie/DID Line Options  
Program 15 Overview  
This program specifies operational options on a line by line basis.  
Code 0: Automatic Release (AR) on Voice Mail or Voice Calls  
On loop start CO lines, some COs send the AR (Automatic Release) or CPC (Calling party  
Control) signal after an external party hangs up (typically 1~15 seconds) to disconnect a loop start  
line. An AR/CPC signal is a 95 or 450-millisecond open of the CO line loop. If the CO sends this  
signal after an external party hangs up and before the VM/auto attendant transfers a call, D tone  
will be sent to the voice mail port (Program 30, LED 15), releasing and clearing that port for  
another call. This feature is active on all voice calls.  
When a station is disconnected from a CO line call by the AR/CPC signal, its LCD will display  
“CO LINE HANG UP”. The line can be disconnected anytime by the AR/CPC signal during the  
“talk state” of a call. CO line calls disconnected by the AR/CPC signal will be represented on the  
SMDR report by a “ ” next to the CO line number. Code 0 does not apply to ground start lines,  
*
which automatically disconnect when the external party hangs up. The Voice Mail device must  
recognize the “D” tone as a disconnect signal.  
Important! This option cannot always be used because some COs may send unreliable AR/CPC  
signaling or no AR/CPC signaling for loop start lines.  
Enable AR/CPC-Hold detect on loop start lines only after testing that the CO sends  
the AR/CPC-Hold signal.  
Code 1: CO Outgoing Signal  
Each line can be independently assigned to have either Dial Pulse (DP) or Dual-tone Multi-  
frequency (DTMF) signaling on outgoing calls toward the Central Office.  
♦
If a line is set for DP operation, the 7RQHꢃ'LDOꢃ6HOHFWꢃbutton must be programmed on  
stations that must send DTMF tones over the lines.  
♦
If Tie or DID lines are programmed for dial pulse, turn LED 11 ON in Program 30 for each  
station port assigned to the DID or Tie line.  
Code 2: Line Pulse (DP) Rate  
If a line is assigned DP signaling, the rate can be either 20 or 10 pulses per second (PPS). Some  
Central Offices do not reliably accept 20 PPS.  
Code 3: Automatic Release (AR) From Hold/Transfer  
The Automatic Release (AR) signal sometimes called Calling Party Control (CPC) or Supervised  
Loop Control. This signal consists of a momentary open of the loop start CO line provided by  
some COs—the duration of the open depends on the CO. If a CO line is programmed (Programs  
15-0 and 15-3) to detect the AR/CPC signal, the DK system drops the line when the CO sends the  
signal (typically 1~15 seconds after the outside party hangs up). The system sends D Tone to voice  
mail ports to drop the ports when AR/CPC is detected.  
The Strata DK system disconnects a loop start CO line voice call and displays “CO LINE HANG  
UP” on the station’s LCD anytime the AR/CPC signal is detected and the CO line has Programs  
15-0 and 15-3 enabled.  
On loop start CO lines, some Central Offices send an AR/CPC signal. If the system CO line is on  
hold (or being transferred to another station or Auto Attendant port) when the AR/CPC signal is  
sent, it is automatically disconnected if this option is activated.  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
3-45  
System & Station  
Program 15 – Ground/Loop/Tie/DID Line Options  
Two-CO line DISA calls always release when AR/CPC is sent. DISA release via AR/CPC is not  
related to this program. CO line calls disconnected by the AR/CPC signal will be represented on  
the Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) report by a “ ” next to the CO line number. Code 3  
*
does not apply to ground start lines, which automatically disconnect when the external party hangs  
up. See Important! note in earlier paragraph on Code 0.  
DK424 only: If loop start lines are programmed to detect the AR/CPC-Hold signal, they do not  
remain on the attendant console loop keys when the attendant console sets up trunk-to-trunk  
connection. If programmed to ignore AR/CPC-Hold, they remain on the attendant console Hold  
loop keys.  
Important! Enable AR/CPC-Hold detect on loop start lines only after testing that the CO sends  
the AR/CPC-Hold signal.  
Code 4: Automatic Release (AR) Time  
AR/CPC signaling timing is different depending on the Central Office equipment. An assignment  
choice exists between Crossbar or ESS Central Offices.  
For more information on AR/CPC, see the preceding Code 0 and Code 3 sections.  
Code 5: Tandem Line Connection  
Once a Two-line Conference call is made by an electronic, digital or (in R3.2) standard telephone  
users or voice mail ports, the user or voice mail device may drop out of the conference and leave  
the two lines connected. The choice exists for each line that may have this capability. This option  
must be enabled to allow CO lines (ground/loop/Tie/DID) to be used for outgoing DISA, Call  
Forward External, and Tie/DID/DNIS External Network routing calls.  
With Release 3.2, a station which set up a tandem call and then dropped out can dial the pickup  
code (ꢄꢌꢄꢏꢉ) to retrieve the tandem call. If more than one tandem connection is set up by a  
station, ꢄꢌꢄꢏꢉ picks up the call with the lowest CO line as a priority.  
Prior to Release 3.2, standard telephones could set up tandem calls, but they could not drop out. If  
they tried to drop out, the call would ring back to the standard phone.  
Code 7: Forced Account Code (Verified or Non-verified)  
If the Forced Account Code feature is used, (see Program 30) a station user is required to enter an  
Account Code before a CO line call can be completed. A choice exists for each line.  
Code 8: Operation After CO Line Flash  
If a standard telephone user is on an existing CO line call and flashes the hookswitch on their  
telephone, a Dual-tone Multi-frequency (DTMF) receiver channel may or may not be connected,  
depending on this assignment. If the CO line is a rotary dial only type, the QRCU2, K4RCU3,  
K5RCU, K5RCU2, or RRCS must be seized after flash when dialing from DTMF standard  
telephones. The QRCU2, K5RCU, K5RCU2, K4RCU3 or RRCS will decode the dialed tones and  
send dial pulses to the line.  
3-46  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
System & Station  
Program *15 – CO Line Tenant Assignments  
Program *15 – CO Line Tenant Assignments  
Processor Type: DK14, DK40i, All RCTUs  
Program Type: System  
Initialized Default: All CO lines assigned to Tenant 1  
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ  
ꢀ
SELECT = CO Line Number  
TENANT = Assign the CO line to a tenant  
(see legend below)  
To add a line range, enter XXXꢀXXX (low port ꢀ high port).  
Processor Type  
DK14  
CO Line Range  
001~004  
Tenants Supported  
Processor Type  
CO Line Range  
001~048  
Tenants Supported  
2
2
2
RCTUBA/BB  
RCTUC/D  
RCTUE/F  
4
4
4
DK40i  
001~012  
001~144  
RCTUA  
001~016  
001~200  
Tenant Group  
Tenant Group  
Tenant Group  
CO  
Line  
CO  
Line  
CO  
Line  
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
Program 15 Overview  
ꢀ
A system CO line can be shared by more than one business tenant for the purpose of separating CO  
line ringing pickup and Night Transfer. Program ꢀ15 assigns CO line business tenants.  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
3-47  
System & Station  
Program 16 – Assign CO Line Groups (or Dial 9)  
Program 16 – Assign CO Line Groups (or Dial 9)  
Processor Type: DK14, DK40i, All RCTUs  
Program Type:  
System  
Initialized Default: All CO lines assigned to the Dial 9 group  
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ  
SELECT = CO Line Group (see legend)  
LED Buttons = CO line  
Only enter the last two digits of the CO line  
Specify CO line by setting LEDs as defined by the  
table below. When you are finished, all LEDs with  
an “X” should be lit.  
Group, or enter  
for Dial 9 group.  
to go back.  
Press to advance or  
To advance the CO line range, press  
located beneath the LCD. Press  
for a  
Processor Type  
DK14  
CO Line Range  
001~004  
CO Line Groups  
01~04  
Processor Type  
RCTUBA/BB  
RCTUC/D  
CO Line Range  
001~048  
CO Line Groups  
01~08  
DK40i  
001~012  
01~08  
001~144  
01~16  
RCTUA  
001~016  
01~08  
RCTUE/F  
001~200  
01~16  
CO Line Groups  
Line  
LED  
Dial  
9(00)  
Number  
20  
19  
18  
17  
16  
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
10  
09  
08  
07  
06  
05  
04  
03  
02  
01  
3-48  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
System & Station  
Program 16 – Assign CO Line Groups (or Dial 9)  
Program 16 Overview  
Use Program 16 to assign each CO line to a CO line group or a general “dial 9” group. A general  
group for outside calling is available with a “dial 9” access code as the initialized state for all lines.  
Lines can be accessed with a dialing code instead of with a CO /LQH button. This is useful for  
WATS lines or other facilities, and is heavily used in Least Cost Routing and Pooled Line Button  
assignments.  
Do not attempt to assign a line to more than one group. A line need not be assigned to a group. If  
lines are not used, they should be taken out of all groups, including the “dial 9” group. Automatic  
Busy Redial (ABR) will not function if unconnected (unused) lines are assigned to a line group.  
After programming, press:  
♦
♦
♦
9RO▲ to turn all LEDs ON  
9RO ▼ to turn all LEDs OFF  
0RGH and CO line number, then ꢄ to display and advance  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
3-49  
System & Station  
Program 17 – DID/Tie Line Options  
Program 17 – DID/Tie Line Options  
Processor Type: DK40i, All RCTUs  
Program Type:  
System  
Initialized Default: LED 01/02 OFF, LED 03/04 ON  
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ  
Enter Line No. that will be DID or Tie line.  
Light LED Buttons 01~08 as noted in table below  
To add a port range, enter XXXꢀXXX (low port ꢀ high  
Line Numbers:  
LED/Button  
X
LED ON  
LED OFF  
09, 10, and  
14~20  
Not used at this time.  
08  
07  
06  
05  
DID/Tie line DTMF digits with  
tones  
DID/Tie line DTMF digits without  
tones  
ꢀ
ꢀ
DID/Tie line receives ANI and routes per Programs 71 and 72  
DID/Tie line does not receives ANI (DID Program *09 and  
Tie Program 04)  
Telephone LCD priority is ANI  
Telephone LCD priority is DNIS  
DID/Tie line routes per DNIS assignments:  
(Programs 71 and 72)  
DID/Tie line routes per Non-DNIS assignments:  
(DID Program *09 and Tie Program 04)  
04  
03  
02  
DID/Tie no second dial tone  
DID line Auto Camp-on busy  
Wink Start for Tie or DID  
DID/Tie second dial tone  
DID line no Camp-on busy  
Immediate Start for Tie or DID  
Page and Voice Announce on incoming Tie line Page access for No Page and Voice Announce on incoming Tie line No  
Tie/DID DNIS lines Page access for Tie/DID DNIS lines  
01  
Program 17 Overview  
Program 17 assigns lines for Tie and DID operation.  
Important! When normal Tie/DID lines are configured with Program 71 and 72 DNIS  
assignments, turn LED 05 ON and LED 06, 07 and 08 OFF for those lines - then  
program the lines as required in Programs 71 and 72.  
Notes  
●
Each REMU, PEMU, RDDU or TDDU PCB reduces the station port capacity by four station  
ports, each RDTU Tie/DID line channel reduces the system’s station port capacity by one port.  
●
Always install Tie or DID line PCBs in slot numbers that are higher than station PCB slot  
numbers (see Chapter 2 – DK40i Configuration in the Strata DK Installation and Maintenance  
Manual).  
●
●
Incoming Tie line calls camp-on only if Program 71 assignments are used.  
Copy one record sheet for each group of Tie/DID lines that have different Program 17  
parameters.  
LEDs 09, 10 and 14~20  
Not used at this time.  
3-50  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
System & Station  
Program 17 – DID/Tie Line Options  
LED 08: ANI/DNIS Digit Format  
Most DID/Tie lines with ANI/DNIS digit format include tone with digits (LED 08 ON). One  
ꢀ
exception, as of this writing, Sprint provides DNIS without ANI and does not include tone with  
digits - in this case LED 08 should be turned OFF.  
ꢀ
Examples of this signal format are: ANI digits DNIS digits and DNIS digits .  
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
DID/Tie lines with normal digit format does not include tone with digits (LED 08 OFF).  
ꢃꢀ  
LED 07: ANI Receive Line Option  
If a Tie or DID line should receive ANI information, LED 07 should be turned ON for that line. If  
the Tie/DID line receives ANI digits only (no DNIS digits) LED 06, 07, and 08 should be ON and  
LED 05 should be OFF. See Program 71-1, address 199, 299, and 499 for Tie/DID ANI only call  
routing assignments. If a line receives ANI and DNIS, LEDs 05, 07 and 08 must be ON; LED 06  
can be ON or OFF.  
LED 06: Telephone LCD Display Option ANI or DNIS  
Telephone LCDs can display ANI or DNIS information as a priority when Tie/DID lines or ISDN  
channels receive both ANI and DNIS digits. This system-wide option determines if ANI or DNIS  
information should display on telephone LCDs when Tie/DID lines provide both ANI and DNIS  
information together on incoming calls.  
It is not possible to display both ANI and DNIS information simultaneously on the same call but  
the 3DJH button on the LCD telephone can be used to toggle between the ANI and DNIS  
information when an ANI/DNIS line is ringing the telephone. After answering the call, it is not  
possible to toggle the LCD display between ANI and DNIS  
LED 05: DNIS Line/Non-DNIS Line  
This option assigns Tie and/or DID lines to follow Dialed Number Identification Service (DNIS)  
Program assignments.  
Turn LED 05 ON for DNIS only or ANI with DNIS lines.  
Turn LED 05 OFF and LED 07 and 08 ON for ANI only lines which should route per the last  
address assignment in Program 71.  
Important! Any Tie or DID line can be assigned to use the features of Program 71 and 72. If  
normal Tie/DID lines are assigned Name Tags, External Routing, selective Day/  
Day2/Night Routing: In Program 17, Turn LED 05 ON and turn LED 06, 07 and 08  
OFF for those lines - then program the lines as required in Program 71 and 72. In  
this case, Program 09 (DID) and Program 04 (Tie) do not apply to these lines.  
*
LED 04: DID/Tie Second Dial Tone Option  
If the second dial tone option is selected (LED 04 OFF), callers calling in on the DK DID or Tie  
lines will hear dial tone after accessing the DK Tie/DID lines. Second Dial tone will not be sent to  
callers if this option is not selected (LED 04 ON).  
Important! Normally, Tie lines require a second dial tone (LED 04 OFF) and DID lines should  
not return a second dial tone (LED 04 ON). The initialized data is set for DID lines  
so this data must be changed when installing Tie lines if second dial tone is  
required.  
LED 03/04 applies to REMU, PEMU, TDDU, RDDU and RDTU DIDs and Tie lines.  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
3-51  
System & Station  
Program 17 – DID/Tie Line Options  
LED 03: DID Camp-on/Busy  
Turn LED 03 ON if DID line callers should hear ringback tone and camp on to busy stations when  
calling busy stations. Turn LED 03 OFF if the DID callers should hear busy tone when calling  
busy stations. Analog Tie lines will not camp-on to busy stations.  
It is recommended to turn LED 03 ON for all DID lines. To provide Camp-on-busy over RDTU  
Tie line calls, configure Tie lines as DID lines in Program ꢀ41-2; LED 03 must be on for the lines  
in Program 17. This is allowed because Tie and DID signalling is the same for Tie and DID T1  
lines.  
Also, both Tie and DID lines that route per Program 71 DNIS assignments will camp on busy if  
LED 03 is turned ON. Tie lines that route per Program 04 will not camp on busy.  
LED 03/04 applies to REMU, PEMU, TDDU, RDDU and RDTU DIDs and Tie lines.  
LED 02: Wink/Immediate  
Applies to REMU, TDDU, PEMU, and RDDU Tie/DID lines only. Select Wink Start or  
Immediate Start for the entered Tie or DID line. See Program ꢀ41-2 for RDTU Tie/DID Wink/  
Immediate Start assignments or RDTU T1 Tie lines configured as DID lines in Program ꢀ42-1.  
LED 01: Page/Handsfree Answerback  
Allows (LED 01 ON) or denies (LED 01 OFF) the following features when connecting the Strata  
DK to another Key/PBX. LED 01 applies to both Tie and DID lines when programmed with  
Program 71 assignments.  
If using a private network, then turn LED 01 ON to allow Page access on Tie and DID lines  
programmed with DNIS assignments in Program 71 (Code #039).  
Per FCC regulations, public telephone network, Tie, DID, or DNIS lines must always be restricted  
(LED 01 OFF) from Page and Handsfree Answerback.  
♦
♦
♦
Callers on the far-end Key/PBX system can access the Strata DK system external and/or  
Station All Call Page over DID and/or Tie lines programmed with DNIS assignment (Program  
10-2, LED 15 and Program 71-1, Code #039) for DID/Tie DNIS assignments. Tie lines only  
that route per Program 04 can dial any Page Zone or Page Group access code.  
Callers on the far-end Key/PBX system can make voice announce calls to stations on the near-  
end Strata DK. This option applies only Tie lines (not DID lines) that route per Program 04 or  
Program 71. You must program the Strata DK as “Voice First” in Program 10-1, LED 01; or,  
the far end can dial “1” after dialing the [DN] on tone first systems.  
Callers on the far-end Strata DK can answer Tie lines calls (not DID lines) from the Far End  
Key/PBX in the hands free mode. You must program the near-end Strata DK as “Voice First”  
in Program 10-1, LED 01, or the far-end caller must dial “1” to switch from ring to voice  
signaling.  
3-52  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
System & Station  
Program *17 – DID Intercept Port Number (Vacant or Wrong Number)  
Program *17 – DID Intercept Port Number (Vacant or  
Wrong Number)  
Processor Type: DK40i, All RCTUs  
Program Type:  
System  
Initialized Default: No data  
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ  
ꢀ
SELECT = DID Line Number  
HUNT TO = Enter Intercept Station  
Logical Port No.  
Intercept does not apply to Tie line calls.  
LED Button 01 enters blanks.  
To add a port range, enter XXXꢀXXX (low port ꢀ high port).  
Processor Type  
DK14  
DID Line Range  
N/A  
Intercept Port Range  
N/A  
Processor Type  
DID Line Range  
001~048  
Intercept Port Range  
RCTUBA/BB  
RCTUC/D  
RCTUE/F  
000~079  
000~239  
000~335  
DK40i  
001~012  
001~016  
000~027  
001~144  
RCTUA, RCTUB  
000~031  
001~200  
Intercept Port  
Number  
Intercept Port  
Number  
Intercept Port  
Number  
DID LIne Number  
DID LIne Number  
DID LIne Number  
Program *17 Overview  
DID and/or DNIS calls in which callers have dialed a vacant or invalid port can be routed to  
intercept ports assigned with this program. Each DID and/or DNIS line can have its own intercept  
port. In all cases, Intercept does not apply to Tie lines.  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
3-53  
System & Station  
Program 19 – Alternate Background Music Source Slot Assignment  
Program 19 – Alternate Background Music Source Slot  
Assignment  
Processor Type: DK40i, All RCTUs (not used for DK14. See Program 10-2, LED 10)  
Program Type:  
System  
Initialized Default: Slot 11  
more codes  
Turn System Power OFF (5 sec) then ON  
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ  
...or  
SELECT = 1  
Run Program 91-2  
Enter the Slot Number (11~78)  
Program 19 Overview  
The PCB connected to the alternate BGM source can be in any slot. Use this program to designate  
that slot. LEDs 09 and 10 in Program 10-2 should be OFF if the source is connected to a QSTU2,  
KSTU2, PSTU, RSTU, RSTU2, or RDSU. (Only circuit 2 of these PCBs can support the BGM  
source.)  
The alternate BGM source sends BGM to the external speakers and telephone (digital and  
electronic) speakers. If an alternate BGM source is used, the Music-on-Hold (MOH) source  
connected to an RCTU will continue to play for lines and stations that are on hold.  
Important! If the alternate BGM source is not connected to a PEKU, PESU or PSTU, RSTU,  
RSTU2, or RDSU, assign Slot 11 as data in Program 19. If BGM is connected to  
circuit 2 of QSTU2 or KSTU2, assign slot 13 as data in Program 19. This ensures  
that all PSTU or RSTU ports function normally. Digital / electronic telephones or  
RSIU PCBs installed in Slot 11 are not affected by this assignment.  
PEKU/PESU  
If using a PEKU, wire the BGM source to circuit 3 and turn LED 09 ON (Program 10-2) to enable  
the BGM connection.  
If using a PESU, wire the BGM source to circuit 8 and turn LED 10 ON (Program 10-2) to enable  
the BGM connection.  
QSTU2, KSTU2, RSTU, RSTU2, RDSU, or PSTU  
If using a QSTU2, KSTU2, RSTU, RSTU2, RDSU, or PSTU, wire the BGM source to circuit 2  
and turn LED 09 and 10 OFF (Program 10-2). Also, an isolation transformer may be required if  
connecting the source these PCBs. See Chapter 10 – Peripheral Installation in the Installation and  
Maintenance Manual for isolation transformer installation instructions.  
PDKU  
BGM cannot be connected to the PDKU.  
3-54  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
System & Station  
Program 20 – Computer and Data Interface Unit Configuration  
Program 20 – Computer and Data Interface Unit  
Configuration  
Processor Type: DK14, DK40i, All RCTUs  
Program Type: Station  
Initialized Default: LED 17 ON, all others OFF  
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ  
SELECT = PDKU/PDSU Station Logical Port  
Number that is connected to PDIIU-DS or to  
DKT with PDIU-DI or RPCI-DI  
LED Buttons 01~06 define data port type;  
LED Buttons 17~20 assign data port to  
security group.  
Processor Type  
DK14  
Port Range  
000~009  
000~027  
000~031  
Processor Type  
RCTUBA/BB  
RCTUC/D  
Port Range  
000~079  
000~239  
000~335  
DK40i  
RCTUA  
RCTUE/F  
DK40i Base, PDKU, RDSU, KCDU Digital Port Number  
LED  
X
LED ON  
LED OFF  
20  
19  
Data Security Group 4  
Data Security Group 2  
Data Security Group 3  
Data Security Group 1  
Not Included  
Not Included  
Not Included  
Not Included  
18  
17  
12~16  
11  
Not Used  
Not Used  
RPCI-DI DNIS Sent  
RPCI-DI DNIS Not Sent  
10  
RPCI-DI Caller ID/ANI Sent  
RPCI-DI Caller ID/ANI Not Sent  
07~09  
06  
DTR Pulse with Data Release  
Auto Pause Behind PBX  
No DTR Pulse  
05  
No Auto Pause  
04  
PDIU-DS Connected  
PDIU-DI/RPCI-DI Connected  
PDIU-DS to other type DCE or DTE  
AT Commands Only  
03  
PDIU-DS to Modem Connection  
AT Commands and Result Codes  
PDIU-DS or RPCI Connected  
02  
01  
No PDIU-DS or RPCI Connected  
Program 20 Overview  
Program 20 identifies the digital station ports connected to RPCI/PDIU and the type of PDIU  
connected.  
RPCIs have two modes: the Data Switching (DIU mode) and the Application Program Interface  
(or TAPI) mode. In the DIU mode, the RPCI operates as a PDIU-DI (Integrated Data Interface  
Unit); all Program 20 options apply except LED 10 and LED 11 - which only apply to the RPCI in  
TAPI mode. In TAPI mode the RPCI does not require Program 20 assignments, except for LED 10  
and/or LED 11 if ANI, DNIS, and/or Caller ID must be sent from the RPCI-DI to the PC to which  
it is connected.  
Notes  
●
RPCIs and PDIUs cannot be connected to PDKU1 circuit 8, but can be connected to all eight  
PDKU2 circuits. RPCIs and PDIUs that support data switching cannot be connected to PDKU  
in all slots. See DK424 Chapter 4 – DK424 Configuration, Tables 4-4 and 4-5. DK40i slots 17  
and 18 do not support data switching.  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
3-55  
System & Station  
Program 20 – Computer and Data Interface Unit Configuration  
●
If a PC is connected to the RPCI or PDIU, set the communication mode escape sequences in  
the PC communication software “Modem Initialization” character sequence. This ensures the  
escape sequence is restored in case the RPCI Telephone or PDIU is unplugged temporarily.  
●
RPCI and PDIU-DS units that mostly do data switching, can be connected to ports associated  
with PDKU1 circuits 1~7 only. All PDKU2 circuits, 1~8, support RPCIs and PDIUs. RDSU  
digital circuits 5~8 support RPCI and PDIUs.  
●
●
Each PDIU-DS requires a separate digital port.  
If a PDIU-DS (Stand-alone Data Interface Unit) is connected to a modem, refer to Modem  
Setup Recommendations in the PC/Data Communication section of Chapter 10 – Peripheral  
Installation of the Installation and Maintenance Manual.  
●
See Chapter 10 – Peripheral Installation for additional hardware information and Chapter 2 –  
DK40i Configuration and Chapter 4 – DK424 Configuration to identify which slots can  
support RPCIs and DIUs.  
Typical LED Settings for Program 20  
RCPI-DI/PDIU-DI Connected to a terminal or personal computer—LEDs 01, 02, 05, and 17 ON;  
all other LEDs OFF.  
PDIU-DS Connected to a Printer: LEDs 01, 04, and 17 ON; all other LEDs OFF.  
PDIU-DS Connected to a Modem: LEDs 01, 02, 03, 04, and 17 ON; all other LEDs OFF.  
LEDs 17~20: Data Security Groups  
Data security groups can be set to block data calls between RPCI/DIUs. RPCI/DIUs can only  
make data calls to RPCI/DIUs in the same security group. LEDs 17~20 assign the RPCI/DIU to  
the appropriate security group: light LED 17 for Group 1; LED 18, for Group 3; LED 19, for  
Group 2; and LED 20, for Group 4. If an RPCI-DI is used in the Application Program Interface  
(TAPI) mode only, and not the Data Switching mode, this option is not applicable.  
LEDs 12~16  
Not used at this time.  
LED 11: RPCI-DI DNIS to PC Option  
DNIS Number or NAME tag information that is sent to a telephone can be sent, or blocked, from  
the telephone’s RPCI-DI, RS-232 output. If DNIS information should be sent from the  
Telephone’s RPCI-DI to the Personal Computer to which it is connected, turn LED 11 ON; if this  
information should not be sent to the PC, turn LED 11 OFF.  
LED 10: RPCI-DI Caller ID and ANI to PC Option  
Caller ID and ANI information that is sent to a telephone can be sent, or blocked, from the  
telephone’s RPCI-DI, RS-232 output. If Caller ID and ANI information should be sent from the  
RPCI-DI to the Personal Computer to which it is connected, turn LED 10 ON; if this information  
should not be sent to the PC, turn LED 10 OFF. This option does not apply to PDIUs because they  
can not send ANI, Caller ID, or DNIS numbers.  
LEDs 07~09  
Not used at this time.  
3-56  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
System & Station  
Program 20 – Computer and Data Interface Unit Configuration  
LED 06: DTR Pulse  
LED 06 should always be OFF.  
LED 06 should be off for all PDIU-DS, RPCI-DIs, or PDIU-DIs. (Refer to Chapter 10 – Peripheral  
Installation for more PDIU-DS/modem pool information).  
LED 05: Auto Pause Behind PBX  
Turn LED 05 ON to enable Auto Pause Behind PBX. This inserts the Auto Pause after a Centrex  
or PBX access code is dialed by a DIU or RPCI. A CO line must be assigned in Program 42-0, and  
must have an access code assigned in Program 42 (1~8). Pause time is determined by Program 12-  
3. Also, when Auto Pause Behind PBX is enabled, the Auto Pause is inserted after the CO line  
access code is dialed (by the DIU).  
If the system CO lines are connected to a PBX, Centrex, or a Central Office that is slow to return  
dial tone after seizure, enable Auto Pause Behind PBX to insert a pause before and after the PBX  
or Centrex access code is dialed by the DIU or RPCI. Also, light LED 05 to automatically insert a  
pause before network telephone numbers are autodialed by DIUs or RPCIs.  
LED 04: PDIU-DS or PDIU-DI/RPCI-DI Connection  
Set LED 04 ON if a PDIU-DS is connected to the digital port.  
Important! If LED 04 is turned on for a telephone port, that telephone cannot be called.  
Set LED 04 OFF if a PDIU-DI or RPCI-DI or any type of telephone is connected. In this case, the  
digital telephone supporting this PCB may require the Data Call (DATA), Data Release (DRLS),  
and/or Modem buttons assigned in Program 39. Also, if an RPCI-DI is used in the Application  
Program Interface (TAPI) mode only, and not the Data Switching mode, set LED 04 OFF.  
Note The pause length is set in Program 12-3, and lines behind PBX/Centrex are assigned in  
Programs 42-0 and 42-1~8.  
LED 03: RPCI/PDIU-DS to Modem Connection  
If a PDIU-DS is connected to the digital port, identify whether the RPCI/PDIU-DS is connected to  
a modem (LED 03 ON) or not connected to a modem (LED 03 OFF). If not connected to a  
modem, the connected device can be a DCE or DTE. This feature is not necessary for RPCI/PDIU-  
DIs, because they are not normally connected to modems.  
LED 02: AT Commands and Result Codes  
Enable this feature (LED 02 ON) if the RPCI or DIU must respond to AT commands and return  
result codes in the Data Switching command mode. RPCI/DIU “AT” dialing commands and  
“result” codes are listed in the RPCI-DI and the Data Interface User Guide.  
If the DIU is connected to a modem, LED 02 should be ON. If the RPCI/DIU is connected to a  
printer, LED 02 should be OFF. If an RPCI-DI is used in the Application Program Interface (TAPI)  
mode only, and not the Data Switching mode, this option is not applicable.  
If the feature is not enabled (LED 02 OFF), the RPCI/DIU only responds to AT dialing commands  
(ATDT, ATD, and ATDD) and does not return result codes. If the DIU is connected to a terminal or  
a personal computer with communication software, LED 02 should be ON  
LED 01: RPCI and PDIU Connection  
Enable this feature (LED 01 ON) if there is a PDIU-DI, RPCI-DI or PDIU-DS connected to the  
digital port. Each RPCI-DI or PDIU-DI uses the same digital port as the telephone it is attached to.  
This feature is not applicable if an RPCI-DI is used only in TAPI, and not DIU mode.  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
3-57  
System & Station  
Program 21 – Modem Pool Port Assignments  
Program 21 – Modem Pool Port Assignments  
Processor Type: DK14, DK40i, All RCTUs  
Program Type:  
Station  
Initialized Default: Blank  
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ  
Digital Station Logical Port  
Number (see notes below)  
Standard Telephone Modem Port  
Number (see notes below)  
Processor Type  
Port Range  
008~009  
008~027  
008~031  
Processor Type  
RCTUBA/BB  
RCTUC/D  
Port Range  
DK14  
DK40i  
008~079  
008~239  
008~335  
RCTUA  
RCTUE/F  
Logical Port No.  
Modem Port No.  
Assignment 1  
Assignment 2  
Assignment 3  
Assignment 4  
Assignment 5  
Assignment 6  
Assignment 7  
Assignment 8  
Assignment 9  
Assignment 10  
Notes  
●
Digital Ports include: DK14 KSU, DK40i Base KSU, QCDU2, KCDU, PDKU2, and RDSU  
digital ports.  
●
Standard telephone ports include: QSTU2, KSTU2, RSTU2, RDSU, PSTU, and PESU  
standard telephone ports.  
3-58  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
System & Station  
Program 21 – Modem Pool Port Assignments  
Program 21 Overview  
This program assigns modems to the system modem pool. Program 21 identifies modems  
connected to standard telephone ports (line side of modem) and digital/PDIU-DS ports  
(RS-232 side of modem). With data security groups (Program 20, LEDs 17~20) and the call the  
blocking feature (Program 31, LED 04), modem access can be denied or allowed to data users.  
Notes  
●
PDIU-DS must be installed on PDKUs in slots designated for DIU operation. (See Chapter 2 –  
DK40i Configuration and Chapter 4 – DK424 Configuration.)  
●
When modems are connected to standard telephone ports (PSTU, RSTU, RSTU2, PESU,  
RDSU/RSTS, KSTU2, QSTU2) the Executive/ Privacy Override blocking feature (Program  
31, LED 18) should be enabled for the modem RSTU, RSTU2, PSTU, PESU, RDSU, KSTU2  
and QSTU2 ports for data security. The LED 18 feature should be disabled to enable callers to  
switch from voice to data, or vice versa.  
●
●
●
Digital telephones with RCPI-DIs or PDIU-DIs that must access modems from a pool require  
a 0RGHP button assigned in Program 39.  
PDIU-DS ports that are connected to modems in the modem pool should be set with LEDs 01,  
02, 03, and 04 in Program 20.  
If a modem connected to PDIU-DS is connected to a telephone network line instead of a  
standard telephone station port, Program 21 should not be used.  
●
●
Use Program 22 to assign modem/PDIU-DS stations to hunt sequences.  
DIUs can be connected to any ports associated with PDKU circuits, except for ports associated  
with circuit 8 on a PDKU1. All PDKU2, KCDU, and QCDU circuits can support DIUs. DIUs  
can also be connected to any digital circuit in the DK14 or DK40i KSU.  
●
DIUs can be connected to ports associated with PDKU1 circuits 1~7 only. All PDKU2  
circuits, 1~8, can support RPCI/DIUs. RDSU circuits 5~8 can support RPCI/DIUs.  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
3-59  
System & Station  
Program 22 – RPCI and DIU Station Hunting for Data Calls  
Program 22 – RPCI and DIU Station Hunting for Data  
Calls  
Processor Type: DK14, DK40i, All RCTU’s  
Program Type:  
Station  
Initialized Default: Does not assign “hunt-to” ports to any port  
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ  
SELECT = Port Number (see legend below)  
HUNT TO = (see legend below)  
Enter the RPCI/DIU digital port number of the “hunt-from” station.  
Enter the “hunt-to” RPCI/DIU digital port number.  
Enter the port number(s) to which class of service must be assigned.  
To add a port range, enter XXXꢀXXX (low port ꢀ high port).  
LED Button 01 deletes a digit from the “hunt-to”  
port.  
Processor Type  
DK14  
Port Range  
000~007  
000~027  
000~031  
Processor Type  
Port Range  
000~079  
000~239  
000~335  
RCTUBA/BB  
RCTUC/D  
RCTUE/F  
DK40i  
RCTUA  
Hunt From  
Port  
Hunt To  
Port  
Hunt From  
Port  
Hunt To  
Port  
Hunt From  
Port  
Hunt To  
Port  
Hunt From  
Port  
Hunt To  
Port  
Program 22 Overview  
This program assigns computer and Data Interface Unit (DIU) station hunt ports for data calls. If a  
RPCI/PDIU station (printer, modem, etc.) is busy, data station hunting allows the data call to hunt  
to an alternate RPCI/PDIU station assigned in this program. If the hunted RPCI/PDIU station is  
busy, the system will ring the next “hunt-to” station, and so on. If all RPCI/PDIU stations in the  
“hunt-to” sequence are busy, then the data caller will receive a busy tone. Toshiba recommends  
that all PDIU-DS station ports grouped in a modem pooling or printer pooling/server configuration  
be placed into a hunt-sequence arrangement with Program 22.  
Notes  
●
Program 22 applies to RCPI-DI, PDIU-DI and PDIU-DS data calls, not telephone station  
voice calls. If programming an RCPI-DI or PDIU-DI station, use the associated DKT logical  
port number; the PDIU-DS is programmed using its own unique port number.  
●
When a PDIU-DS is connected to a modem(s) assigned to the system modem pool in Program  
21, modem hunting is automatic when the user presses the 'DWDꢃ&DOO button to transfer a line  
call to a modem. However, if the user dials the modem's PDIU-DS's station number, modem  
hunting follows the hunt sequence specified in Program 22.  
3-60  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
System & Station  
Program 23 – Built-in Auto Attendant (AA) Primary Announcement Assignments  
Program 23 – Built-in Auto Attendant (AA) Primary  
Announcement Assignments  
Processor Type: DK14, DK40i, All RCTUs  
Program Type:  
System  
Initialized Default: No ports assigned  
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ  
SELECT = 1~4  
AUTO ATT 1 NO. = Port  
Select the Auto Attendant  
device (digital announcer).  
Enter the standard station logical port  
number to which the device will be assigned.  
Processor Type  
Port Range  
008~009  
008~027  
008~031  
Processor Type  
RCTUBA/BB  
RCTUC/D  
Port Range  
008~079  
008~239  
008~335  
DK14  
DK40i  
RCTUA  
RCTUE/F  
Announcement Device  
Port Number  
1
2
3
4
Program 24 – Built-in AA Secondary Announcement  
Assignments  
Processor Type: DK14, DK40i, All RCTUs  
Program Type:  
System  
Initialized Default: No ports assigned  
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ  
SELECT = 1~4  
AUTO ATT 2 NO. = Port  
Select the Auto Attendant  
device (digital announcer).  
Enter the standard station logical port  
number to which the device will be assigned.  
Note See Program 23 legend for port ranges.  
Announcement Device  
Port Number  
1
2
3
4
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
3-61  
System & Station  
Program 25-1 – Built-in AA Incoming Call Overflow Time  
Programs 23 and 24 Overview  
Programs 23 and 24 assign customer-supplied Auto Attendant announcement devices (digital  
announcers) to standard telephone ports (QSTU2, KSTU2, RSTU, RSTU2, PSTU, PESU, RDSU/  
RSTS). Use Program 23 to assign devices that deliver primary announcements, dialing options and  
greetings heard when callers first call in; also, devices that deliver secondary announcements.  
Use Program 24 to offer options to unanswered calls routed back to the Auto Attendant. Up to  
eight devices can be connected to a system. See Primary and secondary announcements below:  
Primary  
Announcements  
Secondary  
Announcements  
Primary  
Announcements  
Secondary  
Announcements  
Processor Type  
Processor Type  
DK14  
DK40i  
1
4
4
1
4
4
RCTUBA/BB  
RCTUC/D  
RCTUE/F  
4
4
4
4
4
4
RCTUA, RCTUB  
Any combination is allowed within the maximum limitations. For example, three primary  
announcements and one secondary announcement are allowed.  
Ports assigned in Programs 23 and 24 should never be assigned with External Auto Attendant  
voice mail options in other programs (30, 31, 81~89, etc.)  
To allow the built-in Auto Attendant programs to function:  
DK424: the RKYS (1, 2, 3, or 4) and RRCS must be installed on the RCTU PCB;  
DK40i: the KKYS must be installed on the K5RCU;  
DK14: the QKYS, and QRCU3 must be installed in the DK14 KSU.  
Overflow stations and delay ring operation is assigned in Programs 81~89.  
Program 25-1 – Built-in AA Incoming Call Overflow  
Time  
Processor Type: DK14, DK40i, All RCTUs  
Program Type:  
System  
Initialized Default: 20 seconds before overflow  
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ  
SELECT = 1  
AATT TIME = Seconds before overflowing  
Enter the number of seconds, 12~24.  
Program 25-1 Overview  
This program sets the time it takes an unanswered incoming Auto Attendant call to overflow to a  
preassigned station(s). The time can be anywhere from 12 to 24 seconds—the default is 20  
seconds. The overflow station or group of stations is assigned in Programs 81~89.  
This overflow time applies to the overflow of incoming Auto Attendant calls to normal CO line  
ringing if either a primary announcement device or K5RCU, K5RCU2, K4RCU3/RRCS (DTMF)  
circuit is not available.  
Note Auto Attendant will not answer when all of the RRCS, K5RCU, K5RCU2, K4RCU3 or  
QRCU2 circuits or primary announcements are busy.  
3-62  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
System & Station  
Program 26 – Built-in AA Camp-on Busy Time  
Program 26 – Built-in AA Camp-on Busy Time  
Processor Type: DK14, DK40i, All RCTUs  
Program Type: Station  
Initialized Default: Assigns an AA Camp-on-Busy Time of 016 seconds to all ports  
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ  
SELECT = Port Number  
CAMP-ON TIME = AA Camp-on-Busy Time  
Enter the number of the called Station  
Logical port that needs a Camp-on  
Busy time assigned.  
Enter the time in seconds (1~3 digits). The range is  
011~999 seconds (16.65 minutes).  
To add a port range, enter XXXꢀXXX  
(low port ꢀ high port).  
Processor Type  
DK14  
[PDN] Port Range  
000~009  
Processor Type  
RCTUBA/BB  
RCTUC/D  
[PDN] Port Range  
000~079  
DK40i  
000~027  
000~239  
RCTUA  
000~031  
RCTUE/F  
000~335  
Camp-on  
Time  
Camp-on  
Time  
Camp-on  
Time  
Camp-on  
Time  
Port  
Port  
Port  
Port  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
3-63  
System & Station  
Program 26 – Built-in AA Camp-on Busy Time  
Program 26 Overview  
Note This program only applies to Auto Attendant (built-in) calls to busy or ringing stations; it  
does not apply to ring transfer camp-on time from stations or customer-supplied Auto  
Attendant devices; see Program 37 Ring Transfer (Camp-on) recall time.  
This program establishes the time it takes for unanswered Auto Attendant calls camped-on to busy  
or ringing [DNs] to be routed to other destinations. The time, which is set for the “camped-on to  
station”, can be set from 011 seconds to 999 seconds. Ring/No Answer call time to idle stations is  
fixed at 16 seconds unless Call Forward/No Answer is set at the called station.  
The destination that the call can be rerouted to depends on the Auto Attendant application. In Auto  
Attendant applications that use just primary announcement devices, the destination is set in  
Program 10-3, and can be either back to the primary announcement or the normal ringing pattern  
of the line that the call came in on (Programs 81, 84, or 87 for telephone ringing and ꢀ81, ꢀ82, ꢀ83  
for [DN] flash. Also see Program 10-3, LEDs 15 and 16 for disconnect time options. In  
applications that use secondary announcement devices in addition to primary ones, the rerouted  
calls are automatically sent to secondary announcement devices.  
This program timer sets the time that Auto Attendant calls to a busy or ringing station will camp-  
on before routing back to a primary announcement or to the calling CO line’s normal ring pattern.  
(See Program 10-3, LED 3 for routing option after Camp-on-Busy). The time set in this program  
applies to the called station.  
If CF-NA or CF-B/NA is set on a Telephone, the CF-N/A ring timer will have priority over this  
16-sec. camp-on-busy timer so the telephone will ring for the duration of the CF-NA timer. Auto  
Attendant calls to a ring-no-answer or busy station will only forward to one destination, if the CF  
destination station has call forward set, the call will camp-on for 16-seconds and then route per the  
Auto Attendant flow diagram—the call will not forward a second time to another destination.  
3-64  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
System & Station  
Program 27 – DKT Handset/Headset Receiver Volume Level  
Program 27 – DKT Handset/Headset Receiver Volume  
Level  
Processor Type: DK14, DK40i, All RCTUs  
Program Type:  
Station  
Initialized Default: VR=2  
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ  
Digital Telephone Logical Port Number  
VR = Enter volume level 1~4  
Default volume level is 2.  
Total DKT Volume Range (VR)  
Lowest  
Volume  
Highest  
Volume  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Set VR 1~4 for initial off-hook handset receiver volume level;  
VR resets to programmed level (1~4) after each call (on-  
hook/off-hook). Each level is equivalent to a 2dB change.  
Processor Type  
DK14  
Port Range  
000~007  
000~027  
000~031  
Processor Type  
RCTUBA/BB  
RCTUC/D  
Port Range  
000~079  
000~239  
000~335  
DK40i  
RCTUA  
RCTUE/F  
Port  
VR Level  
Port  
VR Level  
Port  
VR Level  
Port  
VR Level  
Program 27 Overview  
This program sets the initial off-hook volume level for each digital telephone handset and/or  
headset. This level can be changed with the digital telephone’s volume control button while the  
handset or headset is off-hook, but it will return to the default level set in this program after the  
handset is placed on-hook. The volume level range for digital telephone handsets is 0~8, with 0 as  
the lowest volume. Anytime a handset is off-hook, the station user can adjust the volume level  
anywhere between 0~8. The level setting established in this program, however, can only be from  
1~4.  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
3-65  
System & Station  
Program 28 – DSS Console/Attendant Telephone Assignments  
Program 28 – DSS Console/Attendant Telephone  
Assignments  
Processor Type: DK40i, All RCTUs  
Program Type:  
Station  
Initialized Default: Assigns Console #1 to Attendant Telephone #1;  
Console #2 to Attendant Telephone #2; etc.  
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ  
SELECT = 1~8  
DSS ATT = 1~8  
Enter the DSS console number.  
Enter the attendant digital or electronic telephone  
number.  
Digital DSS consoles (DDSS) should  
be assigned to digital telephones, and  
electronic consoles (HDSS) should be  
assigned to electronic telephones.  
Processor  
DK14  
DSS Consoles  
HDSS Consoles  
0
0
DK40i  
1~3  
1~3  
1~4  
1~8  
1~8  
1~3  
1~3  
1~4  
1~8  
1~8  
RCTUA  
RCTUBA/BB  
RCTUC/D  
RCTUE/F  
DDSS PDKU/HDSS PEKU PCBs  
(Lowest to Highest)  
DDSS/HDSS  
Console Number  
Attendant DKT/EKT Number (1~8)  
Low Slot Number:  
Slot Number:  
Slot Number:  
Slot Number:  
Slot Number:  
Slot Number:  
Slot Number:  
High Slot Number:  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
3-66  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
System & Station  
Program 28 – DSS Console/Attendant Telephone Assignments  
Program 28 Overview  
DK40i: allows up to three DSS consoles (DK40i KSU supports one DSS, Expansion Unit  
supports two more). A DDSS console can only be connected to circuit 8 of the DK40i base  
digital ports or a PDKU, and an HDSS console can only be connected to circuits 7 and 8 of a  
PEKU.  
♦
DK424: supports up to eight DDSS consoles, or eight HDSS consoles, or any combination of  
the two types of consoles up to eight may be installed with an RCTUC/D or RCTUE/F  
common control unit. The RCTUA and DK40i can support three DSS consoles, the RCTUB,  
RCTUBA/BB can support four, and the RCTUC/D and RCTUE/F support eight.  
The telephone connected to circuit 1 of the PCB or the DK40i Base KSU supporting a console  
is designated as an attendant telephone. Consoles and telephones are numbered 1~8 as they are  
installed from the lowest to highest slot number. For example, in DK424, if a PDKU in Slot 11  
had a DDSS console connected to it, the DDSS console would be Console #1 and the digital  
telephone connected to circuit 1 would be Attendant Telephone #1.  
As many as four DSS consoles can be assigned to one attendant telephone. Because more than  
one DSS console can be assigned to an attendant telephone, the detailed arrangement must be  
programmed. Initialized data assigns one DSS console to one attendant telephone, both  
connected to the same PDKU or PEKU PCB.  
Notes  
●
●
●
●
Refer to Program 03—Flexible PCB Slot Assignments, for the PCB slots of PEKUs and  
PDKUs configured to support consoles.  
The system automatically assigns the console supported by the PEKU or PDKU in the lowest-  
number PCB slot to be console number 1.  
The system automatically assigns the telephone connected to the first station port on a console  
PDKU or PEKU to be attendant number 1.  
If more than one console is associated with one attendant telephone, then specify the same  
number attendant telephone for all consoles associated with it.  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
3-67  
System & Station  
Program 29-1~8 – DSS Console and Number Button Assignments  
Program 29-1~8 – DSS Console and Number Button  
Assignments  
Processor Type: DK40i, All RCTUs  
Program Type:  
Station  
Initialized Default: See “Program 29 - Initialized Default DSS Console Button Assignments” on Page 3-72  
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ  
SELECT = DDSS/HDSS console number 1~8  
CODE =  
Assign Speed Dial, trunk access, or DSS access to  
this button chosen. See code table below.  
DDSS/HDSS LED Button Group 1~3  
Each console has three groups of 20 LED  
buttons.  
The  
be changed to  
and  
buttons may  
buttons, but  
,
(CO) or  
DKT LEDs 01~20  
they may not be reassigned to other button  
locations.  
Press the DKT LED that is in the same position  
as the console button being assigned. The LED  
lights and the LCD displays the console button’s  
number.  
Initialized key assignments are shown following the  
Program 29 System Record Sheets.  
Code Table and Legend  
Personal  
Speed Dial Bin  
Numbers  
System Speed  
DSS Button  
Button Type  
Code  
Processor  
Dial Bin  
CO Line Range  
Range  
Numbers  
All Call  
489  
439  
440  
441  
442  
DK40i  
RCTUA  
001~012  
001~016  
001~048  
001~144  
001~200  
#000~#027  
#000~#031  
#000~#079  
#000~#239  
#000~#335  
10~ 49  
60~ 99  
ꢀ ꢀ  
ꢀ ꢀ  
Night Transfer 1  
Night Transfer 2  
Night Transfer 3  
Night Transfer 4  
10~ 49  
60~ 99  
ꢀ ꢀ  
ꢀ ꢀ  
RCTUBA/BB  
RCTUC/D  
RCTUE/F  
10~ 49  
600~ 699  
ꢀ ꢀ  
ꢀ ꢀ  
10~ 49  
600~ 699  
ꢀ ꢀ  
ꢀ ꢀ  
100~ 139  
200~ 999  
ꢀ ꢀ  
ꢀ ꢀ  
Console Number _______  
Group Number 1  
Group Number 2  
Group Number 3  
Button/Code  
Button/Code  
Button/Code  
Button/Code  
Button/Code  
Button/Code  
10  
09  
08  
07  
06  
05  
04  
03  
02  
01  
20  
19  
18  
17  
16  
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
10  
09  
08  
07  
06  
05  
04  
03  
02  
01  
20  
19  
18  
17  
16  
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
10  
09  
08  
07  
06  
05  
04  
03  
02  
01  
20  
19  
18  
17  
16  
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
3-68  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
System & Station  
Program 29-1~8 – DSS Console and Number Button Assignments  
Program 29-1~8 Overview  
Each button on the DSS consoles can be flexibly assigned as either a Direct Station Selection  
('66), Line (&2), or 6' button. The standard equipped 1LJKWꢃ7UDQVIHU (17), and $OOꢃ&DOOꢃ  
3DJH ($&) buttons may be changed to one of these three types, but not vice versa.  
Station Speed Dial buttons assigned to a DSS console share the associated attendant digital or  
electronic telephone’s Speed Dial memory. The personal Speed Dial numbers of the DSS console  
circuit port(s) are not available. Initialized data assigns the 60 buttons to be Direct Station  
Selection ('66), $OOꢃ&DOOꢃ3DJH ($&), and 1LJKWꢃ7UDQVIHU (17). Each of the consoles can be  
independently programmed.  
Important! Only program the following buttons: 6', /LQH (&2), '66, $OOꢃ&DOOꢃ3DJH ($&),  
and 1LJKWꢃ7UDQVIHUꢃ(17); programming other feature buttons on a console may  
cause system operation problems.  
It is not possible to assign [PDNs]/[SDNs]/[PhDNs] to DSS consoles or ADMs  
Note When assigning CO line access buttons (001~200), the associated telephone must be  
assigned access to the CO line also. See Program 40.  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
3-69  
System & Station  
Program 29-1~8 – DSS Console and Number Button Assignments  
Program 29 - Initialized Default DSS Console Button Assignments  
Group 1  
Group 2  
RCTUB  
RCTUC/D  
RCTUE/F  
RCTUB  
RCTUC/D  
RCTUE/F  
DSS  
Button No.  
DSS  
Button No  
DK40i  
RCTUA  
DK40i  
RCTUA  
01  
02  
03  
04  
05  
06  
07  
08  
09  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
#000  
#001  
#002  
#003  
#004  
#005  
#006  
#007  
#008  
#009  
#010  
#011  
#012  
#013  
#014  
#015  
#016  
#017  
#018  
#019  
#000  
#001  
#002  
#003  
#004  
#005  
#006  
#007  
#008  
#009  
#010  
#011  
#012  
#013  
#014  
#015  
#016  
#017  
#018  
#019  
#000  
#001  
#002  
#003  
#004  
#005  
#006  
#007  
#008  
#009  
#010  
#011  
#012  
#013  
#014  
#015  
#016  
#017  
#018  
#019  
01  
02  
03  
04  
05  
06  
07  
08  
09  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
#020  
#021  
#022  
#023  
#024  
#025  
#026  
#027  
#020  
#021  
#022  
#023  
#024  
#025  
#026  
#027  
#028  
#029  
#030  
#031  
#020  
#021  
#022  
#023  
#024  
#025  
#026  
#027  
#028  
#029  
#030  
#031  
#032  
#033  
#034  
#035  
#036  
#037  
#038  
#039  
ꢀ10  
ꢀ11  
ꢀ12  
ꢀ13  
ꢀ14  
ꢀ15  
ꢀ16  
ꢀ17  
ꢀ18  
ꢀ19  
ꢀ20  
ꢀ21  
ꢀ10  
ꢀ11  
ꢀ12  
ꢀ13  
ꢀ14  
ꢀ15  
ꢀ16  
ꢀ17  
Group 3  
RCTUB  
RCTUC/D  
RCTUE/F  
DSS  
Button No  
DK40i  
RCTUA  
01  
02  
03  
04  
05  
06  
07  
08  
09  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
#040  
#041  
ꢀ22  
ꢀ23  
ꢀ24  
ꢀ25  
ꢀ26  
ꢀ27  
ꢀ28  
ꢀ29  
ꢀ30  
ꢀ31  
ꢀ32  
ꢀ33  
ꢀ34  
ꢀ35  
ꢀ36  
ꢀ37  
ꢀ38  
ꢀ18  
ꢀ19  
ꢀ20  
ꢀ21  
ꢀ22  
ꢀ23  
ꢀ24  
ꢀ25  
ꢀ26  
ꢀ27  
ꢀ28  
ꢀ29  
ꢀ30  
ꢀ31  
ꢀ32  
ꢀ33  
ꢀ34  
#042  
#043  
#044  
#045  
#046  
#047  
#048  
#049  
#050  
#051  
#052  
#053  
#054  
#055  
#056  
#057  
ꢀ39  
ꢀ35  
AC (489)  
AC (489)  
AC (489)  
NT 1 (439)  
NT 1 (439)  
NT 1 (439)  
3-70  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
System & Station  
Program *29 – Add-on Modules Button Assignments  
Program *29 – Add-on Modules Button Assignments  
Processor Type: DK14, DK40i, All RCTUs  
Program Type:  
Station  
Initialized Default: See “Program 29 - Add-on Modules Button Assignments” on Page 3-74  
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ  
ꢀ
Enter the station logical port of the telephone which  
will have buttons assigned to its attached Add-on.  
CODE=  
See the Code Table below.  
Enter the Add-on Module which will have buttons  
assigned to it (0, 1, or 2). Enter 0 when removing  
ADMs.  
LED 01~20  
Press the LED that is in the same position as  
the Add-on Module button being assigned.  
Personal Speed Dial Bin  
Numbers  
System Speed Dial  
Bin Numbers  
Processor  
CO Line Range  
DSS Button Range  
DK14  
DK40i  
10~ 49  
60~ 99  
001~004  
001~008  
001~016  
001~048  
001~144  
001~200  
#000~#009  
#000~#027  
#000~#031  
#000~#079  
#000~#239  
#000~#335  
ꢀ ꢀ  
ꢀ ꢀ  
10~ 49  
60~ 99  
ꢀ ꢀ  
ꢀ ꢀ  
RCTUA  
10~ 49  
60~ 99  
ꢀ ꢀ  
ꢀ ꢀ  
RCTUBA/BB  
RCTUC/D  
RCTUE/F  
10~ 49  
600~ 699  
ꢀ ꢀ  
ꢀ ꢀ  
10~ 49  
600~ 699  
ꢀ ꢀ  
ꢀ ꢀ  
100~ 139  
200~ 999  
ꢀ ꢀ  
ꢀ ꢀ  
Port _____  
Add-on Module 1  
Port _____  
Add-on Module 1  
Add-on Module 2  
Add-on Module 2  
Button  
10  
Code  
Button  
20  
Code  
Button  
10  
Code  
Button  
20  
Code  
Button  
10  
Code  
Button  
20  
Code  
Button  
10  
Code  
Button  
20  
Code  
09  
19  
09  
19  
09  
19  
09  
19  
08  
18  
08  
18  
08  
18  
08  
18  
07  
17  
07  
17  
07  
17  
07  
17  
06  
16  
06  
16  
06  
16  
06  
16  
05  
15  
05  
15  
05  
15  
05  
15  
04  
14  
04  
14  
04  
14  
04  
14  
03  
13  
03  
13  
03  
13  
03  
13  
02  
12  
02  
12  
02  
12  
02  
12  
01  
11  
01  
11  
01  
11  
01  
11  
Number of  
System Speed  
Dial Numbers  
Number of  
Personal Speed  
Dial Numbers  
Processor  
ADMs  
DK14  
DK40i  
8
40  
40  
40  
40  
40  
40  
40  
40  
12  
RCTUA  
12  
40  
RCTUBA/BB  
RCTUC/D  
RCTUE/F  
40  
100  
100  
800  
120  
200  
Program *29 Overview  
This program allows ADM buttons to be customized. Each ADM button can be programmed as  
either a Direct Station Selection, CO line, System Speed Dial or Personal Speed Dial buttons. Only  
2000-series Digital Telephones can connect with ADMs, and up to two ADMs can be connected to  
a telephone.  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
3-71  
System & Station  
Program *29 – Add-on Modules Button Assignments  
Important! Run this program for each station that has an ADM or the ADM will not function.  
Program at least one ADM key for each ADM.  
It is impossible to assign [PDNs], [SDNs] or [PhDNs] to DSS consoles or ADMs.  
Button Assignments  
Add-on  
Module 1  
Button  
No.  
RCTUB  
RCTUC/D  
RCTUE/F  
Add-on  
Module 2  
Button No.  
RCTUB  
RCTUC/D  
RCTUE/F  
DK14  
DK40i  
RCTUA  
DK14  
DK40i  
RCTUA  
01  
02  
03  
04  
05  
06  
07  
08  
09  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
#000  
#001  
#002  
#003  
#004  
#005  
#006  
#007  
#008  
#009  
#000  
#001  
#002  
#003  
#004  
#005  
#006  
#007  
#008  
#009  
#010  
#011  
#012  
#013  
#014  
#015  
#016  
#017  
#018  
#019  
#000  
#001  
#002  
#003  
#004  
#005  
#006  
#007  
#008  
#009  
#010  
#011  
#012  
#013  
#014  
#015  
#016  
#017  
#018  
#019  
#000  
#001  
#002  
#003  
#004  
#005  
#006  
#007  
#008  
#009  
#010  
#011  
#012  
#013  
#014  
#015  
#016  
#017  
#018  
#019  
01  
02  
03  
04  
05  
06  
07  
08  
09  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
#020  
#021  
#022  
#023  
#024  
#025  
#026  
#027  
#020  
#021  
#022  
#023  
#024  
#025  
#026  
#027  
#028  
#029  
#030  
#031  
#020  
#021  
#022  
#023  
#024  
#025  
#026  
#027  
#028  
#029  
#030  
#031  
#032  
#033  
#034  
#035  
#036  
#037  
#038  
#039  
ꢀ20  
ꢀ21  
ꢀ22  
ꢀ23  
ꢀ24  
ꢀ25  
ꢀ26  
ꢀ27  
ꢀ28  
ꢀ29  
ꢀ30  
ꢀ31  
ꢀ32  
ꢀ33  
ꢀ34  
ꢀ35  
ꢀ36  
ꢀ38  
ꢀ39  
ꢀ40  
ꢀ10  
ꢀ11  
ꢀ12  
ꢀ13  
ꢀ14  
ꢀ15  
ꢀ16  
ꢀ17  
ꢀ18  
ꢀ19  
ꢀ20  
ꢀ21  
ꢀ10  
ꢀ11  
ꢀ12  
ꢀ13  
ꢀ14  
ꢀ15  
ꢀ16  
ꢀ17  
ꢀ18  
ꢀ19  
ꢀ10  
ꢀ11  
ꢀ12  
ꢀ13  
ꢀ14  
ꢀ15  
ꢀ16  
ꢀ17  
3-72  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
System & Station  
Program 30 – Station Class of Service  
Program 30 – Station Class of Service  
Processor Type: DK14, DK40i, All RCTUs  
Program Type:  
Station  
Initialized Default: LEDs 01, 05 and 07 for all ports  
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ  
SELECT = Station Logical Port Number(s)  
Light LEDs for the port specified in the last step. All  
LEDs marked with an “X” in the table below should  
be lit.  
Enter the port numbers to which class of service  
must be assigned. To add a port range, enter  
XXXꢀXXX (low port ꢀ high port).  
Processor Type  
DK14  
Port Range  
000~009  
000~027  
000~031  
DISA Port  
010  
Processor Type  
RCTUBA/BB  
RCTUC/D  
Port Range  
000~079  
000~239  
000~335  
DISA Port  
089  
DK40i  
035  
249  
RCTUA  
039  
RCTUE/F  
344  
Port  
Feature  
LED  
SLT/ISDN Terminal “#” Dial  
Privacy Override  
20  
19  
18  
17  
16  
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
10  
09  
08  
07  
06  
05  
Executive Override  
DND Override  
Change TR Traveling Class Code  
Change Verified Account Code  
Verified Account Codes  
SLT-Hook Flash Anti-Bounce Guard  
Dial Pulse - DTMF OFF  
Change DISA Security Code  
Change TR Override Code  
Forced Account Code  
OCA Automatic (originating OCA)  
ABR Access  
Speed Dial Allowed  
#5#30 Pickup AC Page Only  
(Release 3.2 and higher)  
04  
Microphone Button on at Start of Call  
MIC Button Locked  
03  
02  
01  
Speakerphone  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
3-73  
System & Station  
Program 30 – Station Class of Service  
Program 30 Overview  
Program 30 enables or disables features for individual telephones at the station level. The  
following text describes Program 30 LEDs.  
LED 20: SLT/ISDN Terminal “#” Dial  
This feature applies to single-line telephones and ISDN station terminals to indicate when a  
number has been dialed and to begin dialing a sub-address. If a ꢄ is dialed as the first digit, it  
indicates that a feature access code is being entered.  
For ISDN, if separate dialing and sub-address digits will be used, turn LED 20 ON. If it is OFF, ꢄ  
can be used as a dialing separator.  
LED 19: Privacy Override  
With Privacy Override enabled (LED 19 ON), a station can override calls and listen to a CO line  
conversation by pressing a common CO /LQH button (not a [DN] button). [DN] buttons are always  
private. A maximum of two stations can override an existing “station-line” conversation. You can  
set a warning tone for Privacy Override (see Program 10-2).  
Privacy Override of Direct Inward System Access (DISA) Two-CO line calls is not allowed.  
Privacy Override is not available on any call (CO line or internal) that appears on a [PDN], [SDN],  
or [PhDN] button.  
Block Privacy Override by a station via a 3ULYDF\ button (Program 39) or with the Executive/  
Privacy Override blocking option (Program 31, LED 18). To configure the Strata DK system to  
operate as nonprivate, allow Privacy Override from all stations.  
Disabling Privacy Override for attendant console ports does not deny Attendant Supervised Loop  
Monitoring.  
LED 18: Executive Override  
With Executive Override enabled (LED 18 ON) a station can break into and overhear an existing  
station conversation by pressing ꢆ after the busy station number or by pressing the “EXEOVR”  
LCD soft key. You can set a warning tone for this feature (see Program 10-2).  
Privacy Override can be perform from stations with Executive/Privacy Override blocking enabled  
in Program 31, LED 18. The 3ULYDF\ button does not block Executive Override. Disabling  
Executive Override for attendant console ports does not deny Attendant Supervised Loop  
Monitoring.  
LED 17: Do Not Disturb (DND) Override  
With DND Override enabled, (LED 17 ON), you can override a station that has DND ON. A called  
station with DND activated will return very fast busy tone (four tones per second). If the caller  
presses ꢅ after dialing the DND station directory number, a DND Override tone is heard on the  
called station’s speaker.  
If a DND station has more than one [PDN] and it appears on other telephones, when called, the  
[PDN] rings at the other telephones and flashes on the DND station. In this case, DND override is  
not available unless all [PDNs] of the DND station are busy.  
3-74  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
System & Station  
Program 30 – Station Class of Service  
LED 16: Change Toll Restriction Traveling Class Code  
When LED 16 is ON for a port, the station occupying it can change the four-digit Toll Restriction  
Traveling Class of Service Codes established in Program 44-1~8. Stations selected for this feature  
must follow the dialing sequences below to change the codes:  
Class 1 #691  
Class 2 #692  
Class 3 #693  
Class 4 #694  
Class 5 #695  
Class 6 #696  
Class 7 #697  
Class 8 #698  
[PDN] + class code (  
~
) +ꢃfour-digit code +  
LED 15: Change Verified Account Code  
With LED 15 ON, a station can change the Verified Account Codes established in Program 69.  
Selected stations must dial the following sequence to change the codes:  
[PDN] + ꢄꢑꢌꢉ + Verified Account Code + Redial:  
System  
RCTUE/F  
Verified Account Code  
000~499  
RCTUA, BA/BB, C/D, DK40i, DK14  
000~299  
Press ꢄ button if your electronic telephone does not have a 5HGLDO button.  
Total Account Code digit length is set in Program 10-4 (up to 15 digits). All digits do not have to  
be verified.  
LED 14: Verified Account Code  
With LED 14 ON, the system verifies all Forced or Voluntary Account Codes (set in Program 69)  
dialed by the station user. If the station user does not dial a specific Verified Account Codes, the  
call does not execute (Forced), or the Account Code is not validated for the SMDR call report  
(Voluntary).  
To force a verified account code entry on Two-CO line DISA calls through the system, turn LED  
08 and 14 ON for Port 10-DK14, Port 035-DK40i, Port 039-RCTUA, Port 089-RCTUB,  
RCTUBA/BB or Port 249-RCTUC/D or Port 344-RCTUE/F. Also, you must enable Forced  
Account Code for outgoing CO line in Program 15-7.  
LED 12: Single Line Telephone (SLT) Hookflash Anti-bounce Guard  
SLT Hookflash Anti-Bounce Guard (LED 12 ON) prevents false recalls due to hook flash bounce  
during SLT hang-up on outside calls. The system automatically disconnects the CO line if the SLT  
hangs-up after a Hook Flash.  
Use for QSTU2, PSTU, RSTU, RSTU2, RDSU, PESU, and KSTU2 standard telephone ports that  
have standard telephones (with/without message lamps) connected to them to prevent false ring  
signals. With this option ON, a CO line connected to a standard telephone is disconnected if the  
standard telephone user hookflashes and then hangs up. If this option is OFF, the CO line recalls  
the standard telephone.  
LED 11: Dial Pulse - Dual-tone Multi-frequency (DTMF) OFF  
Use Dial Pulse - DTMF OFF (LED 11 ON) if any device, DID or Tie line station port does not  
require the RRCS, K5RCU, K5RCU2, or K4RCU for DTMF decoding. When the device goes off-  
hook or the DID or Tie line is seized for an incoming call, the DTMF receiver is not accessed -  
reducing unnecessary traffic to it.  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
3-75  
System & Station  
Program 30 – Station Class of Service  
If a Tie or DID line is Dial Pulse (Program 15-1, LED ON), enable Dial Pulse - DTMF OFF (LED  
11 ON) for that Tie or DID station port number. If the DID or Tie line is DTMF tone dial (Program  
15-1, LED OFF) disable Dial Pulse - DTMF OFF (LED 11 OFF) and install an RRCS on the  
RCTU, K5RCU, K5RCU2, or K4RCU3 in the DK40i.  
LED 10: Change DISA Security Code  
When enabled (LED 10 ON), allows a selected station to change the DISA security code by  
dialing [PDN] + ꢄꢑꢌꢍ, + Security Code + 5HGLDO.  
LED 09: Change Toll Restriction (TR) Override Code  
When enabled (LED 09 ON), two TR Override codes are available. When one of these codes is  
dialed from any station, all Toll Restriction is bypassed. Change TR Override codes by pressing  
[PDN] + ꢄꢑꢌꢋ for Code 1, or [PDN] + ꢄꢑꢌꢌ for Code 2. Press 5HGLDO to store.  
LED 08: Forced Account Code  
When enabled, (LED 08 ON), a station or DISA CO line user using a line with a Forced Account  
requirement (Program 15-7) must enter an Account Code before the outgoing CO/Tie/DID line  
call can be completed. If Forced Account Codes should be verified, enable Verified Account Code  
(LED 14 ON). Program 60-4 defines the Forced Account Code digit length.  
To force a verified account code entry on Two-CO line DISA calls through the system, (LED 08  
and 14 ON: Port 10-DK14, Port 035-DK40i, Port 039-RCTUA, Port 089-RCTUB, RCTUBA/BB,  
249-RCTU C/D, and Port 344 for RCTU E/F). Also, enable Forced Account Code for outgoing  
CO line in Program 15-7.  
LED 07: Off-hook Call Announce (OCA) Automatic  
When LED 07 is ON, a calling station has this feature enabled. If the system is set for Ring First  
Signaling (Program 10-1, LED 10 ON), the user must dial ꢅꢂ after hearing busy tone or ꢂꢅ after  
hearing ringback tone in order to OCA the called station. OCA Automatic only works on systems  
with Voice First Signaling (Program 10-1 or 10-2, LED 01, OFF) in which case the user does not  
have to dial ꢅꢂ or ꢂꢅ. Initialized default: ON - all ports. The called station must also be enabled to  
receive OCA (see Program 31, LED 03).  
LED 06: Automatic Busy Redial (ABR) Access  
ABR can be enabled (LED 06 ON) or disabled (LED 06 OFF) for each station. The system selects  
the last line in the originating line group each time ABR is initiated (see also Program 10-1). If you  
do not enable ABR access here, the ABR soft key does not appear on LCD telephones. ABR  
operates when calling on ground and loop start lines, but is not functional for DID or Tie line calls.  
ABR overrides Program 41. Program 41 is normally used with LCR.  
For the DK40i, K5RCU, K5RCU2, or K4RCU must be installed; for the DK14, QRCU must be  
installed to detect busy tone so that ABR will function.  
LED 05: Speed Dial  
LED 04 enables (ON) or disables (OFF) Station and System Speed Dial. Initialized default: ON -  
all ports.  
3-76  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
System & Station  
Program 30 – Station Class of Service  
LED 04: Call Pickup Code Option  
Determines the operation of pickup code ꢄꢌꢄꢆꢁ in Release 3.2 (and above) software. If LED 04 is  
ON, ꢄꢌꢄꢆꢁ only picks up All Call Page and External Page (per Program 10-2, LED 15). If LED  
04 is OFF, ꢄꢌꢄꢆꢁ picks up an internal call ringing on a telephone as a priority or it picks up All  
Call Page or External Page if no internal calls are ringing. Prior to Release 3.2, ꢄꢌꢄꢆꢁ picked up  
ringing calls as priority over All Call Page pickup calls.  
LED 03: Microphone Button On at Start of Call  
When enabled (LED 03 ON), the microphone and Mic button LED is turned ON at the start of an  
on-hook speakerphone call. For this feature to work, you must enable the MIC button lock  
operation (LED 02 ON).  
When receiving internal DN calls, the flexible Microphone Cutoff (0LFURSKQꢃ&XWꢒRII) button  
(Program 39) can be used to prevent room monitoring and Handsfree Answerback.  
LED 02: Mic Button - Locked/Momentary  
The 0LF button turns electronic or digital telephone microphones ON/OFF:  
With “Locked” (LED 02 ON), the 0LF button will be ON or OFF (depending on LED 03) when  
you begin the call and you can alternately push it ON or OFF. This does not apply to Handset OCA  
- which is 0LF push-to-talk only.  
With “Momentary” (LED 02 OFF), the 0LF is always ON at the start of a speakerphone call/ You  
must continuously press 0LF to disable the microphone when during a speakerphone call.  
LED 01: Speakerphone  
Enables (LED 01 ON) or disables (LED 01 OFF) speakerphone operation on any electronic or  
digital telephone. If disabled, a speakerphone:  
♦
♦
♦
Can be used as a handsfree electronic or digital telephone.  
Enables talk back with the receiver on-hook when receiving an internal call.  
Will not allow you to talk on a call that you place or a call that you answer by pressing a  
ringing button with the handset on-hook.  
Program 30 - Example  
Action (press buttons + LED buttons)  
LCD Response  
1
1. Use an LCD programming phone per Minimum Hardware  
Requirements on Page 1-14.  
No. N-N  
Jan 20 Sun  
06:43  
Make sure the programming button strip template is installed on the  
programming telephone.  
2.  
Program Mode  
Program = 30  
ꢀꢄꢀꢄꢂꢀꢅꢀꢆ  
Enter programming mode. (Do not press [DN] button.)  
3. 6SNUꢃꢇ6SHDNHUꢈꢃꢆꢁꢃ+ROG  
Access Program 30.  
Data Store  
4. 6SNUꢃꢇ6SHDNHUꢈ  
30 Select =  
30 Select =  
Prepare the system for a station port selection.  
5. Enter the port number where the station being defined is  
connected. Use three digits, followed by a button. A range of  
ports may be entered at once by using the button. (See Note  
ꢀ
on system record sheet for port numbers.)  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
3-77  
System & Station  
Program 30 – Station Class of Service  
Action (press buttons + LED buttons)  
LCD Response  
6. LED buttons 01~20  
LED buttons 01~20 activate features for each station port or port  
range. Make the following selections by turning the appropriate button  
LED ON or OFF for each item (01~20) for each port, as marked on the  
system record sheet:  
LED 01: Speakerphone Enabled  
LED 02: Microphone Key Lock Enabled  
LED 03: Microphone ON at Start of Call  
LED 04: Not Used  
LED 05: Speed Dial Allowed  
LED 06: Automatic Busy Redial Access Enabled  
LED 07: Automatic Off-hook Call Announce  
LED 08: Forced Account Code Enabled  
LED 09: Toll Restriction Override Code Revision Authority  
LED 10: DISA Security Code Change Allowed  
LED 11: Dial Pulse (DTMF Off) for Standard Telephone  
LED 14: Account Codes Verified  
LED 15: Verified Account Code Revision Authority  
LED 16: Traveling Class of Service Code Revision Authority  
LED 17: Do Not Disturb Override Allowed  
LED 18: Executive Override Allowed  
LED 19: Privacy Override Allowed  
LED 20: Not Used  
If programming a port range, the LED indications are as follows:  
♦
♦
♦
LED-ON, all ports in range are enabled for that item.  
LED-OFF, all ports in range are disabled for that item.  
LED-FLASHING, some ports in range are enabled and some  
ports are disabled.  
7. +ROG  
Secure data in system programming.  
30 Select  
Data Programmed  
30 Select =  
8. 6SNUꢃꢇ6SHDNHUꢈ  
Prepare system for another selection (go back to Step 5), or exit  
Program 30 (continue with Step 9).  
9. ꢄꢄꢃ+ROG  
30 Select = ##  
Data Programmed  
Secure Program 30 data in system memory.  
10. 6SNUꢃꢇ6SHDNHUꢈ  
Program =  
Exit Program 30. Enter another program number or exit programming  
mode (go to Step 11). Speaker beeps to indicate it is exiting Program  
33.  
11. ## Hold  
No. N-N  
06:58  
Exit programming mode.  
Jan 20 Sun  
1. N-N = Programming telephone [PDN]  
3-78  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
System & Station  
Program *30 – Telephone Group Page Assignments  
Program *30 – Telephone Group Page Assignments  
Processor Type: DK14, DK40i, All RCTUs  
Program Type: Station  
Initialized Default: All LEDs OFF  
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ  
ꢀ
Enter the station logical port which will be assigned  
to page a group or groups. To add a port range,  
enter XXXꢀXXX (low port ꢀ high port).  
Press LED Buttons 01~08 to light LEDs for the port  
specified in the last step. In the table below, “X” all  
LED Buttons which should be lit.  
Processor Type  
DK14  
Port Range  
000~007  
000~027  
000~031  
Number of Page Groups  
Processor Type  
RCTUBA/BB  
RCTUC/D  
Port Range  
000~079  
000~239  
000~335  
Number of Page Groups  
4
4
4
4
8
8
DK40i  
RCTUA  
RCTUE/F  
Port  
Feature  
LED  
Page Group H  
Page Group G  
Page Group F  
Page Group E  
Page Group D  
Page Group C  
Page Group B  
Page Group A  
08  
07  
06  
05  
04  
03  
02  
01  
Shaded groups apply to RCTUC/D and RCTUE/F only.  
Program *30 Overview  
Digital and electronic telephones can be assigned to “internal telephone speaker” page groups with  
this program. Each group can have as many as 120 stations. Telephones can be a member of more  
than one group. Station users can access each group separately by dialing access codes. (See  
Program 05 for access codes.) The above table shows four or eight page groups. An additional  
group is the All Call Page Group set in Program 31, LED 10.  
Notes  
●
A maximum of 120 telephones can be assigned to a particular page group.  
●
Only 120 telephones can be paged simultaneously. Example: If Page Group “A” has 60  
telephones, Page Group “B” has 50 telephones, and Page Group “C” has 70 telephones, then  
Group A + B (60 + 50 = 110) can be paged simultaneously, but Group A + C (60 + 70 = 130)  
cannot be paged simultaneously.  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
3-79  
System & Station  
Program 31 – Station Class of Service  
Program 31 – Station Class of Service  
Processor Type: DK14, DK40i, All RCTUs  
Program Type:  
Station  
Initialized Default: LED 10 ON for Ports 000~119; LED 11~13 ON for all ports.  
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ  
SELECT = Station Logical Port Number(s)  
Light LED Buttons for the port specified in the last  
step. All LED Buttons marked with an “X” in the  
table below should be lit.  
Enter the port numbers to which class of service  
must be assigned.  
Processor Type  
Port Range  
Processor Type  
Port Range  
DK14  
DK40i  
000~009  
000~027  
000~031  
RCTUBA/BB  
RCTUC/D  
RCTUE/F  
000~079  
000~239  
000~335  
RCTUA  
Port  
Feature  
LED  
20  
Toshiba Stratagy/VP (B + Station No.)  
Toshiba Stratagy/VP (B No Station)  
Executive & Privacy Override Blocking  
End/End Signal Rcv (VM)  
19  
18  
17  
16  
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
10  
09  
08  
07  
06  
05  
04  
03  
02  
01  
Receive VM ID Code  
Toshiba Stratagy/VP Integration (A/D)  
Handset OCA  
Handset OCA Warning Tone  
Pooled Line Key - No Flash if No Ring  
Busy Override Tone - Continuous  
All Call Page Allowed - EKTs/DKTs  
VM (No Conference)  
VM Group 4 (does not apply to DK14)  
VM Group 3 (does not apply to DK14)  
VM Group 2  
VM Group 1  
VM to VM Call Blocking Called/Calling  
OCA Enabled (To Receive)  
Handsfree No Warning Tone  
Handsfree Disabled  
Program 31 Overview  
Program 31 sets most voice mail or External Auto Attendant port assignments. Each standard  
telephone port (QSTU2, RSTU2, RSTU, PSTU, PESU, RDSU, KSTU2, QSTU2) connected to a  
Toshiba Stratagy, Stratagy DK or VP voice mail system should have LEDs 04, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19,  
and 20, and one of the following: 05, 06, 07, or 08 turned ON. These LED’s should be ON for VM  
ports only, not for telephone ports.  
3-80  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
System & Station  
Program 31 – Station Class of Service  
LED 09 should be OFF for VM Auto Attendant “blind” transfer and VM tandem CO line  
connection with automatic release. LED 09 should be ON for VM Auto Attendant supervised  
transfer operation.  
Example Programming Assignment to Set Up Voice Mail in a Distributed Hunt Group  
Programꢃ*32  
008  
010  
VMG1 Message Center  
VMG2 Message Center  
Program 13  
008 – Button 5 ON  
009 – Button 5 ON  
VMG1 RSTU VM Ports  
VMG2 RSTU VM Ports  
VMG1 DH Group Members  
VMG1 DH Group Members  
Program 31  
010 – Button 6 ON  
011 – Button 6 ON  
850 – 01 008  
850 – 02 009  
Program *40  
851 – 01 010  
851 – 02 011  
RS232C (SMDI)  
N/A on DK14  
Voice Mail  
Machine #1  
#008  
#009  
DHG1/VMG1  
Telephones  
using voice mail  
machine #1  
#200  
#201  
008  
010  
DHG2/VMG2  
#010  
#011  
Telephones  
using voice mail  
machine #2  
#202  
#203  
Voice Mail  
Machine #2  
Standard Telephone  
Voice Mail Ports  
1565  
All ports assigned to a Voice Mail Group should also be assigned to a unique Distributed Hunt  
Group using Program ꢀ40. Each Program 31 Voice Mail Group must be associated with a unique  
Program ꢀ40 Distributed Hunt Group that hunts only to its own Voice Mail Group ports. (See  
above example of how to connect/program two voice mail/auto attendant machines and associate  
them with two different DH groups.)  
♦
♦
If LED 15 or 19 is ON, turn LED 17 ON. If LED 20 is ON, turn LEDs 17 and 19 ON.  
For SMDI or DTMF integration, turn ON LEDs 04, 16, 17 and 18, and one of the following:  
05, 06, 07, or 08 for all standard telephone ports connected to a VM unit.  
♦
Turn LED 19 and 20 OFF if the VM unit does not respond properly to transfer recall (B-Tone)  
signals when using any type of Voice Mail Interface.  
♦
♦
LED 09 – see above comments in Program Overview.  
If CO lines direct ring VM ports via Program 81~89, the data in Programs ꢀ81, ꢀ84, and ꢀ87  
must be blank.  
Important! Do not assign Program 31 VM/AA options to built-in Auto Attendant digital  
announcer ports.  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
3-81  
System & Station  
Program 31 – Station Class of Service  
LED 20: Toshiba Stratagy/VP (B + Station Number)  
Use with Toshiba Stratagy/Stratagy DK/VP systems connected to a standard telephone port  
(PSTU, RSTU, RSTU2, PESU, RDSU, KSTU2 and QSTU2). Toshiba voice mail systems  
receiving DTMF B tone followed by the station number may not know where the call is coming  
from - such as hold recall or “blind” ring transfer recall.  
When enabled (LED 20 ON), allows Toshiba voice mail systems to respond more intelligently  
with appropriate voice prompts. Use this feature for standard telephone ports connected to voice  
mail devices only, not for station ports connected to telephones. The station number is not  
returned, it blind transfers to a DND station.  
Note You must enable Toshiba Stratagy/Stratagy DK/VP (B No Station) with LED 19 to allow  
this function.  
LED 19: Toshiba Stratagy/Stratagy DK/VP (B No Station)  
DTMF “B” tone is sent to Toshiba voice mail systems to signify a recall where Toshiba voice mail  
systems already knows the recalling station number. Again, this allows Toshiba voice mail systems  
to respond more intelligently with appropriate voice prompts. Use this feature for standard  
telephone ports (PSTU, RSTU, RSTU2, PESU, RDSU, KSTU2 and QSTU2) connected to voice  
mail devices only, not for station ports connected to telephones.  
LED 18: Executive and Privacy Override Blocking (Modem)  
When enabled (LED 18 ON), denies a station user the capability to break into a station connection  
with Executive or Privacy Override. Use this feature for standard telephone ports (PSTU, RSTU,  
RSTU2, PESU, RDSU, KSTU2 and QSTU2) connected to a modem, voice mail/auto attendant or  
ACD digital announcement device in order to ensure data and voice security. Also, use this feature  
to deny override of any station. This feature does not block Attendant Supervised Loop  
Monitoring.  
You can use the Privacy Release 3ULYDF\ꢃ5HOHDVH button to disable Privacy on a call-by-call  
basis; this button does not disable Executive Override Blocking.  
Enable this feature if a modem is assigned to the system modem pool in Program 21 to provide  
data security for modem standard telephone ports.  
Disable this feature (LED 18 OFF) for the modem standard telephone ports assigned in Program  
21 if using the system modem pool for data calls that must be switched between voice and data.  
LED 17: End-to-end Signal RCV (VM)  
When enabled (LED 17 ON), provides End-to-end Signaling of Dual-tone Multi-frequency  
(DTMF) tones through the system. Required on all voice mail ports (RSTU, RSTU2, RDSU/  
RSTS, PSTU, PESU, RDSU, QSTU2 and KSTU2) for proper signaling communication.  
LED 16: Receive Voice Mail (VM) ID Code  
When a station is call-forwarded to a VM system, certain identification (ID) DTMF tones are  
automatically sent to direct the call to a specific mailbox (VM ID Code #656 or DNIS VM ID  
Code). The automatic ID is also sent to the VM device when electronic, digital, or standard  
telephone users retrieve messages via the Message Waiting buttons (VM ID Code #657). The VM  
port must be programmed for this feature to allow the reception of VM ID DTMF digits.  
3-82  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
System & Station  
Program 31 – Station Class of Service  
LED 15: Toshiba Stratagy, Stratagy DK and/or VP Integration (A Tone/D Tone)  
When enabled (LED 15 ON), sends an answer tone (DTMF A tone) to the Toshiba voice mail  
system when a station answers, and a disconnect tone (DTMF D tone) when a station disconnects.  
This allows Toshiba voice mail systems to respond quickly rather than waiting during long time-  
outs. If the Central Office (CO) provides an Automatic Release (AR) signal (sometimes referred to  
as Calling Party Control or Loop Supervision), D tone is also sent to disconnect VM ports when  
outside callers hang up (see Program 15-0 and 15-3).  
LED 14: Off-hook Call Announce (OCA) Handset or Speaker  
If a station is enabled to receive OCA (Program 31, LED 03 ON), LED 14 defines which type of  
OCA the telephone should receive: Headset/Handset (LED 14 ON) or Speaker (LED 14 OFF).  
Digital Telephones: Speaker OCA requires a DVSU and a special Program 03 code. Only digital  
telephones can receive Handset OCA. Handset OCA does not require DVSU or any other special  
hardware.  
Electronic Telephones: Speaker OCA requires a HVSU and three-pair wiring. Headset OCA does  
not require these items; Electronic or standard telephones cannot receive Handset OCA.  
LED 13: OCA Handset Warning Tone  
This option enables (LED 13 ON) or disables (LED 14 OFF) a warning-tone (one-second tone  
burst) for digital telephones that receive Headset OCA. Does not apply to Speaker OCA.  
LED 12: Pooled Line Button Operation, No Flash if No Ring  
When enabled (LED 12 ON) on telephones assigned to ring in Programs 81~89, incoming line  
calls in pooled line groups only flash on 3RROHGꢃ/LQH buttons. When disabled (LED 12 OFF), the  
Pooled Line LED flashes when an incoming line call is received – even if the telephone does not  
ring.  
LED 11: Busy Override (BOV) Tone  
Digital or Electronic Telephones: If a [DN] is busy and receives a call on an idle [DN] or CO  
button from another station or an outside line then BOV tone is sent. BOV tone can be continuous  
muted one-second rings (LED 11 ON) or two muted one-second rings three seconds apart (LED 11  
OFF).  
If all the [DN] button appearances of the called [DNs] are busy, the call will camp-on and the  
telephone receives two muted rings (camp-on tone) three seconds apart (only if LED 01 is ON for  
the telephone in Program ꢀ34).  
This BOV feature does not apply to CO lines that are ring transferred to a busy telephone - with or  
without an idle [DN] or CO /LQH button. In this case, the call is a camped-on call to the busy  
telephone.  
BOV and Camp-on muted ring tone frequency for digital and electronic telephones:  
1209Hz/modulated by 10Hz on CO line calls; 1209Hz/unmodulated on station-to-station calls.  
Standard Telephones: This feature does not apply to Camp-on tone sent to standard telephones.  
Standard telephones only receive two Camp-on tone bursts - three seconds apart, regardless of this  
BOV Tone feature’s setting. Also, you must run Program ꢀ34 to enable a standard telephone to  
receive Camp-on tone. Camp-on tone is sent when the busy standard telephone receives a  
transferred CO line call and when the busy standard telephone receives a direct call from a station  
or CO line.  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
3-83  
System & Station  
Program 31 – Station Class of Service  
BOV and Camp-on muted ring tone frequency for standard telephone:  
BOV tone is a 160ms burst of 1209Hz/ unmodulated, twice - three seconds apart.  
Camp-on tone is two one-second bursts of 1209Hz/interrupted by 160ms bursts, three seconds  
apart.  
LED 10: All Call Page Allowed-Digital and Electronic Telephones  
When enabled, (LED 10 ON) any station can be allowed to receive an All Call Page and still have  
the ability to initiate an All Call Page. Up to 120 stations can be can be assigned and paged at one  
time. All Call Page is treated as any other page group. See Program ꢀ30 for telephone page group  
assignments and Program 10-2, LED 15 for External Page with All Call Page option (see Program  
ꢀ34).  
LED 09: No Station plus CO Line Conference Origination by VM  
When enabled (LED 09 ON), prohibits VM ports from setting up conference calls with a station  
and the outside line party and tandem calls with two outside lines. Use this feature for VM (RSTU,  
RSTU2, PSTU, PESU, RDSU/RSTS, KSTU2, QSTU2) ports. This LED should be ON when VM/  
Auto Attendant does screened or supervised transfers and OFF if only doing blind transfers.  
If LED 09 is OFF or ON, station can still set up a conference call with an outside line and a VM  
port so the station user and outside party can listen to a message together (R3.2 and above).  
In DK release 3.2 software, VM ports are allowed to set up tandem calls with two CO lines and  
then hook-flash and hang-up to exit the call, allowing the two CO lines to remain connected. For  
this feature, LED 09 must be OFF for VM ports.  
LED 05~08: Voice Mail (VM) Groups 1~4  
The system allows the following VM station port groups to be configured for support of VM/auto  
attendant devices:  
One group is intended for each different device.  
System  
DK14  
Number of VM Groups  
LEDs  
05~06  
05~08  
1~2  
1~4  
DK424 and DK40i  
All standard telephone ports (RSTU, RSTU2, PSTU, PESU, RDSU/RSTS, KSTU2 and QSTU2)  
connected to a particular VM machine should be assigned to the same VM group (SMDI or DTMF  
Integration). The purpose of VM grouping is to allow efficient use of the message waiting (MW)  
set and cancel operations from the VM machine. Since each digital, electronic, and standard  
telephone can only have a maximum of four messages waiting, the VM device should set MW  
only once, regardless of how many messages there are.  
Assign all ports of each Program 31 VM Group to a unique Program ꢀ40 Distributed Hunt (DH)  
Group. Telephones should Call and/or Call Forward to the DH Group [DN] to connect to VM. In  
Programs 13 and ꢀ32, assign the lowest port in the Program 31 VM group as the message center.  
Do not assign the VM DH Group port as the message center.  
LED 04: Voice Mail (VM) to VM Call Blocking  
When enabled (LED 04 ON), prevents VM/auto attendant ports from call forwarding to other VM  
ports during screened or supervised voice mail transfers. Use this feature for all VM/auto attendant  
ports if their transferred calls are screened or supervised. Disable this feature (LED 04 OFF) for all  
VM/auto attendant ports if their calls are ring (blind) transferred.  
3-84  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
System & Station  
Program 31 – Station Class of Service  
LED 03: Off-hook Call Announce (OCA) Enabled (Receive)  
Enable this option (LED 03 ON) for any digital or electronic telephone requiring OCA.  
Telephones must be equipped for OCA. OCA is not available on standard telephones.  
This feature does not affect the station’s ability to originate OCA.  
Digital telephones: Speaker OCA requires a DVSU in the telephone. Also, the PDKU supporting  
OCA must have code 62 or 64 set in Program 03. Handset/headset OCA does not require extra  
hardware - only that Program 31 LED 03, and 14 be ON.  
Electronic telephones: Speaker OCA requires a HVSU/HVSI in the telephone and a third pair of  
wires from the PEKU. Electronic telephones cannot receive Handset OCA.  
LED 02: Handsfree No Warning  
As a default, on Voice First systems (Program 10-1, LED 1) a one-second warning tone is sent to a  
handsfree digital or electronic telephone to inform its user that someone is calling and that they can  
be heard. If the warning tone is not desired at the called digital or electronic telephone, this  
assignment can disable it, allowing silent room monitoring of the area surrounding the telephone.  
This will also prevent ringing the digital or electronic telephone as a ring-first situation. Initialized  
data activates the warning tone for all ports.  
LED 01: Handsfree Disabled  
It is possible to disable the internal call Handsfree Answerback function on any digital or  
electronic telephone. This option ensures privacy (no room monitoring) when enabled on the  
called station but it prevents the called station from answering an internal call hands free. The  
0LFURSKQꢃ&XWRII button (Program 39) can be used instead of this feature to allow the user to  
enable/disable Handsfree Answerback, as desired.  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
3-85  
System & Station  
Program *31 – Group Pickup Assignments  
Program *31 – Group Pickup Assignments  
Processor Type: DK14, DK40i, All RCTUs  
Program Type:  
Station  
Initialized Default: All LEDs OFF  
ꢀ ꢀꢃ ꢀꢃ ꢀꢃ  
ꢀ
Station Logical Port Number  
Light LED Buttons for the port specified in the last  
step. In the table below, mark an “X” for all LED  
Buttons which should be lit.  
Enter the station logical port which will  
be assigned to a pickup group or groups.  
To add a port range, enter XXXꢀXXX  
(low port ꢀ high port).  
Processor Type  
DK14  
Port Range  
000~009  
000~027  
000~031  
Pickup Groups  
Processor Type  
RCTUBA/BB  
RCTUC/D  
Port Range  
000~079  
000~239  
000~335  
Pickup Groups  
8
20  
20  
20  
DK40i  
16  
20  
RCTUA  
RCTUE/F  
Port  
Pickup Group  
LED  
Pickup Group 20  
Pickup Group 19  
Pickup Group 18  
Pickup Group 17  
Pickup Group 16  
Pickup Group 15  
Pickup Group 14  
Pickup Group 13  
Pickup Group 12  
Pickup Group 11  
Pickup Group 10  
Pickup Group 9  
Pickup Group 8  
Pickup Group 7  
Pickup Group 6  
Pickup Group 5  
Pickup Group 4  
Pickup Group 6  
Pickup Group 2  
Pickup Group 1  
20  
19  
18  
17  
16  
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
10  
09  
08  
07  
06  
05  
04  
03  
02  
01  
Program *31 Overview  
Stations can be divided into as many as 20 pickup groups (see the legend above the record sheet).  
Station users can pick up calls (internal or line) that are ringing any station within their group by  
dialing a single access code (or with a &DOOꢃ3LFNXS button assigned with Code 480 in Program  
39), and pick up calls that are ringing stations in other groups by dialing selected access codes.  
Stations can belong to more than one group. (See Program 05 for access codes.) This feature also  
picks up ringing transfer and hold recall calls, but does not pick up held calls or selectively by  
directory number.  
To pickup held or ringing [PDN] and/or [PhDN] calls selectively, use the ꢄꢌꢄꢅ + XXX pickup  
access code (where XXX is the [PDN] or [PhDN]).  
3-86  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
System & Station  
Program 32 – Automatic Preference  
Program 32 – Automatic Preference  
Processor Type: DK14, DK40i, All RCTUs  
Program Type:  
Station  
Initialized Default: Assigns Ringing Code 1 and Automatic Off-hook (Preference) Code 00 for all ports  
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ  
SELECT = Station Logical Port Number  
Automatic Preference Code:  
00 = No selection  
01 = [PDN]  
02 = Lowest CO, Tie, or DID line  
11~26 = 01~16 Line groups  
Enter the port number of the station having  
preference defined. To add a port range,  
enter XXXꢀXXX (low port ꢀ high port).  
DATA = Ringing Code  
(See legend below for maximum line groups.)  
0 = Disable Ringing Line Preference  
1 = Enable Ringing Line Preference  
Processor  
Type  
Port Range  
Port Reference Number  
Number of CO Line  
Processor  
Type  
Port Range  
Port Reference Number  
Number of CO Line  
Groups  
01~04  
01~08  
01~08  
Groups  
01~08  
01~16  
01~16  
DK14  
DK40i  
000~007  
000~027  
000~031  
RCTUBA/BB  
RCTUC/D  
RCTUE/F  
000~079  
000~239  
000~335  
RCTUA  
Automatic  
Preference Code  
Automatic  
Preference Code  
Port Number  
Ringing Code  
Port Number  
Ringing Code  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
3-87  
System & Station  
Program 32 – Automatic Preference  
Program 32 Overview  
This program defines which [PDN] or CO line a digital (cordless, corded, or Strata AirLink  
wireless) and electronic telephone will be automatically connected to when the telephone handset  
is taken off-hook or the 6SNU button is used.  
Note Strata AirLink wireless handsets do not have a 6SNU button.  
The lowest [PDN], lowest CO line, or Line Group is selected only if the telephone is not ringing  
when it is taken off-hook (no 6SNU pressed). If a telephone is ringing, the [PDN] Auto Preference,  
or outgoing CO line is canceled. In this case, no selection is made if Ring Line Preference is  
disabled; the ring line is selected if Ringing Line Preference is enabled.  
Automatic Preference for digital, electronic, or Strata AirLink wireless telephones via handset off-  
hook or the 6SNU button is the automatic connection to lines, or the [PDN] of a telephone under  
various conditions.  
With Ringing Line Preference, a digital, electronic, or Strata AirLink wireless telephone user by  
going off-hook (or by pressing the 6SNU button) may be automatically connected to the lowest line  
ringing in without having to press a CO /LQH button or dial an access code.  
If no lines are ringing and an electronic or digital telephone goes off-hook, the station can be  
automatically connected to the [PDN] or to a line. The line connected can be the lowest numbered  
line available on the telephone or the highest idle line from a selected group.  
Notes  
●
●
●
Program 32 does not apply to standard telephones. To allow system features to be accessed,  
standard telephones always receive system internal dial tone when originating calls.  
If ringing line preference is not selected, no auto preference selection will occur when a station  
goes off hook during an incoming ring condition.  
Toshiba cordless telephones can have [PDN] (Code 01) selected for Auto Preference so the  
user will get system dial tone when pressing the 7$/. button from the idle state, or a line or  
line group can be selected for Auto Preference if CO dial tone should be accessed when the  
7$/. button is pressed.  
●
Strata AirLink wireless handsets must have Code 01 assigned to receive system dial tone after  
pressing &$//ꢃin the idle mode. A line or line group can be selected instead, if CO dial tone  
should be accessed when &$// is pressed.  
3-88  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
System & Station  
Program *32 – RS-232 Voice Mail Message Center Port  
Program *32 – RS-232 Voice Mail Message Center Port  
Processor Type: DK14, DK40i, All RCTUs  
Program Type:  
Station  
Initialized Default: Blank  
ꢀ ꢀꢃ ꢀꢃ ꢀꢃ  
ꢀ
SELECT = Station Logical Port Number  
(see ranges below)  
VM PORT = Voice Mail Message Port  
Enter the Voice Mail Message Center Port  
number (see ranges below) that should be  
assigned to each station.  
Enter the port number having a Message  
Center assigned. Enter all station ports  
using the same Voice Mail machine.  
Enter the lowest KSTU2, QSTU2 or RSTU2 port  
number that is connected to the VM machine.  
To add a port range, enter XXXꢀXXX  
(low port ꢀ high port).  
If VM ports are assigned to a Distributed Hunt  
(DH) Group in Program *40, enter the port  
number of the first DH Group member, not the  
DH Group port (900~915). See example following  
Processor Type  
DK14  
Port Range  
008~009  
008~027  
000~031  
Processor Type  
Port Range  
000~079  
000~239  
000~335  
RCTUBA/BB  
RCTUC/D  
RCTUE/F  
DK40i  
RCTUA  
Port  
MW Center Port  
Port  
MW Center Port  
Port  
MW Center Port  
Port  
MW Center Port  
Program *32 Overview  
This program assigns which Voice Mail Message Center port number will be called when a station  
user presses the flashing 0VJ button. When using SMDI or DTMF voice mail integration, the  
Voice Mail Port Message Center must be assigned for each station. The Message Center port must  
be the lowest voice mail standard telephone port in the Program 31 Voice Mail Group. It is  
normally the same port for all stations.  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
3-89  
System & Station  
Program 33 – [PDN]/ [PhDN] Station Hunting (Voice Calls Only)  
Program 33 – [PDN]/ [PhDN] Station Hunting (Voice  
Calls Only)  
Processor Type: DK14, DK40i, All RCTUs  
Program Type:  
Station  
Initialized Default: Blank  
ꢀ ꢀꢃ ꢀꢃ ꢀꢃ  
SELECT = [PDN] or [PhDN] Port  
Reference Number of the “hunt-from”  
station.  
HUNT TO = [PDN] or [PhDN] Port Reference  
Number of the “hunt-to” station.  
Press LED Button 01 to delete digit from the  
“hunt-to” port.  
To add a port range, enter XXXꢀXXX  
(low port ꢀ high port).  
Processor  
DK14  
[PDN] Port Range  
000~009  
[PhDN] Port Range  
500~509  
Processor  
[PDN] Port Range  
000~079  
[PhDN] Port Range  
RCTUBA/BB  
RCTUC/D  
RCTUE/F  
500~579  
500~739  
500~835  
DK40i  
000~027  
500~527  
000~239  
RCTUA  
000~031  
500~531  
000~335  
Hunt From  
Hunt To  
Hunt From  
Hunt To  
Hunt From  
Hunt To  
Hunt From  
Hunt To  
Program 33 Overview  
Program 33 assigns Station Hunting to [PDNs] or [PhDNs]. When a called station is busy, the  
Station Hunting feature will ring the alternate “hunt to” [PDNs] or [PhDNs] defined in this  
program. If the “hunt-to” [DN] is busy, the system will try to ring the next “hunt-to” [DN], and so  
on.  
If a “hunt-to” [DN] is in the Call Forward mode, the call forward will have priority over the hunt.  
A ground/loop start CO line will hunt from a [PDN] or [PhDN] only if it has been assigned to  
immediate ring at the owner station of the [PDN] or [PhDN] exclusively (in Programs 81, 84, or 87  
and ꢀ81, ꢀ84, or ꢀ87).  
3-90  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
System & Station  
Program 33 – [PDN]/ [PhDN] Station Hunting (Voice Calls Only)  
On Ring-first systems, if a [PDN] appears on more than one button (on owner’s telephone), the  
DK will not hunt until all appearances of the [PDN] are in use.  
On Voice-first systems, the system will hunt for an available station if any one of the [PDN]  
appearances is busy.  
Program 33 - Example  
Action (press buttons+LED buttons)  
LCD Response  
1
1. Use the programming LCD electronic or digital telephone connected to  
physical port 005 - circuit 6.  
No. N-N  
Jan 20 Sun  
06:43  
Make sure the programming button strip template is installed on the  
programming telephone. (See “Program 38 Digital and Electronic  
Telephone Keystrip Type” on Page 3-109.)  
2.  
Program Mode  
Program = 33  
ꢀꢄꢀꢄꢂꢀꢅꢀꢆ  
Enter programming mode. (Do not press [DN] button.)  
3. 6SNUꢃꢇ6SHDNHUꢈꢃꢆꢆꢃ+ROG  
Access Program 33. System beeps after 6SNUꢃꢇ6SHDNHUꢈ is pressed  
Data Store  
to indicate program number may be entered.  
4. 6SNUꢃꢇ6SHDNHUꢈ  
33 Select =  
Prepare the system for a station port selection.  
5. ꢁꢁꢁ~ꢆꢆꢌ or ꢌꢁꢁ~ꢍꢆꢌ  
33 Select = (000~335)  
Hunt To =  
Select the port number of the Hunt From station. A range of ports can  
be entered as specified on the record sheet. After the Hunt From port  
is entered, press the ꢄ button. Do not press ꢄ when entering a range.  
6. ꢁꢁꢁ~ꢆꢆꢌ or ꢌꢁꢁ~ꢍꢆꢌ  
33 Select = (000~335)  
Hunt To = (000~335)  
Enter the port number of the Hunt To point, as recorded on the system  
record sheet. Press LED button 01 to delete a digit from Hunt To point  
ports.  
7. +ROG  
33 Select = (000~335)  
Data Programmed  
Secure data in system programming.  
8. 6SNUꢃꢇ6SHDNHUꢈ  
33 Select = ##  
Prepare system for another selection (go back to Step 5), or exit  
Program 33 (continue with Step 9).  
9. ꢄꢄꢃ+ROG  
33 Select =  
Secure Program 33 data in system memory.  
Data Programmed  
10. 6SNUꢃꢇ6SHDNHUꢈ  
Program =  
Exit Program 33. Enter another program number or exit programming  
mode (go to Step 11). Speaker beeps to indicate it is exiting  
Program 33.  
11. ꢄꢄꢃ+ROG  
No. N-N  
06:58  
Exit programming mode.  
Jan 20 Sun  
1. N-N = Program telephone [PDN]  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
3-91  
System & Station  
Program *33 – [PhDN] Owner Telephone Assignment  
Program *33 – [PhDN] Owner Telephone Assignment  
Processor Type: DK14, DK40i, All RCTUs  
Program Type:  
Station  
Initialized Default: Blanks (no data)  
ꢀꢃ ꢀꢃ ꢀꢃ ꢀꢃ  
ꢀ
SELECT = [PhDN] Port Reference Number  
Enter the [PDN] Owner Station Logical Port  
Number.  
[PhDN] Port  
[PhDN] Port  
Reference Number  
Processor  
[PDN] Port Range  
Reference Number  
Processor  
[PDN] Port Range  
DK14  
DK40i  
500~509  
500~527  
500~531  
000~009  
000~027  
000~031  
RCTUBA/BB  
RCTUC/D  
RCTUE/F  
500~579  
000~079  
000~239  
000~335  
500~739  
RCTUA  
500~835  
[PhDN] Port  
Reference  
Number  
Owner Telephone  
(Program 04)  
Port Number  
[PhDN] Port  
Reference  
Number  
Owner Telephone  
(Program 04)  
Port Number  
[PhDN] Port  
Reference  
Number  
Owner Telephone  
(Program 04)  
Port Number  
3-92  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
System & Station  
Program *33 – [PhDN] Owner Telephone Assignment  
Program *33 Overview  
This program assigns each [PhDN] to a designated “Owner” telephone. Each [PhDN] must be  
assigned to a designated “Owner” telephone and that [PhDN] must be assigned (using Program 39)  
to appear on the owner telephone. If a [PhDN] is not assigned to an “Owner” telephone, it cannot  
receive calls (caller will receive reorder tone) but it can be used to originate calls.  
If the [PhDN] owner telephone is unplugged, the [PhDN] is busy (vacant) when called, unless CF-  
All Call is set, in which case, it will forward. A telephone can be assigned as “Owner” of up to  
eight [PhDNs].  
[PhDN] “Owner” telephones have the following attributes for the [PhDNs] that it is assigned to  
own:  
♦
♦
Set Call Forward for all [PhDNs] that the telephone owns.  
Set Call Forward to a VM Mail Box and Message Retrieve ID codes (#656/#657), independent  
of the telephone’s Voice Mail assignments. This “CF to” VM Box can be the same as the  
Owner telephone’s VM Box or any other VM Box, including a dedicated VM Box for the  
[PhDN].  
♦
♦
♦
Have up to four [PhDN] Message Waiting (MW) LEDs (Program 39, flexible button). This  
[PhDN] MW button indicates that the [PhDN] has a message waiting from voice mail or  
another [DN] - again independent of the telephone’s fixed Msg LED.  
Store ANI and/or Caller ID information for abandon calls directed to the [PhDN]. The [PhDN]  
Owner telephone must be assigned “Abandon Call Memory” in Program ꢀ51 if the [PhDN]  
rings on more than one telephone.  
Can receive OCA calls to the [PhDN].  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
3-93  
System & Station  
Program 34 – Hold Recall Timing  
Program 34 – Hold Recall Timing  
Processor Type: DK14, DK40i, All RCTUs  
Program Type:  
Station  
Initialized Default: Assigns a Hold Recall Time of 032 seconds to all ports  
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ  
SELECT = Station Logical Port Number  
HUNT TIME = Seconds  
Enter the port number having its Hold  
Recall Time defined.  
Enter the number of seconds the system will  
wait (three digits).  
Enter 000 for no Hold Recall. Enter 011~160 for  
11 to 160 seconds.  
To add a port range, enter XXXꢀXXX  
(low port ꢀ high port).  
Processor  
DK14  
Port Range  
Processor  
Port Range  
000~079  
000~239  
000~335  
000~009  
000~027  
000~031  
RCTUBA/BB  
RCTUC/D  
RCTUE/F  
DK40i  
RCTUA  
Port  
Seconds  
Port  
Seconds  
Port  
Seconds  
Port  
Seconds  
Program 34 Overview  
Each station can have a different time (from 011 to 160 seconds) from the point of placing a call on  
hold to the point of recall. Initialized data assigns a recall time of 032 seconds to all ports.  
3-94  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
System & Station  
Program *34 – Station Class Of Service  
Program *34 – Station Class Of Service  
Processor Type: DK14, DK40i, All RCTUs  
Program Type:  
Station  
Initialized Default: LED 01 ON for all ports  
ꢀ ꢀꢃ ꢀꢃ ꢀꢃ  
ꢀ
SELECT = Station Logical Port Number  
LED = Select LEDs to light for the port  
specified in the last step. Mark an “X” in the  
table below for all LEDs which should be lit.  
Enter the port number(s) being defined.  
To add a port range, enter XXXꢀXXX  
(low port ꢀ high port).  
Processor  
DK14  
Port Range  
000~009  
000~027  
000~031  
Processor  
Port Range  
000~079  
000~239  
000~335  
RCTUBA/BB  
RCTUC/D  
RCTUE/F  
DK40i  
RCTUA  
Port  
Feature  
LED  
20  
19  
18  
17  
16  
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
10  
09  
08  
07  
06  
05  
04  
03  
02  
Camp-on Tone to standard telephone,  
DKT, or EKT handset/Spkr  
01  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
3-95  
System & Station  
Program *34 – Station Class Of Service  
Program *34 Overview  
Program *34 assigns Camp-on tone to standard telephones.  
A standard telephone can receive (LED 01 ON), or be blocked (LED 01 OFF) from receiving  
Camp-on tone depending on how LED 01 is programmed for its standard station port.  
When LED 01 is ON for a standard telephone: Camp-on tone is sent when the busy standard  
telephone receives a transferred CO line call and when the busy standard receives a direct call  
from a station or CO line.  
An optional Camp-on busy tone burst can be sent to standard telephone handsets/headsets (LED  
01 ON). Turn LED 01 OFF for all standard telephone ports connected to voice mail and/or auto  
attendant devices.  
Camp on tone to a standard telephone handset is:  
♦
♦
Two 160 ms bursts of 1209 Hz, 3-seconds apart (internal, transferred, or Tie line calls)  
Two 1-second bursts of 1209 Hz, (interrupted by 160 ms), 3-seconds apart (external CO or  
DID line call)  
If this option is disabled on Toshiba digital or electronic telephones (LED 01 OFF), the telephone  
will not receive camp-on tone on direct DID calls or transferred CO line calls if there is not an idle  
[DN] or /LQH button to receive the call, but the telephone will continue to receive BOV tone on  
direct internal or CO line calls, providing there is a [DN] or /LQH button available for the call to  
ring.  
Also, if a busy DKT or EKT receives any type of call and there is not an idle [DN] or /LQH button  
available for the call to ring, the DKT or EKT will receive camp-on tone (if LED 01 is ON) or will  
not receive camp-on or BOV tone (LED 01 OFF).  
3-96  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
System & Station  
Program 35 – Station Class of Service  
Program 35 – Station Class of Service  
Processor Type: DK14, DK40i, All RCTUs  
Program Type:  
Station  
Initialized Default: LED 01, 02, 04, 05, 16 are ON, all other LEDs OFF.  
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ  
SELECT = Station Logical Port Number  
Enter the port number(s) being defined.  
LED = Select LEDs to light for the port  
specified in the last step. Mark an “X” in the  
table below for all LEDs which should be ON.  
To add a port range, enter XXXꢀXXX  
(low port ꢀ high port).  
Maximum LCD Phones With  
Maximum LCD Phones With  
Personal Messages  
Processor  
Port Range  
Processor  
Port Range  
Personal Messages  
DK14  
DK40i  
000~009  
000~027  
000~031  
8
RCTUBA/BB  
RCTUC/D  
RCTUE/F  
000~079  
000~239  
000~335  
32  
96  
96  
16  
16  
RCTUA  
Port  
Feature  
LED  
Busy Station Transfer  
Busy Station Ringing  
Automatic Hold  
20  
19  
18  
DKT 2000 Telephone  
Continuous DTMF Tones  
OFF  
17  
No CF/NA Handsfree or OCA  
Not used  
16  
15  
Toll Restriction After Answer  
Toll Restriction After Answer  
Not used  
14  
13  
12~07  
Disable Hold Display  
Scrolling (Release 3.2 and  
higher)  
06  
LCD Personal Message  
(10~19) Allowed  
05  
04  
03  
Message Waiting (RCV)  
Message Waiting Lamp  
Standard. Telephones  
LCD Type/32-ON/12-OFF  
LCD Display  
02  
01  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
3-97  
System & Station  
Program 35 – Station Class of Service  
Program 35 Overview  
LED 19: Busy Station Transfer (BST), LED 20 / Busy Station Ringing (BSR)  
BST and BSR operate together to ensure that a busy digital or electronic telephone station always  
receives transferred line calls along with LED and tone indications. The station or Voice Mail  
(VM)/auto attendant device that transfers the call must be programmed with BST (LED 20 ON)  
and the station port that receives it must have BSR (LED 19 ON).  
When a busy station with BSR receives a transfer from a station or VM/auto attendant with BST,  
there is a muted repetitive BOV tone (see Program 31, LED 11) at the busy station; if there is an  
idle [DN], its LED will flash at the ringing rate until the station transferring the call hangs up.  
When it does hang up, or if there is not an idle [DN], the line call then camps-on to the busy  
station. The busy station is alerted of the camp-on by a camp-on tone (see Program *34), the CO  
line LED flashes at the exclusive hold rate, and a message (“CAMP-ON X”, X = the line number)  
appears on the LCD (if equipped).  
Among other applications, a VM/auto attendant device that transfers calls to a typically busy  
answering position station benefits from this program. Some auto attendant devices cannot transfer  
a call to a busy station if BST and BSR are not activated.  
Notes  
●
A BST station receives ringback tone, instead of busy tone, when transferring a call to a busy  
BSR station.  
●
●
Do not assign BST/BSR to built-in Auto Attendant announcement ports.  
BST (LED 20 ON) should be assigned to all ACD agent telephones and BSR (LED 19 ON)  
should be assigned to all ACD supervisor telephones to allow agent assistance calls to  
supervisor telephones that are busy.  
●
●
LEDs 01, 02, and 04 must be ON to allow the Telephone’s Message Waiting LED to function  
with voice mail—even if the Telephone is not an LCD type.  
Dial out (with or without Toll Restriction) must be allowed to use Speed Dial Buttons after  
answering incoming calls. If a CO line is put on hold, Toll Restriction is applied to stations  
that are restricted when the held line is picked up by a toll restricted station. If “Dial out with  
T.R.” is enabled, the CO line will drop if a station dials a restricted number after answering an  
incoming call, or if any digit is dialed with “dial out not allowed.”  
LED 18: Automatic Hold  
When enabled, (LED 18 ON), station users with CO /LQH buttons can place a CO line or [DN] call  
on hold, then call another line or station just by pressing another CO /LQH or [DN] button and  
dialing the number. If Automatic Hold is not allowed (LED 18 OFF), users can put calls on hold  
and place calls, but they must press the +ROG button before accessing another line or [DN].  
Notes  
●
CO line or internal calls that appear on the [DN] buttons will automatically hold when  
accessing another line.  
●
Toshiba recommends that the 5HOHDVHꢃDQGꢃ$QV button be provided via Program 39 to  
telephones programmed for Auto Hold.  
3-98  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
System & Station  
Program 35 – Station Class of Service  
LED 17: Continuous DTMF Tones Off  
2000-series digital telephones can send DTMF tones for as long as station users press their buttons  
(80 msec. minimum). This feature can be disabled (LED 17 ON). If it is disabled, DTMF tones  
sent by these telephones will be either 80 or 160 milliseconds depending on the selection made  
with Program 10-1, LED 04 and Program 10-2, LED 06.  
Note PDKU1 does not support continuous DTMF tones on 2000-series digital telephones.  
LED 16: No Call Forward/No Answer on Handsfree Answerback  
When enabled (LED 16 ON), a Handsfree Answerback call to an idle station in the Call Forward  
No-Answer or Call Forward-Busy/No Answer mode is not forwarded. If the system is  
Programmed for Voice first (Program 10-1 and 10-2, LED 01 OFF), Voice Announce calls do not  
Call Forward No-Answer; however, calls will call forward busy. This prevents the call from being  
forwarded 8-60 seconds after the called party has been talking in the Handsfree Answerback  
mode.  
Outside calls and busy internal calls to the station continue to forward with this feature set. If the  
system is set for Tone First, calls will call forward on Busy and No Answer.  
Notes  
●
The caller can press the RING Soft Key on digital LCD telephones or press ꢂ on digital or  
electronic telephones to activate Call Forward on Voice Announce calls.  
●
OCA calls do not Call Forward No Answer in any case.  
LED 15  
Not used at this time.  
LEDs 13 and 14: Toll Restriction After Answer  
These two LEDs determine whether or not a toll restricted telephone user is allowed to use one  
touch speed dial buttons after answering an incoming CO line call. LED 13 and 14 should be  
turned ON for Toll Restricted Telephones that must answer incoming CO line calls and use 6'  
(speed dial) buttons programmed to perform functions that Hold or Park calls and access the page  
system automatically.  
LED 13  
OFF  
LED 14  
OFF  
Description  
Not allowed to use Speed Dial after answering a line call.  
Allowed to use Speed Dial buttons but subject to toll restriction tables.  
Allowed to use Speed Dial buttons and not subject to toll restriction.  
ON  
OFF  
ON  
OFF  
Initialized data sets both LEDs 13 and 14 off for all telephone users (not allowed to use Speed Dial  
buttons after answering incoming CO line calls).  
LED 07~12  
Not used at this time.  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
3-99  
System & Station  
Program 35 – Station Class of Service  
LED 06: Disable Hold Display Scrolling (Release 3.2)  
If LED 06 is ON, Hold Display scrolling is disabled. Also, a telephone LCD cannot display which  
CO lines are on hold on a [PDN] if the 6FUROO button is pressed. Hold Display causes the [DN]  
button LED, of the line displayed on the LCD, to flash at a fast rate. If LED 06 is OFF, Hold  
Display Scrolling is enabled. Prior to Release 3.2, Hold Display Scrolling was always enabled.  
Hold Display Scrolling requires an LCD telephone.  
LED 05: LCD Individual Message  
This option defines which ports can allows LCD digital and electronic telephones to store up to 10  
personal messages. It offers the option of entering alphanumeric memos for each of the LCD’s  
station speed dial numbers. See the record sheet legend for the maximum stations that can have  
this option:  
A low port must be disabled (LED 05 OFF) before adding a port above the initialized ports.  
LED 04: Message Waiting (RCV)  
If the message waiting indication is not desired on an electronic, digital or standard telephone, this  
program can be used to deny it. This does not affect that station’s ability to send a message waiting  
indication to another station ([PDN] or [PhDN]). Do not use this option to enable/disable MW  
lamps on standard telephones; use LED 03 below for standard telephones.  
LED 03: Standard Telephone Message Waiting Lamp Enable  
This option is used to identify which station ports are connected to Standard Telephones (2500 or  
500 type telephones) that have Message Waiting Lamps. LED 03 should be turned ON for all  
Standard Telephones ports that should support Standard Telephone Message Waiting lamps; LED  
03 must be turned OFF for all other station ports including digital and electronic telephone ports  
that support Message Waiting LEDs. This also applies to Voice Mail ports.  
Important! Standard telephones that require the Message Waiting Lamp functions must be  
connected to an RSTU2 PCB. Only one standard telephone with Message Waiting  
Lamp is allowed to be connected to each RSTU2 port.  
LED 02: LCD Type 32/12  
Digital and 6000/6500-series LCD electronic telephones have 32-character displays. Therefore,  
assignments should be left in the initialized state of 32 characters. LED 02 must be ON to receive  
the voice mail message waiting indication.  
LED 01: LCD Display  
This option should be used (LED 01 ON) for all stations (even non-LCD), unless it is desired to  
disable the station's LCD and message waiting functions.  
3-100  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
System & Station  
Program 36 – Fixed Call Forward  
Program 36 – Fixed Call Forward  
Processor Type: DK14, DK40i, All RCTUs  
Program Type:  
Station  
Initialized Default: Does not assign a Fixed Call Forward location to any port  
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ  
SELECT = Station Logical Port Number  
FORWARD TO TEL = Port Number  
Enter the port number of the station that  
needs a Fixed Call Forward location  
assigned.  
Enter the port number of the [PDN], [PhDN] or  
DH [DN] that will be call forwarded to when the  
button is pressed.  
To add a port range, enter XXXꢀXXX  
(low port ꢀ high port).  
[PhDNs] or DH [DNs] can be entered with DK  
Release 3.2 and above software only.  
[PDN] Port [PhDN] Port  
DH Group  
Ports  
[PDN] Port  
Range  
[PhDN] Port  
Range  
DH Group  
Ports  
Processor  
Processor  
Range  
Range  
DK14  
DK40i  
000~009  
000~027  
000~031  
500~509  
500~527  
500~531  
900~915  
900~915  
900~915  
RCTUBA/BB  
RCTUC/D  
RCTUE/F  
000~079  
000~239  
000~335  
500~579  
500~739  
500~835  
900~915  
900~915  
900~915  
RCTUA  
Port  
Forward to Tel Port  
Port  
Forward to Tel Port  
Port  
Forward to Tel Port  
Port  
Forward to Tel Port  
Program 36 Overview  
Fixed Call Forwarding is different from other station Call Forwarding options. It is fixed in terms  
of the destination [PDN] which is assigned in this program. The station user cannot change the  
Fixed Call Forward destination, unlike the other station Call Forwarding options. If Fixed Call  
Forwarding is set on a station, the station does not ring and all calls forward immediately.  
Note Telephones and attendant consoles must have a )L[HGꢒ&DOOꢃ)RUZDUG button to activate  
this feature (See Programs 39 and 59).  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
3-101  
System & Station  
Program *36 – System NT Button Lock Password Changing Station Assignment  
Program *36 – System NT Button Lock Password  
Changing Station Assignment  
Processor Type: DK14, DK40i, All RCTUs  
Program Type:  
Station  
Initialized Default: 000  
ꢀ ꢀꢃ ꢀꢃ ꢀꢃ  
ꢀ
Tenant Number 1~4  
DATA = Station port designated as Night Transfer Lock  
Password Change Station for selected tenant.  
Processor  
Port Range  
000~009  
000~027  
000~031  
Processor  
RCTUBA/BB  
RCTUC/D  
RCTUE/F  
Port Range  
000~079  
000~239  
000~335  
DK14  
DK40i  
RCTUA  
Tenant Number  
NT Lock Station or Console Port  
1
2
3
4
Program *36 Overview  
Attendant Consoles and stations assigned in this program can change the System Night Transfer  
(NT) Lock password by dialing the sequence below:  
Tenant Number 1~4  
Night Transfer Lock Password  
Only one station or console can change the code. System/Tenant CO lines can be locked into the  
Day, Day2, or Night ringing mode only after the NT Lock password is entered. Locking the system  
into a particular ringing mode adds security to line call routing which prevents accidental or  
mischievous changing of the system ringing mode.  
Any telephone or an attendant console can lock the system into a ringing mode. The telephone or  
console must have both a 1LJKWꢃ7UDQVIHUꢃand an 1LJKWꢃ7UDQVIHUꢃ/RFN button and the person  
locking the system must enter the password.  
NT lock related programs include:  
Program 39  
Program 59  
Program *36  
Station Flexible Button Assignments – 1LJKWꢃ7UDQVIHUꢃandꢃ  
1LJKWꢃ7UDQVIHUꢃ/RFN buttons  
Attendant Console Flexible Button Codes – 1LJKWꢃ7UDQVIHUꢃand  
1LJKWꢃ7UDQVIHUꢃ/RFN buttons  
NT Lock Station Assignment. Program *36 is not required to assign  
attendant consoles to NT Lock functions  
Program *15  
Program 74  
Program 77-3  
CO Line Tenant Assignments  
System NT Lock Password Assignment  
Tenant Night Ring Over External Page Assignments  
3-102  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
System & Station  
Program 37 – Ring Transfer (Camp-on) Recall Time  
Program 37 – Ring Transfer (Camp-on) Recall Time  
Processor Type: DK14, DK40i, All RCTUs  
Program Type: Station  
Initialized Default: Assigns Ring Transfer Recall Time of 32 seconds to all ports  
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ  
SELECT = Station Logical Port Number  
HOLD TIME = Port Number  
Enter the port number that needs a Ring Transfer Recall  
Time assigned.  
Enter the Ring Transfer Recall Time (three  
digits, in seconds)  
Enter 011~999 for 11 to 999 seconds.  
To add a port range, enter XXXꢀXXX (low port ꢀ high port).  
Processor  
DK14  
Port Range  
000~009  
000~027  
000~031  
Processor  
Port Range  
000~079  
000~239  
000~335  
RCTUBA/BB  
RCTUC/D  
RCTUE/F  
DK40i  
RCTUA  
Port  
Hold Time  
Port  
Hold Time  
Port  
Hold Time  
Port  
Hold Time  
Program 37 Overview  
If a busy or ringing station does not answer a call sent to it via ring (blind) call transfer (lines or  
[DNs]), the station originating the ring (blind) transfer is recalled after an amount of time  
determined with this program. This time (011~999 seconds) is set independently for each  
originating station port. Initialized data sets all stations for a 032-second recall time. Ring Transfer  
must first be enabled for the system with Program 10-1, LED 07 ON.  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
3-103  
System & Station  
Program *37 – Park Recall Timing  
Program *37 – Park Recall Timing  
Processor Type: DK14, DK40i, All RCTUs  
Program Type:  
Station  
Initialized Default: Assigns Ring Transfer Recall Time of 32 seconds to all ports  
ꢀ ꢀꢃ ꢀꢃ ꢀꢃ  
ꢀ
SELECT = Station Logical Port Number  
PARK TIME = Seconds  
Enter the port number having its Park Recall  
Time assigned.  
Enter the number of seconds the system will  
wait (three digits). Enter 011~999 for 11 to 999  
seconds.  
To add a port range, enter XXXꢀXXX  
(low port ꢀ high port).  
Processor  
DK14  
Port Range  
000~009  
000~027  
000~031  
Processor  
Port Range  
000~079  
000~239  
000~335  
RCTUBA/BB  
RCTUC/D  
RCTUE/F  
DK40i  
RCTUA  
Port  
Seconds  
Port  
Seconds  
Port  
Seconds  
Port  
Seconds  
Program *37 Overview  
Each station can have a different duration (from 011 to 999 seconds) from the time of parking a  
call to the time the parked party recalls the station. Initialized data assigns a park recall time of 032  
seconds to all ports.  
3-104  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
System & Station  
Program 38 – Digital and Electronic Telephone Keystrip Type  
Program 38 – Digital and Electronic Telephone  
Keystrip Type  
Processor Type: DK14, DK40i, All RCTUs  
Program Type: Station  
Initialized Default: Assigns Code 31 to all ports  
Important!  
If you only want to view Program 38  
data, do not press  
, press  
will change Program 39  
.
Pressing  
assignments.  
...or  
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ  
SELECT = Port Number  
BUTTON MENU = Code  
Enter the appropriate code:  
Enter the port number of the station  
that needs a keystrip defined.  
Code 21 = 10-button telephone  
Code 31 = 20-button (A) telephone  
Code 32 = 20-button (B) telephone  
Code 33 = 20-button (C) telephone  
To add a port range, enter XXXꢀXXX  
(low port ꢀ high port).  
Processor  
DK14  
Port Range  
000~009  
000~027  
000~031  
Processor  
RCTUBA/BB  
RCTUC/D  
RCTUE/F  
Port Range  
000~079  
000~239  
000~335  
DK40i  
RCTUA  
Port  
Button Menu  
Port  
Button Menu  
Port  
Button Menu  
Port  
Button Menu  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
3-105  
System & Station  
Program 38 – Digital and Electronic Telephone Keystrip Type  
Program 38 Overview  
Four telephone button arrangements are provided (see the Program 38 System Record Sheet). It is  
best to start with one of these four, and then move on to Program 39, where individual buttons may  
be programmed. Initialized data treats all digital telephone ports as 20-button types with 17 CO  
/LQH buttons, one [PDN] button, one 'Rꢃ1RWꢃ'LVWXUE button, and the 6SHHGꢃ'LDO button. See  
the System Record Sheet for electronic telephone arrangements.  
Important!  
●
Always complete Program 38 before proceeding to Program 39.  
●
DKAdmin will program a Pause on buttons 11~20 on 10-key telephones.  
Assignments for 2000-Series Digital Telephone Keystrips  
1
All Call  
Voice Page  
Speed Dial  
(for DK40i only) ...or  
1
Line 9  
Line 8  
Line 7  
Line 6  
Line 5  
Line 4  
Line 3  
Line 2  
Line 1  
[PDN]  
Speed Dial  
Do Not Disturb  
Line 7  
Do Not Disturb  
2
Line 17  
Line 6  
Line 16  
Line 15  
Line 14  
Line 13  
Line 12  
Line 11  
Line 10  
Line 5  
Line 4  
Line 3  
Line 2  
Line 1  
[PDN]  
Code 21 – 10-Button  
Code 31 (Default) – 20-Button (A)  
1
1
Line 9  
Line 8  
Line 7  
Line 6  
Line 5  
Line 4  
Line 3  
Line 2  
Line 1  
[PDN]  
SD14  
SD13  
SD12  
SD11  
SD10  
Line 4  
Line 3  
Line 2  
Line 1  
[PDN]  
Speed Dial  
Speed Dial  
Do Not Disturb  
SD 14  
Do Not Disturb  
SD 22  
SD 13  
SD 21  
SD 12  
SD 20  
SD 11  
SD 19  
SD 10  
SD 18  
Line 12  
Line 11  
Line 10  
SD 17  
SD 16  
SD 15  
DK424 and DK40i  
Code 32 – 20-Button (B)  
DK14  
Code 32 – 20-Button (B)  
SD10  
Flash  
Do Not Disturb  
Speed Dial  
Redial  
Line 9  
Flash  
Do Not Disturb  
Speed Dial  
Redial  
Line 8  
Line 7  
Line 6  
Line 5  
Line 4  
Line 3  
Line 2  
Line 1  
[PDN]  
Line 8  
Line 7  
Line 6  
Line 5  
Line 4  
Line 3  
Line 2  
Line 1  
[PDN]  
Speed Dial Pause  
SD 15  
Speed Dial Pause  
Line 12  
SD 14  
Line 11  
SD 13  
Line 10  
SD 12  
SD 11  
DK424  
Code 33 – 20-Button (C)  
(Keystrip not provided, but can be assigned)  
DK40i  
Code 33 – 20-Button (C)  
3-106  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
System & Station  
Program 38 – Digital and Electronic Telephone Keystrip Type  
Assignments for 1000-Series Digital Telephone Keystrips  
CO15  
CO10  
CO5  
CO16  
CO11  
CO6  
CO17  
CO12  
CO7  
DND  
CO13  
CO8  
SDS  
CO14  
CO9  
SD12  
CO10  
CO5  
SD13  
CO11  
CO6  
SD14  
CO12  
CO7  
DND  
SD10  
CO8  
CO3  
SDS  
SD11  
CO9  
CO4  
PAU  
SD11  
CO5  
RDL  
SD12  
CO6  
CO1  
SDS  
SD13  
CO7  
CO2  
DND  
SD14  
CO8  
CO3  
FLASH  
SD15  
CO9  
[PDN]  
CO1  
CO2  
CO3  
CO4  
[PDN]  
CO1  
CO2  
[PDN]  
CO4  
Code 31 (Default) – 20-Button (A)  
Code 32 – 20-Button (B)  
Code 33 – 20-Button (C)  
Assignments for Electronic Telephone Keystrips  
1
1
CO9  
CO8  
CO7  
CO6  
CO5  
CO4  
CO3  
CO2  
CO1  
MW/FL  
MW/FL  
Do Not Disturb  
CO7  
Do Not Disturb  
2
CO17  
CO6  
CO16  
CO15  
CO14  
CO13  
CO12  
CO11  
CO10  
CO5  
CO4  
CO3  
CO2  
CO1  
[PDN]  
[PDN]  
Code 21 – 10-Button  
Code 31 (Default) – 20-Button (A)  
1
1
CO9  
CO8  
CO7  
CO6  
CO5  
CO4  
CO3  
CO2  
CO1  
[PDN]  
SD10  
CO8  
CO7  
CO6  
CO5  
CO4  
CO3  
CO2  
CO1  
[PDN]  
MW/FL  
MW/FL  
Do Not Disturb  
SD14  
Do Not Disturb  
SDS  
SD13  
RDL  
SD12  
PAU  
SD11  
SD15  
SD10  
SD14  
CO12  
SD13  
CO11  
SD12  
CO10  
SD11  
Code 32 – 20-Button (B)  
Code 33 – 20-Button (C)  
1. The  
changing PEKU PCBs (electronic telephone) to PDKU PCBs (digital telephone), or vice versa, always check that the  
or button is set appropriately in Program 39.  
button is the same as the  
or  
buttons in previous Strata systems (Program 39, Code 97). Also, if  
2. This button is initialized as  
with RCTUA since there are only 16 CO lines.  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
3-107  
System & Station  
Program 38 – Digital and Electronic Telephone Keystrip Type  
10  
09  
08  
07  
06  
05  
04  
03  
02  
01  
9 20  
8 19  
7 18  
6 17  
5 16  
4 15  
3 14  
2 13  
1 12  
0 11  
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
16, 36, 56, 76  
96, 116, 136,  
156, 176, 196  
17, 37, 57, 77  
97, 117, 137,  
157, 177, 197  
18, 38, 58, 78  
98, 118, 138,  
158, 178, 198  
19, 39, 59, 79  
99, 119, 139,  
159, 179, 199  
20, 40, 60, 80  
100, 120, 140,  
160, 180, 200  
30, 50, 70  
90, 110, 130,  
150, 170, 190  
40, 60, 80  
100, 120, 140,  
160, 180, 200  
11, 31, 51, 71  
91, 111, 131,  
151, 171, 191  
12, 32, 52, 72  
92 112, 132,  
152, 172, 192  
13, 33, 53, 73  
93, 113, 133,  
153, 173, 193  
14, 34, 54, 74  
94, 114, 134,  
154, 174, 194  
15, 35, 55, 75  
95, 115, 135,  
155, 175, 195  
29, 49, 69  
89, 109, 129,  
149, 169, 189  
39, 59, 79  
99, 119, 139,  
159, 179, 199  
06, 26, 46, 66  
86, 106, 126,  
146, 166, 186  
07, 27, 47, 67  
87, 107, 127,  
147, 167, 187  
08, 28, 48, 68  
88, 108, 128,  
148, 168, 188  
09, 29, 49, 69  
89, 109, 129,  
149, 169, 189  
10, 30, 50, 70  
90, 110, 130,  
150, 170, 190  
28, 48, 68  
88, 108, 128,  
148, 168, 188  
38, 58, 78  
98, 118, 138,  
158, 178, 198  
01, 21, 41, 61  
81, 101, 121,  
141, 161, 181  
02, 22, 42, 62  
82, 102, 122,  
142, 162, 182  
03, 23, 43, 63  
83, 103, 123,  
143, 163, 183  
04, 24, 44, 64  
84, 104, 124,  
144, 164, 184  
05, 25, 45, 65  
85, 105, 125,  
145, 165, 185  
27, 47, 67  
87, 107, 127,  
147, 167, 187  
37, 57, 77  
97, 117, 137,  
157, 177, 197  
1843  
26, 46, 66  
86, 106, 126,  
146, 166, 186  
36, 56, 76  
96, 116, 136,  
156, 176, 196  
1000-series digital telephone strip - shows programming button/LED  
assignment locations. Shown as reference only - not available as an  
individual strip.  
25, 45, 65  
85, 105, 125,  
145, 165, 185  
35, 55, 75  
95, 115, 135,  
155, 175, 195  
LED Buttons and CO line numbers (01~20)  
24, 44, 64  
84, 104, 124,  
144, 164, 184  
34, 54, 74  
94, 114, 134,  
154, 174, 194  
Last digit of EK port number for  
programs with a format like 71, 72, and 73  
23, 43, 63  
83, 103, 123,  
143, 163, 183  
33, 53, 73  
93, 113, 133,  
153, 173, 193  
*
*
*
22, 42, 62  
82, 102, 122,  
142, 162, 182  
32, 52, 72  
92, 112, 132,  
152, 172, 192  
CO line numbers (21~200)  
21, 41, 61  
81, 101, 121,  
141, 161, 181  
31, 51, 71  
91, 111, 131,  
151, 171, 191  
2000-series digital telephone strip - supplied with each Strata DK  
Programming Manual and each Documentation Package that ships with the  
system. Can also be used with 6000- and 6500-series electronic telephones.  
Note Button numbers 01~200 on electronic telephones (6000, 6500 series, etc.) are in the same  
position as shown on the 2000-series digital telephone programming keystrip.  
3-108  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
System & Station  
Program *38 – Standard Telephone Ring-Down Destination  
Program *38 – Standard Telephone Ring-Down  
Destination  
Processor Type: Release 4.0 and higher RCTUs  
Program Type: Station  
Initialized Default: Does not assign Ring Down Destination to any port  
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ  
ꢀ
SELECT = Standard Telephone Logical Port Number  
FORWARD TO TEL = Port Number  
Enter the port number of the station that needs a Ring Down  
Destination assigned.  
Enter the port number of the [PDN], [PhDN] or  
DH [DN] that should ring when the Ring-Down  
Timer (Program 12-1) expires.  
To add a port range, enter XXXꢀXXX (low port ꢀ high port).  
[PDN] Port [PhDN] Port  
DH Group  
Ports  
[PDN] Port  
Range  
[PhDN] Port  
Range  
DH Group  
Ports  
Processor  
Processor  
Range  
Range  
DK14  
DK40i  
N/A  
N/A  
900~915  
900~915  
900~915  
RCTUBA/BB  
RCTUC/D  
RCTUE/F  
000~079  
000~239  
000~335  
500~579  
500~739  
500~835  
900~915  
900~915  
900~915  
N/A  
N/A  
RCTUA  
000~031  
500~531  
Port  
Forward to Tel Port  
Port  
Forward to Tel Port  
Port  
Forward to Tel Port  
Port  
Forward to Tel Port  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
3-109  
System & Station  
Program *38 – Standard Telephone Ring-Down Destination  
Program *38 Overview  
Standard telephones can be assigned to ring a destination automatically by going off-hook (ring  
down). They can also be programmed to ring a destination if an incomplete valid number is dialed.  
This program assigns the ring down destination. The timer in Program 12-1 determines when the  
destination should ring after the standard telephone goes off hook or if an incomplete valid number  
is dialed.  
If a standard telephone is assigned a ring down destination, ring down will always occur after the  
ring down timer expires unless a valid feature access code or [DN] is dialed prior to the ring down  
timer expiration (Program 12-1). Ring down applies only to standard telephone ports, not  
electronic or digital telephone ports.  
3-110  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
System & Station  
Program 39 – Flexible Button Assignments  
Program 39 – Flexible Button Assignments  
Processor Type: DK14, DK40i, All RCTUs  
Program Type: Station  
Initialized Default: See Program 38  
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ  
SELECT = Port Number  
Code  
Enter the port number(s) to which  
class of service must be assigned.  
To add a port range, enter  
Press LED Button to be defined.  
XXXꢀXXX (low port ꢀ high port).  
10  
20  
LCD  
DIU  
10  
20  
LCD  
DIU  
10  
20  
LCD  
DIU  
10  
20  
LCD  
DIU  
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
Port No. _______  
Location:  
Port No. _______  
Location:  
Port No. _______  
Location:  
Port No. _______  
Location:  
Button  
10  
Code  
Button  
20  
Code  
Button  
10  
Code  
Button  
20  
Code  
Button  
10  
Code  
Button  
20  
Code  
Button  
10  
Code  
Button  
20  
Code  
09  
19  
09  
19  
09  
19  
09  
19  
08  
18  
08  
18  
08  
18  
08  
18  
07  
17  
07  
17  
07  
17  
07  
17  
06  
16  
06  
16  
06  
16  
06  
16  
05  
15  
05  
15  
05  
15  
05  
15  
04  
14  
04  
14  
04  
14  
04  
14  
03  
13  
03  
13  
03  
13  
03  
13  
02  
12  
02  
12  
02  
12  
02  
12  
01  
11  
01  
11  
01  
11  
01  
11  
10  
20  
LCD  
DIU  
10  
20  
LCD  
DIU  
10  
20  
LCD  
DIU  
10  
20  
LCD  
DIU  
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
Port No. _______  
Location:  
Port No. _______  
Location:  
Port No. _______  
Location:  
Port No. _______  
Location:  
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
Button  
10  
Code  
Button  
20  
Code  
Button  
10  
Code  
Button  
20  
Code  
Button  
10  
Code  
Button  
20  
Code  
Button  
10  
Code  
Button  
20  
Code  
09  
19  
09  
19  
09  
19  
09  
19  
08  
18  
08  
18  
08  
18  
08  
18  
07  
17  
07  
17  
07  
17  
07  
17  
06  
16  
06  
16  
06  
16  
06  
16  
05  
15  
05  
15  
05  
15  
05  
15  
04  
14  
04  
14  
04  
14  
04  
14  
03  
13  
03  
13  
03  
13  
03  
13  
02  
12  
02  
12  
02  
12  
02  
12  
01  
11  
01  
11  
01  
11  
01  
11  
10  
20  
LCD  
DIU  
10  
20  
LCD  
DIU  
10  
20  
LCD  
DIU  
10  
20  
LCD  
DIU  
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
Port No. _______  
Location:  
Port No. _______  
Location:  
Port No. _______  
Location:  
Port No. _______  
Location:  
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
Button  
10  
Code  
Button  
20  
Code  
Button  
10  
Code  
Button  
20  
Code  
Button  
10  
Code  
Button  
20  
Code  
Button  
10  
Code  
Button  
20  
Code  
09  
19  
09  
19  
09  
19  
09  
19  
08  
18  
08  
18  
08  
18  
08  
18  
07  
17  
07  
17  
07  
17  
07  
17  
06  
16  
06  
16  
06  
16  
06  
16  
05  
15  
05  
15  
05  
15  
05  
15  
04  
14  
04  
14  
04  
14  
04  
14  
03  
13  
03  
13  
03  
13  
03  
13  
02  
12  
02  
12  
02  
12  
02  
12  
01  
11  
01  
11  
01  
11  
01  
11  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
3-111  
System & Station  
Program 39 – Flexible Button Assignments  
Program 39 Overview  
Program 39 assigns features to the flexible buttons for individual telephones in the system. Several  
types of buttons can be assigned with this program, including:  
♦
♦
♦
Feature  
[PDNs], [SDNs] and [PhDNs] – Message Waiting buttons can be assigned to [PhDNs]  
Alert Signal (Buzz key)  
Feature Buttons Assignments  
You can assign commonly used telephone features to any flexible button (see Table 3-1). Button  
assignments can be different for individual telephones. Telephone users can also assign flexible  
buttons if their COS and/or if programming permits the feature on their telephone.  
Strata AirLink handsets interfaced to the Strata DK using the RWIU/WWIS PCB have only six  
flexible buttons (4~9) available for programming.  
Important!  
●
DKAdmin programs a Pause on buttons 11~20 on 10-key telephones.  
●
The /LQH button on the DKT2001 is flexible button 01. Only program a [PDN] onto this  
button. Do not program CO lines or secondary line appearances onto button 01 or in any  
other position. Since the system assigns CO lines 01~17 by default, be sure to remove any CO  
line appearances by programming them as Station Speed Dial buttons (code ).  
ꢀ
Note If the 6SHHGꢃ'LDOꢃ6HOHFW button is removed, the key becomes the 6SHHGꢃ'LDOꢃ  
ꢃꢀ  
6HOHFW button. While on an outside call, the user must press then ꢄ to activate the  
ꢀ
ꢃ
ꢀ
and ꢄ DTMF tones for the duration of the call.  
ꢃ
➤ To assign features to flexible buttons  
1. Complete Program 38 before Program 39. Initialized data assigns the keystrip pattern  
associated with Code 31 from Program 38.  
2. Use “Program 39 – Flexible Button Assignments”on Page 3-111 to indicate feature buttons.  
Use the programming sequence after this table to perform the following steps.  
3. Program the port number or enter a range of port numbers.  
4. Press the button that will be associated with the feature.  
5. Enter the feature code.  
6. Repeat this procedure until all feature buttons have been assigned.  
Table 3-1  
Feature Button Codes for Digital, Electronic, and Strata AirLink Wireless Telephones  
Button Function  
Button Labels  
Code  
Notes  
Account Code  
Account Code or ACCNT  
450  
Allows a Voluntary Account Code entry.  
Alarm1  
Alarm Reset or ALRM  
477  
Resets alarm condition system-wide.  
Alert Signaling (see following pages)1  
All Call Voice Page  
All Call Page or AC  
489  
470  
494  
478  
487  
Pages up to 120 idle electronic or digital telephones over speaker.  
Sets ABR of busy outgoing number.  
Automatic Busy Redial  
Automatic Callback Busy  
Background Music1  
Auto Busy Redial or ABR  
Auto Callback or ACB  
Sets ACB for station recalled by busy line.  
Turns BGM ON or OFF through station speaker.  
All calls forward to selected station.  
Tel Set Music or BGM  
Call Forward All Calls  
Call Frwd All Calls or CFAC  
3-112  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
System & Station  
Program 39 – Flexible Button Assignments  
Table 3-1  
Feature Button Codes for Digital, Electronic, and Strata AirLink Wireless Telephones (continued)  
Button Function  
Button Labels  
Call Frwd to: or CFF  
Code  
486  
Notes  
Call Forward A.C. Fixed  
Call Forward Busy  
Forwards all calls to pre-defined destination. See Program 36.  
Forwards calls to selected station if station is busy.  
Call Frwd Busy or CFB  
459  
Call Forward Busy/No  
Answer  
Call Frwd Busy/NAns or CFB/  
NA  
Forwards calls to selected station if station is busy or does not  
answer.  
457  
Call Forward External  
Call Forward No Answer  
Call Park2  
Call Frwd External or CF-EXT  
Call Frwd No Answer or CFNA  
Park in Orbit or PARK (R3)  
460  
458  
464  
Forward calls externally.  
Forwards calls to selected station if station does not answer.  
Call Park Only.  
Park Orbit DIsplay or CPD  
(R3)  
CP Display Button and Mode 64 can be used interchangeably.  
Displays call parked via telephone LCD.  
Call Park LCD Display1  
465  
Call Park and Page  
Call Pickup (Directed)  
Call Pickup Tenant 43  
Call Pickup Tenant 33  
Call Pickup Tenant 23  
Call Pickup Tenant 13  
Call Pickup (Group)2  
Call Park/Page or CP/PG (R3)  
Directed Pickup or PKUP  
PKUP 4  
463  
484  
435  
436  
437  
438  
480  
Parking and Paging Park Pickup.  
Picks up ringing or held intercom, trunk calls, and page.  
PKUP 3  
Picks up tenant’s ringing CO calls.  
See Program 15 for Tenant Group assignments.  
PKUP 2  
*
PKUP 1  
Group Pickup  
Picks up a call to any group to which station is assigned in 31.  
*
Unanswered Caller ID and/  
or ANI Stored Number Auto  
Dial1  
Will Auto Dial a Caller ID and/or Automatic Number Identification  
(ANI) telephone number that was stored in station Caller ID/ANI  
memory.  
Lost Call Auto Dial (R3) or  
LCAD  
462  
Line 1~200 or CO 001~CO  
200  
001~  
200  
CO Line Appearance  
CO line access of appearing calls.  
Data1  
Data Release1  
Data Call or DATA  
456  
454  
Used to place data call.  
Releases data call.  
Data Release or DRLS  
#000~  
#239  
Direct Station Selection  
DSS  
Assigns DSS hotline keys to port number.  
Directory Numbers (see following pages)  
Do Not Disturb4  
Do Not Disturb or DND  
498  
Prevents calls to station.  
Unlock Door 0 or DRLK 0  
Unlock Door 1 or DRLK 1  
Unlock Door 2 or DRLK 2  
Unlock Door 3 or DRLK 3  
Unlock Door 4 or DRLK 4  
471  
472  
473  
474  
475  
Door Lock 0 ~4 (DDCB/  
HDCB)1  
Momentarily unlocks door (3 or 6 seconds).  
See Program 77-1 and 77-2.  
Handset Off-Hook Call  
Announce1  
HS-OCA  
468  
Activates 2-way voice path to Off-Hook Call Announce caller. (R3)  
Separates the called party’s ISDN sub-address from the called  
party number. The digit performs this function on standard  
telephones.  
ISDN Sub-address  
Sub-address  
467  
Initiates DK to send dialed digits to the ISDN network when this  
button is pressed from a digital or electronic telephone. Program  
*63-2 invokes the same function when the Dial Timer expires. Also  
see Tone Button in this table.  
ISDN Start  
Start  
469  
LCD Message Select  
LCD Msg Select or LCD M  
Msg Wait, Flash or MW/FL  
481  
499  
Begins LCD message selection.  
Message Waiting and Flash  
Provides message waiting LED for EKT and Flash Button.  
Sets microphone ON/OFF for incoming handsfree Directory  
Number [DN] calls.  
Microphone Cutoff5  
Microphn Cut-off or MCO  
488  
Modem1  
Modem or MODEM  
455  
439  
440  
441  
442  
431  
432  
433  
434  
495  
493  
Used to reserve modem in modem pool.  
Night Transfer Tenant 13  
Night Transfer Tenant 23  
Night Transfer Tenant 33  
Night Transfer Tenant 43  
Night Transfer Lock Tenant 1  
Night Transfer Lock Tenant 2  
Night Transfer Lock Tenant 3  
Night Transfer Lock Tenant 4  
Pause1  
Night Transfer1 or NT1  
Night Transfer2 or NT2  
Night Transfer3 or NT3  
Night Transfer4 or NT4  
Night Lock1 or NT1 L1  
Night Lock2 or NT2 L2  
Night Lock3 or NT3 L3  
Night Lock4 or NT4 L4  
Spd Dial Pause or PAU  
Spd Dial Lng Pause or PAU/L  
Sets Tenant CO line DAY/NIGHT ring mode.  
Available with RCTUA3, RCTUBA3/RCTUBB3 or RCTUC/D3  
Release 3 or above only.  
Used to lock system ringing mode: DAY, DAY2, NIGHT See  
Programs 74 and 36 for NT Lock Password assignments.  
*
Sets pause in Speed dial See Program 12-3.  
Pause (Long)1  
Sets a 10-second pause in Speed Dial.  
301~  
316  
Pooled Line  
Pooled Line Grp or PL  
Multiple CO line may appear under one button.  
Privacy  
Privacy On Line or PRIV  
453  
479  
Prevents Privacy Override (not Executive Override).  
Privacy Release  
Privacy Release or PRV RLS  
Changes station Privacy mode to Non-private for CO lines.  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
3-113  
System & Station  
Program 39 – Flexible Button Assignments  
Table 3-1  
Feature Button Codes for Digital, Electronic, and Strata AirLink Wireless Telephones (continued)  
Button Function  
Redial Last Number  
(ꢄ Button)  
Button Labels  
Code  
496  
Notes  
Redial or RDL  
Redials the last number.  
Release to Idle  
Release Call or RLS  
476  
Releases current call and makes station idle.  
Simulates On-hook/Off-hook operation to release an existing call  
and answer new incoming/ringing call.  
Release and Answer  
Release and Ans or RLS/ANS  
Save Last Number on SAVE  
Speed Dial or SDS  
466  
Save Last Dialed Number  
Speed Dial Select  
485  
Saves last number dialed for future speed dial.  
497  
Begins speed dial selection.  
(
Button)6  
ꢀ
Reserves button for station speed dial. Station Speed Dial code  
ranges vary per processor:  
ꢀ10~  
ꢀ49  
DK14, DK40i, RCTUA  
RCTUBA/BB, RCTUC/D  
RCTUE/F  
Station Speed Dial Codes6  
SD (All DK systems)  
ꢀ10~  
ꢀ49  
ꢀ100~  
ꢀ139  
Speed dial number set by station port 000. System Speed Dial  
code ranges vary per processor:  
60~  
DK14, DK40i, RCTUA  
ꢀ99  
System Speed Dial Codes6  
SD  
ꢀ
600~  
RCTUBA/BB, RCTUC/D  
ꢀ699  
ꢀ
200~  
RCTUE/F  
ꢀ999  
ꢀ
Tone1  
Tone Dial Select or TONE  
490  
CO dial signals set to tone or pulse.  
1. Unavailable to Strata AirLink handsets (RWIU/WWIS interface).  
2. Picks up calls to telephones in any call pickup group to which the telephone is assigned in Program *31.  
3. See Program *15 for Tenant Group assignments.  
4. The Strata AirLink handset (RWIU/WWIS interface) displays DND, but no warning tone is enabled for Executive or Busy Override.  
5. The Strata AirLink handset (RWIU/WWIS interface) has mute only.  
6. Both wireless system handsets (RWIU and Base Station Interface Adapter) only have an internal memory Speed Dial capability.  
Notes  
●
●
The Strata AirLink “call” button is set using Program 39, key 01. It must be set as the PDN of  
the handset.  
Strata AirLink handset buttons 1~6 when used with the FCN button are set using Program 39,  
keys 02~07 respectively.  
3-114  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
System & Station  
Program 39 – Flexible Button Assignments  
Directory Number Button Assignments  
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ  
YYY = the Program 04 Port Number  
(000~336) of the [DN] that should be  
assigned. If YYY=XXX, then the [DN]  
is the [PDN]; if YYY does not = XXX,  
then the [DN] is an [SDN].  
Enter the logical port number of the  
telephone that will be assigned a [DN]  
button.  
...or  
Press the telephone button to which the  
[DN] button should be assigned.  
ZZZ = the Program *04 Port Number  
(500~835) of the [PhDN] that should  
be assigned.  
Directory Numbers are assigned to the flexible button positions on telephones.  
♦
♦
♦
Primary Directory Number Buttons [PDNs] are similar to Intercom numbers.  
Secondary Directory Numbers [SDNs] are [PDNs] which appear on another telephone.  
Phantom Directory Numbers [PhDNs] are generally used as numbers that may appear on a  
group of telephones, such as an extension number which rings all phones in a department.  
♦
There are a number of considerations for assigning Directory Numbers. Toshiba suggests  
reading the following steps and Directory Number Considerations before assigning [DNs].  
➤ To assign directory numbers to flexible buttons  
1. Refer to the next page to determine how many and what type of Directory Numbers to assign  
per telephone. You can use the Flexible Button Assignments forms to indicate where [DNs]  
will be placed (see “Program 39 Flexible Button Assignments” on Page 3-113).  
2. Assign [PDNs] and [SDNs] by entering the Program 04 port number assignment sequence  
shown below. Refer to Program 04 for Station Logical Port Numbers.  
##YYY, where YYY is the port number of the DN.  
If a telephone has multiple [PDN] buttons, put the lowest number [NNNN-1] on the top, the  
next lowest number [NNNN-2] below that, etc. This is the order in which they will ring (from  
the top down). See the Directory Number Programming Example.  
3. Assign [PhDNs] by entering the Program ꢀ04 port number assignment sequence shown below.  
Refer to Program ꢀ04 for Station Logical Port Numbers. Also refer to Program ꢀ33 to  
determine which Station Logical Port Number is the owner of the [PhDN].  
##ZZZ, where ZZZ is the Program ꢀ04 port number of the [PhDN].  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
3-115  
System & Station  
Program 39 – Flexible Button Assignments  
Button Type  
Button Labels  
Code  
Notes  
Primary Directory  
Numbers [PDNs]  
[PDN] NNNN - 1, Highest button  
[PDN] NNNN - 2, next highest  
[PDN] NNNN - 3, next highest  
[PDN] NNNN - 4, Lowest button  
##YYY  
##YYY  
##YYY  
##YYY  
YYY = the Program 04 station logical port  
number of the [DN] that should appear as a  
[PDN]. YYY should be the same port number  
as the port number (XXX) of the telephone to  
which the [PDN] is assigned. NNNN is the  
actual [DN] assignment for Port YYY in  
Program 04.  
4-Maximum of  
same [PDN] per  
telephone  
Secondary  
Directory Numbers  
[SDNs]  
[SDN] NNNN - 1, Highest button  
[SDN] NNNN - 2, next highest  
[SDN] NNNN - 3, next highest  
[SDN] NNNN - 4, Lowest button  
##YYY  
##YYY  
##YYY  
##YYY  
YYY = the Program 04 station logical port  
number of the [DN] that should appear as a  
[SDN]. YYY should not be the same port  
number as the port number (XXX) of the  
telephone on which the [SDN] is assigned.  
NNNN is the actual DN assignment for Port  
YYY in Program 04.  
16 total [PDNs] +  
[SDNs];  
4-Maximum of  
same [SDN] per  
telephone  
Phantom Directory  
Numbers [PhDNs]  
[PhDN] NNNN  
##ZZZ  
ZZZ = the Program 04 Port ref. number of  
the [PhDN]. NNNN is the actual [DN]  
*
assignment for Port ZZZ in Program 04.  
*
8-Maximum unique  
[PhDNs]  
Each [PhDN] must have an owner telephone  
assigned in Program *33. If an owner is not  
assigned, the [PhDN] can originate but  
cannot receive calls.  
1-Maximum of  
same [PhDN] per  
telephone  
Phantom Directory  
Number Message  
Waiting button  
[PhDN]  
[PhDN/MW] - 1 Lowest [PhDN]  
[PhDN/MW] - 2 Next Highest  
[PhDN/MW] - 3 Next Highest  
[PhDN/MW] - 4 Highest [PhDN]  
423  
424  
425  
426  
Message Waiting Key for [PhDNs] assigned  
to telephone. Telephone must be assigned as  
[PhDN] owner in Program *33 to allow it to be  
equipped with a [PhDN/MW] button.  
4- maximum  
[PhDN/MW] per  
telephone  
Directory Number Programming Example  
Program 33: Assign Station Logical Port 000 as owner of [PhDN] 500 and 502.  
*
Assign Station Logical Port 001 as owner of [PhDN] 501.  
Program 04  
Port No. Directory  
XXX  
and  
YYY  
No.  
[PDN/SDN]  
NNNN  
PhDN 4502  
MW 4502  
Code = 424  
Code = 423  
ZZZ = 502  
ZZZ = 501  
ZZZ = 500  
YYY= 002  
000  
001  
002  
003  
3200  
3201  
3202  
3203  
PhDN 4501  
PhDN 4500  
SDN 3202  
PhDN 4501  
PhDN 4500  
SDN 3203  
MW4501  
MW 4500  
CO 10  
CO 9  
CO 11  
CO 10  
CO 9  
CO 3  
CO 2  
CO 1  
ZZZ = 501  
ZZZ = 500  
YYY= 003  
YYY= 000  
YYY= 001  
SDN 3201-1  
SDN 3201-2  
PDN 3200-1  
PDN 3200-2  
PDN 3200-3  
SDN 3200-1  
SDN 3200-2  
PDN 3200-3  
PDN 3201-1  
PDN 3201-2  
Program 04  
*
YYY = 001  
CO 3  
Port No. Directory  
ZZZ  
No. [PhDN]  
NNNN  
CO 2  
500  
501  
502  
503  
4500  
4501  
4502  
4503  
CO 1  
YYY = 000  
Station 3200  
Port 000  
Station 3201  
Port 001  
1569  
XXX= 000  
XXX= 001  
3-116  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
System & Station  
Program 39 – Flexible Button Assignments  
♦
♦
The total number of [DNs] allowed on a telephone ([PDN], [SDNs], and [PhDNs]) is limited  
to the number of buttons on the telephone (i.e., a 20-button telephone can have 20 [DN]  
buttons).  
The number of [SDN] buttons programmed on a telephone for a given Primary Directory  
Number must always be the same as the number of [PDN] buttons that exist on the [PDN]  
owner telephone.  
Example: If [PDN] 200 appears on 3 buttons on station 200, and [SDN] 200 should appear on  
station 201, then [SDN] 200 must appear on 3-buttons on station 201. Never put more (or less)  
[SDN] buttons of the same Directory Number on a telephone than [PDN] buttons that appear  
on the [PDN] owner telephone. If this guideline is not followed, calls to the [PDN] telephone  
will be missed on the [SDN] telephone.  
♦
The maximum number of [DNs] per system is listed below:  
Maximum [PDNs] per  
System  
Maximum [PhDNs] per  
System  
Total Number of Unique [DNs]  
per system [PDNs] + [PhDNs]  
Processor  
DK14  
DK40i  
10  
27  
10  
27  
20  
54  
RCTUA  
32  
32  
64  
RCTUBA/BB  
RCTUC/D  
RCTUE/F  
80  
80  
160  
480  
672  
240  
336  
240  
336  
♦
♦
[PhDN] can appear on all Toshiba telephones in the system, but a [PhDN] is limited to ring on  
120 telephones maximum.  
Phantom [DN] owner telephones have the following attributes:  
♦
♦
♦
Set Call Forward for [PhDNs]  
Set Call Forward Mail Box destinations (VM ID codes) for [PhDNs]  
Receive Message Waiting indication for up to four Phantom Directory Numbers on  
individual [PhDN/MW] button LEDs  
♦
♦
When off-hook, the [PhDN] telephone owner will receive OCA calls directed to a busy the  
[PhDN].  
[PDN] and/or [PhDN] Call Forward/Message retrieval can only be set/received from the  
[PDN] and/or [PhDN] owner telephone.  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
3-117  
System & Station  
Program 39 – Flexible Button Assignments  
Alert Signal Button Assignments  
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ  
YYY = the Program 39 code for the  
button that should be installed.  
Enter the logical port number of the  
telephone that will be assigned an  
button.  
Press the telephone button to which  
should be assigned.  
Station Number: _______  
Alert Signal Button  
Alert Signal Button Partner  
Button Number (01~20)  
Speed Dial Number  
Station Number  
No.  
Code  
1
427  
2
3
4
428  
429  
430  
Station Number: _______  
Alert Signal Button  
Alert Signal Button Partner  
Station Number  
Button Number (01~20)  
Speed Dial Number  
No.  
Code  
1
427  
2
3
4
428  
429  
430  
The Alert Signal is four short bursts of tone, sent two times/three seconds apart from one partner  
station when the other partner station when one of the partners presses the $OHUWꢃ6LJQDOꢃbutton  
on their telephone. An Alert Signal can be sent to stations that are idle or busy, or in Call Forward  
or Do Not Disturb mode. No talk path will exist before or after the Alert Signal is activated.  
Important!  
●
Both partner stations must have the same Alert Signal button number programmed in Program  
39 and the appropriate Speed Dial Number programmed to allow the Alert Signal buttons to  
operate.  
●
Strata AirLink does not support this feature.  
3-118  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
System & Station  
Program 39 – Flexible Button Assignments  
Alert Signal Button Programming Example  
Station 200  
Station 202  
Signal  
Code  
=
427  
Code  
=
427  
Signal  
Signal  
Signal  
1
2
4
1
2
SD 48 = 202  
SD 48 = 200  
*
*
Code  
=
428  
Code  
=
428  
Signal  
SD 47 = 203  
SD 47 = 201  
*
*
Code  
=
430  
SD 45 = 204  
*
Station 203  
Code  
=
427  
Signal  
Signal  
1
2
SD 48 = 201  
*
Station 201  
Code  
=
428  
SD 47 = 200  
*
Code  
=
427  
Signal  
Signal  
Signal  
1
2
3
SD 48 = 203  
*
Code  
=
428  
Station 204  
SD 47 = 202  
*
Code  
=
429  
Signal  
Signal  
3
4
Code  
=
429  
SD 46 = 201  
*
SD 46 = 204  
*
Code  
=
430  
SD 45 = 200  
*
1571  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
3-119  
System & Station  
Program *40 – Distributed Hunt Group Member Assignments  
Program *40 – Distributed Hunt Group Member  
Assignments  
Processor Type: DK14, DK40i, all RCTUs  
Program Type:  
Station  
Initialized Default: No member (station port) assigned to any DH Group  
ꢀ ꢀꢃ ꢀꢃ ꢀꢃ  
ꢀ
DATA = Hunt Port Number  
SELECT = Distributed Hunt (DH)  
Group Number (see legend)  
When editing the data field, use LED  
Button 01 to delete a number.  
Hunt order (01~32)  
Processor  
DK14  
DH Port Range  
900~915  
Hunt Port Range  
000~009  
Processor  
DH Port Range  
900~915  
Hunt Port Range  
RCTUBA/BB  
RCTUC/D  
RCTUE/F  
000~079  
000~239  
000~335  
DK40i  
900~915  
000~027  
900~915  
RCTUA  
900~915  
000~031  
900~915  
DH Port  
(900~915)  
Hunt Order  
(01-32)  
Hunt Port  
Number  
DH Port  
(900~915)  
Hunt Order  
(01-32)  
Hunt Port  
Number  
DH Port  
(900~915)  
Hunt Order  
(01-32)  
Hunt Port  
Number  
3-120  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
System & Station  
Program *40 – Distributed Hunt Group Member Assignments  
Program *40 Overview  
This program assigns the members (station primary [DN] port numbers and hunting orders  
[01~32] of Distributed Hunt (DH) groups [900~915]). When a member of a DH group is added or  
deleted, all the other members’ hunting orders are automatically shifted to a new sequential order.  
If Ground/Loop start CO lines ring DH Group member telephones, use Program 81~89 to assign  
the selected CO lines to ring the DH group (900~915); do not use ꢀ81, ꢀ84, and ꢀ87 to assign  
[PDNs] or [PhDNs] to flash and ring on the DH Group member telephones. Instead, put the CO  
lines in a pooled line group and put the appropriate 3RROHGꢃ/LQHꢃ*US buttons on the DH member  
telephones. Do not assign DH Group member telephones to ring in Program 81~89.  
To assign ANI/DNIS/DID/Tie and Internal calls to ring DH groups, use Program ꢀ04, ꢀ09,  
ꢀ71~ 73, or 71 (1~3) as required and do not put DID or Tie line pooled or direct line buttons on  
*
DH member telephones. These calls ring the DH member telephone [PDN].  
Each port assigned to a Program 31 Voice Mail Group should also be assigned to a dedicated  
Distributed Hunt Group. (See Program 31 record sheet overview for Voice Mail/Distributed Hunt  
program example.)  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
3-121  
System & Station  
Program *41 for DK424 – T1 Assignment Series (Part 1)  
Program *41 for DK424 – T1 Assignment Series (Part 1)  
Processor Type: RCTUBA/BB, RCTUC/D and RCTUE/F  
Program Type:  
System  
Initialized Default: See each program  
Series Overview  
Use Program ꢀ41 (Part 1) and ꢀ42 (Part 2) series to set T1 parameters and assignments on the  
DK424. See the Strata DK Configuration and T1 sections for additional T1 information. RCTU  
support is as follows:  
Processor  
RCTUBA/BB  
RCTUC/D  
Number of RDTU’s Supported  
2
6
8
RCTUE/F  
Program *41-1 – T1 Span (RDTU) Frame and Line Code Assignments  
Initialized Default: LED 01 and LED 02 OFF for all T1 span lines  
ꢀ ꢀꢃ ꢀꢃ ꢀꢃ  
ꢀ
LEDs 01 and 02  
SELECT = 1  
Set as described below.  
Select the RDTU being  
programmed (1~8)  
Extended Superframe  
LED 01 ON  
Superframe  
LED 01 OFF  
B8ZS  
LED 02 ON  
AMI Code  
LED 02 OFF  
T1 Span  
1 RDTU  
2 RDTU  
3 RDTU  
4 RDTU  
5 RDTU  
6 RDTU  
7 RDTU  
8 RDTU  
Program *41-1 Overview  
T1 Span Framing Assignments: Each RDTU PCB can be individually assigned for Superframe  
(LED 01 OFF) or Extended Superframe (LED 01 ON).  
T1 Span Line Code Assignments: Each RDTU PCB can be individually assigned for B8ZS  
(LED 02 ON) or AMI coding (LED 02 OFF).  
3-122  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
System & Station  
Program *41 for DK424 – T1 Assignment Series (Part 1)  
Program *41-2 – T1 Channel Assignments  
Initialized Default: 1 = Loop Start  
More channels  
ꢀ ꢀꢃ ꢀꢃ ꢀꢃ  
ꢀ
or...  
Run Program 91-2  
SELECT = 2  
Enter the RDTU being programmed (1~8).  
Enter the line type to be assigned to the RDTU channel:  
Enter the RDTU channel number (01~24)  
to be assigned a line type.  
1 = Loop Start (initialized) 4 = Tie (Wink)  
2 = Ground Start  
5 = DID (immediate)  
6 = DID (Wink)  
To add a port range, enter XXXꢀXXX  
(low port ꢀ high port).  
3 = Tie (immediate)  
See Programs 17 and 71 for other Tie/DID assignments;.  
See Program *17 and Program *09 for other DID assignments.  
Processor  
Line Range  
001~048  
001~144  
001~200  
RCTUBA/BB  
RCTUC/D  
RCTUE/F  
RDTU:___________  
Slot:___________  
Line Type  
RDTU:___________  
Slot:___________  
Line Type  
RDTU:___________  
Slot:___________  
Line Type  
RDTU Channel No.  
RDTU Channel No.  
RDTU Channel No.  
1
2
1
2
1
2
3
3
3
4
4
4
5
5
5
6
6
6
7
7
7
8
8
8
9
9
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
Important! See Program 17 for other Tie/DID assignments; see Program 17 and Program 09  
*
*
for other DID assignments.  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
3-123  
System & Station  
Program *41 for DK424 – T1 Assignment Series (Part 1)  
Notes  
●
You must cycle system power or run Program 91-2 to transfer Program ꢀ41-2 data from  
temporary memory to working memory. Turn system power OFF (five seconds) and ON after  
running Program ꢀ41-2.  
●
Always install RDTU PCBs that have Tie or DID channels in slot numbers that are higher than  
station and Attendant Console PCB slot numbers whenever possible. Each Tie or DID line  
installed uses a station port in software (see the Configuration worksheets for Tie/DID  
configuration in the Strata DK Installation and Maintenance Manual).  
Program *41-2 Overview  
RDTUs provide 8, 16, or 24 channels as set in Program 03. Each channel can operate  
independently as CO lines (ground start or loop start), Tie lines (Wink or Immediate Start), or DID  
lines (Wink or Immediate Start). Assign the number of channels for each RDTU with Program 03.  
Important! Program 91-2 must be run or System Power must be momentarily turned OFF (five  
seconds) then ON for Program 41-2 to take effect.  
*
Program *41-3 – T1 Span Transmit Level Pad Assignments  
Initialized Default: 5 (-6dB)  
ꢀ ꢀꢃ ꢀꢃ ꢀꢃ  
ꢀ
SELECT = 3  
Enter one of the following pad codes for the  
transmission of path:  
Enter the RDTU being  
programmed (1~8).  
1 = +6 dB pad  
2 = +3 dB pad  
3 = 0 dB pad  
RDTU No.  
PAD Code  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
4 = -3 dB pad  
5 = -6 dB pad (Initialized: PAD_S = 5)  
6 = -9 dB pad  
7 = -12 dB pad  
8 = -15 dB pad  
Program *41-3 Overview  
The transmission path of each RDTU can be set for one of several pad settings:  
Code  
Enter 1  
Enter 2  
Enter 3  
Enter 4  
Decibel Level  
Code  
Enter 5  
Enter 6  
Enter 7  
Enter 8  
Decibel Level  
-6 dB (initialized setting)  
-9 dB  
+6 decibel (dB) padding  
+3 dB  
0 dB  
-12 dB  
-3 dB  
-15 dB  
3-124  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
System & Station  
Program *41 for DK424 – T1 Assignment Series (Part 1)  
Program *41-4 – T1 Span Receive Level Pad Assignments  
Initialized Default: 4 (-3dB)  
ꢀꢃ ꢀꢃ ꢀꢃ ꢀꢃ  
ꢀ
SELECT = 4  
Enter one of the following pad codes for the  
transmission of path:  
Enter the RDTU being  
programmed (1~8).  
1 = +6 dB pad  
2 = +3 dB pad  
3 = 0 dB pad  
4 = -3 dB pad  
5 = -6 dB pad (Initialized: PAD_R = 4)  
6 = -9 dB pad  
RDTU No.  
PAD Code  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
7 = -12 dB pad  
8 = -15 dB pad  
Note See “Program *41-3 Overview”on Page 3-124 above for decibel levels.  
Program *42 for DK424 – T1 Assignment Series (Part 2)  
See “Program *42 – Clock Source”on Page 7-8.  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
3-125  
System & Station  
Program *50 – Caller ID Circuit Assignments to CO Line PCBs  
Program *50 – Caller ID Circuit Assignments to CO  
Line PCBs  
Processor Type: DK14, DK40i, All RCTUs  
Program Type:  
System  
Initialized Default: No RCIU/RCIS circuits assigned  
ꢀ ꢀꢃ ꢀꢃ ꢀꢃ  
ꢀ
Run Program 91-2  
Processor  
DK14  
CO Line Range  
System power must be cycled or Program 91-2 must  
be run after completing *50 data entry to transfer  
data from temporary memory to working memory.  
001~004  
001~012  
001~016  
001~048  
001~144  
001~200  
DK40i  
RCTUA  
RCTUBA/BB  
RCTUC/D  
RCTUE/F  
CIUNO = RCIU/RCISU Caller ID circuit number  
(001~200) or use LED Button 01 to erase data. For  
DK14, enter the Caller ID interface box line number  
(001~004).  
Any Caller ID circuit can be assigned to any analog  
ground or loop start CO line circuit. Circuit numbers  
do not have to match.  
RCIU/RCIS Circuit  
Number Assigned  
RCIU/RCIS Circuit  
Number Assigned  
RCIU/RCIS Circuit  
Number Assigned  
CO Line Number  
CO Line Number  
CO Line Number  
Note The Tip/Ring leads of RGLU, RCOU, RCOS, and PCOU Caller ID CO lines assigned to  
RCIU2/RCIS circuits must be bridged at the MDF. The Tip/Ring leads of TCOU and  
TCIU2 are bridged by the PCB connectors in the DK40i Base KSU.  
For more information on RCIU/RCIS assignments and installation, refer to Chapter 7 –  
Universal Slot PCB Installation and Chapter 8 – Universal Slot PCB Wiring Diagrams in  
the Strata DK Installation and Maintenance Manual.  
On DK14, the Tip/Ring leads of the CO line circuit must be connected to the line Tip/Ring  
leads of the Caller ID interface box. (See Chapter 1 - DK14 Installation, Figure 1-18 and  
the Caller ID text under “WSIU1 Serial Interface Board” in the Strata DK Installation  
and Maintenance Manual.)  
3-126  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
System & Station  
Program *50 – Caller ID Circuit Assignments to CO Line PCBs  
Program *50 Overview  
In DK40i and DK424, each analog ground/loop start CO line that receives Caller ID information  
from the local Central Office must be assigned to an RCIU or RCIS circuit using this program.  
In DK14, each CO line that receives Caller ID must be assigned an MLX-41 interface box circuit  
number. For information regarding the MLX-41, see Chapter 1 - DK14 Installation in the Strata  
DK Installation and Maintenance Manual. This is necessary to allow Caller ID information to be  
recognized by the DK system processor. Any RCIU, RCIS or MLX-41 circuit can be assigned to  
any analog ground/loop start CO line circuit.  
Each RCIU slot will be allocated eight Caller ID circuits when assigned with Code 81 in Program  
03; because of this, you should always install RCIS on RCIU when more than four circuits are  
required. TCIU2 allocates four Caller ID circuits to TCOU.  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
3-127  
System & Station  
Program *51 – Station Memory Allocation  
Program *51 – Station Memory Allocation  
for Storing Caller ID/ANI Numbers on Abandoned/  
Unanswered Calls  
Processor Type: DK14, DK40i, All RCTUs  
Program Type:  
Station  
Initialized Default: No memory for all ports  
ꢀ ꢀꢃ ꢀꢃ ꢀꢃ  
ꢀ
Processor  
DK14  
Station Ports  
000~007  
000~027  
000~031  
000~079  
000~239  
000~335  
BUF = 000, 010, 020, 030, 040, 060, 070, 080,  
090 or 100.  
DK40i  
This is the number of telephone numbers that can  
be stored at the designated port(s). The  
maximum Caller ID/ANI numbers that can be  
stored per telephone is 100.  
RCTUA  
RCTUBA/BB  
RCTUC/D  
RCTUE/F  
IDL = Total number of Caller ID/ANI Telephone  
Numbers Available in each system  
To add a port range, enter  
XXXꢀXXX (low port ꢀ high port).  
DK14  
DK40i  
200  
200  
RCTUA  
200  
RCTUBA/BB  
RCTUC/D  
RCTUE/F  
400  
1000  
2000  
Station Logical  
Port Number  
Memory Allocation  
(100 max each)  
Station Logical  
Port Number  
Memory Allocation  
(100 max each)  
Station Logical  
Port Number  
Memory Allocation  
(100 max each)  
3-128  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
System & Station  
Program *51 – Station Memory Allocation  
Program *51 Overview  
Use this program to allocate “Abandon-Call-Memory” when any LCD telephone must store  
abandon call information for Caller ID, Ground/Loop start line and/or ANI, DID/Tie lines.  
On direct incoming calls that ring on more than one telephone, the Caller ID, Ground/Loop start,  
line must also be assigned to the designated abandon call storage LCD telephone in Program ꢀ52.  
If a CO line only direct-rings one telephone, that telephone will store the abandoned call  
information automatically without being assigned in Program ꢀ52; however, Program ꢀ51 is still  
required.  
The IDL memory allocation displays on the program telephone’s LCD, indicating the total number  
of telephone numbers that can be stored at the designated port(s). These numbers are reduced  
accordingly each time memory is allocated to a station.  
On direct incoming calls, the ANI abandon call information is stored in the “Abandon-Call-  
Memory” of the [PDN] owner or [PhDN] owner LCD telephone - depending on which [DN] rings  
when the call is received. Do not assign ANI/DNIS lines in Program ꢀ52.  
Abandoned “Call-forwarded” calls will store Caller ID and/or ANI information in the “Abandon-  
Call-Memory” of the “first-call-forwarded-from-station”. The “first-call-forwarded-from-station”  
does not have to be assigned as the owner of the CO line in program ꢀ52 or as the owner of the  
[PhDN] in Program ꢀ33, but it must be assigned memory in this program.  
Distributed Hunt Queue or DISA line, Abandoned Calls store ANI/Caller ID data in the Program  
ꢀ52 CO line owner station.  
If a Caller ID CO line is programmed to direct ring more than one station (81~89) a station logical  
port must be assigned as owner of the ground and/or loop start Caller ID line (in Program ꢀ52) to  
be able to store Caller ID numbers on abandoned or unanswered calls on Direct Incoming calls.  
If a Caller ID CO line is programmed (81~89) to ring only one station, that station will store Caller  
ID abandoned call information regardless of Program ꢀ52 data - the station must have storing  
memory assigned in Program ꢀ51. ANI abandoned call numbers will be stored in the telephone  
memory of the called Primary Directory Number [PDN] owner telephone or the called Phantom  
Directory Number [PhDN] owner telephone.  
Transferred Caller ID and/or ANI line abandoned call numbers will be stored in the “transferred-  
to” telephone memory if that telephone is assigned memory in this program. (see Program ꢀ52).  
Call forwarded Caller ID and/or ANI line abandoned call numbers will be stored in the [PDN] or  
[PhDN] owner telephone memory if that telephone is assigned memory in this program.  
ACD calls that are abandoned while the call is in queue or calls abandoned while connected to an  
Auto Attendant or VM device will register on the SMDR report as a call answered by the ACD  
announcement [DN], Auto Attendant [DN], or Voice Mail [DN].  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
3-129  
System & Station  
Program *52 – Caller ID/ANI Abandoned Call Number Station Owner Assignments  
Program *52 – Caller ID/ANI Abandoned Call Number  
Station Owner Assignments  
Processor Type: DK14, DK40i, All RCTUs  
Program Type:  
Station  
Initialized Default: No station owners assigned  
ꢀꢃ ꢀꢃ ꢀꢃ ꢀꢃ  
ꢀ
SELECT = Caller ID or ANI CO Line Number  
CLASS OWNER = the station port number that  
should store Abandon Call Numbers for the Caller  
ID or ANI CO Line(s) entered.  
To add a range of line numbers, enter  
XXXꢀXXX (low port ꢀ high port).  
Press LED Button 01 to erase data.  
Processor  
DK14  
CO Line Range  
001~004  
[PDN] Port Range  
000~009  
Processor  
RCTUBA/BB  
RCTUC/D  
RCTUE/F  
CO Line Range  
001~048  
[PDN] Port Range  
000~079  
DK40i  
001~012  
000~027  
001~144  
000~239  
RCTUA  
001~016  
000~031  
001~200  
000~335  
CLID/ANI  
CO Line  
Number  
Station Owner  
Port Number  
Assigned  
CLID/ANI  
CO Line  
Number  
Station Owner  
Port Number  
Assigned  
CLID/ANI  
CO Line  
Number  
Station Owner  
Port Number  
Assigned  
CLID/ANI  
CO Line  
Number  
Station Owner  
Port Number  
Assigned  
3-130  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
System & Station  
Program *52 – Caller ID/ANI Abandoned Call Number Station Owner Assignments  
Program *52 Overview  
Use this program for any LCD telephone that must store abandon call information for Caller ID,  
Ground/Loop start lines and/or ANI, DID/Tie lines must be allocated “Abandon-Call-Memory”  
LCD telephones can be allocated memory to save up to 100 numbers in 10 number increments (see  
IDL totals).  
When Caller ID and ANI lines ring into the Strata DK system and the caller hangs-up before the  
call is answered, the call is considered abandoned. In this case, the Caller ID and ANI information  
received can be stored at a designated LCD telephone. When a Caller ID line rings at more than  
one telephone (Program 81-89), the LCD telephone that should store the Caller ID information for  
that line must be programmed as the owner of that Caller ID line using this program.  
When a Caller ID line rings only one LCD telephone (Program 81-89), the abandoned call Caller  
ID information will be stored at that LCD telephone regardless of the Program *52 assignment.  
The number of abandoned calls the station can store is set in Program *51.  
An LCD telephone can be assigned as owner of any number of Caller ID lines. A Caller ID line  
can only be assigned to one owner LCD telephone.  
If a Caller ID CO line or ANI Tie/DID line is answered by the, Distributed Hunt group queue, or  
DISA line, and if this call is abandoned before it is routed to and rings a station, the Caller ID or  
ANI data will be stored in the abandoned call memory of the station owner assigned to the Caller  
ID or ANI line assigned in this program.  
Notes  
●
●
●
●
Abandoned “call-forwarded” calls will store Caller ID information in the “Abandon-Call-  
Memory” of the “first-call-forwarded-from-station”. The “first-call-forwarded-from-station”  
does not have to be assigned to the CO line in this program. To store abandon call information  
for CO lines, the station must also be allocated “Abandon Call Memory” in Program *51.  
If a Caller ID CO line is answered by the Strata DK Distributed Hunt Group Queue or DISA  
line, and if this call is abandoned before it is routed to and rings a station, the Caller ID data is  
stored in the abandon call memory of the station owner assigned to the Caller ID line assigned  
in this program.  
Tie/DID ANI lines store abandoned call ANI numbers on the Primary and/or Phantom  
Directory Number owner telephones if they are allocated memory in Program *51. Tie/DID  
ANI line calls that are abandoned while Distributed Hunt Group queue will store ANI  
information on the station owner assigned in this program.  
ACD or Auto Attendant calls that are abandoned while the call is in queue or calls abandoned  
while connected to an Auto Attendant or VM device will register on the SMDR report as a call  
answered by the ACD announcement [DN], Auto Attendant [DN], or Voice Mail [DN].  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
3-131  
System & Station  
Program 58 – DK424 Attendant Console Series (Part 1)  
Program 58 – DK424 Attendant Console Series (Part 1)  
Processor Type: RCTUBA/BB, RCTUC/D and RCTUE/F  
Program Type:  
Station  
Initialized Default: see each program  
Program 58-1 – Attendant Console Overflow Timer  
Initialized Default: 32 seconds  
ꢀ ꢀꢃ ꢀꢃ ꢀꢃ  
SELECT = 1  
DATA = 011~999 seconds  
DATA =  
Program 58-1 Overview  
Incoming Line Calls (not recalls) to attendant consoles will overflow to a designated attendant  
console or station port (Program 58-5) if the call is not answered within the time (011~999  
seconds) specified by this program. The overflow call will ring on either the ,Qꢒ7UDQV button  
(assigned in Program 59) of the console that receives the overflow call, or the [DN] or CO /LQH  
button of a station.  
Notes  
●
This program sets overflow timer for all attendant consoles (1~4)  
The overflow destination is assigned in Program 58-5.  
●
Program 58-2 – Attendant Console Display Type  
Initialized Default: All LEDs OFF  
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ  
SELECT = 2  
LED Button 01 ON for EL or OFF for EGA display  
Console Number (1~4)  
LED Button 02 ON sets Answer Button operation for First In/  
First Out (FIFO) or priority per Program 58-4  
LED Button 03 ON sets Attendant Console Call Waiting Tone  
Button 01 LED  
Button 02 LED  
ON (FIFO) OFF (58-4)  
Button 03 LED  
Attendant  
Console  
ON  
(EL)  
OFF  
(EGA)  
ON  
OFF  
(Call Waiting Tone)  
(No Call Waiting Tone)  
1
2
3
4
3-132  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
System & Station  
Program 58 – DK424 Attendant Console Series (Part 1)  
Program 58-2 Overview  
This program identifies in software the type of display connected to each console. It also enables  
you to set priorities for types of incoming calls. You can also enable Call Waiting tones.  
LED 01: Attendant Console Display Type  
Base units can connect to an Electroluminescent (EL) display (LED 01 ON) or Extended Graphics  
Adapter (EGA) Display (LED 01 OFF).  
LED 02: Answer Button Operation  
The attendant console $QVZHU button can be programmed to answer calls on either a First-in,  
First-out (FIFO) or a Priority basis. With FIFO, new calls or recalls are stacked in queue in the  
order in which they are received. This is true regardless of the type of call/recall (CO line,  
Intercom, [DN] call or Hold Recall, etc.). The queued calls ring to the $QVZHU button in the order  
in which they are received.  
With Priority operation, each type of incoming call or recall (CO line call, [DN] call, Hold Recall  
or Park Recall, etc.) is assigned a specific answering priority ranging from 1~6. (Call Priority is  
flexible and is assigned in Program 58-4.) Calls will queue to the attendant in order of their  
predetermined priority levels. For example, Priority Level 1 calls ring to the attendant before  
Priority 2 calls; Priority 2 calls ring before Priority 3 calls, and so forth.  
LED 03: Attendant Console Call Waiting Tone  
Each attendant console can be programmed individually to receive a muted ring signal that will  
alert the console that a new call is waiting while the console is busy on another call. If call waiting  
tone is not enabled, new calls do not present an audible indication. The call waiting display always  
displays the number of calls waiting to be answered.  
Program 58-4 – Attendant Console Answer Button Priority Assignments  
Initialized Default: 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6  
Lowest Priority  
Highest Priority  
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ  
SELECT = 4  
Console Number (1~4)  
Enter button numbers in priority order.  
Button Name  
Button Number  
Park-RC  
Trans RC  
Hold-RC  
In-Trans  
LINE  
In Dial “O”  
[PDN]  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
Program 58-4 Overview  
Each incoming call or recall type can be assigned a specific $QVZHU button priority level, ranging  
from 0~6. If the $QVZHU button is assigned Priority answer operation in Program 58-2, then  
incoming calls/recalls will ring to the $QVZHU button based on their assigned priority levels.  
Priority 1 calls have the highest priority while Priority 6 calls have the lowest.  
Notes  
●
EMRG has first priority over the above key assignments.  
See Program 59 for the function of each button.  
●
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
3-133  
System & Station  
Program 58 – DK424 Attendant Console Series (Part 1)  
Program 58-5 – Attendant Console Overflow Destination Assignments  
Initialized Default: Blank  
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ  
SELECT = 5  
Enter the overflow destination port number.  
Console overflow destination =  
Console Number (1~4)  
Processor  
RCTUBA/BB  
RCTUC/D  
[PDN] Port Range  
Max. Consoles  
000~079  
000~239  
000~335  
2
4
4
RCTUE/F  
Program 58-5 Overview  
When the attendant console has been placed in the Overflow mode (via the 2YHUIORZ button),  
calls queue to be answered based on the predetermined FIFO or priority basis. If a call remains in  
queue for a period longer than the time period set for the Overflow Timer (set in Program 58-1),  
then the call will overflow to the destination assigned in this program.  
The assigned destination can be either a station, voice mail, auto attendant, or another attendant  
console.  
●
Calls that will overflow include ring transfer, incoming CO /LQH, GLDOꢃ“ꢁ”, and $WWGꢃ&DOO  
button calls; Transfer Recall (,Qꢒ7UDQV) and +ROG recall will not overflow.  
●
Overflow recall time is set in Program 58-1.  
3-134  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
System & Station  
Program 59 – Attendant Console Flexible Button Codes  
Program 59 – Attendant Console Flexible Button  
Codes  
Processor Type: RCTUBA/BB, RCTUC/D, RCTUE/F  
Program Type: Station  
Initialized Default: Given throughout this section  
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ  
Attendant Console (1~4)  
DATA = Button Code  
See legend.  
1 = Left  
2 = Right  
Press LED Buttons 01~12 on Programming Telephone to  
enter data for corresponding console button.  
Codes (Left Buttons 1~12)  
Join Loop (239)  
In-DN (257)  
Codes (Right Buttons 1~12)  
Split (295)  
In-Emrg (261)  
In-Trans (258)  
In-LG3 (243)  
Sup. Loop (296)  
In-Dial “0” (262)  
Hold-RC (259)  
In-LG1 (241)  
Conf (297)  
Redial (496)  
BLF (298)  
Overflow (299)  
Spdial (497)  
Out Dial (294)  
SD10 (*10)  
Night (439)  
SD13 (*13)  
SD12 (*12)  
SD11 (*11)  
Trans-RC (260)  
In-LG2 (242)  
Attd Call (000)  
Console 1  
Left  
Right  
Right  
Right  
Right  
10  
07  
04  
01  
11  
08  
05  
02  
12  
10  
07  
04  
01  
11  
08  
05  
02  
12  
09  
06  
03  
09  
06  
03  
Console 2  
Left  
10  
07  
04  
01  
11  
08  
05  
02  
12  
09  
06  
03  
10  
07  
04  
01  
11  
08  
05  
02  
12  
09  
06  
03  
Console 3  
Left  
10  
07  
04  
01  
11  
08  
05  
02  
12  
09  
06  
03  
10  
07  
04  
01  
11  
08  
05  
02  
12  
09  
06  
03  
Console 4  
Left  
10  
07  
04  
01  
11  
08  
05  
02  
12  
09  
06  
03  
10  
07  
04  
01  
11  
08  
05  
02  
12  
09  
06  
03  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
3-135  
System & Station  
Program 59 – Attendant Console Flexible Button Codes  
Program 59 Overview  
Attendant Consoles have 24 flexible buttons (12 on left and 12 on the right side of the dial pad).  
This program is used to assign each button to an available function or options. Program 59 record  
sheets define the button options (and codes) available.  
Table 3-2  
Required PC Attendant Console Button Codes  
Button Function  
Button Labels  
Code  
Notes  
Conference  
Conf  
297  
259  
262  
Starts conference calls.  
Hold Recall  
Hold-RC  
In-Dial “0”  
Held calls recall on this button.  
Incoming Dial “0”  
Dial “0” calls ring in on this button.  
Incoming calls to the console DN ring on this  
button. The console [DN] is the Prog 04  
assignment of the Prog 04 console port  
number.  
Incoming Directory Number  
In-DN  
257  
Incoming Ring Transfer  
Join-Loop  
In-Trans  
258  
293  
Receive call transfer.  
Join-Loop  
Connects any held call to an existing call.  
Switches ATTD consoles dial pad from digital  
to tone mode.  
Out Dial  
Out Dial  
294  
Redial Last Number (  
Release to Idle  
)
Redial or RDL  
496  
476  
497  
Redials the last number.  
Release Call or RLS  
Speed Dial or SDS  
Releases current call and makes station idle.  
Begins speed dial selection.  
Speed Dial Select (  
)
ꢀ
Allows attendant to talk to either party  
separately on a conference call.  
Split Call  
Split  
295  
296  
260  
Places call on attendant hold loop key so  
attendant can supervise call.  
Supervised Loop  
Transfer Recall  
Sup Loop  
Trans-RC  
No answer transferred calls, recall on this  
button.  
Can originate calls on this button. The  
Attendant Call LED is lit red any time the  
attendant talk path is connected.  
Attendant Call  
Attd Call  
000  
Table 3-3  
Recommended PC Attendant Console Button Codes  
Button Labels Code  
Button Function  
Notes  
Display BLF  
BLF  
298  
Displays BLF on CRT or EL display.  
Indicates to all consoles an incoming  
emergency call.  
Incoming Emergency  
In-Emrg  
261  
Indicates a message from station or VM  
device to Attendant. Disconnects and recalls  
dial tone on CO line; accesses Centrex or  
PBX features; enters pause or flash during  
speed dial programming.  
Message Waiting/Flash  
Msg Wait, Flash or MW/FL  
499  
Overflow  
Overflow  
Park-RC  
299  
263  
Places console in the call overflow mode.  
Parked calls recall on this button.  
Park Recall  
Table 3-4  
Incoming Line Group Button Assignments  
In-LG1~241  
In-LG2~242  
In-LG3~243  
In-LG4~244  
In-LG5~245  
In-LG6~246  
In-LG7~247  
In-LG8~248  
In-LG9~249  
In-LG10~250  
In-LG11~251  
In-LG12~252  
In-LG13~253  
In-LG14~254  
In-LG15~255  
In-LG16~256  
Table 3-5  
Optional Attendant Console Button Codes  
Button Function  
Button Labels  
Code  
Notes  
Alarm  
Alarm Reset or ALRM  
477  
Resets alarm condition system-wide.  
Picks up tenant 3’s ringing CO calls.  
Call Pickup Tenant 1~Call  
Pickup Tenant 4  
PKUP 1~PKUP 4  
435~438  
3-136  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
System & Station  
Program 59 – Attendant Console Flexible Button Codes  
Table 3-5  
Optional Attendant Console Button Codes (continued)  
Button Labels Code  
Button Function  
Notes  
CO line access of appearing calls. CO  
line ranges vary according to processor:  
Line 1~48  
001~048  
001~144  
001~200  
RCTUBA/BB  
RCTUC/D  
RCTUE/F  
CO Line Appearance  
Line 1~144  
Line 1~200  
Momentarily unlocks door (3 or 6  
seconds). The PC attendant activates  
these options when these buttons are  
assigned.  
Door Lock 0~Door Lock 4  
(DDCB/HDCB)  
DRLK 0~4  
471~475  
292  
Activates ALL CALL Paging to  
telephone speakers (not EXTR Page).  
Overrides any existing ALL CALL page.  
Emergency Page Access  
Emrg Page  
Night Transfer  
Tenant 1~Tenant 4  
Night Transfer1 or NT1~Night  
Transfer4 or NT4  
Sets Tenant 1 CO line DAY/NIGHT ring  
mode.  
439~442  
453  
Prevents Privacy Override (not  
Executive Override).  
Privacy  
Privacy On Line or PRIV  
Changes station Privacy mode to Non-  
private for CO lines.  
Privacy Release  
Privacy Release or PRV RLS  
479  
Sets pause in Speed dial (see Program  
12-3.)  
Pause  
Spd Dial Pause or PAU  
495  
493  
Pause (Long)  
Spd Dial Lng Pause or PAU/L  
Sets a 10-second pause in Speed Dial.  
Will Auto Dial a Caller ID and/or  
Automatic Number Identification (ANI)  
telephone number that was stored in  
station Caller ID/ANI memory.  
Unanswered Caller ID and/  
or ANI Stored Number  
Auto Dial  
Lost Call Auto Dial or LCAD  
462  
Table 3-6  
Additional Feature Button Codes  
Button Function  
Button Labels  
Code  
Notes  
Allows a Voluntary Account Code to be  
entered.  
Account Code  
Account Code or ACCNT  
450  
Console can alert another station but  
another station cannot alert the console.  
See Program 39 for more information.  
Alert Signaling  
Alert 1~4  
427~430  
Pages up to 120 idle electronic or digital  
telephones over speaker.  
All Call Voice Page  
All Call Page or AC  
489  
470  
494  
487  
486  
Automatic Busy Redial  
Automatic Callback Busy  
Call Forward All Calls  
Call Forward A.C. Fixed  
Auto Busy Redial or ABR  
Auto Callback or ACB  
Call Frwd All Calls or CFAC  
Call Frwd to: or CFF  
Sets ABR of busy outgoing number.  
Sets ACB for station recalled by busy  
line.  
All calls forward to selected station.  
Forwards all calls to pre-defined  
destination. See Program 36.  
Forwards calls to selected station if  
station is busy.  
Call Forward Busy  
Call Frwd Busy or CFB  
459  
Call Forward Busy/  
No Answer  
Forwards calls to selected station if  
station is busy or does not answer.  
Call Frwd Busy/NAns or CFB/NA  
Call Frwd External or CF-EXT  
Call Frwd No Answer or CFNA  
Park in Orbit or PARK  
457  
460  
458  
464  
Call Forward External  
Call Forward No Answer  
Call Park  
Forward calls externally.  
Forwards calls to selected station if  
station does not answer.  
Call Park Only.  
CP Display Button and Mode 64 can be  
used interchangeably. Displays call  
parked via telephone LCD.  
Call Park LCD Display  
Park Orbit DIsplay or CPD  
465  
Call Park and Page  
Call Park/Page or CP/PG  
Directed Pickup or PKUP  
463  
484  
Parking and Paging Park Pickup.  
Picks up ringing or held intercom, trunk  
calls, and page.  
Call Pickup (Directed)  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
3-137  
System & Station  
Program 59 – Attendant Console Flexible Button Codes  
Table 3-6  
Additional Feature Button Codes (continued)  
Button Labels  
Button Function  
Code  
480  
Notes  
Picks up a call to any group to which  
station is assigned in *31.  
Call Pickup (Group)4  
Do Not Disturb  
Group Pickup  
Do Not Disturb or DND  
498  
Prevents calls to station.  
Separates the called party’s ISDN sub-  
address from the called party number.  
The digit performs this function on  
standard telephones.  
ISDN Sub-address  
Sub-address  
467  
Initiates DK to send dialed digits to the  
ISDN network when this button is  
pressed from a digital or electronic  
telephone. Program *63-2 invokes the  
same function when the Dial Timer  
expires. Also see Tone Button in this  
table.  
ISDN Start  
Start  
469  
LCD Message Select  
LCD Msg Select or LCD M  
481  
Begins LCD message selection.  
Night Transfer Lock  
Tenant 1~Night Transfer  
Lock Tenant 4  
Used to lock system ringing mode: DAY,  
DAY2, NIGHT See Programs 74 and *36  
for NT Lock Password assignments.  
Night Lock1 or NT1 L1~Night  
Lock4 or NT4 L4  
431~434  
Simulates On-hook/Off-hook operation  
to release an existing call and answer  
new incoming/ringing call.  
Release and Answer  
Release and Ans and RLS/ANS  
Save Last Number or SAVE  
466  
485  
Saves last number dialed for future  
speed dial.  
Save Last Dialed Number  
Reserves button for station speed dial  
for the following processors:  
*10~*49  
*10~*49  
RCTUBA/BB  
RCTUC/D  
RCTUE/F  
Station Speed Dial Codes  
System Speed Dial Codes  
SD  
*100~*139  
Speed dial number is set by station port  
000.  
*600~*699  
*600~*699  
*200~*999  
RCTUBA/BB  
SD  
RCTUC/D  
RCTUE/F  
CO dial signals set to tone or pulse.  
For ISDN applications, after the user  
presses the Tone Dial Select button, any  
digits dialed after it is will be sent using  
DTMF tones.  
Tone  
Tone Dial Select or TONE  
490  
Notes  
●
See Program *15 for Tenant Group assignments.  
●
Picks up calls to telephones in any call pickup group to which the telephone is assigned in  
Program *31.  
●
Attendant consoles cannot be equipped with [SDNs] or [PhDNs]. The console [DN] is  
assigned to the console port number in Program 04. The console’s [DN] can have only one  
appearance.  
●
Attendant consoles cannot be equipped with [PDNs], [SDNs], or [PhDNs]. The [In-DN]  
button is the console’s [DN], assigned in Program 04; it supports incoming calls only and can  
only appear once on a console.  
3-138  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
System & Station  
Program 60-1 – SMDR Data Output Options  
Program 60-1 – SMDR Data Output Options  
Processor Type: DK14, DK40i, All RCTUs  
Program Type: System  
Initialized Default: LED 01 OFF  
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ  
SELECT = 1  
Light the LED Buttons that are marked  
with an X in the table below.  
LED/Button  
X
LED ON  
LED OFF  
20  
19  
18  
17  
16  
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
10  
09  
08  
07  
06  
05  
04  
03  
02  
Caller ID, ANI and DNIS data will be sent from the system  
SMDR port  
Account code data will be sent from the system SMDR  
port  
01  
Program 60-1 Overview  
Program 60-1 determines which information will be sent out the system SMDR port: System  
Account codes or Caller ID and/or ANI telephone numbers.  
Turn LED 01 ON if received Caller ID and/or ANI information should be sent out the system  
SMDR port.  
Turn LED 01 OFF if Account Code information should be sent out the system SMDR port.  
Note LED 01 determines if received Caller ID and/or ANI information (LED 01 ON) or data is  
sent out the SMDR port. This data is output on the last 15-digit (right hand) field columns  
of the SMDR print out.  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
3-139  
System & Station  
Program 60-2~7 – SMDR Output/Account Code Digit Length  
Program 60-2~7 – SMDR Output/Account Code Digit  
Length  
Processor Type: DK14, DK40i, All RCTUs  
Program Type:  
System  
Initialized Default: Item 2: 10 seconds  
Item 3: SMDR output is enabled for answered incoming/outgoing calls  
Item 4: a 6-digit length is assigned to all Forced/Voluntary Account Codes  
Item 7: 21 digits  
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ  
SELECT = 2~7 (Item)  
See table below.  
Make a selection from  
the table below.  
Item  
Description  
Data  
SMDR Threshold Time  
0 =1 second  
1 = 10 seconds  
2
3
Time  
SMDR Output when a call is completed  
0 = Outgoing Only  
1 = Incoming and Outgoing  
SMDR COR  
Forced/Voluntary Account Code Digit Length 04~15  
4
5
(See Program 69 for Verified Account Codes)  
Digits are verified per Program 30, Button/LED 14 and Program 69  
Account  
SMDR Printout Options  
Toll Dial:  
0 = All Calls (item 3, printout outgoing call only is still available)  
1 = Dial “0” calls only  
2 = Dial “1” calls only  
3 = Dial “00” calls only  
4 = Dial “1”, “0” calls only  
5 = Dial “1”, “00” calls only  
Toll Dial Data  
Data  
DISA Security Code  
01~15 digits, may be changed from station, per Program 30  
Button 01 = blank  
6
7
If a security code is not programmed, outgoing trunk access via DISA  
will not require a security code when dialing.  
Button 02 is wild card  
(any digit from 1~9)  
Credit Card Call Digit Length, 01~30 digits  
Credit  
Number of digits required  
when “0” is the first digit  
dialed; if this number of  
digits is not dialed, the  
system will disconnect the  
call after 20 seconds. “0” is  
counted as a digit.  
(see Program 43)  
Example: 0 + 714 + 583 -  
3700 = 11 digits; 11 should  
be programmed as a  
minimum in this case.  
3-140  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
System & Station  
Program 60-2~7 – SMDR Output/Account Code Digit Length  
Program 60-2-7 Overview  
This program assigns the type of data to send to the Station Message Detail Report (SMDR).  
Item 2: SMDR Threshold Time  
The time that a call must be in progress before it will register with SMDR can be set to 1 or 10  
seconds.  
Item 3: SMDR Output  
System output to a Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) device can include information for  
both incoming and outgoing calls, or only for outgoing calls. Local and long distance call data will  
be sent out.  
Item 4: Forced/Voluntary Account Code Digit Length  
The Account Code entered at a station can vary in length from 4~15 digits. For Forced Account  
Code use, a call will not be completed unless the specified number of digits is entered by a station  
user. In the case of Voluntary Account Codes, the Account Code will not be sent to the SMDR call  
record unless the specified number of digits is dialed. Initialized data assigns a six-digit length for  
all Account Codes. See Program 60-1 and Program 69 for Verified Account Codes.  
Item 5: Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) Printout Options  
This option selectively deletes local call data and allows long distance/toll call data only to be sent  
out the SMDR port. The type of long distance/toll call data that prints out is selected by long  
distance prefix codes 0, 1, 00, or 1 or 0.  
Item 6: Direct Inward System Access (DISA) Security Code  
The optional security code (1~15 digits) is required for incoming DISA calls to access outgoing  
CO lines. If the DISA security code is not set in programming, DISA users can access outgoing  
lines without dialing a security code. This code is not required for DISA internal calls to stations.  
The DISA security code can also be changed from stations enabled in Program 30. If the DK280  
built-in Auto Attendant is installed, make sure to program a DISA security code to prevent Auto  
Attendant callers from making unauthorized external DISA calls by using the DISA access feature  
(Dial ꢀ).  
Item 7: Credit Card Call Digit Length  
Station users bypassing Toll Restriction with the “0 +” Credit Card Calling feature (Program 43)  
must dial a predetermined number of digits including the “0.” This predetermined number is  
established with Item 7, and can be 1~30 digits. Set 11 digits in this program when using LCR.  
Notes  
●
●
●
If PBX code is dialed, numbers dialed after the code will be checked.  
If A/C, O/C or SPCC code begins with “0”, “1”, or “00”, that call will print out.  
When accessing LCR feature, all digits sent to CO will be output.  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
3-141  
System & Station  
Program 60-8 – Call Forward External (Remote Change, Security) ID Code  
Program 60-8 – Call Forward External (Remote  
Change, Security) ID Code  
Processor Type: DK14, DK40i, All RCTUs  
Program Type:  
System  
Initialized Default: No digits  
More Codes  
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ  
DATA = ID code (1~15 digits)  
When entering less than 15 digits, enter digits,  
then press Hold.  
SELECT = 8  
Telephone port number to  
which the CF Ext ID (security)  
code will be assigned.  
LED Button 01 = blanks, erases data  
LED Button 02 = a wild card (can be any digit  
from 1~9)  
Processor  
[PDN] Port Range  
000~009  
Processor  
[PDN] Port Range  
000~079  
DK14  
DK40i  
RCTUBA/BB  
RCTUC/D  
RCTUE/F  
000~027  
000~239  
RCTUA  
000~031  
000~335  
Telephone Port  
Number  
CF/EKT ID Code  
(1~15 digits)  
Telephone Port  
Number  
CF/EKT ID Code  
(1~15 digits)  
Telephone Port  
Number  
CF/EKT ID Code  
(1~15 digits)  
Program 60-8 Overview  
Changes a telephone’s External Call Forward destination to [PDNs] but not [PhDNs] from outside  
the system. The person that wishes to change the destination must call into a DISA CO line, enter  
the telephone’s [PDN] +ꢃꢄꢑꢏꢁ and then enter a security code plus the destination telephone  
number. CF/EXT ID code must be assigned to a telephone to allow callers to change the Call  
Forward-External destination of that telephone from a remote location by calling in on a DISA CO  
line.  
The security code (1~15 digits) for each telephone is set with this program.  
Important!  
To allow Call Forward External, CO lines must be enabled for the following:  
●
Two CO line connection in Program 10-1 and Program 15-5.  
Outgoing Access in Program 41 including DISA port numbers.  
●
3-142  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
System & Station  
Program 69 – Verified Account Codes  
Program 69 – Verified Account Codes  
Processor Type: DK14, DK40i, All RCTUs  
Program Type:  
System  
Initialized Default: Blank  
More Codes  
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ  
SELECT = Verified Account Code  
Verified Account Code (1~15 digits)  
Number (VACN)  
Processor  
DK14  
VACN  
Processor  
RCTUBA/BB  
RCTUC/D  
RCTUE/F  
VACN  
000~299  
000~299  
000~299  
000~299  
000~299  
000~499  
DK40i  
RCTUA  
Verified Account Code (1~15 digits)  
10  
VACN  
(3-digit)  
Name  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
3-143  
System & Station  
Program 69 – Verified Account Codes  
Program 69 Overview  
Verified Account Codes (VACs) may be added, deleted, or changed with Program 69. Each  
Verified Account Code can be 1~15 digits long, but cannot exceed the Account Code length  
requirement set in Program 60-4.  
Account Codes may not conflict with (be the same as) emergency numbers in Program 44-91~93.  
The following programs and options should be considered when establishing Verified Account  
Codes.  
Account Code Digit Length  
Program 60-4 sets the digit length that must be dialed for all Account Codes: Forced (Verified/  
Nonverified) and Voluntary (Verified/Nonverified).  
Full and Partially Verified Account Codes  
Verified Account Codes can contain the same number of digits (full Verified Account Code) or less  
(partially Verified Account Code) than the length set in Program 60-4.  
If the quantity of digits in a VAC is the same as the Account Code digit length in Program 60-4,  
then all digits will be Verified; if the quantity of digits is less, then only those digits will be  
verified. Stations must have LED 14 ON in Program 30 to use Verified Account Codes.  
If partially verified, the first part of the Account Code is verified and the remainder is not. For  
example, if VAC 2734 is set in Program 69, but the digit length is set to eight in Program 60-4,  
then the user must dial 2734 plus any other four digits to enter a partially Verified Account Code.  
There are many applications for partially VACs. For instance, using the code in the example  
above, the numbers 2734 could be the user’s dial restriction code and the remaining four digits  
could be a customer-client code, a sales order, etc.  
Verified Account Code Toll Restriction Assignments  
A Toll Restriction Class can be assigned with Program 70 to each of the 300 VACs. This feature  
can be used to change a telephone’s Class of Service to allow long distance calls from restricted  
telephones only when a verified account code is entered before dialing the long distance number.  
These calls will be recorded with the account code on the system SMDR output.  
Verified Account Code Dial Requirement  
Assigned on a station-by-station basis in Program 30, LED 14 ON. All Account Codes dialed  
(Forced or Voluntary) from stations assigned in this program will be verified.  
Code Change  
Stations selected in Program 30, LED 15 ON, can change VACs by dialing the following:  
[PDN] + &98< + 333~7<< + VAC + 5HGLDO  
Verified Account Codes: Forced/Voluntary Program Options  
Any station can dial a VAC after accessing a CO line—by pressing the 6SHHG#'LDO + 83 (DK14,  
DK40, RCTUA~C/D), 6SHHG#'LDO + 383 (RCTUE/F),#or by pressing the $FFRXQW#&RGH  
button. Forced Account Code requirements are assigned via station and line program options:  
stations are assigned in Program 30, LED 08 ON; and lines are assigned in Program 15-7. Stations  
must dial VACs when assigned in Program 30, LED 14 ON. Direct Inward System Access (DISA)  
callers that access outgoing lines can be required to enter Verified Account Codes with Program 30  
(LED 08 ON for Port 99).  
3-144  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
System & Station  
Program 70 – Verified Account Code Toll Restriction Assignments  
Program 70 – Verified Account Code Toll Restriction  
Assignments  
Processor Type: DK14, DK40i, All RCTUs  
Program Type:  
System  
Initialized Default: 000 for all VACNs  
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ  
SELECT = Verified Account Code  
Number (VACN)  
VAC Restrict Code (00~10)  
00 =No Station Toll Restriction  
01 =Area Code Toll Restriction  
DATA = VAC Digit Restriction  
0 = No Digit Restriction  
1 = Digit Restriction  
02 =Area Code Toll Restriction and 0 or 1 as 1st (or  
2nd digit)  
03 =Class 1 T.R.07 = Class 5 T.R.  
Processor  
DK14  
VACN  
Processor  
RCTUBA/BB  
RCTUC/D  
RCTUE/F  
VACN  
000~299  
000~299  
000~299  
000~299  
000~299  
000~499  
DK40i  
RCTUA  
VAC Digit  
Restrict Code  
VAC Restrict  
Code  
VAC Digit  
Restrict Code  
VAC Restrict  
Code  
VAC Digit  
Restrict Code  
VAC Restrict  
Code  
VACN  
VACN  
VACN  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
3-145  
System & Station  
Program 70 – Verified Account Code Toll Restriction Assignments  
Program 70 Overview  
A Toll Restriction Class can be assigned with this program to each of the 300 Verified Account  
Codes assigned in Program 69. This class of restriction overrides the normal station class of  
restriction assigned in Program 48 when a VAC is entered at the station. The station resumes its  
Program 48 restriction after the call is disconnected.  
When a Forced or Voluntary Verified Account Code is dialed at a station after accessing a CO line  
and before dialing a telephone number, the station temporarily assumes the Toll Restriction Class  
assigned to the Verified Account Code. When Program 70 is initialized, all Verified Account  
Codes are assigned as not Toll Restricted (data = 00). Verified Account Code Toll Restriction class  
assignments are not user programmable; so if the assignments are not known, it is recommended to  
assign a number (block) of Verified Account Codes to each type of Toll Restriction class. For  
example:  
VACs 000~050 = no restriction  
VACs 051~100 = total restriction  
VACs 101~150 = Class 1, etc.  
♦
♦
♦
When stations enter VACs they will be unrestricted.  
Range programming is not available.  
If dial “0” credit card dialing is allowed, use Program 43 to allow designated stations/CO lines  
credit card calling.  
3-146  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
System & Station  
Program 71 – DNIS  
Program 71 – DNIS  
Processor Type: DK40i, all RCTUs  
Program Type:  
System  
Initialized Default: All Programs blank  
DNIS Addresses  
Processor  
DK14  
DNIS Address  
NA  
ANI Address  
Processor  
RCTUBA/BB  
RCTUC/D  
RCTUE/F  
DNIS Address  
000~349  
ANI Address  
NA  
199  
199  
349  
499  
499  
DK40i  
000~199  
000~199  
000~499  
RCTUA  
000~499  
Program 71-0: DID / Tie / DNIS / ANI Lines  
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ  
DNIS Address (see legend above)  
DNIS Number (2~5 digits)  
Press LED Button 01 to blank out data.  
Program 71-1~3: DNIS Number and ANI Line Routing Assignments  
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ  
Enter 1, 2, or 3  
Ringing Destination (see legend below)  
Use LED Button 01 to blank out data.  
1 = Day Ring Assignment  
2 = Day2 Ring Assignment  
3 = Night Ring Assignment  
DNIS Address (see legend above)  
For ANI-only lines, enter address (only one assignment is  
provided for ANI lines without DNIS, see legend above).  
DNIS/ANI Routing Destinations  
Route to Ports  
DK40i  
[PDN]  
[PhDN]  
DH [DN]  
0900~0915  
0900~0915  
0900~0915  
0900~0915  
0900~0915  
ACD  
NA  
IMDU/RMDS  
#031  
Network Table  
#300~#399  
#300~#399  
#300~#499  
#300~#599  
#400~#699  
0000~0027  
0000~0031  
0000~0079  
0000~0239  
0000~0335  
0500~0527  
0500~0531  
0500~0589  
0500~0739  
0500~0835  
RCTUA  
NA  
#035  
RCTUBA/BB  
RCTUC/D  
RCTUE/F  
#090~#097  
#250~#265  
#345~#360  
#085  
#245  
#340  
All Processors: External Page = #039  
All processors except RCTUE/F: Night Ring Over External Page = #271  
Night Ring Over External Page for RCTUE/F = #366  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
3-147  
System & Station  
Program 71 – DNIS  
Program 71-4: DNIS and ANI Only Lines Voice Mail ID Assignments  
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ  
DNIS Address  
VM ID Code  
(see legend above)  
Enter VM ID code that should be sent to Voice Mail  
when the selected DNIS number Call-Forwards or  
rings directly to Voice Mail (1~16 digits).  
Important! DNIS VM ID codes operate with in-  
band DTMF tone VM integration only;  
not with SMDI VM integration.  
Press LED Button 02 to enter ꢀ  
Press LED Button 03 to enter #  
Press LED Button 04 to enter Pause  
Program 71-5: DNIS Number Name Display  
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ  
DNIS Address  
DNIS NAME TAG (up to 16 characters)  
(see previous legend)  
Use the character entry procedures that follow  
Program 93 record sheets. NAME TAG displays on  
LCD telephones when a DNIS Call rings in.  
DNIS Record Sheet  
DNIS Number  
DNIS Number  
DNIS Number  
VM ID Code (1~16 digits)  
71-4  
DNIS Number Name  
(1~16 characters)  
71-5  
Routing Points (71-  
1, 71-2, 71-3)  
DNIS  
Address  
(1~5 digits)  
71-0  
1
2
3
3-148  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
System & Station  
Program 71 – DNIS  
DNIS Number  
Routing Points (71-  
1, 71-2, 71-3)  
DNIS Number  
(1~5 digits)  
71-0  
DNIS Number  
VM ID Code (1~16 digits)  
71-4  
DNIS Number Name  
(1~16 characters)  
71-5  
DNIS  
Address  
1
2
3
Program 71-0 Overview  
Defines the DID / Tie / DNIS / ANI line extension numbers that the system should be able to  
receive. Each extension number can be from two to five digits; normally the local telephone  
company and/or the DNIS long distance carrier company will provide a list of these numbers.  
Each RCTU supports a different quantity of DNIS or DID/Tie line extension numbers (shown  
above in the Program Sequence).  
To assign a DNIS and/or normal Tie/DID line to Program 70-0 assignments: Program 17, LED 05  
must be turned ON for the line. In this case, Tie lines do not follow Program 04 assignments and  
DID lines do not follow Program ꢀ09 assignments. When this program is used with normal (non-  
DNIS or non-ANI) Tie and/or DID Lines -Program 17, LEDs 06, 07, and 08 must be OFF.  
Program 71-1~71-3 Overview  
Assigns the routing destination of each DNIS and/or normal Tie/DID line extension number and/or  
the routing destination of Automatic Number Identification (ANI) only lines.  
Important! Program 71-1 assigns DNIS numbers to route to selected [DN] buttons and makes  
them flash when the DNIS number is called. When assigning DNIS numbers to route  
to Directory Numbers ([PDNs], [SDNs], [PhDNs]) using program 71-1, Program  
*71, *72, and *73 must also be used to assign the telephones, on which the [DNs]  
appear, to ring. When assigning DNIS numbers to route to ACD and DH groups  
using Program 71, the telephones (and appropriate [PDN], [SDN], or [PhDN]) in  
these groups must also be assigned to ring in Program *71, *72, and *73.  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
3-149  
System & Station  
Program 71 – DNIS  
A DNIS and/or Tie/DID extension number and/or ANI only line can be assigned to route one of  
the following destinations:  
♦
Primary Directory Number [PDN] - secondary appearances of this [PDN] will also ring if  
Programmed to ring in Program *71, *72, and/or *73  
♦
♦
♦
♦
♦
♦
♦
Phantom Directory Number  
Distributed Hunt Group  
ACD Group  
Outside telephone number routed externally over the Public Telephone Network  
The system remote maintenance modem  
Night ringing over the external page  
The external voice paging system (Private Network Tie lines only)  
A DNIS number or ANI only line can be assigned to route to one destination only in each of the  
three system ringing modes (Day, Day2 and Night); the destination can be unique or different in  
each ringing mode. For each DNIS Tie/DID extension number, the routing destination can be a  
unique destination or it can be the same destination as that assigned to other DNIS numbers. To  
assign lines that receive both ANI and DNIS with each call to Program 71-1 assignments: Program  
17, LED 05, 07 and 08 must be turned ON; for lines that receive DNIS digits only, LED 05 and 08  
must be ON.  
This program can also be used with non-DNIS or non-ANI Tie and/or DID lines to route calls. In  
this case, the normal Tie digit assignments in Program 04 and DID digit assignments in Program  
ꢀ09 will not be active - Program 17, LED 06, 07, 08 must be OFF and LED 05 must be ON for  
normal Tie/DID lines.  
The last address (499 for RCTUC3/D3, RCTUE3/F3; 349 for RCTUBA3/B3; and 199 for  
RCTUA3 or DK40i) in Program 71-0 is used to assign ANI only lines to a routing destination. All  
ANI only lines must be assigned to the same routing destination; this destination can be unique in  
each of the ringing modes (Day/Day2/Night).  
To assign an ANI only Tie/DID line to Program 71-1 assignments: Program 17, LED 05 must be  
turned OFF and LED 07 and 08 must be ON for lines that receive ANI digits only.  
Program 71-4 Overview  
This feature is available when using DTMF In-band VM integration only; it is not provided with  
SMDI VM integration.  
This Program assigns a Voice Mailbox ID (VMID) number to each DNIS/Tie/DID extension  
number and/or ANI only lines. This allows each DNIS/Tie/DID extension number and/or ANI  
only lines to be routed to a unique Voice Mail box when the number directly rings or is Call  
Forwarded to the Voice Mail system. When a DNIS/Tie/DID extension number or ANI line rings a  
station that has call forwarding set to Voice Mail, the DNIS/Tie/DID extension or ANI VMID is  
sent to the VM machine (if programmed in Program 71-4). If a DNIS/Tie/DID extension or ANI  
VMID is not programmed, the Call Forwarding station’s VMID is sent to the voice mail machine  
when the DNIS/Tie/ DNIS extension or ANI call forwards to VM. This program can also be used  
with non-DNIS Tie and/or DID lines to assign VMID digits to normal Tie or DID numbers.  
The last address (499 for RCTUC3/D3, RCTUE3/F3; 349 for RCTUBA3/B3, and 199 for  
RCTUA3 or DK40i) in Program 71-4 can be used to assign a VMID code to ANI only lines. All  
ANI only lines will be directed to the same Voice Mailbox.  
To assign an ANI only Tie/DID line to Program 71-4 assignments: Program 17, LED 05 must be  
turned OFF and LED 07 and 08 must be ON for lines that receive ANI digits only.  
3-150  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
System & Station  
Program 71 – DNIS  
Program 71-5 Overview  
This program is used to assign names to each DNIS number. The names for each DNIS/Tie/DID  
extension number is normally supplied by the customer. Each DNIS name can be up to 16  
alphanumeric characters. The DNIS/Tie/DID extension name will display on a telephone’s LCD  
when the DNIS/Tie/DID extension number rings the telephone directly or is transferred, Call  
Forwarded, or Hunted to the telephone.  
To assign a Tie/DID line to Program 71-5 assignments: Program 17, LED 05 must be turned ON  
for lines that should display DNIS/Tie/DID extension name tags. When a Tie/DID line receives  
both DNIS and ANI digits on the same call, Program 17, LED 06 determines what information,  
DNIS extension name or ANI number, will display as a priority when the line rings incoming to  
the system.  
This program can also be used with non-DNIS or ANI Tie and/or DID lines to display names,  
associated with the Tie or DID numbers, on telephone LCDs. In this case, the normal Tie digit  
assignments in Program 04 and/or DID digit assignments in Program ꢀ09 will not be active.  
Important!  
●
An individual telephone user can disable/enable the DNIS name display by using the Mode 60/  
61 function on his/her LCD telephone.  
●
The DNIS extension name can be assigned or not assigned to display as a priority over the  
ANI display (in Program 17, LED06) when both ANI and DNIS digits are received on the same  
call.  
●
If a name is not assigned to a DNIS number, DN:XXXX will display on telephone LCDs when  
the DNIS/Tie/DID line rings into the DK system (where XXXX = actual DNIS/Tie/DID digits  
received).  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
3-151  
System & Station  
Program *71~*73 – [DN] to [DN], Tie to [DN], and DID to [DN] Ringing Assignments  
Program *71~*73 – [DN] to [DN], Tie to [DN], and DID to  
[DN] Ringing Assignments  
Processor Type: DK14, DK40i, All RCTUs  
Program Type:  
System  
Initialized Default: [PDNs] are programmed to immediately ring their  
respective telephones in Program *71; no other default ringing assignments are made.  
ꢀꢃ ꢀꢃ ꢀꢃ ꢀꢃ  
ꢀꢃ  
Enter:  
1 = Immediate Ring  
2 = Delay 1 Ring (12 sec. delay)  
3 = Delay 2 Ring (24 sec. delay)  
Press the button associated with the  
telephones (EKs) that should ring  
when the selected [DN] is called.  
Port Reference Number of that should ring [PDN] or [PhDN]  
To add a port range, enter  
XXXꢀXXX (low port ꢀ high port).  
Press  
to advance or  
to go back.  
Press Vol▲ to turn all LEDs ON.  
Press Vol▼ to turn all LEDs OFF.  
Processor  
DK14  
[PDN] Port  
000~009  
000~027  
000~031  
[PhDN] Port  
500~509  
Processor  
RCTUBA/BB  
RCTUC/D  
RCTUE/F  
[PDN] Port  
[PhDN] Port  
500~589  
000~079  
000~239  
000~335  
DK40i  
500~527  
500~739  
RCTUA  
500~531  
500~835  
[DN] Port Reference  
Number  
EK Telephone Ports (The Program 04 [PDN] port number of the telephones that should ring.)  
Important! In the EK Telephone Ports column, enter the Program 04 telephone ports of the  
telephones that should ring when the [DN] is called from another [DN] or a Tie or  
DID line (maximum of 120 telephones can be assigned to ring). The [DN] button  
must be assigned (Program 39) to the telephone that should ring.  
3-152  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
System & Station  
Program *71~*73 – [DN] to [DN], Tie to [DN], and DID to [DN] Ringing Assignments  
First Telephone Group  
Buttons 01~20 on the programming telephone are associated with the telephone groups displayed  
on the telephone LCD.  
GRP EK000 = Telephone Port 000 is represented by programming button 01...  
GRP EK001 = Telephone Port 001 is represented by programming button 02...  
GRP EK019 = Telephone Port 019 is represented by programming button 20.  
Second Telephone Group  
In telephone group “GRP 020~039”, the relationship is as shown below:  
GRP EK020 = Telephone Port 020 is represented by programming button 01...  
GRP EK021 = Telephone Port 021 is represented by programming button 02...  
GRP EK039 = Telephone Port 039 is represented by programming button 20.  
Program *71, *72, *73 Overview  
Primary/Phantom Directory Number and Telephone Ringing assignments:  
♦
♦
♦
This program assigns telephones to ring when a [PDN] or [PhDN] that appears on the  
telephone is dialed from another telephone (direct or transferred call). The [PDN] may appear  
as an [SDN] on other telephones that should ring.  
This program assigns telephones to ring when a call is routed from a Tie, DID, DNIS, DNIS/  
ANI or ANI only line to a [PDN] or [PhDN] that appears on the telephone. The [PDN] may  
appear as an [SDN] on other telephones that should ring.  
Calls that Call Fwd, Hunt, or are transferred to a [PDN] or [PhDN] will ring on telephones per  
Program *71, *72, and *73 ringing assignments. The [PDN] or [PhDN] must appear on a  
flexible button (as a [PDN], [SDN], or [PhDN]) of telephones that should ring.  
Important! 120 Telephones (maximum) can be programmed to ring for any given [PDN],  
[SDN] or [PhDN] in Program *71, *72, and *73 combined.  
For the above case:  
♦
Telephones can be programmed to immediately Ring (*71 assignments), delay ring after 12  
seconds (*72 assignments), or delay ring after 24 seconds (*73 assignments) for each [PDN]  
or [PhDN] button that appears on the telephone.  
♦
The called [PDN], [SDN], or [PhDN] button must be programmed to appear (Program 39) on  
all Telephones that should ring.  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
3-153  
System & Station  
Program 72 – DNIS Number Network Table Assignments  
Program 72 – DNIS Number Network Table  
Assignments  
Processor Type: DK40i, All RCTUs  
Program Type:  
System  
Initialized Default: Blank  
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ  
Network Table Number  
Line Access Code and Network Telephone  
Number (1~27 digits)  
Any type line can be accessed (ground, loop,  
Tie, and/or DID) to send a DNIS call back out  
over the telephone network.  
Press LED Button 02 to enter ꢀ.  
Press LED Button 03 to enter #.  
Network Table  
Number  
Total DNIS Network  
Number  
Network Table  
Number  
Total DNIS Network  
Number  
Route to Ports  
Route to Ports  
DK14  
DK40i  
NA  
NA  
100  
100  
RCTUBA/BB  
RCTUC/D  
RCTUE/F  
300~499  
300~599  
400~699  
200  
300  
300  
300~399  
300~399  
RCTUA  
Network  
Table  
Number  
Network  
Table  
Number  
Ground / Loop / Tie / DID Line Access Code and  
Network Telephone Number  
Ground / Loop / Tie / DID Line Access Code and  
Network Telephone Number  
3-154  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
System & Station  
Program 72 – DNIS Number Network Table Assignments  
Program 72 Overview  
This program defines the external Network routing numbers that can be assigned DNIS/Tie/DID  
extension numbers in the Day, Day2, or Night ringing mode. This assignment will cause incoming  
DNIS/Tie/DID calls to route (forward) back out over a public, or private, telephone network to a  
pre-assigned telephone number.  
To assign a Tie/DID line to Program 72 assignments: The DNIS/Tie/DID extension number must  
be assigned to route to the appropriate Network routing number in Program 71-1.  
This program can also be used with non-DNIS or ANI (only), Tie and/or DID Lines to assign  
normal incoming Tie/DID calls to route back out over the public, or private telephone network to  
an external telephone number.  
Important!  
●
Tie/DID lines used for DNIS network routing must be enabled with tandem (Two-CO line)  
connection with Program 15, Code 5 and Program 10-1, LED 20.  
●
●
DNIS Network routing numbers will not be restricted by DK424 Toll Restriction assignments.  
Tie/DID lines must have LED05 ON in Program 17 to use the (DID, Tie) DNIS routing  
assignments in Program 71 and 72.  
●
DNIS network calls are timed by the Program 12 disconnect timer which, if set to default, will  
disconnect the call after four minutes. The disconnect timer may be disabled  
(see “Program 12 – System Assignments, Basic Timing”on Page 3-41).  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
3-155  
System & Station  
Program 74 – System NT Button Lock Password  
Program 74 – System NT Button Lock Password  
Processor Type: DK14, DK40i, All RCTUs  
Program Type:  
System  
Initialized Default: Port 000 for all tenants  
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ  
Tenant Number (1~4)  
DATA = Night Lock Password for selected  
Tenant (4-digits)  
Tenant Number  
NT Lock Password (4 Digits)  
1
2
3
4
Program 74 Overview  
This program assigns the password for each 1LJKWꢃ7UDQVIHU or 1LJKWꢃ7UDQVIHUꢂaꢋ button. To  
lock the system ringing mode requires a password and two buttons: 1LJKWꢃ7UDQVIHU and 1LJKWꢃ  
7UDQVIHUꢃ/RFN.  
♦
♦
1LJKWꢃ7UDQVIHU switches the station to Night Transfer mode.  
1LJKWꢃ7UDQVIHU /RFN + the Night Lock password, locks the 1LJKWꢃ7UDQVIHU button into  
that ringing mode.  
The Strata DK system provides three system ringing modes (Day/Day2/Night). The system ringing  
modes are controlled by the 1LJKWꢃ7UDQVIHU button which is programmed on a flexible button of  
a telephone or attendant console. Each ringing mode allows incoming calls to be routed to  
different destinations.  
Programs related to Program 74 are:  
Program 39, which assigns the 1LJKWꢃ7UDQVIHU and 1LJKWꢃ7UDQVIHUꢃ/RFN buttons to stations.  
Also, these station(s) must be assigned as the designated Night Transfer Lock station in Program  
ꢀ36.  
Program 59, which assigns 1LJKWꢃ7UDQVIHU/1LJKWꢃ7UDQVIHUꢃ/RFN buttons to attendant  
consoles. Attendant consoles and stations (assigned in Program ꢀ36) can also change the 1LJKWꢃ  
7UDQVIHUꢃ/RFN button password using a special access code. Program ꢀ36 is not required to  
assign attendant consoles to Night Transfer Lock functions.  
Also see Programs 39, ꢀ36, ꢀ15 and 77-3.  
3-156  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
System & Station  
Program 76-1(X-Y) – DK14, DK40i, All RCTUs  
Program 76-1(X-Y) – DK14, DK40i, All RCTUs  
Processor Type: DK14, DK40i, All RCTUs  
Program Type: System  
Initialized Default: Port 1 (Type 1), Ports 2~4 (Type 0)  
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ  
SELECT = 1  
Run Program 91-2  
X = Port Number (1~4)  
System power must be cycled or Program 91-2  
must be run to transfer Program 76-1 data entries  
from temporary memory to working memory.  
Y=Port Type (0~6), see table below.  
Port Number  
Port Type (0~6)  
1
2
3
4
Program 76-1 Overview  
This program assigns each installed WSIU (DK14 only), TSIU (DK40i only) or RSIU/RSIS  
(DK424 only) port to a function.  
For Program 76-1(X-Y):  
X identifies the WSIU, TSIU port number 1~2 or RSIU/RSIS/RMDS port number 1~4.  
Y identifies the WSIU, TSIU or RSIU/RSIS/RMDS port function as shown below:  
Port Type (Y)  
0
Function  
No port equipped. This should be used for any of the four RSIU/RSIS/RMDS ports that are not used.  
1
TTY or modem .  
1
TTY RS-232 port (set Program 77-1, LED 14 OFF; DK14, DK40i or DK424).  
RMDS modem port (set Program 77-1, LED 14 ON; DK424).  
2
3
4
5
6
SMDR  
MIS or SMIS (DK424)  
SMDI  
Open Architecture Interface (see Program 77-4) (DK424 R3.2)  
2
Caller ID output to Caller ID interface box (DK14 only)  
1. If port type code 1 is set, then Program 77-1, LED 14 status determines if the port operates as a system administration/maintenance  
modem (LED 14 ON) or an RS-232 administration/maintenance TTY port (LED 14 OFF). For modem operation, an RMDS piggy-  
back PCB is required, for RS-232 TTY port, a TSIU, WSIU, RSIU/RSIS/RMDS PCB may be used.  
2. If the DK14 CO lines must pass Caller ID information to the Toshiba telephones, LCD/RPCI-DI, an interface box, TC1041 (MLX-  
41), must be connected to one of the WSIU outputs. For more information, see the Caller ID instructions in Chapter 1 – DK14  
Installation of the Strata DK Installation and Maintenance Manual.  
♦
Port types set in this program override RSSU, PIOU, and/or PIOUS function codes (41, 42,  
43) set in Program 03. To activate changes made to this program, system power must be turned  
off/on or Program 91-2 must be run.  
♦
Communication Parameters: SMDI, MIS or SMIS, TTY, IMDU/RMDS, Caller ID, OAI: 7  
bits, even parity, 1 stop bit. SMDR: 8 bits, no parity, 1 stop bit.  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
3-157  
System & Station  
Program 76-2 (X-Z) – WSIU, TSIU and RSIU / RSIS / RMDS Transmission Rates  
Program 76-2 (X-Z) – WSIU, TSIU and RSIU / RSIS /  
RMDS Transmission Rates  
Processor Type: DK14, DK40i, All RCTUs  
Program Type:  
System  
Initialized Default: All ports 2400 bps  
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ  
SELECT = 2  
X=Port (1~4)  
Z=Transmission Rate (1~4):  
1 = 9600 bps  
2 = 4800 bps  
3 = 2400 bps  
4 = 1200 bps  
Port Number (x)  
Data Transmission Rate (z)  
1
2
3
4
Total  
Note  
Total must be ≤ 9600 bps.  
Program 76-2 Overview  
Assigns each installed WSIU (DK14 only), TSIU (DK40i only) or RSIU port to operate at a  
specified transmission rate. Where X identifies the WSIU, TSIU port number 1~2 or RSIU/RSIS/  
RMDS port number 1~4 and Z identifies the WSIU, TSIU or RSIU/RSIS/RMDS port data  
transmission rate in bits-per-second (bps).  
Whenever uploading Program 76 with DKAdmin/DKBackup, the bps rate of the DKBackup/  
DKAdmin customer database (on the PC) and the WSIU, TSIU or RSIU/RSIS/RMDS TTY/  
RMDS port must all be set the same. If the bps rate of these items are not the same, uploading  
Program 76 will fail.  
The sum of the transmission rates of equipped WSIU, TSIU or RSIU/RSIS/RMDS ports cannot  
exceed 9600 bps. Ports assigned “no-function” (code 0) in Program 76-2X-Y will not be included  
in the transmission rate sum. The RMDS will only function at 1200 or 2400 bps on the DK424 (see  
Program 77-1 LED 15).  
Program 76-2 does not require system power OFF/ON to change the bps rate.  
3-158  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
System & Station  
Program 77-1 – Peripheral Options (Door Phones)  
Program 77-1 – Peripheral Options (Door Phones)  
RSIU / RSIS / RMDS, PIOU/PIOUS / IMDU, PEPU  
Processor Type:  
DK14, DK40i, All RCTUs  
Program Type:  
System  
Initialized Default: All LEDs are OFF  
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ  
SELECT = 1  
Light the LED Buttons that are  
marked with an X in the table below.  
LED/  
Button  
X
LED ON  
LED OFF  
20  
19  
18  
Door Lock Time/6 seconds  
Door Lock Time/3 seconds  
Port 028/DDCB 4 or HDCB 4 (DK424)  
Port 020/DDCB 3 orHDCB 3 (DK40i/DK424)  
Port 028/Telephone (DK424)  
Port 020/Telephone (DK40i/DK424)  
Port 012/DDCB 2 orHDCB 2 (DK424)  
Port 012/DDCB 2 or HDCB 2 (DK40i  
Expansion Unit)  
Port 012/Telephone (DK40i Expansion Unit,  
DK424).  
Port 003/Telephone (DK14).  
17  
Port 003/DDCB 2 (DK14)  
Port 004/DDCB 1 or HDCB 1 (DK424)  
Port 004/DDCB 1 (DK40i)  
Port 004/Telephone (DK40i, DK424).  
16  
Port 002/DDCB 1 (DK14)  
Port 002/Telephone (DK14).  
15  
14  
RMDS Modem Protocol CCIT (2400 bps)  
RMDS/IMDU Modem (DN #19)/Enabled  
Enable DKAdmin/Backup ACK/NAC Protocol  
RMDS Modem Protocol Bell212A (1200 bps)  
RMDS/IMDU Modem (DN #19)/Disabled  
Disable DKAdmin/Backup ACK/NAC  
Protocol  
10  
Door Phone Ring on External Page in Night  
Mode  
No Ring on External Page in Night Mode  
08  
07  
06  
Door Lock Relay Enabled  
External Page Relay Enabled  
NT Relay with NT1 and NT2 Button and  
Ringing CO Line  
NT Relay Steady with NT1 Button (DK424  
only)  
05  
04  
03  
MOH Relay Enabled  
NT Relay Enabled  
—
—
—
—
LED 02 applies to DK14/DK40i only.  
LED 01 has priority.  
External Page on Base Unit Relay Enabled  
02  
01  
LED 01 applies to DK14/DK40i only.  
MOH on Base Unit Relay Enabled  
NT on Base Unit Relay Enabled  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
3-159  
System & Station  
Program 77-1 – Peripheral Options (Door Phones)  
Program 77-1 Overview  
This program performs the following functions:  
Programs door lock relays  
Assigns door phones/lock control units  
♦
♦
♦
♦
♦
♦
♦
♦
♦
Enables RMDS/IMDU built-in maintenance modems  
Sets RMDS communications standard type  
Enables DKAdmin Communications Protocol  
Enables/disables door phone ring tone to external paging when system is in Night mode  
Assigns a relay to operate with door lock function or external page for mute control  
Assigns a relay to operate in one of two Night Transfer modes  
Assigns a relay to operate in one of two applications  
LED 20: Door Lock Time  
The Door Lock Relay contact may be programmed to operate for either three or six seconds  
(applies to PIOU, PIOUS, PEPU, DDCB, and HDCB door lock controls).  
LEDs 16~19: Port Number/Door Phone/Lock Control Units  
Door phone/lock existence is defined by this program. The door lock option is set via Program  
77-2.  
♦
DK424: Door phone/lock controllers (DDCBs and/or HDCBs) can only exist at Ports 004,  
012, 020 and 028, and can only be installed on Circuit 5 of a PDKU, RDSU, PEKU and/or  
PESU. PDKUs and RDSUs support DDCBs, but not HDCBs. PEKUs and PESUs can support  
HDCBs, but not DDCBs. After assignment of a DDCB or HDCB, door phone numbers  
(#151~#159, #161~#163) effectively replace the station number assignment in Program 04.  
Up to four DDCBs/HDCBs can be installed in a system with RCTUB, RCTUBA/BB and C/D,  
only 3 are allowed with RCTUA. They must be assigned a PDKU, RDSU, PEKU or PESU  
port number to operate (DDCB to PDKU or RDSU, and HDCB to PEKU or PESU). (See  
Program 79 and ꢀ79 for door phone ringing assignments)  
Station PCBs that are connected to HDCB/DDCB door phones control boxes must be installed  
in lower slot numbers than Tie, DID, or Attendant Console PCBs.  
♦
DK40i and DK14: See port information on record sheet.  
LED 15: RMDS Protocol  
This program sets the RMDS communications standard type to CCITT/V.22bis (2400bps) or Bell  
212A (1200bps). The standard set in this program must match the standard of the modem that will  
be used to communicate with the Strata DK RMDS.  
♦
If the RMDS modem standard should be 2400bps/CCITT/ V.22bis, turn LED 15 on; if the  
RMDS standard is a 1200 bps/Bell 212A, turn LED 15 off. Most Hayes compatible modems  
will function with either standard; check with the modem manufacturer’s documentation to  
verify which protocol should be used. When the system is initialized the Bell 212A (1200 bps)  
standard is set (LED 15 off).  
♦
IMDU can be 1200 bps or 300 bps as set by SW2 on the PIOU or PIOUS PCB; RMDS can be  
1200 bps or 2400 bps as set in Program 76-2 and Program 77-1 LED 15.  
3-160  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
System & Station  
Program 77-1 – Peripheral Options (Door Phones)  
LED 14: RMDS or IMDU Modem  
DK424: This program enables the DK424 built-in maintenance modem function: RMDS or  
IMDU. If LED 14 is off, the RSIU Port (1~4) which is set for TTY operation (Code 1 in  
Program 76-1) will operate as a local RS-232 maintenance port. If RSIU is not configured as  
TTY, then the PIOU/PIOUS/RSSU that has code 41 set in Program 03, will operate as a local  
TTY maintenance port.  
Only one DK424 built-in modem RMDS or IMDU can be used in the DK424; if both are  
installed, RMDS will be accessed when a CO line direct rings the modem or is transferred to  
the modem by dialing &QIꢐ7UQ+ꢄꢂꢉ.  
♦
DK40i: Turn LED 14 ON if the optional PIOU or PIOUS has Remote Maintenance from the  
IMDU modem subassembly. If an IMDU is installed on a DK40i PIOU or PIOUS, it can be  
accessed by dialing station #19 (unless the access code prefix has been changed with Program  
05).  
Other system Programs that are related to the system modem are: Program 76, RMDS/TTY  
assignments on RSIU PCB; *-51~53, system CO line to modem ringing assignments; Program 71-  
1, DNIS line to modem ringing assignments; Program *09, DID line to modem ringing  
assignments; Program 77-1, LED 15, RMDS modem Protocol/speed assignments.  
If a modem unit (RMDS/IMDU) is installed, it can be accessed by dialing Station #19 and can be  
assigned a DID extension number in Program ꢀ09 or in Program 71 (1~3). See Program 79 and  
Program ꢀ79 for door phone ringing assignments.  
LED 10: DKAdmin/Backup  
Enables the system to Upload/Download the RCTU RAM data base using Toshiba DKAdmin and/  
or DKBackup software program. DKAdmin/Backup will automatically turn LED 10 ON when the  
DKAdmin/Backup PC communicates with the DK424. LED 10 should be OFF if the maintenance  
PC is using standard communication software (such as Procomm™) to program the DK424.  
LED 08: Door Phone Ring On External Page  
If a door phone button is pressed, a ring tone can be enabled or disabled to external paging when  
the system is in the Night mode. Activation of a Tenant 1 1LJKWꢃ7UDQVIHUꢂ button is required to  
activate this feature. The Tenant 2~4 1LJKWꢃ7UDQVIHUꢅaꢋ buttons do not apply to door phones.  
CO lines must be assigned to night ring over External Page (Program 78-1) to allow the NT relay  
to operate when incoming CO lines ring. See Programs 79 and *79 for door phone ringing  
assignments.  
LED 07: Door Lock Relay/External Page Relay  
A relay on the PIOU, PIOUS, or PEPU can be assigned to operate with the Door Lock function or  
with External Page for mute control. The door lock button (8QORFNꢃ'RRUꢁaꢋ) is assigned in  
Program 39; the door lock activation time is assigned in Program 77-1. This door lock function is  
not associated with the DDCB or HDCB door lock, but is an addition to them.  
This option applies to the PIOU/PIOUS/PEPU Door Lock Control 0 assigned to electronic or  
digital telephone buttons using Code 471 in Program 39; it does not apply to DDCB or HDCB  
Door Lock Control.  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
3-161  
System & Station  
Program 77-1 – Peripheral Options (Door Phones)  
LED 06: NT Relay  
A relay located on the PIOU, PIOUS, PEPU, DK14 KSU or DK40i KSU can be assigned to  
operate in one of two Night Transfer modes (see next item, MOH/NT Relay).  
♦
DK14: Activate the NT Relay in the DK14 KSU before setting the specific Night Transfer  
mode with LED 06.  
♦
DK40i: Activate the NT Relay on the PIOU or PIOUS with LED05, or activate the NT Relay  
on the DK40i KSU with LED 01 before setting Night Transfer mode with LED 06.  
In one mode, the relay will activate for one second, then be idle for three seconds when a line rings  
(incoming) while the system is in the Night mode. The intended application is to control an  
external ringing device at night.  
Program 78 or Program 71 (1~3, Code #271) must have Ring Over External Page activated for this  
feature. In the second mode, the relay will operate continuously while the NIGHT mode is  
activated. One application for this mode is to control an external answering machine.  
CO lines must be assigned to night ring over External Page (Program 78-1) to allow the NT relay  
to operate when incoming CO lines ring.  
LED 05: MOH/NT Relay (DK40i, DK424)  
A relay on the PIOU, PIOUS, or PEPU can be assigned to operate in one of two applications. A  
choice must be made between use for Night Transfer application (see NT Relay, LED 06) or  
Music-on-Hold (MOH). If used for MOH, the relay will activate when any trunk or station is  
placed on hold. The intended application is to control a tape player which can be used as a Music-  
on-Hold source.  
LEDs 02 and 01: MOH/NT/External Page Relay (DK14 and DK40i)  
For KSU relay to MOH, LEDs 01 and 02 must be ON.  
For NT function, LED 02 must be ON, LED 01 OFF.  
For External Page function, LED02 must be OFF, LED 01 can be ON or OFF.  
3-162  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
System & Station  
Program 77-2 – Door Phone Busy Signal/Door Lock Assignments  
Program 77-2 – Door Phone Busy Signal/Door Lock  
Assignments  
Processor Type:  
DK14, DK40i, All RCTUs  
Program Type:  
Station  
Initialized Default: All LEDs are OFF  
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ  
SELECT = 2  
Light the LED Buttons that are  
marked with an X in the table below.  
LED/  
Button  
X
LED ON  
One Door Phone Ring  
LED OFF  
20  
19  
18  
17  
16  
15  
14  
13  
Five Door Phone Rings  
—
—
—
—
—
—
DDCB4/HDCB4 B-jack is Lock Control #4 (DK424)  
Door phone 4C Busy Out  
B is connected to Door Phone 4B  
No Busy Signal  
Door phone 4B Busy Out  
No Busy Signal  
Door phone 4A Busy Out  
No Busy Signal  
DDCB4/HDCB3 B-jack is Lock Control #3 (DK40i/  
DK424)  
B is connected to Door Phone 3B  
12  
11  
10  
09  
Door phone 3C Busy Out  
Door phone 3B Busy Out  
Door phone 3A Busy Out  
No Busy Signal  
No Busy Signal  
No Busy Signal  
DDCB4/HDCB2 B-jack is Lock Control #2 (DK424)  
DDCB2 B-jack is Lock Control #2 (DK40i, DK14)  
B is connected to Door Phone 2B  
08  
07  
06  
05  
Door phone 2C Busy Out  
Door phone 2B Busy Out  
Door phone 2A Busy Out  
No Busy Signal  
No Busy Signal  
No Busy Signal  
DDCB4/HDCB1 B-jack is Lock Control #1 (DK424)  
DDCB1 B-jack is Lock Control #2 (DK40i, DK14)  
B is connected to Door Phone 1B  
04  
03  
02  
01  
Door phone 1C Busy Out  
Door phone 1B Busy Out  
Door phone 1A Busy Out  
No Busy Signal  
No Busy Signal  
No Busy Signal  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
3-163  
System & Station  
Program 77-2 – Door Phone Busy Signal/Door Lock Assignments  
Program 77-2 Overview  
This program performs three functions:  
♦
♦
♦
Sets number of times door phone rings  
Sets fast busy tone if the called door phone does not exist  
Configures B-pack on DDCB/HDCB output for door lock control  
LED 20: Door Phone Ring Count  
The number of times that a door phone will ring digital and electronic telephones is set with this  
LED. Light the LED for one ring; turn it OFF for five rings. The default is five rings. See Program  
79 to assign which telephones will be rung by door phones.  
LEDs 01, 02, 03, 05, 06, 07, 09, 10, 11, 13, 14, and 15: Door Phone Busy Out  
Each door phone controller (DDCB or HDCB) can interface with up to three door phones. The  
system treats each controller as a station. Therefore, this is quite different from all other station  
arrangements using telephones. Only one door phone can be in used at one time. The system does  
not automatically know how many door phones are connected to each DDCB or HDCB, so it must  
be told.  
This program is used to enter that information so that a caller will receive fast busy tone if the  
called door phone does not exist. Door phones 1A, 1B, 1C are numbered #151, #152, #153,  
respectively, and are connected to the DDCB or HDCB at Port 004. Door phones 2A, 2B, 2C are  
numbered #154, #155, #156, respectively, and are connected to the DDCB or HDCB at port 012,  
etc.  
LEDs 04, 08, 12, and 16: Door Lock Assignments  
Each B-jack on the DDCB and HDCB output can be configured for door lock control. Door lock  
control buttons (8QORFNꢃ'RRUꢁaꢋ) for door locks are assigned to electronic or digital telephones  
in Program 39. Door lock activation time is set in Program 77-1. Each DDCB requires one PDKU  
or RDSU circuit, and each HDCB requires one PEKU or PESU electronic telephone circuit. These  
door locks are not associated with, but are in addition to the door lock control provided by the  
PIOU, PIOUS, or PEPU PCB.  
CAUTION! To prevent system malfunction, DO NOT install the RDSU or PESU in slot 18  
of the DK40i system.  
DK424  
DDCB/HDCB Slot Number  
DK40i, DK14  
Port Number  
DDCB Type  
DDCB1  
DK40i Port Number  
DK14 Port Number  
11  
12  
13  
14  
004  
012  
020  
028  
004  
012  
020  
002  
003  
NA  
DDCB2  
DDCB3  
3-164  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
System & Station  
Program 77-3 – Night Ringing Over PIOU External Page Zones  
Program 77-3 – Night Ringing Over PIOU External Page  
Zones  
Processor Type: DK40i, All RCTUs  
Program Type:  
System  
Initialized Default: Zones 1~4 assigned to tenant 1  
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ  
SELECT = 3  
Enter the tenant (1~4) to be assigned with  
the zone entered in the preceding step.  
Enter a PIOU external  
page zone relay (1~4).  
These assignments apply to ground and  
loop start lines only; they do not apply to DID  
and Tie lines.  
Tenant  
Zone 1  
Zone 2  
Zone 3  
Zone 4  
Tenant 1 CO Lines  
Tenant 2 CO Lines  
Tenant 3 CO Lines  
Tenant 4 CO Lines  
Program 77-3 Overview  
Each tenant’s CO lines can be assigned to ring over selected PIOU external page zones during the  
NIGHT mode. Lines must be allowed to Night Ring over External Page in Program 78 or Program  
71 (1~3, Code #271) for this feature to work. Tenant assignments are made in Program ꢀ15.  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
3-165  
System & Station  
Program 77-4 – RSIU Open Architecture Interface (OAI) Data Output Assignments  
Program 77-4 – RSIU Open Architecture Interface (OAI)  
Data Output Assignments  
Processor Type: All RCTUs (Release 3.2 and above)  
Program Type:  
System  
Initialized Default: All LEDs are OFF  
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ  
SELECT = 4  
Light the LED Buttons that are  
marked with an X in the table below.  
LED/  
Button  
X
LED ON  
LED OFF  
20  
19  
18  
17  
16  
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
10  
09  
08  
07  
06  
05  
04  
03  
02  
01  
DNIS Number will be sent from OAI port  
Caller ID/ANI will be sent from OAI port  
DNIS Number will not be sent from OAI port  
Caller ID/ANI will not be sent from OAI port  
Program 77-4 Overview  
This program is used to enable Caller ID, Automatic Number Identification (ANI), and/or Dialed  
Number Identification Service (DNIS) Numbers (received) to be sent from the RSIU Open  
Architecture Interface (OAI) port. The OAI port sends MIS data for ACD calls (only) along with  
ANI, Caller ID and/or DNIS Numbers received on ACD calls depending on LED 01 and LED 02  
option settings. ANI, Caller ID and/or DNIS numbers on non-ACD calls will not be sent out the  
OAI port for non-ACD calls.  
3-166  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
System & Station  
Program 77-4 – RSIU Open Architecture Interface (OAI) Data Output Assignments  
LED 01/LED 02: RSIU Open Architecture Interface (OAI) Data Output Assignments (Caller  
ID/DNIS/ANI/OAI Output Options)  
Turn LED 01 ON if the OAI port should send Caller ID and/or ANI information for ACD calls and  
LED 02 ON if the OAI port should send DNIS Number (not DNIS NAME) for ACD calls. LED 01  
and 02 may be ON or OFF in any combination.  
RCTU PCB requires RKYS4 and RSIU to provide MIS, Caller ID, ANI, and DN information via  
the system OAI port.  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
3-167  
System & Station  
Program 78 – CO Line Special Ringing Assignments  
Program 78 – CO Line Special Ringing Assignments  
Processor Type: DK14, DK40i  
Program Type:  
Station  
Initialized Default: All LEDs are OFF  
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ  
Feature Number  
1, 2, 5, or 6  
CO Line  
Specify CO lines with LED Buttons as defined by the table  
below. All LEDs with an X should be lit when finished.  
Code 1~3  
Press  
to advance or  
to go back.  
After programming, press:  
Press  
Press  
▲ to turn all LEDs ON  
▼ to turn all LEDs OFF  
+ CO line number + to display and advance  
Processor  
CO Line Range  
001~004  
Processor  
RCTUBA/BB  
CO Line Range  
001~048  
DK14  
DK40i  
001~012  
RCTUC/D  
RCTUE/F  
001~144  
RCTUA  
001~016  
001~200  
Line  
LED  
Feature  
Number  
Feature  
Description  
Code  
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20  
Ring Over External Page  
during NIGHT mode  
1
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
DISA CO Line during DAY  
Mode  
DISA CO Line during DAY2  
Mode  
2
DISA CO Line during NIGHT  
Mode  
Ring IMDU or RMDS1 Modem  
during DAY Mode  
1
Ring IMDU or RMDS Modem  
5
6
during DAY2 Mode  
1
Ring IMDU or RMDS Modem  
during Night Mode  
Auto Attendant during DAY  
Mode2  
Auto Attendant during DAY2  
2
Mode  
Auto Attendant during Night  
2
Mode  
1. RMDS requires RSIU and is available with DK424 only, IMDU requires PIOU or PIOUS. See Programs 77-1 LED 14, and Program 76 for  
RMDS. Only one built-in maintenance modem, IMDU or RMDS, will function at a time in DK424.  
2. If CO lines should ring telephones before the Auto Attendant answers, use Program 81~89 to assign telephones to ring. Do not assign telephones  
in Program 81~89, if the Auto Attendant should answer on the first ring.  
3-168  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
System & Station  
Program 78 – CO Line Special Ringing Assignments  
Program 78 Overview  
This program assigns ground/loop start CO lines:  
♦
♦
♦
♦
to ring over external page during night mode  
to be used with DISA features  
for direct access to IMDU/RMDS modem  
for Auto Attendant operation  
Feature 1: Ring Over External Page During Night Mode  
This program selects which ground/loop start CO lines will activate ringing over external paging  
facilities during the NIGHT mode (for Tenants 1~4). The NT Relay on the PIOU, PIOUS, or  
PEPU will also be activated if it is in the 1-second ON/3-seconds OFF mode.  
Feature 2: DISA CO Line Assignment  
This program assigns ground/loop start CO lines to be used with the Direct Inward System Access  
(DISA) features. These lines may be set for DISA operation during the different system modes of  
DAY, DAY2, and NIGHT. A line will switch to normal ringing after ten seconds if the outside  
caller does not use the DISA feature. Normal function of these lines occurs for outgoing calls.  
Note An optional security code for DISA outgoing lines calls is available via Program 60-6.  
This code should always be programmed when using DISA and built-in Auto Attendant to  
prevent unauthorized calls through the DK system.  
Feature 5: Ring IMDU or RMDS Maintenance Modem  
The IMDU (DK40i and DK424 only) or RMDS (DK424 only) Remote Maintenance modem can  
be directly accessed by incoming ground/loop start CO lines assigned in this Program. Different  
alternatives are available for the system modes of DAY, DAY2, and NIGHT. If none of these are  
selected, the IMDU or RMDS can still be reached by dialing a modem [DN] with the DISA feature  
or by a Ring Transfer from the DSS console attendant or any other station. The IMDU or RMDS  
modem must be enabled with Program 77-1, LED 14-ON.  
Feature 6: Built-in Auto Attendant CO Line Assignment  
This feature selects ground/loop start CO lines for Auto Attendant operation. There is no limit to  
the number of lines which can be assigned with Auto Attendant. Different alternatives are  
available for system modes DAY, DAY2, and NIGHT.  
Built-in Auto Attendant is not available for Tie, DID, ANI or DNIS lines on DK40i or DK424 and  
is not available on any line of DK14.  
Note Auto Attendant assignments 61~63 have priority over ACD assignments in Program 14-0.  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
3-169  
System & Station  
Program 79 – Door Phone Ringing  
Program 79 – Door Phone Ringing  
Processor Type: DK14, DK40i, All RCTUs  
Program Type:  
Station  
Initialized Default: All LEDs are OFF  
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ  
SELECT = Port Number  
Light the LED Buttons that are marked with an X in  
the table below.  
Enter the port number having  
Door Phone Ringing assigned.  
To specify a port range, enter  
XXXꢀXXX (low port ꢀ high port).  
Processor  
DK14  
Port Range  
000~009  
000~027  
000~031  
Processor  
RCTUBA/BB  
RCTUC/D  
RCTUE/F  
Port Range  
000~079  
000~239  
000~335  
DK40i  
RCTUA  
Feature  
LED  
Ports  
Muted ring to busy DKT/EKT  
20  
19  
18  
17  
16  
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
10  
9
Door phone 4C Ring DP12  
Door phone 4B Ring DP11  
Door phone 4A Ring DP10  
Door phone 3C Ring DP9  
Door phone 3B Ring DP8  
Door phone 3A Ring DP7  
Door phone 2C Ring DP6  
Door phone 2B Ring DP5  
Door phone 2A Ring DP4  
Door phone 1C Ring DP3  
Door phone 1B Ring DP2  
Door phone 1A Ring DP1  
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
DP = Door Phone Program  
3-170  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
System & Station  
Program 79 – Door Phone Ringing  
Program 79 Overview  
This program assigns the door phone ringing feature to ports.  
LED 20: Muted Ring to Busy Electronic and Digital Telephone  
If all electronic and digital telephones are busy and a door phone button is pressed, a muted ring  
tone can be sent to selected digital and electronic telephones, as defined with this program. (Only  
the lowest port in the appropriate ringing group will mute ring.)  
LEDs 01~12: Door Phone Ring  
When a door phone button is pressed, selected digital and/or electronic telephones will ring as  
assigned with this program. See Program 77-2 for an explanation of the door phone A, B, and C  
numbering scheme. (Use Program ꢀ79 to assign [DN] button LEDs to flash on telephones that are  
assigned to ring.)  
Door phones will not ring attendant consoles or standard telephones. Ringing door phones will  
flash on idle console’s $QVZHU buttons, but will not alert a console that is in the busy mode. See  
Program 77-1 for door phone box port assignments.  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
3-171  
System & Station  
Program *79 – Door Phone to [DN] Flashing Assignments  
Program *79 – Door Phone to [DN] Flashing  
Assignments  
Processor Type: DK14, DK40i, All RCTUs  
Program Type:  
Station  
Initialized Default: No [DNs] assigned to ring for any door phone  
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ  
ꢀ
Door Box Number (1~4)  
Enter a [DN] Port Reference  
(Port Number of the [DN] that should flash when the  
door phone button is pressed.)  
Door Box Circuit Number (1~3)  
[DN] = [PDN] or [PhDN] port (see Legend below)  
Processor  
[PDN] Port Range  
000~009  
[PhDN] Port Range  
500~509  
Processor  
RCTUBA/BB  
RCTUC/D  
[PDN] Port Range  
000~079  
[PhDN] Port Range  
500~579  
DK14  
DK40i  
000~027  
500~527  
000~239  
500~739  
RCTUA  
000~031  
500~531  
RCTUE/F  
000~335  
500~835  
Door Phone Box  
Number  
Door Box Circuit  
Number  
[DN] Port Reference  
Number  
Door Phone Number/Location  
1
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
2
1
2
3
4
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10  
11  
12  
Program *79 Overview  
This program assigns door phones to ring Directory Number buttons ([PDNs]/[SDNs] [PhDNs])  
when pressed and flash the [DN]’s LED. Each door phone can be assigned to flash one [DN]’s  
LED and the [DN] can be assigned to appear and ring on up to 120 telephones.  
Program 79 must be used in conjunction with Program ꢀ79 to ring a telephone with a flashing  
[DN], when the door phone button is pressed. See Program 77-1 for door phone control box port  
assignments.  
Important! To allow a door phone to flash and ring, you must assign the [DN] to flash in  
Program *79 and the telephone on which it appears must be assigned to ring in  
Program 79.  
3-172  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
System & Station  
Program 80 – EKT and DKT Ringing Tones (CO Line Calls)  
Program 80 – EKT and DKT Ringing Tones (CO Line  
Calls)  
Processor Type: DK14, DK40i, All RCTUs  
Program Type:  
Station  
Initialized Default: Tone 1 is assigned to all ports  
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ  
SELECT = Station Logical Port Number  
Ringing Tone Code  
1 = Tone Option 1  
2 = Tone Option 2  
3 = Tone Option 3  
Enter the telephone port number for which  
the ringing tone is being defined.  
To specify a port range, enter XXXꢀXXX  
(low port ꢀ high port).  
Ring Tone Option  
1
2
3
Incoming Line Call*  
Transferred Line Call  
500/640 Hz  
540/760 Hz  
1200/1500 Hz 800/1000 Hz  
1300/1780 Hz 880/1180 Hz  
*Incoming Line Call distinctive ring tones apply to DID, ground, and  
loop start CO lines.  
Ring tone for internal or [DN] calls, and Tie line incoming calls is  
Processor  
Port Range  
000~009  
000~027  
000~031  
Processor  
RCTUBA/BB  
RCTUC/D  
RCTUE/F  
Port Range  
000~079  
000~239  
000~335  
DK14  
DK40i  
RCTUA  
Ringing Tone (Code)  
Ringing Tone (Code)  
Ringing Tone (Code)  
Port  
Number  
Tone 1  
(1)  
Tone 2  
(2)  
Tone 3  
(3)  
Port  
Number  
Tone 1  
(1)  
Tone 2  
(2)  
Tone 3  
(3)  
Port  
Number  
Tone 1  
(1)  
Tone 2  
(2)  
Tone 3  
(3)  
Program 80 Overview  
External speakers and all electronic and digital telephones are paged by dialing: [DN] + ꢄꢆꢉ. Theꢃ  
$OOꢃ&DOOꢃ3DJHꢃꢇ$&ꢈ button is used to page all digital and electronic telephones only; external  
speakers are not included when using the button.  
PESU/PEKU can be in any universal slot assigned in Program 19-1.  
CAUTION! To prevent system malfunction, DO NOT install the PESU in slot 18 of the  
DK40i system.  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
3-173  
System & Station  
Program *80 – Call Forward Station Ring Assignment  
Program *80 – Call Forward Station Ring Assignment  
Processor Type: All RCTUs with Release 3.2 and above  
Program Type:  
Station  
Initialized Default: LED 01, 04, and 07 ON for all lines  
ꢀ ꢀꢃ ꢀꢃ ꢀꢃ  
ꢀ
SELECT = CO Line Number  
LED buttons = ringing assignment in  
which calls should Call Forward  
To specify a CO line range, enter  
XXXꢀXXX (low line ꢀ high line).  
Processor  
DK14  
CO Line Range  
Processor  
RCTUBA/BB  
RCTUC/D  
RCTUE/F  
CO Line Range  
NA  
NA  
001~048  
001~144  
001~200  
DK40i  
RCTUA  
001~016  
CO Lines  
System  
Ring Mode  
Call Forward Station  
Ring Assignment  
LED  
Delay 2 (89)  
Delay 1 (88)  
Immediate (87)  
Delay 2 (86)  
Delay 1 (85)  
Immediate (84)  
Delay 2 (83)  
Delay 1 (82)  
Immediate (81)  
09  
08  
07  
06  
05  
04  
03  
02  
01  
Night  
Day 2  
Day  
Program *80 Overview  
Sets the Call Forward (CF) ringing assignment for ground/loop CO line calls. The station that  
controls CF should be the only station programmed to ring in the appropriate Ringing Assignment  
Programs (81~89). This program does not apply to Tie, DID, DNIS, or ANI lines.  
Example application: A CO line call rings a CO line button on multiple stations, then Call  
Forwards. CO line 001 is programmed to ring station 200, then after 12 secs., it delay rings  
stations 201 and 202 (12 secs.). Then, CO line 001 will CF per station 203’s CF setting. If station  
203 has CF-No Answer, CO line 001 will ring station 203, and then CF. If station 203 has CF-All  
Calls, CO line 001 will not ring station 203, but will forward immediately.  
Programming for the above example:  
Program 39 - Put CO line 001 button on stations 200~203.  
Program 81 - Set CO line 001 to ring station 200 immediately.  
Program 82 - Set CO line 001 to Delay Ring station 201 and 202  
Program 83 - Set CO line 001 to Delay 2 Ring station 203.  
Program *80 - Set CO line 001 to CF during Delay 2 Ring assignment (LED 03 ON).  
Set station 203 to CF to Voice Mail. When CO line 001 rings, the call will forward per station  
203’s CF (All Calls, No Answer, etc.) setting during the Delay 2 ring period. Note that only station  
203 can be set to ring in the Delay 2 (Program 83) ring assignment to allow CF to operate. VM will  
receive station 203’s VMID (set via code #656).  
3-174  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
System & Station  
Programs 81~89 – Ground/Loop Start/CO Line Station Ringing  
Programs 81~89 – Ground/Loop Start/CO Line Station  
Ringing  
Processor Type: DK14, DK40i, All RCTUs  
Program Type:  
System  
Initialized Default: All LEDs ON for Port 000 (81), Port 001 (87), all other LEDs OFF  
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ  
SELECT = 1~9  
(for type of ringing)  
LED Buttons = CO line assigned to ring selected  
station port or DH Group number(s).  
SELECT = Station or DH port  
(see legend below)  
Press  
to advance or  
to go back.  
Selected trunks ring selected station ports as follows:  
81 = Immediate  
84 = Immediate  
87 = Immediate  
DAY  
82 = 12-second delay  
83 = 24-second delay  
DAY 2  
85 = 12-second delay  
86 = 24-second delay  
NIGHT  
88 = 12-second delay  
89 = 24-second delay  
Station Port  
Range  
Station Port  
Range  
Processor  
DH Port  
CO Line  
Processor  
DH Port  
CO Line  
DK14  
DK40i  
000~009  
000~027  
000~031  
900~909  
900~915  
900~915  
001~004  
001~012  
001~016  
RCTUBA/BB  
RCTUC/D  
RCTUE/F  
000~079  
000~239  
000~335  
900~915  
900~915  
900~915  
001~048  
001~144  
001~200  
RCTUA  
Station or DH Port  
CO Line  
LED  
20  
19  
18  
17  
16  
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
10  
09  
08  
07  
06  
05  
04  
03  
02  
01  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
3-175  
System & Station  
Programs 81~89 – Ground/Loop Start/CO Line Station Ringing  
Program 81~89 Overview  
Programs 81~89 assign telephones or a Distributed Hunt group to each CO line that will ring.  
Use Programs *81, *84 and *87 to assign which [PDN] and/or [PhDN] buttons flash when a call  
comes in on various CO lines.  
♦
♦
If the telephone has a specific CO /LQH button or 3RROHGꢃ/LQHꢃ*US button, do not use  
Programs *81, *84 or *87 to assign [DN] LEDs to flash. This will cause both the CO line and  
[DN] button to flash on the telephone when the CO line rings on an incoming call.  
Programs *81, *84, and *87 data should be blank for CO lines that ring Voice Mail (VM)  
ports. Always check these programs because *81 and *87 default to port 000 and 001 and CO  
lines 18~200.  
➤ To assign CO line ringing ports to station LEDs  
1. On the record sheet on the previous page, enter the port numbers in the grey boxes in the top  
row.  
2. Enter the CO Line numbers in the left column.  
3. Mark “X’s” in the boxes indicating which LED should be lit when a CO Line call comes in on  
a particular port.  
Auto Attendant  
Use Programs 81~89 to set-up DK424 built-in Auto Attendant delay ring feature per the guide on  
the next page.  
CO lines to Ring Station [PDN] Ports and/or Distributed Hunt (DH) Group  
Ports  
CO lines that must ring DH groups must be assigned to ring the specific DH group number  
(900~915). If the CO /LQH button or 3RROHGꢃ/LQHꢃ*US buttons must appear on the DH group  
member telephones, Program *81, *84 and *87 assignments are not necessary. Do not assign DH  
group member station ports in Program 81~89.  
Station Ringing Modes  
Important! 120 telephones maximum can be programmed to ring in any one mode (Day/Day2/  
Night) per CO line.  
The delay functions are mainly used in Centrex application, but can be used for other situations. If  
delayed ringing occurs, the station that initially rings will continue to ring with subsequent delayed  
ring stations. A wide variety of line ringing to stations can be programmed into the system.  
There are nine categories:  
Ringing Mode  
Day Immediate  
Comments  
Ring assigned telephones on first ring from CO line (second ring to Caller ID lines).  
Day Delay1  
Delay1 is a 12-second delay of ringing signal to a standard, electronic, or digital  
Delay2 is a 24-second ring delay.  
Day Delay2  
Day2 Immediate  
Day2 Delay1  
Same as Day Immediate except during Day2 NT mode.  
Same as Day Delay 1 except during Day 2.  
3-176  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
System & Station  
Programs 81~89 – Ground/Loop Start/CO Line Station Ringing  
Ringing Mode  
Day2 Delay2  
Comments  
Same as Day Delay 2 except during Day 2.  
Night Immediate  
Night Delay1  
Night Delay2  
Same as Day Immediate except during Day2 NT mode.  
Same as Day Delay 1 except during Day 2 NT mode.  
Same as Day Delay 1 except during Day 2 NT mode.  
Day, Day2, Night refer to the  
button’s three modes.  
Attendant Console (DK424 only)  
Programs 81~89 are used to ring individual attendant consoles and/or to enable attendant console  
incoming CO line call load sharing. (See “Auto Attendant Delay Ring” and “PC and Conventional  
Attendant Console Programming Overview” in Chapter 5 – Station Apparatus of the Strata DK  
Installation and Maintenance Manual.)  
Attendant Console Load Sharing  
In Programs 81, 84, and 87, assign all CO lines (ground, loop, and DID) that should alternately  
ring multiple attendant consoles to the respective Load Share console ports (see “Attendant  
Console Load Share Programming Example” on page 5-21 of the Strata DK Installation and  
Maintenance Manual.  
On DID lines, when the digits assigned to console ports in Program *09 are dialed on incoming  
calls, the calls will alternately ring the Load Share consoles.  
Auto Attendant Delay Ring  
➤ To set Auto Attendant Delay Ring operation  
Note If the Auto Attendant must answer calls on the first ring, do not assign CO lines to ring  
telephones in Programs 81~89.  
1. Assign CO lines to ring the Auto Attendant (AA) in Program 78.  
Program 78-61: AA DAY  
Program 78-62: AA DAY 2  
Program 78-63: AA NIGHT  
2. Assign stations that should ring (immediately for 12 seconds) before the AA answers to the  
AA CO lines in Program 81 (84 – Day 2, 87 – Night). Also assign the [DN] that should flash  
when the CO lines ring with Program *81 (*84 – Day 2, *87 – Night). As an option, the station  
can be equipped with the appropriate CO /LQH or 3RROHGꢃ/LQHꢃ*US buttons in which case  
you should not program a [DN] to flash with Program *81.  
♦
Stations assigned in Program 81 and the [DN] assigned in Program *81 – ring immediate  
for 12 seconds and then stop ringing unless they are also assigned to ring in Program 82.  
Assign [DN] for the appropriate CO /LQH or 3RROHGꢃ/LQHꢃ*US buttons to these ports  
using Program 39.  
3. Assign stations that should ring (after a 12-second delay – for 12 seconds) before the AA  
answers to the AA CO lines in Program 82 (85 – Day 2, 88 – Night). Also assign the [DN] that  
should flash when the CO lines ring with Program *81 (*84 – Day 2, *87 – Night). As an  
option, the station can be equipped with the appropriate &2ꢃ/LQH or 3RROHGꢃ/LQHꢃ*US  
buttons in which case you should not program a [DN] to flash with Program *81.  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
3-177  
System & Station  
Programs 81~89 – Ground/Loop Start/CO Line Station Ringing  
♦
Station assigned in Program 82 and the [DN] assigned in Program *81 – ring after a 12-  
second delay for 12 seconds and then stop ringing. Assign the appropriate [DN] or /LQH  
or 3RROHGꢃ/LQHꢃ*US buttons to these ports using Program 39.  
4. Assign any station to ring the AA CO lines in Program 83 (86 – Day 2, 89 – Night). This  
assignment is only a flag that notifies the software to delay ring stations assigned in Program  
82. Program 83 station assignments do not ring.  
♦
♦
♦
The station assigned in Program 83 will not ring because AA will answer the call after 24  
seconds. Assign [DN] buttons that flash/ring on this station port using Program 39.  
No Delay: If AA line(s) are assigned to ring stations in Program 81, but no stations are  
assigned in Programs 82 or 83, AA will answer the call immediately (no delay ring).  
12 Second Delay: If AA line(s) are assigned to ring stations in Programs 81 and 82 but no  
stations are assigned in Program 83, stations assigned in Program 81 will ring immediately  
for 12 seconds and then the AA will answer (stations assigned in Program 82 will not  
ring).  
♦
24 Second Delay: If AA CO line(s) are assigned to ring stations in Programs 81, 82, and  
83, then the following ringing occurs:  
Note The Auto Attendant Answers after stations assigned in Program 81 and 82 stop ringing (24  
seconds from start of call).  
5. Use Program 39 to assign the [DN] button that should flash and ring before the AA answers.  
The [DN] button, or buttons for multiple [PDNs], must be assigned on all station ports  
assigned to ring in Programs 81-89 only if the stations that must ring before AA answers do  
not have the appropriate CO /LQH or 3RROHGꢃ/LQHꢃ*US buttons.  
Auto Attendant Program Example  
♦
CO lines 1~5 should ring [PhDN] 500 on station 200 immediately for 24 seconds (6 rings).  
♦
CO lines 1~5 should delay ring [PhDN] 500 on station 208 after ringing [PhDN] on station  
200 for 12 seconds.  
♦
The Auto Attendant should answer CO 1~5, 24 seconds after station 200 started ringing and  
12 seconds after station 208 started ringing. Stations 200 and 208 stop ringing when auto  
attendant answers.  
➤ To program the example  
1. Assign lines 001~005 to AA in Program 78-61.  
2. Assign lines 001~005 to ring station 200 in Program 81.  
3. Assign lines 001~005 to ring station 208 in Program 82.  
4. Assign lines 001~005 to ring any installed RSTU, PDKU, or PEKU port that has a telephone  
or does not have a telephone connected in Program 83 (Program 83 assignment is used only to  
enable Program 82 delay ring stations to ring. Assign [PhDN] 500 button on this port using  
Program 39).  
5. Assign lines 001~005 to flash [PhDN] 500 in Program ꢀ81.  
6. Assign the [PhDN] 500 button to station 200 and 208 using Program 39.  
7. Make sure [PhDN] is assigned to an owner telephone (200 or 208) in Program ꢀ33.  
8. Using Program 39, assign [PhDN] button 500 on stations 200 and 208.  
3-178  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
System & Station  
Programs *81, *84, and *87 – Ground/Loop Start/CO Line to [DN] LED Flash Assignments  
Programs *81, *84, and *87 – Ground/Loop Start/CO  
Line to [DN] LED Flash Assignments  
Processor Type: DK14, DK40i, All RCTUs  
Program Type:  
System  
Initialized Default: CO 018~200 flashes Port 000 ( 81) and Port 001 ( 87)  
*
*
ꢀ ꢀꢃ ꢀꢃ ꢀꢃ  
ꢀ
Ringing Assignments  
Station Logical Port Number  
1 = Day Ring  
4 = Day 2 Ring  
7 = Night Ring  
Enter the [PDN] or [PhDN] that should flash  
LED Button 01 enters blank data.  
CO line number (see table below)  
To add a CO line range, enter XXXꢀXXX  
(low CO line ꢀ high CO line).  
[PDN] Port  
Range  
[PhDN] Port  
Range  
[PDN] Port  
Range  
[PhDN] Port  
Range  
Processor  
CO Line  
Processor  
CO Line  
DK14  
DK40i  
001~004  
001~012  
001~016  
000~009  
000~027  
000~031  
500~509  
500~527  
500~531  
RCTUBA/BB  
RCTUC/D  
RCTUE/F  
001~048  
001~144  
001~200  
000~079  
000~239  
000~335  
500~579  
500~739  
500~835  
RCTUA  
CO Line  
Number  
Day Ring  
[DN] (*81)  
Day 2 Ring  
[DN] (*84)  
Night Ring  
[DN] (*87)  
CO Line  
Number  
Day Ring  
[DN] (*81)  
Day 2 Ring  
[DN] (*84)  
Night Ring  
[DN] (*87)  
.
Important! Blank out initialized default data if CO line should not ring and flash [PDN]  
assigned to port 000 and port 001. If this initialized data is programmed when other  
[DNs] or telephones should flash and ring, Call Forward and Station Hunt may not  
operate properly.  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
3-179  
System & Station  
Programs *81, *84, and *87 – Ground/Loop Start/CO Line to [DN] LED Flash Assignments  
Programs *81, *84 and *87 Overview  
Ground/loop start CO lines can be assigned to ring and flash specific Directory Number buttons,  
including [PDNs], [SDNs] or [PhDNs]. These programs assign which [DN] will flash when a  
ground/loop start CO line rings a direct incoming call to the DK system.  
Programs 81~89 must be used in conjunction with Programs *81, *84, and *87 to ring the  
telephone on which the flashing [DN] appears. Refer to the CO /LQH/[DN] button LED control  
logic diagrams that follow these record sheets for more information.  
Each ground/loop start CO line can be assigned to flash one [DN], but that [DN] button can be  
assigned to up to 120 telephones. The assigned [DN] LED will flash as 1 Hz rate when CO line  
call rings into the DK424.  
If a specific CO /LQH or 3RROHGꢃ/LQH *US button is programmed to appear on a telephone (in  
Program 39), do not assign a [DN] to flash on that telephone with Programs *81, *84, and *87.  
Important! If CO lines direct ring voice mail (VM) ports in Programs 81~89, the data for those  
CO lines in Programs *81, *84, and *87 must be blank.  
Program *81  
Assigns which [DN] flashes when the CO line rings during the system Day mode.  
Program *84  
Assigns which [DN] flashes when the CO line rings during the system Day2 mode.  
Program *87  
Assigns which [DN] flashes when the CO line rings during the system Night mode.  
Programs 81, 82, 83  
Assign Immediate Ring, 12-second delay Ring, 24-second delay Ring in the Day mode,  
respectively, to telephones with [DNs] assigned to flash in Program *81  
Programs 84, 85, 86  
Assign Immediate Ring, 12-second delay Ring, 24-second delay Ring in the Day2 mode,  
respectively, to telephones with [DNs] assigned to flash in Program *84  
Programs 87, 88, 89  
Assign Immediate Ring in the Night mode, 12-second delay Ring, 24-second delay Ring,  
respectively, to telephones with [DNs] assigned to flash in Program *87.  
3-180  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
System & Station  
Programs *81, *84, and *87 – Ground/Loop Start/CO Line to [DN] LED Flash Assignments  
Ground/Loop Start  
CO Incoming Call Ringing Control  
EKT/DKT  
[DN]  
Y
Y
Program 81  
*
Idle  
N
I-Use or Red  
N
[DN] 1 HZ  
N
Program 81  
Y
EKT/DKT  
or  
EKT/DKT  
SLT  
SLT  
Program 39  
CO Line  
Button  
N
SLT  
[PDN]1  
Idle  
Y
Y
N
N
Program 81  
*
SLT is  
talking on  
[PDN]  
N
Y
Y
Y
[DN] Idle  
N
[DN]  
I-Use  
N
Y
Telephone May  
Receive Camp-On  
Tone3  
Telephone  
Receives Beep  
and Camp-On Tone  
Telephone Receives  
No Ring2  
Telephone Receives  
Ring Tone  
Telephone Does Not  
Ring  
1575  
1. [PDN] belongs to Standard Telephone.  
2. If a digital/electronic telephone has an SLT [PDN] on their telephone and if that telephone is currently using the SLT [PDN], the SLT  
will not receive camp-on tone.  
3. See Program *34.  
Figure 3-2 Strata DK CO Line Button/Directory Number [DN] Button Ringing Control Logic Diagram  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
3-181  
System & Station  
Programs *81, *84, and *87 – Ground/Loop Start/CO Line to [DN] LED Flash Assignments  
Ground/Loop Start CO Line  
Incoming Call LED Control  
Program 81  
and [PDN] or [PhDN]  
button [DN]  
*
Y
on telephone  
N
Telephone  
[DN] LED  
1 HZ-Red  
Program 39  
CO Line Button  
on Telephone  
?
N
Y
Program 39  
CO Line Button  
on Telephone  
?
Y
N
Telephone CO Line  
Button LED:  
Telephone [DN]  
Button LED:  
No LED  
I-Called (Green)  
I-Called (Green)  
1576  
Figure 3-3 Strata DK CO Line Button/Directory Number LED Flash Control Logic Diagram  
Program *81 CO Line to Station [DN] LED flashing Control Logic also applies to Programs *84  
and *87.  
Program 81 CO Line to Station Ringing Control Logic also applies to Programs 82~89.  
Important! System Record Sheets for Programs 90, 91, and 92 appear in the beginning of this  
section because they must be executed prior to running any other programs.  
3-182  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
System & Station  
Program 93 – CO Line Identification  
Program 93 – CO Line Identification  
Processor Type: DK14, DK40i, All RCTUs  
Program Type:  
System  
Initialized Default: Blank  
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ  
SELECT = 1  
CO Line Identification  
Enter the CO line identification. (See next page  
for data entry procedures.)  
LED Button for CO  
line being named.  
To advance the line  
range, press Scroll.  
Processor  
CO Line Range  
Processor  
CO Line Range  
DK14  
DK40i  
001~004  
001~012  
001~016  
RCTUBA/BB  
RCTUC/D  
RCTUE/F  
001~048  
001~144  
001~200  
RCTUA  
LED Line  
CO Line Identification (16 Characters Max. Enter One per Rectangle)  
20  
19  
18  
17  
16  
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
10  
09  
08  
07  
06  
05  
04  
03  
02  
01  
Program 93 Overview  
Assigns alphanumeric names (such as “WATS BAND 5”, “FX TO NY,” “MR JONES,” etc.) to  
lines. The names can be up to 16 characters each, and display when the line is being used by an  
LCD station. When programmed to display, Caller ID, DNIS, ANI, and ACD call information will  
display in place of CO line Alpha identification data.  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
3-183  
System & Station  
Program 93 – CO Line Identification  
➤ To enter CO line identification  
1. Enter Program 93 and select the desired CO line.  
2. Using the guide below enter the CO line identification information.  
Numeric Mode  
ꢁ~ꢉ are treated as numerals.  
Dial pad starts in numeric mode. Press ꢄ to switch to alpha mode.  
Alpha Mode  
1700  
QZ  
GHI  
PRS  
ABC  
JKL  
TUV  
DEF  
MNO  
WXY  
Moves cursor to  
right, and starts  
special character  
entry when in the  
Alpha Mode  
Cursor  
Left  
Scroll  
Key  
Mode  
Key  
Moves cursor to left  
Changes from  
Numeric to  
Alpha Mode  
and vice versa  
Scrolls alpha and  
special characters  
Alpha Entry (Example):  
A
Special Character Entry:  
Q
Z
:
B
C
–
+
/
Alpha  
Character  
Entry  
Sequence  
Special  
Entry  
Character  
Sequence  
3-184  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
System & Station  
Program 97 – Printing Program Data through SMDR  
Program 97 – Printing Program Data through SMDR  
Processor Type: DK14, DK40i, All RCTUs  
Program Type: System  
Initialized Default: Prints out customer database  
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ  
SELECT = Program Number  
to be printed on SMDR.  
Cancels printout at  
any time.  
Exit Program  
Mode.  
Data Print  
Printout begins.  
To specify a range of programs, enter XXꢀXX  
(low program in range ꢀ high program in range).  
Program 97 Overview  
Contents of each program can be sent to the SMDR port for a hard copy printout.  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
3-185  
System & Station  
Program 97 – Printing Program Data through SMDR  
3-186  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
Toll Restriction  
4
This chapter gives you an overview of the Toll Restriction feature and step-by-step instructions to  
fill in the Toll Restriction System Record Sheets for DK14, DK40i, and all RCTUs.  
Toll Restriction Methods  
Toll Restriction screens and selectively restricts outgoing calls using three different methods. Each  
type of restriction can be programmed for individual stations. Toll Restriction can also be enabled/  
disabled for each outgoing line in the system.  
Important! Strata DK requires that a “1” be dialed before an area code to provide simple,  
three, or six-digit toll restriction.  
Simple Toll Restriction  
Only involves the first digit dialed. The system can be programmed to reject outgoing calls  
beginning with 0 or 1 (see Program 48).  
Three-digit Toll Restriction  
Involves the system analyzing the area code dialed, and selectively allowing/disallowing outgoing  
calls following the criteria defined in Area Code Tables (see Program 46, Codes 2~4).  
Six-digit Toll Restriction  
Involves the system analyzing the area code and the office code, and selectively allowing/  
disallowing outgoing calls following the criteria defined in Area Code Tables and Office Code  
Tables (see Program 46, codes 2~4 and 6~8).  
Note Standard telephones that are Toll Restricted should always be forced to use Least Cost  
Routing (LCR) to place outside calls. This prevents Toll Restriction defeat when the  
RRCS, K4RCU3, K5RCU or QRCU3 circuit times out.  
Toll Restriction Features  
For description purposes, Toll Restriction is divided into several components, or subfeatures. The  
subfeatures operate independently of the restriction methods just described, although they may  
employ these methods.  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
4-1  
Toll Restriction  
Toll Restriction Features  
Station Priority Classes 1~8  
Eight classes of Toll Restriction can be defined to assign different levels of priority to individual  
stations with RCTUC/D and RCTUE/F.  
Four classes are supported with DK14, DK40i, RCTUA, and RCTUBA/BB.  
Classes can be defined so each is progressively more restrictive by allowing or denying specific  
area or office codes, calls to long distance information, international calls, and operator assisted  
calls (Programs 46-10~80).  
Office Code Exception Tables  
Class 1~8 restrictions can be further modified by defining as many as eight exception tables to  
allow or deny access to specific office codes that fall within previously restricted area codes  
(Program 47). Exception office code access is accomplished with the Six-digit Toll Restriction  
method described earlier.  
Emergency, Information, and Toll-free Long Distance Toll Restriction  
Override  
Toll Restricted stations may be allowed to dial special codes such as 911 or Enhanced 911 (E911)  
for emergency response, 1-411 or 411 for information, or 800 prefix toll-free calls (see Program 46  
for normal 911 and ꢀ10 for E911).  
Important! Always be sure to provide access to emergency numbers such as 911.  
Toll Restriction Override by System Speed Dial  
System Speed Dial numbers can be programmed to override Toll Restriction (see Basic System  
Features, Program 10-1).  
Toll Restriction/Traveling Class Override Codes  
Up to two Toll Restriction Override Codes can be defined. When dialed at a toll restricted station,  
these codes enable the station user to override toll restrictions defined at the station (Program 44-  
1~8 or 45-8~9). Codes may be changed by stations chosen in programming (see Basic System  
Features, Program 30). Also, Verified Account Codes (Forced or Voluntary) can be used to  
override or change a telephone’s toll restriction class on a call by call basis (see Programs 69 and  
70).  
Special Common Carrier Authorization  
Toll Restriction can be programmed to recognize Other Common Carrier (OCC) telephone  
numbers, directory numbers, authorization codes, and Centrex/PBX access codes. The system  
starts inspecting numbers for Toll Restriction purposes after the recognizable code is dialed  
(Program 45-3~6). This does not apply to 10XXX or 101XXX carrier access codes which are  
always restricted to stations that are toll restricted in any class in Program 48.  
4-2  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
Toll Restriction  
Completing the Toll Restriction System Record  
Completing the Toll Restriction System Record  
The following instructions explain how to complete System Record Sheets used to program the  
Toll Restriction feature. They are arranged in the same order in which the tables appear in the Toll  
Restriction System Record Sheets. The following instructions are intended to give a concise  
general definition of the programming characteristics defined by each record sheet.  
Note On each record sheet, mark an X in the space provided to indicate that a choice is selected.  
Unless otherwise specified, this indicates the LED is lit. When appropriate, indicate digits  
to be entered using the station dialpad.  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
4-3  
Toll Restriction  
Program 40 – Station CO Line Access  
Program 40 – Station CO Line Access  
Processor Type: DK14, DK40i, All RCTUs  
Program Type:  
Toll Restriction  
Initialized Default: All LEDs ON for all CO lines (all stations can access all lines)  
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ  
SELECT = Station Logical Port Numbers  
LED Buttons = CO Lines  
Light LEDs for the port(s) that are  
allowed access.  
To add a port range, enter XXXꢀXXX (low  
port ꢀ high port).  
Press  
to advance or  
to go back.  
To turn all CO LEDs ON or OFF, after the port number and is entered, press  
▲ (all LEDs ON) or  
▼ (all LEDs OFF).  
To check a particular CO line, after the port number is entered, press  
button to display and advance.  
and enter the CO line number, then use the  
CO Line  
Range  
[PDN] Port  
Range  
CO Line  
Range  
[PDN] Port  
Range  
Processor  
DISA Port  
Processor  
DISA Port  
DK14  
DK40i  
001~004  
001~012  
001~016  
000~009  
000~027  
000~031  
10  
RCTUBA/BB  
RCTUC/D  
RCTUE/F  
001~048  
001~144  
001~200  
000~079  
000~239  
000~335  
089  
249  
344  
035  
039  
RCTUA  
Port  
CO Line  
LED  
20  
19  
18  
17  
16  
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
10  
09  
08  
07  
06  
05  
04  
03  
02  
01  
4-4  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
Toll Restriction  
Program 40 – Station CO Line Access  
Program 40 Overview  
This program is used to allow or deny each station and/or DISA to use CO lines on a line by line  
basis. This applies to all analog and digital line types.  
Any station can have access to as many lines as desired. Any station denied access (either to make  
a call or to answer a call) to a line cannot seize it by dialing either an access or pickup code or by  
using a CO line button. This also denies access via Least Cost Routing. Also, use this program to  
divide lines for Tenant Service. Use Program 40 to deny CO line call pickup. If only outgoing  
access is to be prevented but answering incoming calls should be allowed, use Program 41, not  
Program 40 to deny CO line access.  
Program 40 does not deny access to answer transferred calls. If the LED for a CO line is OFF in  
this program, access to the line on direct incoming or outgoing calls is denied.  
Important! If the DISA port is denied, CO line access in Program 40, DISA callers cannot  
access outgoing CO lines when calling in on DISA lines. Also, External Call  
Forward will be blocked on the denied lines. (See DISA port legend.)  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
4-5  
Toll Restriction  
Program 41 – Station Outgoing Call Restriction  
Program 41 – Station Outgoing Call Restriction  
Processor Type: DK14, DK40i, All RCTUs  
Program Type:  
Toll Restriction  
Initialized Default: All LEDs OFF for all CO lines (all stations can access all lines)  
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ  
LED Buttons = CO Lines  
Light LEDs for the port(s) that are  
allowed access.  
SELECT = Station Logical Port Numbers  
To add a port range, enter XXXꢀXXX (low  
port ꢀ high port).  
Press  
to advance or  
to go back.  
After programming, press:  
•
•
•
▲ to turn all LEDs ON  
▼ to turn all LEDs OFF  
+ CO line number, then to display and advance  
CO Line  
Range  
[PDN] Port  
Range  
CO Line  
Range  
[PDN] Port  
Processor  
DISA Port  
Processor  
DISA Port  
Range  
000~079  
000~239  
000~335  
DK14  
DK40i  
001~004  
001~012  
001~016  
000~009  
000~027  
000~031  
010  
035  
039  
RCTUBA/BB  
RCTUC/D  
RCTUE/F  
001~048  
001~144  
001~200  
089  
249  
344  
RCTUA  
Port  
CO Line  
LED  
20  
19  
18  
17  
16  
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
10  
09  
08  
07  
06  
05  
04  
03  
02  
01  
4-6  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
Toll Restriction  
Program 41 – Station Outgoing Call Restriction  
Program 41 Overview  
Program 41 restricts each station (or Direct Inward System Access (DISA) CO line) from outgoing  
access to each line. If restricted, that station can still answer a ringing line or pick up a call on hold  
but cannot directly access a line for an outgoing call by pressing the line button or dialing the line  
access code. All Call Pickup functions operate normally. This does not deny access via LCR.  
Notes  
●
Automatic Busy Redial (ABR) overrides Program 41.  
●
To deny a CO line to be accessed for DISA tandem connection or external call forward, turn its  
LED ON (see DISA ports legend).  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
4-7  
Toll Restriction  
Program 42-0 – CO Line to PBX/Centrex Connection & Access Codes  
Program 42-0 – CO Line to PBX/Centrex Connection &  
Access Codes  
Processor Type: DK14, DK40i, All RCTUs  
Program Type:  
Toll Restriction  
Initialized Default: All LEDs OFF for all CO lines. Assigns no access codes to PBX groups.  
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ  
SELECT = 0  
Press  
Specify CO Lines by setting LED Buttons as  
defined by the table below.  
to advance  
or  
to go back.  
After programming, press:  
•
•
•
▲ to turn all LEDs ON  
▼ to turn all LEDs OFF  
Mode and CO line number, then to  
display and advance  
Processor  
DK14  
CO Line Range  
001~004  
Processor  
RCTUBA/BB  
RCTUC/D  
CO Line Range  
001~048  
DK40i  
001~012  
001~144  
RCTUA  
001~016  
RCTUE/F  
001~200  
Set Button LEDs  
Button  
LED  
Line  
(Trunk)  
Centrex/PBX Connection (LED ON)  
Normal (LED OFF)  
20  
19  
18  
17  
16  
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
10  
09  
08  
07  
06  
05  
04  
03  
02  
01  
4-8  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
Toll Restriction  
Program 42-0 – CO Line to PBX/Centrex Connection & Access Codes  
Program 42-0 Overview  
Use this program to allow Centrex/PBX (after flash) features to operate. Do not use this program  
when the Centrex feature (assume 9) is used and the DK LCR is activated (see notes below).  
The Strata DK System recognizes PBX/Centrex access codes via Programs 42-1~8. Program 42-0  
informs the software which lines are connected to a PBX or to Centrex. This combination allows  
Toll Restriction and Speed Dialing to function properly.  
Notes  
●
If the CO line is programmed for behind Centrex/PBX (LED ON), reseize guard time is 1.5  
seconds. If CO line is programmed for normal operation guard time is 0.45 seconds. See  
Program 10-1, Button/LED 02.  
●
Do not use this program when using LCR behind Centrex/PBX; use Program ꢀ45-2 instead.  
Also, do not use this program if installing CO lines behind “assume-9” Centrex.  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
4-9  
Toll Restriction  
Program 42-1~8 – PBX/Centrex Access Codes  
Program 42-1~8 – PBX/Centrex Access Codes  
Processor Type: DK14, DK40i, All RCTUs  
Program Type:  
Toll Restriction  
Initialized Default: Assigns no access codes to PBX groups  
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ  
SELECT = 1~8 PBX Access Code Group  
Enter the PBX Group Number 1~8 that needs  
an access code assigned.  
ACCESS CODE = Enter a 2-digit access code for the group,  
as defined by the table below.  
•
If access code is single digit, enter the first digit and press  
LED Button 01 as second digit.  
•
•
Press LED Button 01 to delete digit.  
Press LED Button 02 for Wild Card digit (any digit, 0~9). For  
example, pressing + LED Button 02 allows 80~89.  
PBX/Centrex Outgoing CO Line Access Code(s)  
1st Digit 2nd Digit  
PBX/Centrex Access Code  
Number  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Program 42-1~8 Overview  
The Centrex access code(s) used to make out-of-centrex calls (usually 9) is entered in this table.  
Use this program to allow correct Toll Restriction and Centrex/PBX transfer operation.  
Do not use this program when using LCR behind Centrex/PBX; use Program ꢀ45-2 instead. Also,  
do not use this program if installing CO lines behind “assume-9” Centrex.  
4-10  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
Toll Restriction  
Program 43 – 0 + Credit Card Dialing Option  
Program 43 – 0 + Credit Card Dialing Option  
Processor Type: DK14, DK40i, All RCTUs  
Processor Type: Toll Restriction  
Initialized Default: All LEDS OFF  
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ  
SELECT = Station Logical Port Numbers  
LED Buttons = CO lines  
Assigned to allow dial 0+ calls with  
selected stations.  
Press  
to advance or  
to go back.  
After programming, press:  
•
•
•
▲ to turn all LEDs ON  
▼ to turn all LEDs OFF  
+ CO line number, then to display and advance  
Processor  
DK14  
CO Line Range  
001~004  
[PDN] Port Range  
000~009  
Processor  
RCTUBA/BB  
RCTUC/D  
CO Line Range  
001~048  
[PDN] Port Range  
000~079  
DK40i  
001~012  
000~027  
001~144  
000~239  
RCTUA  
001~016  
000~031  
RCTUE/F  
001~200  
000~335  
Port  
CO Line  
LED  
20  
19  
18  
17  
16  
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
10  
09  
08  
07  
06  
05  
04  
03  
02  
01  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
4-11  
Toll Restriction  
Program 43 – 0 + Credit Card Dialing Option  
Program 43 Overview  
This program enables selected station users to bypass their normal Toll Restriction assignments by  
dialing “0” immediately after seizing a CO line. Both the station and the line must be enabled for  
this feature with this program.  
After seizing the line, the station user is required to dial a specific number of digits, which includes  
the leading 0. This digit-length requirement forces the user to dial a telephone number or a  
telephone number plus a credit card number. As a result, these calls are billed to the credit card,  
and operator-placed calls are not billed to the line. The digit length, 1~30 numbers, is set in  
Program 60-7. This length is determined by the system’s call routing method.  
If the number of digits set in Program 60-7 are not dialed, the call will be cut off 20 seconds after  
the last digit is dialed.  
When not dialing via LCR, the digit length should usually be 25 which is the sum of the digits in  
the telephone (11) and credit card (14) numbers. When using LCR, a digit length of 11 is  
recommended.  
Stations that are enabled with 0 + credit card calling should not be restricted for dialing 0 or 01 in  
Programs 46 (10~80) and 48.  
Important! More digits than the length set in Program 60-7 are allowed to be dialed; there is no  
limit to the amount of digits that can be dialed.  
4-12  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
Toll Restriction  
Program 44-1~8 – Toll Restriction/Traveling Class Override Codes  
Program 44-1~8 – Toll Restriction/Traveling Class  
Override Codes  
Processor Type: DK14, DK40i, All RCTUs  
Program Type: Toll Restriction  
Initialized Default: All Classes Blank (no code)  
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ  
SELECT = Toll Restriction Class 1~8  
DATA = Toll Restriction Code for Selected Class (1~4 digits)  
Processor  
DK14  
Toll Restriction Class  
Processor  
RCTUBA/BB  
RCTUC/D  
Toll Restriction Class  
1~4  
1~4  
1~4  
1~4  
1~8  
1~8  
DK40i  
RCTUA  
RCTUE/F  
Toll Restriction Class  
SELECT =  
DATA = (1~4 Digit Code)  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Program 44-1~8 Overview  
This program enables you to assign a code for each of the Toll Restriction classes established in  
Program 46. If one of these codes is entered at a station, the station assumes the code’s class for  
that call. When the call is complete, the station returns to its regular class assigned in Program 48.  
The Traveling Class code data is not sent out the SMDR port and does not print out on station call  
records. Account Codes (Forced or Voluntary) can also be used for this function, in which case the  
Account Code will print out on SMDR (see Programs 69 and 70).  
Notes  
●
Stations selected in Program 30, LED 16 ON, can add, change, or delete the codes set in  
Program 44-1~8.  
●
When the Toll Restriction Override code is dialed, the station's class (defined in Program 48)  
changes to the class assigned to the code in Program 44-1~8.  
●
●
Do not use the same codes set in Program 45 (8 and 9).  
Stations enabled in Program 30, Button/LED 16 ON, are allowed to enter and change Toll  
Restriction Class (1~8) override codes.  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
4-13  
Toll Restriction  
Program 44-91~93 – Emergency Bypass of Forced/Verified Account Codes  
Program 44-91~93 – Emergency Bypass of Forced/  
Verified Account Codes  
Processor Type: DK14, DK40i, All RCTUs  
Program Type:  
Toll Restriction  
Initialized Default: Code 91 = 911, Codes 92 and 93 are blank  
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ  
SELECT = 91~93  
to set Emergency Number 1~3  
DATA = Emergency Telephone Number (1~4 digits)  
To enter blanks, press LED Button 01.  
Emergency Number (1~3)  
SELECT =  
DATA = (1~4 Digit Telephone Number)  
911 (default)  
91  
92  
93  
If CO lines are behind PBX or Centrex, program the PBX/Centrex outside CO line access code.  
Example: “9”. A pause is automatically inserted following the first 9.  
See Programs *45-2 to assign the CO line and access code for behind PBX/Centrex operation.  
Also, if the system CO lines are behind Centrex/PBX, the Centrex/PBX CO line access codes  
must be programmed in front of the emergency telephone number. Example: If the Centrex/PBX  
access code is “9”, then enter 9911 in Program 44-91.  
Program 44-91~93 Overview  
This program exempts as many as three special numbers, each up to four digits (such as the  
emergency 911 number), from Verified Account Code dialing restrictions. When dialed, these  
numbers are sent out immediately, bypassing any Verified Account Code dialing restrictions set in  
Programs 69 and 30, button/LEDs 8 and 14, respectively. If Verified Account Codes assigned in  
Program 69 conflict (duplicate) with emergency or other type telephone numbers set in Program  
44-91~93, Program 44-91~93 has priority.  
If lines are behind Centrex or PBX, program the appropriate one- or two-digit Centrex/PBX line  
access code in front of the emergency number.  
Notes  
●
Do not use this program with ABR and DISA.  
●
This program does not override Toll Restriction. Emergency numbers must be put in  
“allowed” tables in the normal Toll Restriction programming procedures.  
●
If Enhanced 911 (E911) is required, use E911 Programs in place of 44-91~93.  
4-14  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
Toll Restriction  
Program 45-1 – LCR/Toll Restriction Dial Plan  
Program 45-1 – LCR/Toll Restriction Dial Plan  
Processor Type: DK14, DK40i, All RCTUs  
Program Type: Toll Restriction  
Initialized Default: Assigns Dial Plan 7 to the system (current North American Numbering Plan)  
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ  
SELECT = 1  
DATA = Plan 1~9  
Enter Codes 1~9 to indicate the  
dial plan for the system.  
X
Plan  
Toll Restriction/LCR Dial Plans  
(101XXXX)+1+NXX+NXX/NXX  
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
(101YXXX)+1+NXX+NXX/NXX  
(10XXX)+1+NXX+NXX/NXX  
For UK only.  
0+ (0+ and universal (Codes 5 and 4) are not used in USA.)  
Universal (0+ and universal (Codes 5 and 4) are not used in USA.)  
(10XXX)+1+AC+NXX/NXX  
(10XXX)+1+AC+NXX/1+NNX  
(10XXX)+AC+NXX/1+NNX  
Where:  
In NXX and NNX,  
X =  
N =  
0~9  
2~9  
Office code (interchangeable with area and office codes; second digit can be  
0~9)  
NXX =  
NNX =  
AC =  
Office code (not interchangeable; second digit cannot be 1 or 0)  
Area Code  
1+ NNX =  
10XXX =  
1 may be dialed before office codes  
old 5-digit Carrier Access Codes  
101YXXX/101XXXX = new 7-digit Carrier Access Codes  
Y =  
0, 5 or 6  
Program 45-1 Overview  
This program enables you to define a dial plan for the Toll Restriction software to recognize the  
typical dialing sequence of long distance/local calls made from the system’s home area code, and  
to identify area and office codes. The dialing plan defines several components of a telephone  
number for long distance calling  
Notes  
●
Setting the proper dialing plan in this program is also required for the Least Cost Routing  
feature to function properly.  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
4-15  
Toll Restriction  
Program 45-1 – LCR/Toll Restriction Dial Plan  
●
The Strata DK System automatically restricts direct dialing of 10XXX+1 and 10XXXXX+1  
access codes to any station that is toll restricted. These codes are allowed in system speed dial  
and LCR modified digit tables. This is necessary to control Long-Distance-Carrier access.  
10XXX+0 and 10XXXXX+0 are allowed/denied depending on the station’s class and Program  
46 (10~80) button/LED 01 assignment.  
Pre-January 1995 North American Numbering Plan (NANP)  
Plans 1~6 use numbering plans for systems that do not use the NANP established January, 1995.  
DK14, DK40i, and all DK424 RCTUs provide plans 1~9.  
Long Distance Prefix 1 in most areas must be the first digit dialed for long distance calling. In  
such areas, the area code is dialed right away. The dial plan defines whether the prefix 1 is required  
for a particular installation’s long distance calling.  
Area/Office Code Numbering Schemes—In most places, the middle digit of an area code is 0 or  
1, and the middle digit of an office code is 2~9. Toll Restriction examines the first three-digit  
sequence dialed and determines whether it is an area code or an office code.  
♦
♦
If the middle digit is 0 or 1, then the sequence is an area code.  
If the middle digit does not equal 0 or 1, then the sequence is an office code, and the office  
code parameters of the selected dialing plan apply.  
An exception to this rule exists. In some places, area and office codes are interchangeable. The  
middle digit is always 0 or 1 (see Code 3 selection). In such a case, the system only knows that  
three digits dialed are an area code if 1 is dialed before them. If 1 is not dialed first, the system  
knows the three digits are an office code. The dial plan defines the numbering scheme applicable  
to the installation site.  
Special Common Carrier Number and Digit Length - for SPCC numbers of the form 950-  
XXXX, this program can allow credit card calling but will restrict the maximum number of digits  
dialed to prevent defeat of Toll Restriction.  
Plan 1  
Older Strata DK Systems use Plan 1 for dialing plan AC+NXX/1+NNX if the installation is in a  
location where a user places a long distance call to a destination outside the area code without  
dialing 1 before dialing the area code. The user places a long distance call to a destination in the  
same area code by dialing 1 directly before the office code.  
♦
♦
♦
The first three digits of a ten-digit number is an area code if the middle digit is 0 or 1.  
Pressing the first three digits immediately after a 1 in an eight-digit string is an office code  
A seven-digit string starting with an office code is a local call.  
Plan 2  
♦
♦
Plan 2 is 1+AC+NXX/1+NNX. Use this plan where a user places a long distance call to a  
destination outside the area code by dialing a 1 before dialing the area code. The user places a  
long distance call to a destination in the same area code by dialing a 1 directly before the office  
code  
When using this plan, the system recognizes the following:  
♦
The first three digits following a 1 in an 11-digit number are an area code, if the middle  
digit is 0 or 1.  
♦
The first three digits dialed immediately after a 1 in an eight-digit string is an office code.  
4-16  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
Toll Restriction  
Program 45-1 – LCR/Toll Restriction Dial Plan  
Plan 3  
♦
Plan 3 is 1+AC+NXX/NXX. Use this plan where a user places a long distance call to a  
destination outside the area code by dialing a 1 before dialing the area code. The user places a  
long distance call to a destination in the same area code by simply dialing the number, without  
a 1 in front. The office codes are interchangeable. The system differentiates between them  
whenever it sees the digit 1 dialed.  
When using this plan, the system recognizes the following:  
♦
♦
♦
If 1 is the first number entered in an 11-digit string, the next three digits are an area code.  
A 10-digit string is not recognized.  
The first three digits in a seven-digit string are an office code. (There is no distinction  
between local call dialing and long distance dialing within the area code.)  
♦
Digits 5~7 in an 11-digit string may be an interchangeable office code as well.  
Plans 4~6  
Not used in the United States.  
Post 1995 North American Numbering Plan (NANP)  
Plans 7~9 use the NANP established January 1995. DK14, DK40i, and all DK424 RCTUs provide  
plans 7~9.  
♦
Prefix 1 is used only when followed by an area code. The area code can be the home area code,  
depending on the telephone company’s plan in that state.  
♦
Area/Office code numbering schemes – All area codes and office codes will have the format  
NXX, making the new plan have both interchangeable area codes as well as interchangeable  
office codes.  
♦
Intra-area code toll calls can be according to a seven-digit only plan in some states. In this  
case, a seven-digit call may be a local call or a toll call. Therefore, only particular office codes  
can determine a toll call for a seven-digit call, not the dial plan in 45-1.  
Changing System Dialing Plan for NANP from a Station  
For NANP upgraded SW version, the dial plan can also be changed from the station port 000  
(default station 10, 100, or 200).  
➤ To change the System Dialing Plan for the North American Dialing Plan  
1. With the handset on-hook, You hear a confirmation tone. X is  
NANP=X KEY CODE=  
press a [DN] + ꢄꢑꢌꢁ.  
the current system dialing plan 1, 2,  
3, 7, 8, or 9.  
2. Enter ꢑꢅꢑꢏ.  
You hear a confirmation tone.  
CODE=6267 NANP=  
CODE=6267 NANP=X  
3. Enter the one-digit (X) for You hear a confirmation tone.  
the system dialing plan (X  
= 1, 2, 3, 7, 8, or 9).  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
4-17  
Toll Restriction  
Program 45-1 – LCR/Toll Restriction Dial Plan  
4. Press 5HGLDOꢃor 5'/.  
The telephone returns to the idle  
mode.  
DATA PROGRAMMED  
5. Press 6SNU.  
Plan 7 - (10XXX)+1+NXX+NXX/NXX  
The Strata DK systems in this Programming Manual default to this plan. Used when dialing 1  
before the long distance number. Call is placed to a destination outside the area code by dialing a 1  
before dialing the area code.  
The user places a local code plus distance call to a destination in the same area code by simply  
dialing the number, without a 1 in front. The area and office codes may be interchangeable. The  
system differentiates between them whenever it sees the digit 1 dialed. This plan supports five-  
digit Carrier Access (CA) codes (10XXX) compared to seven-digit CA codes.  
When using this plan, the system recognizes the following:  
♦
If 1 is the first number dialed in an 11-digit string, the next three digits are an area code  
(ꢂ + $&ꢃ+ 7 digit number). A ten-digit string is not recognized ($&ꢃ+ 7 digit number).  
♦
♦
Digits 2~4 and 5~7 in an 11-digit string are NXX format and are interchangeable.  
The first three digits in a seven-digit string are an office code. (There is no distinction between  
local call dialing and long distance dialing within the area code.)  
♦
If 16-digit dialing (Area Code + 7 digits) is required to be unrestricted and routed over the  
local LCR route, program the Area Code in Program 46-2~4 and Program ꢀ45-2.  
Plan 8  
Plan 9  
Same as Plan 7 except a new 7-digit carrier access code must be 101YXXX format (where Y is 0,  
5 or 6; X is 0 to 9).  
Same as Plan 7 except a new 7-digit carrier access code must be 101XXXX format (where X is 0  
to 9).  
Area codes and office codes in XXX format (where X is 0 to 9) are allowed to be programmed in  
the area code and office code tables for Toll Restriction and Least Cost Routing purposes.  
Only area codes formatted N(0/1)X and office codes formatted NNX are valid on call processing  
for the old dial plans 1, 2, 3.  
New area codes NXX are valid only in NANP dialing plans 7, 8, 9.  
Office codes of the form NNX and NXX are valid on call processing for the old dialing plans 1, 2,  
3, and new dialing plans 7, 8, 9, respectively. For international calls, area code 011 and office  
codes XXX (as country codes) are valid on the call processing for all dialing plans.  
4-18  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
Toll Restriction  
Program 45-2 – Toll Restriction Disable  
Program 45-2 – Toll Restriction Disable  
Processor Type: DK14, DK40i, All RCTUs  
Program Type:  
Toll Restriction  
Initialized Default: All LEDs OFF for all CO lines (all lines apply Toll Restriction)  
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ  
SELECT = 2  
LEDs/Buttons  
Specify CO lines by setting LED Buttons as defined by  
the table below. All LEDs with an X should be lit when  
finished.  
Press  
to go back.  
to advance or  
After programming, press:  
ON = Disable Toll Restriction  
•
•
▲ to turn all LEDs ON  
▼ to turn all LEDs OFF  
Processor  
DK14  
CO Line Range  
Processor  
RCTUBA/BB  
RCTUC/D  
CO Line Range  
001~048  
001~004  
001~012  
001~016  
DK40i  
001~144  
RCTUA  
RCTUE/F  
001~200  
LED  
20  
19  
18  
17  
16  
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
10  
09  
08  
07  
06  
05  
04  
03  
02  
01  
CO Line  
X
LED  
20  
19  
18  
17  
16  
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
10  
09  
08  
07  
06  
05  
04  
03  
02  
01  
CO Line  
X
LED  
20  
19  
18  
17  
16  
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
CO Line  
X
10  
09  
08  
07  
06  
05  
04  
03  
02  
01  
Program 45-2 Overview  
This program enables you to program lines be exempt from any Toll Restrictions defined in this  
section. Mark the exempt lines with an X on the record sheet. Toll Restrictions disabled in this  
program override Station Toll Restrictions defined in Program 48.  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
4-19  
Toll Restriction  
Program 45-3~6 – Special Common Carrier Numbers and Authorization Code Digit Length  
Program 45-3~6 – Special Common Carrier Numbers  
and Authorization Code Digit Length  
Processor Type: DK14, DK40i, All RCTUs  
Program Type:  
Toll Restriction  
Initialized Default: Assigns blank data to Items 3 and 5 and “00” data to Items 4 and 6.  
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ  
SELECT = Item 3~6  
Enter the Item number  
3~6 from the table below.  
DATA =  
First five digits of the SPCC number, or digit length  
specified in the table below.  
When editing:  
•
•
•
Press to move cursor.  
Press LED Button 01 to delete or leave a blank.  
Press LED Button 02 to allow all digits to work.  
DATA = 1st five digits  
(SPCC Number or Digit Length)  
Item  
Description  
3
4
5
6
SPCC1 Telephone Number  
Allowed Digit Length (00~99)  
SPCC2 Telephone Number  
Allowed Digit Length (00~99)  
Program 45-3~6 Overview  
This program notifies the system of how many digits to ignore before it applies Toll Restriction. It  
allows the system to use Special Common Carrier (SPCC) authorization codes to modify  
restrictions when the station user is dialing a long distance carrier. The user enters a telephone  
number to access the carriers. Original restrictions re-activate after the carrier number is dialed.  
The sequence is: the first five digits of the SPCC Number (950XXXX) + Telephone Number +  
Credit Card Authorization Code.  
SMDR prints out the following: SPCC Number + ---- + Telephone Number (the Authorization  
Code does not print out. If the SPCC access code is a 1+800 number, the dialed SPCC code will  
overwrite the actual telephone number dialed on the SMDR report.  
Do not set 10XXX or 101XXXX Carrier Access Codes (CACs) in this program. The DK Strata  
system automatically treats CACs as special codes and applies Toll Restriction and LCR as  
follows:  
♦
♦
♦
For stations that are Toll Restricted, 10XXX+1/101XXXX+1 are restricted for manual dialing  
but are allowed in system speed dial and LCR modified digit tables.  
10XXX+0/101XXXX+0 are allowed or denied depending on the station’s class and 46 (10-80)  
Key 01 assignment.  
LCR always routes 10XXX and 101XXXX via the local route plan, if not restricted.  
4-20  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
Toll Restriction  
Program 45-3~6 – Special Common Carrier Numbers and Authorization Code Digit Length  
There are two elements Toll Restriction software must verify for a user to successfully complete  
long distance calling:  
♦
The first five digits of the number dialed to access the long distance special common carrier  
(SPCC).  
♦
The total number of digits allowed following the SPCC number.  
Items 3 and 5  
Enter the first five digits of the SPCC telephone number in the spaces labeled SPCC1 Telephone  
Number (Item 3) or SPCC2 Telephone Number (Item 5) on the record sheet. The initialized state  
assigns “00000” to Items 3 and 5.  
Items 4 and 6  
The allowed digit length is the total number of digits allowed to be dialed after the SPCC Number  
and before Toll Restriction Digit Restriction activates. This can be 00~99 digits. In most cases, 99  
digits should be allowed for voice mail applications. Do not enter a digit length greater than  
necessary or users may be able to override Toll Restriction.  
Initialized data assigns “00” to items 4 and 6. Enter two digits on the record sheet.  
A restricted station is not able to place a toll call through a long distance carrier by dialing the  
SPCC1 or SPCC2 telephone number if the station is denied from that number in other toll  
restriction programs. Upon recognizing the first five digits dialed, Toll Restriction software is  
notified to allow the number of digits programmed in items 4 or 6 (00~99, following the including  
the dialed SPCC1 or 2 number).  
The system interprets data to be a seven-digit local call or 1-800 number to an SPCC. Only five  
digits are entered; therefore, the last digits are “wild card” digits; any number dialed that has the  
same first five digits as the carrier’s SPCC number, the system will assume the SPCC is being  
called.  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
4-21  
Toll Restriction  
Program 45-8~9 – Toll Restriction Override Code  
Program 45-8~9 – Toll Restriction Override Code  
Processor Type: DK14, DK40i, All RCTUs  
Program Type:  
Toll Restriction  
Initialized Default: Leaves code assignments blank  
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ  
SELECT = Item 8 or 9  
Enter 8 to select Code 1.  
Enter 9 to select Code 2.  
DATA = Code  
Enter 1 to 4-digit code from the table below.  
Press LED Button 01 to delete or leave a blank.  
Press LED Button 02 to allow all digits to work.  
SELECT =  
8 (Code 1)  
9 (Code 2)  
Description  
DATA = (1 to 4 Digits)  
Program 45-8~9 Overview  
This program enables selected stations in the system to alter the override code. These stations are  
defined by their users - specified in Program 30, Button/LED 09.  
Two different codes can be dialed by any station user to override station-specific restrictions.  
These codes will not register on SMDR.  
To change the codes from selected stations:  
Code 1: [PDN] + ꢄꢑꢌꢋ + code + 5HGLDO  
Code 2: [PDN] + ꢄꢑꢌꢌ + code + 5HGLDO  
Notes  
●
Do not use the same four-digit codes set in Program 44-1~8, Toll Restriction/Traveling Class  
Override codes.  
●
●
●
Program 45 (8~9) overrides Program 44-1~8 if the same codes are used.  
Electronic telephone users can use the ꢄ button instead of the 5HGLDO button.  
Verified Account Codes (Forced or Voluntary) can also be used to override Toll Restriction on  
a call by call basis. When used for this function, the account code will register on the SMDR  
report (see Programs 69 and 70).  
4-22  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
Toll Restriction  
Program *45-1 (1~4) – Toll Restriction for Office Codes  
Program *45-1 (1~4) – Toll Restriction for Office Codes  
Processor Type: DK14, DK40i, All RCTUs  
Program Type:  
Toll Restriction  
Initialized Default: Assigns 976 to first office code - blank for other three office codes  
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ  
ꢀ
SELECT = 1  
DATA = Office Code (3 digits)  
SELECT = 1~4  
Press LED Button 01 to delete a digit.  
SELECT =  
DATA = Office Code  
976  
1
2
3
4
Program *45-1 Overview  
This program enables you assign up to four office codes to be restricted within all area codes. This  
program only applies to telephone users which belong to toll restriction classes (assigned via  
Program 48). If a telephone user does not belong to any class, he/she is not subject to any of the  
restricted office codes assigned in this program.  
The restricted office codes are verified when a user dials a seven-digit local call (in home area  
code) or a “1” plus ten-digit long distance call (in any area code).  
Notes  
●
Use this program with Program 45 Dial Plan 7, 8, or 9 only.  
●
This table applies to all stations with Program 48 TR Codes 03~10 only (TR classes 1~8); not  
to stations with Program 48 TR Codes 00, 01, or 02.  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
4-23  
Toll Restriction  
Program *45-2 (1~6) – LCR/Toll Restriction Bypass  
Program *45-2 (1~6) – LCR/Toll Restriction Bypass  
for Special Numbers that Do Not Begin with */#  
Processor Type: DK14, DK40i, All RCTUs  
Program Type:  
Toll Restriction  
Initialized Default: All data blank  
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ  
ꢀ
SELECT = 2  
DATA = 1~5 Digit Code  
(that are not subject to toll restriction)  
SELECT = 1~6  
First Digit: 0~9 only  
0~9, ꢀ,  
Non-first Digits:  
SELECT =  
DATA = 1~5 Digits  
When editing:  
1
2
3
4
5
6
•
•
Press LED Button 01 to delete or leave a blank.  
Press LED Button 02 to allow all digits to work.  
Program *45-2 Overview  
Use this program to allow special CO Area Codes and Centrex feature access codes or extension  
numbers to bypass toll restriction and route over the local LCR route - if using LCR. (Toll  
Restriction is always applied after dialing the special numbers assigned to this table.  
Codes programmed in this table will bypass Toll Restriction, and will be sent to the CO local route  
if using LCR. Calls subject to toll restriction are normally restricted if “*” or “#” is pressed during  
toll restriction digit analysis. However, in some special applications (e.g., the Strata DK System is  
connected behind a PBX/Centrex, or assume_9 Centrex dialing), “*” and/or “#” may be required  
within the first four digits or the last digit.  
If the digit string containing */# matches with any of the six programmed digit strings of this  
program, toll restriction is applied after the matched digit string. This program can also be used for  
special area code dialing plans where the digit “1” is not dialed before the area code. See example  
on the Program *45-2 Examples.  
Notes  
●
If using LCR behind Centrex, enter the Centrex trunk access code (such as “9” entered in the  
example below). If “9” is entered in this table, the user must dial 9 + 9 + 911 for an emergency  
call when using LCR.  
●
The record sheet above allows up to 5-digit numbers. If the number to be entered is less than 5  
digits, enter Blanks (Button 01) for all digits less than 5 digits.  
Example (Centrex assume 9)  
If using LCR behind “assume 9” Centrex, and restricted stations (1+AC not allowed) must dial  
12XX# and 13XX# as Centrex station numbers (# is the Centrex end-of-dialing code for extension  
numbers) enter ꢂꢃ+ ꢅꢃ+ %XWWRQꢃꢁꢅꢃ+ %XWWRQꢃꢁꢅꢃ+ ꢄ and  
ꢂꢃ+ ꢆꢃ+ %XWWRQ ꢁꢅꢃ+ %XWWRQꢃꢁꢅꢃ+ ꢄ as data in Programs *45-21 and *45-22, respectively.  
4-24  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
Toll Restriction  
Program *45-2 (1~6) – LCR/Toll Restriction Bypass  
This will allow Centrex station numbers (1200#~1299# and 1300#~1399#) to de dialed -  
overriding Toll Restriction. The call will route out the local LCR route immediately after the # is  
dialed.  
Use this record sheet to assign area codes in 10-digit dialing areas. If some non-toll numbers  
require 10-digit dialing: Area Code (AC) + Office Code (OC) + YYYY dialing (no digit “1”  
before the area code) enter the area code in this table if dialing through LCR. Area codes entered in  
this table (without the long distance “1” prefix) will be routed over the LCR local call route when  
dialed with the AC + OC + YYYY format (YYYY = 4-digit CO extension number).  
Example (10-digit Dialing)  
If area code 817 is a local area code that must be dialed without the prefix digit “1”, enter:  
ꢍꢃ+ ꢂꢃ+ ꢏꢃ+ %XWWRQꢃꢁꢂꢃ+ %XWWRQꢃꢁꢂ in Program *45-2X. With this entry, LCR will route 817  
calls over the local route immediately after dialing: ꢍꢂꢏꢃ;;;ꢃ;;;; (10 digits).  
This table applies to all stations with Program 48 TR Codes 03~10 only (TR classes 1~8); not to  
stations with Program 48 TR Codes 00, 01, or 02.  
Notes  
●
When editing the data field, use Button/LED 01 to end the digit string, Button/LED 02 to  
assign a wild card value (0~9, *, #).  
●
See Program 46 (10~80) Button/LED 04 should be OFF when dialing codes containing * and/  
or #.  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
4-25  
Toll Restriction  
Program *45-3 (1~9) – LCR/Toll Restriction Bypass For Special Numbers that Begin with */#  
Program *45-3 (1~9) – LCR/Toll Restriction Bypass For  
Special Numbers that Begin with */#  
Processor Type: DK14, DK40i, All RCTUs  
Program Type:  
Toll Restriction  
Initialized Default: All data blank  
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ  
ꢀ
OPTION = 0~4 (R4.15)  
SELECT = 3  
0 = Code is not valid in ISDN; is valid in analog line  
1 = Privacy Change for ISDN; valid analog line  
2 = Privacy Change for ISDN; not valid analog line  
3 = No Privacy Change for ISDN; valid analog line  
4 = No Privacy Change for ISDN; analog line not  
valid  
SELECT = 1~9  
DATA = Digit String (1~3 digits)  
When editing:  
•
•
Press LED Button 01 to end the digit string.  
Press LED Button 02 to allow all digits to work.  
.
Do not enter ꢀ or  
OPTION = 0~3  
0 = No Toll Restriction after Special Code  
1 = Toll Restriction after Special Code  
2 = Special Code Restricted  
3 = LCR + Toll Restriction after Special Code (R3.2)  
SELECT =  
(1~9)  
DATA =  
OPTION = OPTION =  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Program *45-3 Overview  
Codes programmed in this record sheet are ignored by Toll Restriction and sent to the appropriate  
route if using LCR. Calls started with “*” or “#” are normally not allowed. However, in some  
special applications (e.g., Caller ID blocking), “*” or “#” might be the first digit before dialing the  
actual destination’s telephone number. This program assigns up to nine such codes for toll  
restriction bypass.  
Digits dialed after the code starting with “*” or “#” are analyzed for toll restriction depending on  
the option (0~3) assigned following the digit code. The option value 0 indicates that no Toll  
Restriction applies to the telephone number dialed after the code is entered. The option value 1  
indicates that Toll Restriction is applied as normal after the code entry. The option value 2  
indicates that the call is restricted when the code is entered. The option value 3 applies LCR and  
TR after the code entry.  
Use this program to allow special CO or Centrex access codes that begin with the * or # prefix.  
Assign them in this table if it is required to bypass Toll Restriction and/or route over the local LCR  
route, if using LCR. (T.R. options 0~3 will be applied after dialing the special numbers assigned in  
this table).  
4-26  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
Toll Restriction  
Program *45-3 (1~9) – LCR/Toll Restriction Bypass For Special Numbers that Begin with */#  
In the “Data = Digit String” part of the programming sequence, note that for two digit codes, such  
as 87, 82, 67, Key (LED Button 01) must be pressed to get to the following “Option=” section. For  
example, enter ꢀꢋꢌꢃ+ROGꢃ6SNUꢃꢆꢃꢂꢃꢑꢏB ( _ = Press LED Button 01) ꢃ+ ꢁꢁ.  
The Privacy Change option (0~4) enables the telephone user to override the setting for their own  
telephone. For instance, if Privacy Change is enabled, then a user can press ꢀꢑꢏ to allow their  
Caller ID to be shown on the caller’s LCD.  
Example 1  
If using LCR behind Centrex and you must dial Centrex speed dial numbers  
ꢃꢀꢏꢁꢁ~ ꢏꢉꢉ, enter  
ꢀ
ꢏꢃ+ %XWWRQꢃꢁꢅꢃ+ %XWWRQꢃꢁꢅꢃ+ ꢁꢁ in Program *45-31. In this case, Toll Restriction will not be  
applied after the Centrex speed dial number ( ꢏ;;) is sent to the Centrex because Option “0” is  
ꢀ
set.  
Example 2  
If you are dialing out and you wish to block the Caller ID feature, you must dial  
appropriate provider's code (e.g.,  
ꢀꢑꢏ or the  
ꢀꢍꢅ, ꢀꢍꢌ). In this case, enter ꢑꢃ+ ꢏꢃ+ %XWWRQꢃꢁꢂꢃ+ ꢆ in Table  
*45-31. In this case, if the user dials ꢑꢏ + telephone number, then Toll Restriction and LCR is  
ꢀ
applied to the telephone number after  
ꢀꢑꢏ is dialed because Option “3” is set. Also, if you want to  
override Privacy Change, for the fourth entry, Option “4”, enter a ꢂ.  
In this case, enter ꢑꢃ+ ꢏꢃ+ %XWWRQꢃꢁꢂꢃ+ ꢆ in Table *45-31. In this case, if the user dials  
telephone number, then Toll Restriction and LCR is applied to the telephone number after  
dialed because Option “4” is set.  
ꢀꢑꢏ +  
ꢀꢑꢏ is  
To allow or ꢄ to be entered as a first digit, a number must be entered in at least one table of  
ꢀꢃ  
Program ꢀ45-3X; do not enter and ꢄ as the first digit of any number in Program *45-3X; Toll  
ꢀ
Restriction assumes the number entered in this table begins with a or ꢄ.  
ꢀ
Important! To allow /ꢄ to be dialed as a first digit, at least one number must be entered in  
ꢀ
Program ꢀ45-3X.  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
4-27  
Toll Restriction  
Program *45-4 – Special Code Dialing Sequence with LCR  
Program *45-4 – Special Code Dialing Sequence with  
LCR  
Processor Type: DK424, all RCTUs (Release 4.1 and higher)  
Program Type:  
Toll Restriction and LCR  
Initialized Default: All LEDs OFF  
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ  
ꢀ
SELECT = 4  
Light the LED Buttons that are  
marked with an X in the table below.  
LED ON  
LED OFF  
Button/LED  
20~3  
X
Not used.  
Not used.  
02  
Sends the digits from Program *45-3 before  
the Programs 55-1 Modified Digits Table  
(MDT) digits.  
Sends the Programs 55-1 Modified Digits Table  
(MDT) digits before the digits from Program *45-  
3.  
01  
Does not insert a pause into the dialing  
sequence.  
Inserts a pause into the dialing sequence.  
Program *45-4 Overview  
When LCR is used to make calls, this program determines if the codes set in Program *45-3 are  
sent before or after the digits that are set in the modified digits table (MDT). See Programs 55-1  
and 55-0.  
Program *45-4 only works when the code of Program *45-3x is dialed. The length of the pause  
inserted is determined by the timer setup in Program 12-3 (unit pause length of 1.5 or 3 seconds).  
This program has no effect on outgoing calls without Program *45-3 codes.  
The digit deletion function of the modified digits table (Program 55-0) applies to the digits that  
immediately follow the Front Modified Digits Table (F-MDT).  
LED 01: Pause following Program *45-3 code  
If LED 01 is ON, a pause is inserted after the digits from Program *45-3 are sent; if LED 01 is  
OFF, a pause is not inserted.  
LED 02: Order of LCR bypass code and MDT  
If LED 02 is ON, the code from Program *45-3 is inserted before the Front Modified Digits Table  
(F-MDT) digits; if LED 02 is OFF, code from Program *45-3 is inserted after the  
F-MDT digits. (See example on Page -28.)  
If LED 02 is ON, digits are not deleted from the Program *45-3 code per Program 55-0; if LED 02  
is OFF, digits are deleted from the Program *45-3 code per Program 55-0.  
LCR Example  
The table below shows the actual dial output digits at the time that LCR sends them. These output  
digits are determined by the settings for LEDs 01 and 02. In this example, the user dials ꢉ + code  
+ telephone number.  
4-28  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
Toll Restriction  
Program *45-4 – Special Code Dialing Sequence with LCR  
Program *45-4  
LED 01 ON  
LED 02 ON  
LED 02 OFF  
Code + Pause + F-MDT + number + E-MDT  
Code + F-MDT + number + E-MDT  
F-MDT + Code + Pause + number + E-MDT  
F-MDT + Code + number + E-MDT  
LED 01 OFF  
F-MDT = Added digits in Front of number dialed (Program 55-1)  
E-MDT = Added digits at the End of number dialed (Program 55-2)  
Code  
=
Digits programmed in Program *45-3  
Number = Dialed telephone number  
9
=
=
LCR access code  
Pause  
Pause time determined in Program 12-3  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
4-29  
Toll Restriction  
Program 46-2~4 – Toll Restriction Allowed/Denied Area Codes by Class  
Program 46-2~4 – Toll Restriction Allowed/Denied Area  
Codes by Class  
Processor Type: DK14, DK40i, All RCTUs  
Program Type:  
Toll Restriction  
Initialized Default: Includes all area codes in all classes  
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ  
DATA = Area Codes  
Enter or display area codes.  
SELECT = Toll Restriction Class  
(see Legend below)  
To add a range, enter XXXꢀXXX (low area code  
ꢀ
high area code).  
Enter: 2, 3, 4#  
2 = add to memory  
Several ranges or individual area codes may be  
entered by separating them with the # button.  
3 = Delete from memory  
4# = Display allowed codes in  
memory (press to scroll)  
Processor  
DK14  
Toll Restriction Class  
Processor  
RCTUBA/BB  
RCTUC/D  
Toll Restriction Class  
1~4  
1~4  
1~4  
1~4  
1~8  
1~8  
DK40i  
RCTUA  
RCTUE/F  
Class:  
(Check one)  
Allowed ❐  
Denied ❐  
DATA = Area Codes  
Class:  
(Check one)  
Allowed ❐  
Denied ❐  
DATA = Area Codes  
♦ Tables with deny box checked do not represent memory. All area codes in memory are allowed.  
♦ International calls may be allowed/denied by entering 011 as the area code. See Program 47 for International Call Restriction by  
Country Codes.  
Program 46-2~4 Overview  
Each class area code provides for a different combination of restrictions.  
The tables in this program define the area codes allowed or denied for each Toll Restriction class.  
The tables (in memory) operate as allow tables. If an area code exists in a table (displays with 4#),  
then it is allowed. Anything not displaying is not allowed. Initialized data allows all area codes for  
each class (all codes are in all tables). All allowed area codes can be displayed (4#) for each class.  
For each class, choose whether the record table is used to record allowed area codes in memory  
(allowed) or denied area codes not in memory (denied). Enter the area codes that define the set.  
4-30  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
Toll Restriction  
Program 46-6~8 – Toll Restriction Allowed/Denied Local Office Codes Assigned by Class  
Program 46-6~8 – Toll Restriction Allowed/Denied  
Local Office Codes Assigned by Class  
Processor Type: DK14, DK40i, All RCTUs  
Program Type:  
Toll Restriction  
Initialized Default: Includes all office codes in all classes  
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ  
DATA = Office Codes  
Enter or display office codes.  
SELECT = Toll Restriction Class  
(see Legend below)  
To add a range, enter XXXꢀXXX (low office code  
ꢀ
Enter: 6, 7, 8#  
6 = add to memory  
7 = Delete from memory  
8# = Display allowed codes in  
memory (press # to scroll)  
high office code).  
Several ranges or individual office codes may be  
entered by separating them with the # button.  
Processor  
DK14  
Toll Restriction Class  
Processor  
RCTUBA/BB  
RCTUC/D  
Toll Restriction Class  
1~4  
1~4  
1~4  
1~4  
1~8  
1~8  
DK40i  
RCTUA  
RCTUE/F  
(Check one)  
Class:  
Allowed ❐  
Denied ❐  
DATA = Office Codes  
(Check one)  
DATA = Office Codes  
Class:  
Allowed ❐  
Denied ❐  
♦ Tables with deny box checked do not represent memory. All office codes in memory are allowed.  
♦ International calls may be allowed/denied by entering 011 as the area code. See Program 47 for International Call Restriction by  
Country Codes.  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
4-31  
Toll Restriction  
Program 46-6~8 – Toll Restriction Allowed/Denied Local Office Codes Assigned by Class  
Program 46-6~8 Overview  
This program defines the office codes allowed or denied for each Toll Restriction Class within the  
home area code. Office code tables for each class can each describe office codes allowed or denied  
for the class. The tables (in memory) operate as allow tables. If an office code exists in a table  
(displays with 8#), then it is allowed. Anything not displaying is not allowed. Initialized data  
allows all office codes in the home area code for each class.  
For each class, choose whether the record table is used to record allowed office codes in memory  
(allowed) or denied office codes not in memory (denied). Enter the office codes that define the set.  
4-32  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
Toll Restriction  
Programs 46-10~80 – Toll Restriction Class Parameters  
Programs 46-10~80 – Toll Restriction Class  
Parameters  
Processor Type: DK14, DK40i, All RCTUs  
Program Type: Toll Restriction  
Initialized Default: All LEDs OFF  
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ  
Select Class from Legend below.  
Turn LEDs 01, 02, 03, or 04 ON to select restriction option.  
Processor  
DK14  
Toll Restriction Class  
Processor  
RCTUBA/BB  
RCTUC/D  
Toll Restriction Class  
1~4  
1~4  
1~4  
1~4  
1~8  
1~8  
DK40i  
RCTUA  
RCTUE/F  
Button 01 LED  
Button 02 LED  
Button 03 LED  
Button 04 LED  
ON  
OFF  
ON  
OFF  
ON  
OFF  
ON  
OFF  
Restrict  
Numbers that  
contain * or #  
within the first  
4 digits  
Allow  
555 Allowed or  
Denied per A/C  
Restriction  
TAble  
A/C+555 or 1+A/  
C+555 Allowed  
for all A/Cs  
Numbers that  
contain * or #  
within the first  
4 digits  
Dial 0  
Restricted  
Dial 0  
Allowed  
Dial 01  
Restricted  
Dial 01  
Allowed  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Programs 46-10~80 Overview  
This program defines parameters of each Toll Restriction class, including dialing plan restrictions  
and exceptions to previous restrictions. This program also relates to Program 47. See Program 47  
for more explanation.  
Run these programs for dial 0, 01, */# restriction and long distance information (555) assignments.  
Toll Restriction exceptions and dialing plan restrictions may be defined for each class.  
♦
♦
♦
Programs 46-10 and 46-11 assign Class 1 restriction exceptions and parameters  
Programs 46-20 and 46-21 assign Class 2  
Programs 46-30 and 46-31 assign Class 3; etc.  
LED 01: 0 Restricted  
Mark an X next to LED 01 if operator or operator-assisted calls are restricted for the class being  
defined. To allow 0 + dialing LED 01 must be OFF. Allowing 0 + dialing allows operator-assisted  
toll calls. If a station is allowed 0 + Credit Card calling in Program 43, LED 01 must be OFF.  
Program 43 will restrict operator assisted calls.  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
4-33  
Toll Restriction  
Programs 46-10~80 – Toll Restriction Class Parameters  
LED 02: 01 Restricted  
Mark an X next to LED 02 if overseas operator or unassisted overseas operator calls are restricted  
for the class being defined. If a station is allowed 0 + Credit Card calling in Program 43, LED 02  
must be OFF. Program 43 will restrict 01 operator assisted calls.  
LED 03: 1+AC+555 and AC+555 Allowed  
Mark an X next to LED 03 to allow the particular class to call all restricted area codes plus the  
office code of 555, including out-of-area directory assistance calls. Turning the LED off does not  
necessarily deny information calls. This may also be accomplished in the office code table and/or  
the area/office code exception tables.  
LED 04: Restrict Numbers Containing * or # Within the First Four Digits  
Numbers set in Program *45-2X override the #/* restriction function of Program 46 (10~80)  
Button LED 04. LED 04 applies only to the first four digits of a dialed number when no digit  
restriction (Code 0) is set for the station Toll Restriction class in Program 48.  
Turn LED 04 ON only if Strata DK CO lines are connected to a Central Office that absorbs * and  
# digits. The first four digits that contain # and * digits can be restricted (LED 04 ON). For  
example: if LED 04 is ON, 17# is restricted when the # is dialed but 1751# is allowed because “#”  
comes after the fourth digit dialed.  
Turn LED 04 OFF if the telephone numbers that contain * and # after the first digit should be  
allowed (see Programs *45-2 and *45-3).  
4-34  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
Toll Restriction  
Programs 46-11~46-81 – Toll Restriction Class (1~8) Parameters  
Programs 46-11~46-81 – Toll Restriction Class (1~8)  
Parameters  
Processor Type: DK14, DK40i, All RCTUs  
Program Type:  
Toll Restriction  
Initialized Default: Leaves all LEDs OFF  
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ  
Select Class from Legend below.  
Light LED Buttons as required to assign Table to Class.  
Processor  
DK14  
Toll Restriction Class  
Exception Table  
Processor  
RCTUBA/BB  
RCTUC/D  
Toll Restriction Class  
Exception Table  
1~4  
1~4  
1~4  
8
8
8
1~4  
1~8  
1~8  
8
DK40i  
16  
16  
RCTUA  
RCTUE/F  
LED  
20~17  
X
LED ON  
LED OFF  
Not Used  
16  
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
10  
9
Table 16 Area/Office Exception  
Table 15 Area/Office Exception  
Table 14 Area/Office Exception  
Table 13 Area/Office Exception  
Table 12 Area/Office Exception  
Table 11 Area/Office Exception  
Table 10 Area/Office Exception  
Table 09 Area/Office Exception  
Table 08 Area/Office Exception  
Table 07 Area/Office Exception  
Table 06 Area/Office Exception  
Table 05 Area/Office Exception  
Table 04 Area/Office Exception  
Table 03 Area/Office Exception  
Table 02 Area/Office Exception  
Table 01 Area/Office Exception  
Not Selected  
Not Selected  
Not Selected  
Not Selected  
Not Selected  
Not Selected  
Not Selected  
Not Selected  
Not Selected  
Not Selected  
Not Selected  
Not Selected  
Not Selected  
Not Selected  
Not Selected  
Not Selected  
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Programs 46-11~46-81 Overview  
Run these programs for area/office code exception table assignments.  
Refer to the legend above the record sheet for exception tables and classes. Exception tables for  
both area and office codes will be defined in Program 47. Each class can be assigned any or all of  
the available office code exception tables.  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
4-35  
Toll Restriction  
Program 47 – Toll Restriction Exception Office Codes Assigned by Area Codes (Tables 1~16)  
Program 47 – Toll Restriction Exception Office Codes  
Assigned by Area Codes (Tables 1~16)  
Processor Type: DK14, DK40i, All RCTUs  
Program Type:  
Toll Restriction  
Initialized Default: Assigns no office codes to tables  
SELECT = Exception Table from Legend  
below.  
A new exception table is needed for each  
area code with office codes that are  
exceptions to restriction.  
AREA CODE =  
Enter only one area code per exception table.  
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ  
SELECT = Exception Table (01~16)  
DATA =  
Enter or display office code(s).  
Enter: 2, 3, 4#  
To add a range, enter XXXꢀXXX (low office  
2 = add to the exception table  
3 = Delete from the exception table  
4# = Display the exception table’s office codes.  
code ꢀ high office code).  
Several ranges or individual office codes may be  
entered by separating them with the # button.  
Processor  
DK14  
Exception Table  
01~08  
Processor  
RCTUBA/BB  
RCTUC/D  
Exception Table  
01~08  
DK40i  
01~08  
01~16  
RCTUA  
01~08  
RCTUE/F  
01~16  
Exception Table:  
Area Code:  
DATA = Record of Exception Office Codes  
4-36  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
Toll Restriction  
Program 47 – Toll Restriction Exception Office Codes Assigned by Area Codes (Tables 1~16)  
Program 47 Overview  
This program defines exceptions to previously defined office code restrictions for up to 16 area  
codes, allowing six-digit Toll Restriction. Office codes entered in Tables 01~16 are opposite of  
what is defined for the area code by Program 46-2~4. For instance, if Program 46 denies area code  
714, entering office codes 530 and 555 into an exception table for area code 714 will allow 714 to  
be dialed only with office codes 530 and 555. Conversely, if 714 is allowed in Program 46, then  
714 + 530 or 714 + 555 will be restricted.  
Each area code with exception office codes requires a table. Each table may hold up to 800  
exception office codes.  
Enter the area code and required office codes on the record sheet.  
For International Call Restriction by country codes, enter 011 for the area code, and Restricted  
country code(s) in the office table(s). To fully restrict a 2-digit country code, also Restrict the  
imaginary third digit of that country code.  
For example, to Restrict country code 81, you must Restrict 10 country codes 810 to 819.  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
4-37  
Toll Restriction  
Program 48 – Station Toll Restriction Classification  
Program 48 – Station Toll Restriction Classification  
Processor Type: DK14, DK40i, All RCTUs  
Program Type:  
Toll Restriction  
Initialized Default: 100 for all ports  
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ  
SELECT = Port Number(s)  
Enter the port number(s) of the  
station(s) being defined.  
Station Restriction Code (00~10)  
00 = No Station Toll Restriction  
01 = Area Code toll Restriction and 0 or 1 as 1st digit  
02 = Area Code Toll Restriction and 0 or 1 as 1st digit  
To add a port range, enter  
03 = Class 1  
04 = Class 2  
05 = Class 3  
06 = Class 4  
07 = Class 5  
08 = Class 6  
09 = Class 7  
10 = Class 8  
XXXꢀXXX (low port ꢀ high port).  
DATA ( 0 or 1)  
0 = No digit restriction  
1 = Digit restriction  
If dial “0” credit card calling must be allowed, use  
Program 43 to assign designated stations/CO lines to  
allow credit card calling.  
Toll Restriction Toll Restriction  
Toll Restriction Toll Restriction  
Processor  
Port Range  
Processor  
Port Range  
Ports for DISA  
Class  
Ports for DISA  
Class  
DK14  
DK40i  
000~009  
000~027  
000~031  
010  
035  
039  
1~4  
RCTUBA/BB  
RCTUC/D  
RCTUE/F  
000~079  
000~239  
000~335  
089  
249  
344  
1~4  
1~4  
1~8  
RCTUA  
1~4  
1~8  
Port No.  
Digit Restriction Code  
Station Restriction Code  
Port No.  
Digit Restriction Code  
Station Restriction Code  
4-38  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
Toll Restriction  
Program 48 – Station Toll Restriction Classification  
Program 48 Overview  
This program assigns a combination of Digit Restriction and Station Restriction to each station  
port defined in the system.  
Digit Restriction  
If Digit Restriction is enabled for a particular station, the station is able to dial the number of digits  
defined in the Program 45-1 Toll Restriction dialing plan.  
♦
♦
♦
Enter 1 in the Digit Restriction column to enable Digit Restriction for the selected station. This  
prevents a user from dialing a second call when dial tone is returned from a CO after the  
outside party disconnects.  
Enter 0 in the Digit Restriction column to disable Digit Restriction for the selected station.  
This allows toll restricted users to dial any number of digits (e.g., to an external voice mail  
device, computer, etc.).  
In systems prior to the DK280 Release 3.1 and in DK40i, digit restriction is always applied to  
restricted stations after dialing a number using system speed dial. With DK424 RCTU PCBs,  
digit restriction after dialing a number using system speed dial will only be applied to stations  
with digit restriction (Code 1) in this program.  
Station Restriction  
Station Restriction assigns Toll Restriction to individual station ports, in addition to previous  
restrictions. It includes eleven different choices (described below). One of the choices must be  
entered for each port. Station restrictions are overridden by lines disabled as defined in Program  
45-2. If a station port has appearance of a line with restrictions disabled, the restrictions will be  
removed from the station on an individual line basis through Program 45-2.  
Enter one of the following codes in the Station Restriction column:  
Enter  
00  
Function  
Description  
No Station Toll Restriction (default)  
Area Code Toll Restriction  
This restricts a station from dialing all area codes.  
01  
Area Code Toll Restriction and “0” or “1”  
as a first or second digit (for old plan 1, 2  
or 3 or new plan 7, 8 or 9 - as defined in  
Program 45-1).  
This prevents the station from making any long distance calls or operator-  
assisted calls, in addition to outgoing calls outside the home area code.  
In applicable areas, this prevents long distance office codes from being  
dialed (if 1+NNX).  
02  
Class 1 Toll Restriction  
Class 2 Toll Restriction  
Class 3 Toll Restriction  
Class 4 Toll Restriction  
Class 5 Toll Restriction  
Class 6 Toll Restriction  
Class 7 Toll Restriction  
Class 8 Toll Restriction  
Class 1 area and office code restrictions are defined in Program 46, and  
exception office code tables in 46-10.  
03  
04  
05  
06  
07  
08  
09  
10  
Class 2 area and office code restrictions are defined in Program 46, and  
exception office code tables in 46-20.  
Class 3 area and office code restrictions are defined in Program 46, and  
exception office code tables in 46-30.  
Class 4 area and office code restrictions are defined in Program 46, and  
exception office code tables in 46-40.  
Class 5 area and office code restrictions are defined in Program 46, and  
exception office code tables in 46-50.  
Class 6 area and office code restrictions are defined in Program 46, and  
exception office code tables in 46-60.  
Class 7 area and office code restrictions are defined in Program 46, and  
exception office code tables in 46-70.  
Class 8 area and office code restrictions are defined in Program 46, and  
exception office code tables in 46-80.  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
4-39  
Toll Restriction  
Program 48 – Station Toll Restriction Classification  
4-40  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
Least Cost Routing  
5
The following provides you an overview of the Least Cost Routing (LCR) feature and step-by-step  
instructions to fill in the Least Cost Routing System record sheets. The quantities of LCR plans,  
CO line groups, etc. vary between processors. This chapter and the LCR record sheets note these  
differences when they exist.  
LCR enables the system to automatically route each outgoing voice call over common carriers and  
selected lines. The customer chooses these lines for the specific time of day, and for system users  
with varying priorities. If the system is programmed properly, LCR can select the most economical  
route. If the best routes are unavailable, users with priority can access more expensive outgoing  
routes. Several elements of LCR must be defined in programming.  
For LCR to function properly:  
♦
♦
♦
line groups must be created in Program 16;  
line restrictions must be set in Programs 40 and 41; and  
the area dialing plan must be assigned in Program 45-1.  
LCR Features  
Parameters  
Enables LCR features, including a warning tone for last choice route number, a comfort dial tone  
during LCR processing, and the Long Distance Information dialing plan.  
Home Area Code  
Notifies LCR software of the area code of the installation site.  
Special Codes  
Notifies LCR of special emergency and operator codes that will be automatically routed as a local  
call, without unnecessary delay.  
Long Distance Information Plan Number  
Notifies LCR software how to route a long distance information call.  
Local Call Plan Number  
Notifies LCR software which call routing plan is designed to handle local and special calls.  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
5-1  
Least Cost Routing  
LCR Conditions  
Timeout after 0 (Zero)  
Notifies the system of the time delay to the user after dialing a 0, before a regular operator is  
accessed.  
Area Code and Office Code Exceptions  
Separate area code tables and office code exception tables (quantity listed below) can be defined -  
one for each available call routing plan. Each table defines the area codes that are handled by the  
particular routing plan. According to the tables defined, specific exception office codes can be  
routed through a different call plan than the overall area code plan.  
Area Code and  
Office Code  
Exception Tables  
Area Code and  
Office Code  
Exception Tables  
Call Routing  
Plans  
Call Routing  
Plans  
Processor  
Processor  
DK14  
DK40i  
8
8
8
8
8
8
RCTUBA/BB  
RCTUC/D  
RCTUE/F  
8
8
16  
16  
16  
16  
RCTUA  
Schedule Assignments Call Routing Plans  
These plans (quantity listed above) can send the outgoing calls of different groups of stations  
according to a time schedule, and call route definitions.  
Route Definitions  
Groups of CO lines assigned to special common carriers, foreign exchange lines, or other special  
services can be specified as call routes.  
LCR Modified Digit Assignments  
Carrier codes can be programmed to dial automatically when a call is placed over the appropriate  
route. Digits can be added to the front or back of special common carrier codes or other access  
numbers to make placing calls an invisible process for the user. Digits may also be deleted from  
the front of the dialed number.  
LCR Station Access Priority Assignments  
Each station port defined in the system may be assigned to one of four station priority groups. The  
groups can have varying access to the defined call routes at different times of day. Each group is  
partitioned from the other groups.  
LCR Conditions  
If a station has direct line appearances, or Pooled CO Line buttons programmed to allow direct  
outgoing line access, LCR is bypassed using the 3RROHGꢃ/LQH or a CO /LQH button. LCR  
accommodates special code dialing, such as 911 for emergency response, 1-411 or 411 for  
information, or 800 area code toll-free numbers. These calls can be directed to the local call route  
(see Program 50-31~35).  
Important! Always provide emergency service access for numbers such as 911.  
Standard telephones that are Toll Restricted should be required to use LCR to place outgoing calls.  
This prevents Toll Restriction defeat when the K4RCU or RRCS times out.  
5-2  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
Least Cost Routing  
LCR CO Line Programming Reference Table  
LCR CO Line Programming Reference Table  
1. Use Program 16 to assign CO lines in groups per the reference table below.  
Processor  
DK14  
CO Line Group  
Processor  
RCTUBA/BB  
RCTUC/D  
RCTUE/F  
CO Line Group  
1~4  
1~8  
1~8  
1~8  
1~16  
1~16  
DK40i  
RCTUA  
Line  
Group  
CO Line in Group  
CO Line Type/Comments  
01  
02  
03  
04  
05  
06  
07  
08  
09  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
2. Use Program 40 to allow CO line access to stations using LCR for outgoing calls.  
3. Use Program 41 to deny outgoing CO line access, except for LCR access.  
Important! Area code and office code structure must be defined by Toll Restriction Dial Plan  
for LCR to work properly.  
4. Use Program 45-1 to enable the dial plan that is appropriate for the area where the LCR calls  
will originate.  
5. Under the column labeled “CO Line Type/ Comments,” enter the service type, the common  
carrier name, or the line type for each line group, e.g., local line, Foreign Exchange (FX) to  
818 (LA), WATS (out of state), etc.  
6. Refer to the Program 40 to restrict stations from incoming and outgoing access of lines,  
including using LCR. All stations that must use LCR to make outgoing calls must not be  
restricted in this program. These restrictions do apply to LCR.  
7. Refer to Program 41, to restrict stations from accessing outgoing lines, except through LCR.  
All stations that must use LCR for outgoing calls must be restricted from line access in this  
program.  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
5-3  
Least Cost Routing  
Program 50-1 – LCR Parameters  
Program 50-1 – LCR Parameters  
Processor Type: DK14, DK40i, All RCTUs  
Program Type:  
Least Cost Routing  
Initialized Default: All LEDs OFF  
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ  
SELECT = 1  
Press LED Buttons for each LCR parameter  
LED  
01  
ON  
OFF  
Enable System LCR  
No LCR  
Not Used  
02  
Not Used  
03  
555 LDI Route per Program 50-4  
Dial Tone After LCR Access  
Warning Tone Last Choice Route Number  
No CO Dial Tone After Line Access  
Per Area Code Table  
04  
Silent  
05  
No Warning Tone  
CO Dial Tone (R4.15)  
10  
Program 50-1 Overview  
This program defines general operating parameters for LCR software.  
●
Program 40 denies CO line access via LCR, but denies all other access methods.  
●
Program 41 allows CO line access via LCR, but denies all other outgoing access methods:  
(#7001~#7200, 801~816, Line button).  
●
Toll Restricted standard telephones should be forced to dial outgoing calls via LCR. This is to  
prevent Toll Restriction defeat when the QRCU3, K4RCU3, K5RCU or RRCS times out.  
LED 01: Enable System LCR  
LED 01 ON: LCR software is enabled system-wide. For the Hospitality Management Information  
System (HMIS), this LED must always be set to ON.  
LED 01 OFF: LCR software is disabled. None of the LCR programming referred to by this section  
is recognized. Dial 9 access assigned in Program 16 is enabled.  
LED 02: Not used  
LED 03: 555 LDI Route Per Program 50-4  
LED 03 ON: LCR routes long distance information (LDI) calls over the plan number specified in  
Program 50-4.  
LED 03 OFF: LCR routes LDI calls using area codes specified in route plans in the following  
table, as it would for any other call.  
Route Plans  
Supported  
Route Plans  
Supported  
Processor  
Processor  
DK14  
DK40i  
8
8
8
RCTUBA/BB  
RCTUC/D  
RCTUE/F  
8
16  
16  
RCTUA  
5-4  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
Least Cost Routing  
Program 50-2 – LCR Home Area Code  
LED Button 04: Dial Tone After LCR Access  
LED 04 ON: Station users hear a simulated dial tone immediately after dialing the access LCR  
code (typically 9), until the first digit of the phone number is dialed. The dial tone is simulated to  
assure the user of the system’s proper operation, but it is not a functional dial tone.  
For HMIS, set LED 04 ON.  
If LED 04 is OFF, station users hear nothing after dialing the LCR access code until the destination  
rings or issues a busy signal.  
LED Button 05: Warning Tone Last Choice Route Number  
LED 05 ON: The user is notified with a warning tone to indicate that LCR has routed the call over  
the least desirable route number. The most expensive route is typically programmed to be the least  
desirable. A user has three choices upon hearing the warning tone:  
♦
♦
♦
Ignore the tone, LCR places the call using the least desirable route.  
Hang up and try later to save money.  
Activate the Automatic Call Back feature. The appropriate line group calls the user back when  
a more desirable route number becomes available.  
LED 05 OFF: No warning tone sounds.  
Program 50-2 – LCR Home Area Code  
Processor Type: DK14, DK40i, All RCTUs  
Program Type:  
Least Cost Routing  
Initialized Default: Leaves the home area code blank  
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ  
SELECT = 2  
DATA = Home (local) area Code  
Program 50-2 Overview  
LCR matches the area code entered here with the LCR route plan containing the home area code in  
its Area Code Table. (The home area code is later entered into one of the available LCR route  
plans through Program 51). Thus, LCR is informed of how to handle local calls.  
Typically, systems are configured to have the LCR route plan containing the home area code as the  
same as the local route plan defined in Program 50-5. Typically you would program it to be Route  
Plan Number 1, rather than the default Plan 16.  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
5-5  
Least Cost Routing  
Programs 50-3 (1~5) – LCR Special Codes  
Programs 50-3 (1~5) – LCR Special Codes  
Processor Type: DK14, DK40i, All RCTUs  
Program Type:  
Least Cost Routing  
Initialized Default: 911 in 31, all other codes blank  
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ  
SELECT = 31~35  
Enter 31~35 to indicate  
the special code.  
DATA = Special Code  
Enter the code from the table below.  
Key 01 = blank  
SELECT =  
Special Code (4 Digits)  
Examples  
31  
32  
33  
34  
35  
911  
411  
Programs 50-3 (1~5) Overview  
This program allows special 1~4 digit codes such as 911 to be routed over the local call route  
immediately when dialed. If Enhanced 911 (E911) is required, E911 programs should be used  
instead of this program.  
You can enter five special codes in the spaces provided next to 31~35. The codes can be a  
maximum of four digits, and should include items such as 911 for emergency calls, and 411 or  
1+411 for local information, etc.  
When any of these codes are dialed, LCR is flagged to treat the call as follows:  
♦
♦
The call is sent over the local call route plan specified in Program 50-5.  
No additional digits need to be dialed. They are not necessary. Therefore, the call is put  
through immediately.  
5-6  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
Least Cost Routing  
Program 50-4 – LCR Long Distance Information (LDI) Plan Number  
Program 50-4 – LCR Long Distance Information (LDI)  
Plan Number  
Processor Type: DK14, DK40i, All RCTUs  
Program Type:  
Least Cost Routing  
Initialized Default: See the legend below  
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ  
SELECT = 4  
DATA = LDI Route Plan (see Legend below)  
LDI Route  
Plans  
LDI Route Plans  
LDI Route  
Plans  
LDI Route Plans  
Processor  
Processor  
Default  
Default  
DK14  
DK40i  
01~08  
01~08  
01~08  
08  
RCTUBA/BB  
RCTUC/D  
RCTUE/F  
01~08  
01~16  
01~16  
08  
08  
16  
RCTUA  
08  
16  
Program 50-4 Overview  
Enter the number of the LCR route plan over which long distance information calls will be routed.  
Typically, long distance information calls are routed over the local call route defined in Program  
50-5.  
♦
If you choose the long distance information plan in Program 50-1, the call is routed as defined  
by this table.  
♦
Typically, LDI Plan Number = Local Call Plan Number.  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
5-7  
Least Cost Routing  
Program 50-5 – LCR Local Call Plan Number  
Program 50-5 – LCR Local Call Plan Number  
Processor Type: DK14, DK40i, All RCTUs  
Program Type:  
Least Cost Routing  
Initialized Default: See the legend below  
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ  
SELECT = 5  
DATA = Local Call Plan (see Legend below)  
Local Call Plan  
Local Call Plan  
Default  
Local Call Plan  
Local Call Plan  
Default  
Processor  
Processor  
Number  
Number  
01~08  
01~08  
01~08  
DK14  
DK40i  
08  
08  
08  
RCTUBA/BB  
RCTUC/D  
RCTUE/F  
01~08  
01~16  
01~16  
08  
16  
16  
RCTUA  
Program 50-5 Overview  
The Local Call Plan handles special codes and operator calls. Of the 16 Route Plans available for  
LCR call processing, define one as the Local Call Plan, typically Route Plan 1. Enter the number  
of the plan over which local calls, operator-assisted/0+ calls, and special code calls will be routed.  
5-8  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
Least Cost Routing  
Program 50-6 – LCR Dial 0 (Zero) Time-out  
Program 50-6 – LCR Dial 0 (Zero) Time-out  
Processor Type: DK14, DK40i, All RCTUs  
Program Type: Least Cost Routing  
Initialized Default: Assigns an LCR Dial Zero Time-out value of 06  
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ  
SELECT = 6  
DATA = Time-out Value  
Enter a time-out value from 04~10 seconds long.  
Program 50-6 Overview  
Enter the maximum number of seconds LCR waits for a user to dial additional digits after a 0,  
before it routes the call to an operator for assistance. LCR waits this number of seconds to receive  
additional digits that indicate charge calls, collect calls or other 0+ calls.  
♦
♦
The allowed range is 04~10 seconds. Always enter two digits.  
Dial 0 calls will be restricted when using 0 + Credit Card calling (Program 43) if a telephone  
number is not dialed after dialing 0 or if Dial 0 is restricted in Program 46 (10~80).  
Overview for Programs 51~54  
These programs provide the system with directions for routing all possible calls, made by all  
possible users at all possible times of day. Tables for Programs 51~54 appear on LCR Route Plan  
Numbers 1~16. The following instructions show how to fill in individual tables within the plans.  
Each of the following program tables must be completed for all plans.  
Programs 51~54 defines LCR route plans (quantities given below):  
LCR Route  
Plans  
LCR Route  
Plans  
Processor  
Processor  
DK14  
DK40i  
8
8
8
RCTUBA/BB  
RCTUC/D  
RCTUE/F  
8
16  
16  
RCTUA  
These separate plans provide the customer flexibility enough to route different area codes and  
exception office codes over different line groups.  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
5-9  
Least Cost Routing  
Program 51 – LCR Area Codes  
Program 51 – LCR Area Codes  
Processor Type: DK14, DK40i, All RCTUs  
Program Type:  
Least Cost Routing  
Initialized Default: Leaves Tables 01~15 blank; all codes (000~999) initialized to the plan - legend below  
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ  
SELECT = LCR Plan Number  
(see Legend below)  
DATA = Area Code(s) (3 digits)  
To add a range of area codes, enter XXX  
ꢀXXX (low office code ꢀhigh office code).  
Action Code:  
2 = To add code to table  
3 = To delete code from table  
4# =To display codes from table  
Processor  
DK14  
LCR Plan Number  
01~08  
LCR Plan Default  
Processor  
RCTUBA/BB  
RCTUC/D  
RCTUE/F  
LCR Plan Number  
01~08  
LCR Plan Default  
08  
08  
08  
08  
16  
16  
DK40i  
01~08  
01~16  
RCTUA  
01~08  
01~16  
LCR Plan:  
LCR Plan:  
Data = Area Code(s)  
LCR Plan:  
LCR Plan:  
Data = Area Code(s)  
Data = Area Code(s)  
Data = Area Code(s)  
5-10  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
Least Cost Routing  
Program 51 – LCR Area Codes  
Program 51 Overview  
Use Program 51 to define which area code calls are placed over which LCR Plan Number (01~08  
or 01~16). Therefore, calls made to all area codes are routed over route definitions defined in  
Program 54 for Plan 08 or 16, following the time schedule specified by Program 53 for Plan 08 or  
16 (unless other assignments are made in plans 1~15).  
Every route plan can be assigned to define a set of area codes and/or office codes.  
011 can be entered as an Area Code into any LCR plan to route direct dial international calls via  
LCR.  
Example  
Any area code entered in a Program 51 LCR area code table for plans 1~15 is subtracted from Plan  
16. An area code cannot be lost. If it is subsequently deleted from Plans 01~07 or Plans 01~15,  
LCR software automatically adds it to Plan 08 or 16.  
Remember that LCR matches the home area code entered in Program 50-2 with the LCR route  
plan containing the home area code in its Area Code Table. The home area code must be entered  
into one of the 16 available LCR route plans through Program 51. Thus, LCR is informed of how  
to handle local calls.  
Typically, systems are configured to have the LCR route plan containing the home area code as the  
same as the local route plan defined in Program 50-5. This usually is programmed by the installer  
to be Route Plan Number 1, rather than the default Plan 08 or 16.  
HMIS Example  
Plan 01 includes home area code, 800, 888. Plan 08 includes long distance area codes. Plan 16 is  
used for RCTUC/D and RCTUE/F processors. The following table gives you an example of how  
you might set up Program 51 for the HMIS:  
LCR Plan:  
01  
LCR Plan:  
02  
LCR Plan:  
08  
LCR Plan:  
Data = Area Code(s)  
Data = Area Code(s)  
Data = Area Code(s)  
Data = Area Code(s)  
714  
800  
888  
000  
715  
801  
889  
713  
799  
887  
999  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
5-11  
Least Cost Routing  
Program 52 – LCR Office Code Exceptions for Specified Area Code  
Program 52 – LCR Office Code Exceptions for  
Specified Area Code  
Processor Type: DK14, DK40i, All RCTUs  
Program Type:  
Least Cost Routing  
Initialized Default: Leaves all office code tables blank and all tables assigned to LCR Plan (see legend  
below)  
More Data  
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀꢃ ꢀ  
DATA = LCR Plan, Area Code, or Office Code  
SELECT = Office Code Exception Table  
(see Legend below)  
To add a range of office codes, enter XXX ꢀXXX (low  
office code ꢀhigh office code).  
Action Code  
Action Code Function  
Action Codes  
DATA =  
Assign Exception Table to LCR Plan  
Assign Area Code to LCR Plan  
0
(LCR Plan 01~16):  
(3-digit Area Code):  
(3-digit Office Code):  
(3-digit Office Code):  
(3-digit Office Code):  
1
Add Office Code to Exception Table  
Delete Office Codes from Exception Table  
Display Office Codes in Exception Table  
2
3
4# more #  
LCRException  
LCRException  
Processor  
Table Number  
LCR Plan  
Processor  
Table Number  
LCR Plan  
Codes  
Codes  
DK14  
DK40ii  
RCTUA  
01~08  
01~08  
01~08  
01~08  
01~08  
01~08  
8
8
8
RCTUBA/BB  
RCTUC/D  
RCTUE/F  
01~08  
01~16  
01~16  
01~08  
01~16  
01~16  
8
16  
16  
Table Number:  
Area Code:  
LCR Plan:  
Table Number:  
Table Number:  
Area Code:  
LCR Plan:  
Table Number:  
Area Code:  
LCR Plan:  
Area Code:  
LCR Plan:  
Data = Office Code(s)  
Data = Office Code(s)  
Data = Office Code(s)  
Data = Office Code(s)  
5-12  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
Least Cost Routing  
Program 52 – LCR Office Code Exceptions for Specified Area Code  
Program 52 Overview  
This Office Code exception table enables the user the flexibility of routing specific office codes  
through a different call plan than other office codes used with that area code.  
♦
♦
♦
Any number of exception code tables can be assigned to each route plan, although each  
exception table can only be used once system-wide.  
Every route plan can be assigned to define a set of area codes and office code exceptions or a  
set of office code exceptions.  
This program applies to both examples listed below. In the first case, an office code exception  
table does not need to be defined in addition to the area codes in Program 51, but it may. In the  
second case, the plan only pertains to exception office codes for certain area codes.  
♦
To route International (011) calls over any selected plan by Country Code, program 011 as the  
Area Code and the Country Code as the Office Code in Program 52 in any Exception Code  
Table. If the Country Code is two digits, add 10, 3-digit Office Codes as follows: XX0 through  
XX9, where XX is the Country Code.  
Example 1  
In the first example, office code exception tables are defined to the area code table. Use the  
continuation sheet to define the exception office codes. As many as 16 office code exception tables  
can be linked to a plan, but each exception table can only be used once. When using the  
continuation sheet, be sure that the same exception table is not assigned to more than one plan.  
1. Turn to the continuation sheet (that follows Plan 16 record sheet).  
2. Determine the plan number where the exception office codes will be routed.  
3. Fill in the area code of the exception office codes in the spaces provided by the correct plan  
number. These office codes will be routed differently than the overall area code.  
4. Enter the specific office codes that are to be routed differently.  
Example 2  
In the second example, the route plan only applies to office code exceptions. The first office code  
exception table may be documented on the LCR Plan record sheet:  
1. Check the box on the record sheet next to Office Code Exception Table number.  
2. Enter the number of the exception table (01~16). Make sure this table number is not entered on  
any other plan, or on the continuation sheet.  
3. Enter the applicable area code.  
4. Enter the specific office codes that are to be routed differently than the area code.  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
5-13  
Least Cost Routing  
Program 53 – LCR Schedule Assignments for LCR Plans  
Program 53 – LCR Schedule Assignments for LCR  
Plans  
Processor Type: DK14, DK40i, All RCTUs  
Program Type:  
Least Cost Routing  
Initialized Default: Assigns starting time as 0000 and Route Definitions as blank for all schedules  
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ  
LCR Plan (1~16)  
Schedule 1~3  
Start Time (HHMM) (HH: 00~23; MM: 00~59)  
or...  
Route Definition Numbers (see Legend below)  
Action Code (0) or LCR Station  
Group Number  
(see Legend below)  
Press LED Button 01 to erase data (LED does  
not light).  
Program 56  
LCR Station Groups  
Program 54 Route  
Definition #  
Program 56  
LCR Station Groups  
Program 54 Route  
Definition #  
Processor  
Processor  
DK14  
DK40i  
1~4  
1~4  
1~4  
1~4  
1~4  
1~4  
RCTUBA/BB  
RCTUC/D  
RCTUE/F  
1~4  
1~8  
1~8  
1~4  
1~6  
1~6  
RCTUA  
Start Time  
Start Time  
LCR Plan  
01~16  
Schedule  
1~3  
Action  
Code  
LCR Plan  
01~16  
Schedule  
1~3  
Action  
Code  
H
H
M
M
H
H
M
M
0
0
0
0
0
0
Program 54  
Route Definition #  
(see legend above)  
Program 54  
Route Definition #  
(see legend above)  
Program 56  
LCR Station  
Group  
(see legend  
above)  
Program 56  
LCR Station  
Group  
(see legend  
above)  
LCR  
Plan  
01~16  
LCR  
Plan  
01~16  
Sched.  
1~3  
Sched.  
1~3  
1st  
Pick  
2nd  
3rd  
4th  
Pick  
1st  
Pick  
2nd  
3rd  
4th  
Pick  
Pick  
Pick  
Pick  
Pick  
5-14  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
Least Cost Routing  
Program 53 – LCR Schedule Assignments for LCR Plans  
Program 53 Overview  
This program assigns up to three time schedules to each plan. Each time schedule consists of four  
or six different route definition choices (defined in Program 54) available to the eight station  
groups (defined in Program 56). It may be helpful to complete Program 54 portions of the plans  
and Program 56 before proceeding.  
If Schedules 1 & 2 start at the same time, then Time of Day schedule change does not occur, and  
data only needs to be entered for Schedule 1.  
Typical Installation Without Time Schedule Feature  
In most cases, an installation does require use of the time schedule feature. To reflect this on the  
record sheets for Plans 01~16:  
1. Enter the same Schedule Start Times for Schedules 1 and 2. Use the military format - HH:MM  
(Hours:Minutes). Fill in all four digits.  
Note If LCR software sees Schedules 1 and 2 have the same start times, then it only looks at  
Schedule 1 for route definitions.  
2. Enter Route Definition numbers for Schedules 1 and 2. Four definitions (route pick or choices)  
can be entered for each group.  
♦
LCR Station (Class) Groups 1~8 are assigned in Program 56.  
♦
LCR Route Definition numbers 1~4 or 1~6 are defined in Program 54.  
3. The order in which the route definitions are entered defines the order of LCR line selection.  
The most desirable route should be entered in the left-most position, and the least desirable  
route in the right-most position.  
4. If “1” is assigned to Station Group 1, and 1 for route definition only, then those assigned will  
only be able to use Route Definition 1, thereby restricting them during times that route  
definition 1 is not allowed.  
5. Keep in mind that the route definition number is being entered, not the CO line group number.  
The definitions are assigned in Program 54.  
Installation Requiring Time Scheduling Feature  
When an installation requires the time scheduling feature to be programmed, three “shifts” of route  
definitions can be assigned per station group. To reflect this on the record sheet, substitute Step 1  
of the procedure described for the typical customer with the following:  
➤ Enter the Schedule Start Times for Schedules 1, 2 and 3. Use military time, in the format  
HH:MM (Hours:Minutes). Fill in all four digits. Initialized data assigns “0000” to all times.  
♦
♦
♦
Start time for schedule 2 is the stop time for schedule 1.  
Start time for schedule 3 is the stop time for schedule 2.  
Start time for schedule 1 is the stop time for schedule 3.  
HMIS Example  
Enter LCR schedule assignments for LCR plan 01, 02 and 08/16. Stations in groups 1, 2, and 3 are  
controlled by HMIS. The following table gives you an example of how you might set up Program  
53 for the HMIS:  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
5-15  
Least Cost Routing  
Program 53 – LCR Schedule Assignments for LCR Plans  
Program 54  
Program 56  
Program 54  
Route Definition #  
(see legend above)  
Program 56  
LCR Station  
Group  
(see legend  
above)  
Route Definition #  
LCR  
Plan  
01~16  
LCR Station  
Group  
LCR  
Plan  
01~16  
Sched.  
1~3  
Sched.  
1~3  
(see legend above)  
(see legend  
above)  
1st  
Pick  
2nd  
Pick  
3rd  
Pick  
4th  
Pick  
1st  
Pick  
2nd  
3rd  
4th  
Pick  
Pick  
Pick  
Guest Room with restricted calling  
Guest Room local/800/888/911  
01  
1
1
2
3
4
1
1
Home  
Area  
Code  
Guest Room complete restriction/911 only  
Hotel Administration (unrestricted)  
1
02  
08  
1
1
1
2
3
1
1
1
Local  
Call  
Route/  
911  
4
1
1
1
2
3
Long  
Distance  
4
1
5-16  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
Least Cost Routing  
Program 54 – LCR Route Definition Tables  
Program 54 – LCR Route Definition Tables  
Processor Type: DK14, DK40i, All RCTUs  
Program Type: Least Cost Routing  
Initialized Default: 0101  
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ  
LCR Plan No.  
(see Legend below)  
Modified Digits Table (see Legend in Program 55)  
CO Line Group (01~16, see Program 16)  
Route Definition Numbers  
(see Legend below)  
Program 16  
CO Line  
Group  
Program 55  
Modified  
Digits  
Program 16  
CO Line  
Group  
Program 55  
Modified  
Digits  
Route  
Definition #  
Route Definition  
#
Processor  
Processor  
DK14  
DK40i  
1~4  
1~4  
1~4  
01~08  
01~08  
01~08  
01~06  
01~06  
01~06  
RCTUBA/BB  
RCTUC/D  
RCTUE/F  
1~4  
1~6  
1~6  
01~08  
01~16  
01~16  
01~06  
01~12  
01~12  
RCTUA  
Route  
Program 16  
Route  
Program 16  
LCR  
Plan  
01~16  
Program 55  
Modified Digits  
(see legend above)  
LCR  
Plan  
01~16  
Program 55  
Modified Digits  
(see legend above)  
Definition #  
(see legend  
above)  
CO Line  
Group (see  
legend above)  
Definition #  
(see legend  
above)  
CO Line  
Group (see  
legend above)  
Program 54 Overview  
Program 54 defines different ways of routing calls for each of the LCR plans. Define each route by  
selecting and entering:  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
5-17  
Least Cost Routing  
Program 54 – LCR Route Definition Tables  
Route Definition Number  
Route definitions define the CO line group and modified digit tables used for each LCR Plan. See  
the legend for the number of route definition numbers for your processor.  
CO Line Group (assigned in Program 16)  
Each line group represents a type of service, e.g., special common carrier, foreign exchange, local  
line group, etc. Program 40 denies incoming and outgoing line access to stations, including LCR  
access. Program 41 allows line access to stations using LCR only for outgoing calls when enabled.  
Modified Digits Table  
Refer to Programs 55-0, 55-1 and 55-2. The system handles line groups differently, according to  
which modified digits table was assigned in Program 54.  
HMIS Example  
The following table gives you an example of how you might set up Program 54 for the HMIS:  
Route  
Definition #  
(see legend  
above)  
Program 16  
CO Line  
Group (see  
legend above)  
Route  
Definition #  
(see legend  
above)  
Program 16  
CO Line  
Group (see  
legend above)  
LCR  
Plan  
01~16  
Program 55  
Modified Digits  
(see legend above)  
LCR  
Plan  
01~16  
Program 55  
Modified Digits  
(see legend above)  
Local  
911  
01  
02  
08  
1
1
1
01  
01  
01  
01  
01  
01  
Long Distance  
5-18  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
Least Cost Routing  
Program 55 – LCR Modified Digits Table  
Program 55 – LCR Modified Digits Table  
Processor Type: DK14, DK40i, All RCTUs  
Program Type:  
Least Cost Routing  
Initialized Default: See each program in the Program 55-X series  
Program 55 Series Overview  
This program defines call handling so the route definition used by LCR is invisible to the station  
user. The station user handles all calls the same way. The goal is for LCR to remember the dialing  
peculiarities of each call route, so the user does not need to know.  
Modified/Add/Delete  
Digit Tables  
Modified/Add/Delete  
Digit Tables  
Processor  
Processor  
DK14  
DK40i  
6
6
6
RCTUBA/BB  
RCTUC/D  
RCTUE/F  
6
12  
12  
RCTUA  
Each modified digits table assigns editing steps that include:  
♦
Deleting a pre-defined quantity of digits from the front of the number dialed  
(Program 55-0).  
♦
♦
Adding a pre-defined number to the front of the number dialed (Program 55-1).  
Adding a pre-defined number to the end of the number dialed (Program 55-2).  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
5-19  
Least Cost Routing  
Program 55-0 – Delete Number of Digits From the Front of Dialed Number  
Program 55-0 – Delete Number of Digits From the Front  
of Dialed Number  
Initialized Default: All tables blank  
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ  
SELECT = Modified Digits Table  
(see Program 55 Legend)  
FIGURE = Quantity of Digits (00~10) to be deleted.  
Program 55-0  
Delete Digits Table  
Quantity of Digits (01~10 max)  
Table Number  
01  
02  
03  
04  
05  
06  
07  
08  
09  
10  
11  
12  
Program 55-0 Overview  
Enter the quantity of digits that should be deleted from the front of the number dialed for each of  
the Table Numbers in the Delete Digits Table. The maximum number is 10. Always make the entry  
two digits.  
If the Delete Digits Table is activated, refer to Programs *45-3 and *45-4 if special dialing codes,  
such as Caller ID blocking, etc., will be used.  
5-20  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
Least Cost Routing  
Program 55-1 and 2 – Add Digits Before and/or After the Dialed Number  
Program 55-1 and 2 – Add Digits Before and/or After  
the Dialed Number  
Initialized Default: Leaves all tables blank except Delete Digits, which are all 00  
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ  
SELECT = Modified Digits Table  
CODE = Digits added (up to 22)  
1 = Add digits in front of number dialed (F-MDT)  
2 = Add digits at the end of number dialed (E-MDT)  
(see Program 55 and *45-4 Legend)  
Enter the digits to be added. Pauses may be coded  
as described in the pause entry reference table  
below.  
Pause Entry Reference (Programs 55-1, 55-2)  
Key/LED  
Pause (Seconds)  
Record Entry  
Special Functions  
Key/LED 09 (R4.15)  
ISDN Start Key, LCD = G  
08  
16  
P8  
Key/LED 11:  
Clear All  
07  
14  
P7  
06  
05  
04  
03  
02  
01  
12  
10  
8
P6  
P5  
P4  
P3  
P2  
P1  
Key/LED 10:  
Convert DP to DTMF,  
LCD = T  
6
Key/LED 12:  
Code for ISDN Sub-address Separator  
LCD = S  
4
2
Modified Digits Table (MDT)  
Add to FRONT of Dialed Number (Program 55-1)  
Table No.  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10 11 12 13 14 15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
01  
02  
03  
04  
05  
06  
07  
08  
09  
10  
11  
12  
Modified Digits Table (MDT)  
Add to END of Dialed Number (Program 55-2)  
10 11 12 13 14  
Table No.  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
01  
02  
03  
04  
05  
06  
07  
08  
09  
10  
11  
12  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
5-21  
Least Cost Routing  
Program 55-1 and 2 – Add Digits Before and/or After the Dialed Number  
Program 55-1 and 2 Overview  
Enter the digits that must be added to the front of the number dialed in the Add Digits Table. The  
maximum digits is 22, including pauses.  
♦
♦
♦
Length of pause can be indicated by using codes (P1~P8) specified in the Pause Entry  
Reference Table. Each pause takes two digits of memory space.  
Try to allow for the longest wait, e.g., make the pause longer, rather than shorter, to  
accommodate the length of time a carrier may need to access the service tones, etc.  
If using special codes in Program *45-3, use Program *45-4 to indicate if the Program *45-3  
codes should be sent before or after the Program 55-1 and 55-0 Modified Digits Table (MDT)  
digits. Program *45-4 also allows a pause to be inserted into the dialing sequence.  
5-22  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
Least Cost Routing  
Program 56 – LCR Station Group Assignments  
Program 56 – LCR Station Group Assignments  
Processor Type: DK14, DK40i, All RCTUs  
Program Type: Least Cost Routing  
Initialized Default: Assigns all stations to Group 1  
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ  
SELECT = Station Logical Port Number(s)  
Enter port numbers of stations being assigned.  
Enter LCR Station Group (1~8)  
To add a port range, enter XXX ꢀXXX (low port ꢀ high port).  
Processor  
DK14  
Port Range  
000~009  
000~027  
000~031  
LCR Station Groups  
Processor  
RCTUBA/BB  
RCTUC/D  
RCTUE/F  
Port Range  
000~079  
000~239  
000~335  
LCR Station Groups  
1~4  
1~4  
1~4  
1~4  
1~8  
1~8  
DK40i  
RCTUA  
Port  
Number  
LCR Station Group  
No. (1~8)  
Port  
Number  
LCR Station Group  
No. (1~8)  
Port  
Number  
LCR Station Group  
No. (1~8)  
Port  
Number  
LCR Station Group  
No. (1~8)  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
5-23  
Least Cost Routing  
Program 56 – LCR Station Group Assignments  
Program 56 Overview  
The purpose of this program is to assign all defined station ports to one of four or eight LCR  
Station Groups (see Program 56, record sheet notes).  
♦
♦
♦
Station groups are completely independent of one another. Therefore, each station group must  
be defined separately.  
Software does not automatically assign the highest, all-inclusive routing priority to Class 1  
stations, making all routes available to Class 2~8 stations available to Class 1 as well.  
Instead, stations are assigned (partitioned) to independent groups. Flexible assignment of  
routing definitions to groups is allowed, with no one group’s definition affecting another’s.  
Each group’s route definitions are specified to activate separately according to the time  
schedules set by Program 53. Enter the station group number next to the port number.  
HMIS Example  
LCR Station Group Assignments for LCR Plans 01, 02, and 08/16:  
LCR Group  
Allows  
All calls to be dialed by rooms.  
01  
02  
03  
04  
Guest Rooms  
Administration  
Local Calls, 800/888, 911 only.  
911 only.  
As needed (most likely will be the same as Group 01).  
5-24  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
Automatic Call Distribution  
6
This chapter provides ACD programming information for the Strata DK424 system and its  
stations. ACD is not available for the DK14 or DK40i.  
The programs specific to ACD are listed below.  
♦
♦
♦
♦
♦
♦
♦
♦
♦
♦
♦
♦
♦
♦
♦
♦
Program 03 – RSIU, RSSU, PIOU, or PIOUS ACD/MIS Slot Assignments  
Program 09 – Auto Attendant Prompt/ACD Group Assignments  
Program *09 – ACD Group DID/Tie Line Digit Assignments (use if Program 71 is not used)  
Program 10-4 – ACD Parameters  
Program 11 – ACD Timing Assignments  
Program 14-0 – Loop/Ground Start CO Line Direct Ring to ACD Group Assignments  
Program 14-1 – ACD Agent Identification Code Assignments  
Program *14-1 – Auto Answer with Zip Tone Assigned to Agent ID  
Program 14-2 – ACD Supervisor Passwords  
Program *14-2 – DID/Tie/DNIS/ANI Line After Shift and Overflow Substitution Destination  
Program 14-3 – Announcement/Music Port Assignments and Queue Pattern  
Program 14-4 – Queue Time Out Overflow Destination  
Program 14-5 – Overflow Point and Ring No Answer Routing Destination Assignments  
Program 14-6 – After Shift Service Destination  
Program 14-71 – Queue Size for Alarm (Immediate Assignments)  
Program 14-72 – Queue Size for Alarm 1 (See also Timer Program 11-6 in Strata DK  
Programming Manual)  
♦
Program 14-73 – Queue Size for Alarm 2 (See also Timer Program 11-7 in Strata DK  
Programming Manual)  
♦
♦
♦
♦
♦
♦
♦
Program 14-8 – Alarm Pattern Assignments  
Program 14-9 – Work Unit Assignments (Work Unit/Stroke Digit Length)  
Program 15 – Ground/Loop/Tie/DID Line Options  
Program 17 – DID/Tie Line Options  
Program 18 – Agent ID Code Name for MIS Assignments  
Program 35 – Station Class of Service  
Program 39 – Flexible Button Assignments for ACD Telephones (in System and Station  
Chapter)  
♦
Program 71 – DID/Tie/DNIS/ANI Lines (use if Program *09 is not used)  
Star (*) programs are the newer programs, and they are located behind the program of the same  
name (e.g., Program *14-2 follows Program 14-2).  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
6-1  
Automatic Call Distribution  
Program 03 – RSIU, RSSU, PIOU, PIOUS ACD/MIS Slot Assignments  
Program 03 – RSIU, RSSU, PIOU, PIOUS ACD/MIS Slot  
Assignments  
Initialized Default: n/a  
Power OFF (5 sec.) then ON  
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ  
PIOU, PIOUS, or RSSU Slot Number (12~78)  
...or RSIU Slot Number 11  
Enter 42 to assign the PIOU, PIOUS, or RSSU  
TTY Port as MIS port, or enter 49 to assign RSIU  
to slot 11 (see Program 76 if installing RSIU).  
Program 03 Overview  
This program is for specifying RSIU, RSSU, PIOU, or PIOUS ACD/MIS Slot Assignments.  
If MIS output is required for ACD, set Code 42 for the slot in which the RSSU, PIOU or PIOUS is  
installed, or Code 49 if RSIU is installed in slot 11 (that connects to the SMIS personal computer).  
If you use RSIU/RSIS for MIS output, you must set the appropriate port for MIS operation/speed  
using Program 76.  
6-2  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
Automatic Call Distribution  
Program 09 – Auto Attendant Prompt/ACD Group Assignments  
Program 09 – Auto Attendant Prompt/ACD Group  
Assignments  
Initialized Default: n/a  
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ  
SELECT = Dialed Digit(s)  
AUTO ATT DIAL = ACD Group Number  
Menu prompts offered to  
caller (1 or 2 digits)  
Enter the ACD Group numbers which will receive  
Auto Attendant calls. Pressꢃꢀ if establishing the  
first digit of a two digit dialing format.  
Processor  
ACD Group Numbers  
RCTUBA/BB  
RCTUC/D  
RCTUE/F  
01~08  
01~16  
01~16  
Dialed Digit  
(Menu Prompts)  
ACD Group Number  
Department, Division, Etc.  
0
1
21  
31  
41  
5
6
7
8
9
1. Do not use digits 2, 3, and 4, unless the station numbering plan is changed. These numbers conflict with the default station  
[PDNs] of the system.  
Program 09 Overview  
Program 09 enables you to assign Auto-Attendant (AA) prompt numbers that will route calls to  
specific ACD Groups.  
Important! If using DK Built-in AA, program call flow assignment of DK AA per Chapter 10 –  
Peripheral Installation of the DK Installation and Maintenance Manual.  
➤ To enter one-digit dialing prompts along with their destination station numbers  
1. Enter Program 09.“SELECT” appears on the LCD.  
2. Press the desired prompt digit. “AUTO ATT DIAL” displays on the LCD.  
3. Enter ꢄꢋ;; (;; = the destination ACD Group number associated with the prompts) and  
press the +ROG button.  
4. Repeat Steps 2 and 3 for more prompt-station entries.  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
6-3  
Automatic Call Distribution  
Program 09 – Auto Attendant Prompt/ACD Group Assignments  
➤ To enter two-digit dialing prompts along with their destination group numbers  
1. Enter Program 09. “SELECT” appears on the LCD.  
2. Press the desired leading digit. “AUTO ATT DIAL” displays on the LCD.  
3. Press then the +ROG button. The first digit will now be set.  
ꢃꢀ  
4. Press 6SNU, then press a second digit. “AUTO ATT DIAL” displays on the LCD. Enter ꢄꢋ.  
5. Enter the destination ACD Group number assigned to the two-digit prompt, then press the  
+ROG button.  
6. To complete more second digit prompt-station entries, repeat Steps 4 and 5.  
Notes  
●
When transmission and DTMF levels are lower than normal or when the digital announcement  
voice frequencies match DTMF digital frequencies (talk-off), AA efficiency may be improved  
with two-digit dialing options, instead of one-digit dialing options.  
●
●
Press button LED 01 to delete data.  
Program 78-61~63 overrides CO line assignments in Program 14-0, which means CO lines  
that are assigned to AA and ACD Groups will be routed to the AA.  
6-4  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
Automatic Call Distribution  
Program *09 – ACD Group DID Line Digit Assignments  
Program *09 – ACD Group DID Line Digit Assignments  
Initialized Default: See table below  
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ  
ꢀ
ACD Group Port Number (3 digits)  
DID/Tie line digits assigned to ACD Group Port  
Number (1~4 digits)  
ACD Group  
Port Numbers  
Default DID/Tie  
Line Digits  
Processor  
RCTUBA/BB  
RCTUC/D  
RCTUE/F  
090~097  
250~265  
345~360  
290~297  
450~465  
870~885  
ACD Group  
Number  
ACD Group Port  
Number  
DID/Tie Line Digits  
Assigned (1~4 Digits)  
Program *09 Overview  
Program *09 assigns DID/Tie line incoming digits to a particular ACD Group and assigns DID  
digits to station ports (only if Program 71 is not used).  
Related Programs  
Program 04 assigns Tie line digits to station ports. (See Programs *09 and 04 in the Strata DK  
Programming Manual.)  
Refer to Program 17, LED 05-for DID and Tie line options. Use Program *09 if Program 71 DID/  
Tie/DNIS/ANI line call routing is not being used.  
If the digits assigned to the group are sent to the Strata DK System on any incoming DID or Tie  
line call, the call is directed to the assigned ACD Group (see Program 14-0 to assign ground and  
loop start lines to an ACD Group).  
Note If DID/Tie/DNIS/ANI lines use Program 71 (DNIS assignments) instead of Program *09  
to route callers to ACD Groups, turn on LED 05 in Program 17 for each of the appropriate  
DID/Tie/DNIS/ANI lines. If the line receives ANI but not DNIS, turn LED 05 OFF and 07  
and 08 ON in Program 17. Use Program 71 (0~3) to make the appropriate digit and  
routing assignments. Refer to Programs 17 and 71.  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
6-5  
Automatic Call Distribution  
Program 10-4 – ACD/ISDN Parameters  
Program 10-4 – ACD/ISDN Parameters  
Initialized Default: LEDs 12 and 14 are ON  
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ  
SELECT = 4  
Light Button/LEDs as defined by the table below. If  
the X column is checked, the LED should be ON.  
Button/  
LED  
X
LED ON  
LED OFF  
20  
19  
18  
17  
16  
15  
ISDN “Start” access code is sent when the Speed Dial  
(SDS) button is pressed (initialized).  
14  
13  
ISDN Start access code is not sent.  
Always receives 3.1kHz calls.  
Receive 3.1kHz audio calls as speech calls only if a  
progress indicator is sent.  
12  
11  
10  
09  
08  
07  
06  
05  
BRI T-Wait ON (initialized)  
PRI T-Wait ON  
BRI T-Wait OFF  
PRI T-Wait OFF (initialized)  
All Agents Unavailable Route: Per Prog. 14-5 (Overflow  
Point Destination)  
All Agents Unavailable Route: Per Prog. 14-6 (After Shift  
Destination)  
04  
03  
Agent receives Supervisor Monitor Tone/LCD display  
when being monitored  
Agent does not receive Supervisor Monitor Tone/LCD  
display when being monitored  
02  
01  
ACD Mode: Most idle Agent receives next call  
ACD Mode: Next Available Agent receives next call  
Program 10-4 Overview  
This program provides three system options. When enabled/disabled these options apply to all  
ACD Groups and Agents. ACD system options are set as follows:  
LED 01: Set Next-Available-First or Most-Idle-First Routing  
Sets which algorithm the system follows to route ACD calls.  
Next-Available-First, Turn LED 01 OFF—The Agent list is searched sequentially, starting from  
(not including) the last found Agent, and ending with the first found available Agent. This method  
of searching is similar to the circular-distributed hunt method.  
Most-Idle-First, Turn LED 01 ON—The Agent with the most idle time, since the last ACD call,  
receives the next call. If all Agents are busy and an Agent becomes available, that Agent  
automatically receives the next call, regardless of idle time. If that should happen, the Agent with  
the longest idle time may have to wait to receive a call. As Agents go idle, they are added to the  
end of the ACD Agent routing list.  
6-6  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
Automatic Call Distribution  
Program 10-4 – ACD/ISDN Parameters  
Note During busy ACD call traffic conditions, the algorithm routes calls that have been waiting  
in the ACD Group queue directly to the first Agent telephone that becomes available.  
LED 03: Supervisor Monitor Tone and Display  
If Tone/LCD is enabled when a Supervisor monitors an Agent telephone, the Agent receives a  
short dial tone burst (every 15 seconds) and a steady LCD display: MONITOR BY SUPRV. The  
system also sends the monitor tone to the outside caller connected to the Agent. If Tone/LCD is not  
enabled, the Agent and outside caller has no indication that their call is being monitored by the  
Supervisor.  
LED 04: ACD Group Unavailable Destination  
When all Agents in a Group are in the Unavailable mode simultaneously, new incoming ACD calls  
that are normally routed to the ACD Group’s call waiting queue is immediately diverted to either  
the Overflow-Queue-Point destination (set in Program 14-5) or to the End-of-Shift destination (set  
in Program 14-6), depending on the status of Program 10-4 LED 04 (see Flowchart 6-6 on Page  
6-46).  
LED 11: PRI ISDN Timer  
The T-Wait timer is an ISDN timer that is required to reduce the potential for a network overload  
condition due to a large number of ISDN terminals requesting initialization at the same time (e.g.,  
due to an area-wide power failure). This timer creates a random time interval and is called upon  
power up to set a value to delay the initialization process until the timer has expired. This timer is  
seldom used for PRI interfaces.  
LED 12: BRI ISDN Timer  
The T-Wait timer for BRI and PRI terminals works the same way. See LED 11 for a description.  
This timer should be used for BRI terminals and only disabled if the local provider instructs  
disabling this timer.  
LED 13: 3.1kHz Audio  
Calls received from the non-ISDN portion of the public network come in 3.1 kHz audio. A  
progress indicator is not always provided for these types of calls. Turning LED 13 OFF allows all  
calls to be received. Toshiba recommends keeping LED 13 OFF until some time in the future when  
the public network is updated to send a progress indicator with all calls.  
LED 14: ISDN Start Button Access Code  
When LED 14 is ON, the ISDN 6WDUW button access code is automatically sent when the 6SHHGꢃ  
'LDO (or 6'6) button is pressed. The default is ON. If LED 14 is OFF, the number entry timer  
expires.  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
6-7  
Automatic Call Distribution  
Program 11 – ACD Timing Assignments  
Program 11 – ACD Timing Assignments  
Initialized Default: See table below  
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ  
Code (1~9)  
DATA = Time (min. or sec.)  
ACD Group Number  
Music Timer (1~3)  
(used only with Code 5, skip this  
entry for all other codes)  
Processor  
RCTUBA/BB  
RCTUC/D  
ACD Group Numbers  
01~08  
01~16  
01~16  
RCTUE/F  
Code  
Time  
Initialized Data  
Notes  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0000~3600 sec.  
000~255 sec.  
000~255 sec.  
000~120 sec.  
000~999 sec.  
000~255 sec.  
000~600 sec.  
0030 sec.  
030 sec.  
060 sec.  
001 sec.  
030 sec.  
120 sec.  
240 sec.  
0000 = No Overflow  
00 Disables Alarm  
Guard Timer; blocks  
Alarm Reset  
8
9
00~30 min.  
00~60 min.  
01 min.  
00 min.  
00 Disables Timer  
Code 1  
Code 2  
Code 3  
Code 4  
Code 5  
Code 6  
Code 7  
Code 8  
Code 9  
Connect to  
Music Timer  
ACD  
Group  
Number  
Queue  
Overflow  
Timer  
RBT before  
Announce  
Timer  
Call Waiting Call Waiting  
Disconnect  
of ACD Call  
Timer  
Ring Agent  
Timer  
Wrap-up  
Timer  
Alarm  
Guard Timer  
Alarm  
Alarm  
Timer 1  
Timer 2  
1
2
3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
6-8  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
Automatic Call Distribution  
Program 11 – ACD Timing Assignments  
Program 11 Overview  
The ACD timers listed below can be set individually for each ACD Group. ACD timers apply to  
loop, Tie, DID, DNIS, and ANI lines, not ground start lines.  
Code 1: Time in ACD Queue Before Overflow  
The time period (ranges from 0000~3600 seconds) a call(s) remains in an ACD queue pattern  
before it attempts to overflow to the destination set in Program 14-4. The queue timer can be set  
from 1 second to 3600 seconds (60 minutes) or to no overflow time out. If no overflow time out is  
set (Data = “0000”), then the call remains in queue or overflows per Program 14-5 operation  
settings (see Flowcharts 6-3 and 6-4 on Pages 6-43 and 6-44).  
Code 2: Ring Agent Timer  
The time period (ranges from 000 seconds to 4 minutes and 15 seconds) an ACD call will ring an  
idle Agent telephone. When the time expires and the call is unanswered, the system hunts and  
rings another idle Agent telephone from the same ACD Group for the same duration of time.  
This process continues until all idle Agent telephones have been rung or the call is answered. If the  
call remains unanswered after ringing the last idle Agent, it is routed to the destination set in  
Program 14-5.  
If the destination set in Program 14-5 is a [DN], the ACD line if idle rings the [DN]. If the [DN] is  
busy, the ACD line rings the idle or busy [DN] or CO /LQHꢐ3RROHGꢃ/LQHꢃ*US button assigned to  
ring in Programs 81, 84, and 87 and flash in *81, *84, and *87. If a DID/Tie/DNIS/ANI line is  
used, the call camps on to the busy station set in Program *14-2 (see Flowchart 6-7 on Page 6-47).  
Code 3: After Call Work Timer  
Immediately after an Agent disconnects from an ACD call, the After Call Work Timer begins to  
count down (ranges from 000 seconds to 4 minutes, 15 seconds). The wrap-up count is updated to  
display the active condition on the Agent telephone LCD (the wrap-up time remaining counts  
down each second).  
When an Agent telephone is in the After Call Work Time mode (wrap-up timer count down), the  
telephone does not receive ACD calls, but it can receive non-ACD or PBX calls. An Agent can  
cancel the wrap-up mode anytime by pressing the (QGꢃ$IWHUꢃ&DOOꢃ:RUNꢃ7LPH button, by  
making another call, or by going off and on-hook. After Call Work Time is not activated after the  
completion of PBX calls made from, or received on, the Agent telephone’s $&'ꢃ&DOO button or  
[PhDN].  
Code 4: Ring-Back-Tone (RBT) Timer  
Defines the time that a new incoming ACD call receives ring back tone, if no Agents are idle and  
the caller must wait for the ACD queue announcement (ranges from 000~120 seconds) (Flowchart  
6-1 on Page 6-41). This timer only applies to CO lines that are routed directly to the ACD Group  
(all types of CO lines).  
If a CO line is transferred to an ACD Group by a station or DK AA and no Agents are idle, this  
timer does not apply. Calls immediately enter the ACD Group’s queue. If a caller hangs up while  
connected to the RBT timer, the call is considered unanswered and the Strata DK system does not  
send answer supervision (800-type calls are not billed in this case).  
If the outside caller hangs up while the incoming call is connected to the RBT timer, the call is  
abandoned and is not considered as an answered call. No answer supervision is sent from the  
Strata DK System and “800” type calls will not be billed. Calls abandoned after the call is sent to  
the first announcement will be considered as answered and billed.  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
6-9  
Automatic Call Distribution  
Program 11 – ACD Timing Assignments  
Code 5: Music Timers 1, 2, and 3  
Defines the time interval that ACD callers in queue are sent music following the first, second, or  
third announcement. Range of each music timer is 000~999 seconds (about 5 seconds to 16 1⁄2  
minutes).  
The connection time tolerance when switching between music and announcements is 5 seconds;  
example, if a music timer is set for 00 seconds, the caller may still hear up to 5 seconds of music if  
a music source is installed.  
♦
♦
Timer 11-51 defines the music interval following the first announcement.  
Timer 11-52 defines the music interval between the second and third announcement on three-  
announcement queue patterns. Timer 11-52 is not used on one or two announcement queue  
patterns.  
♦
Timer 11-53 defines the music interval following the second announcement on two-  
announcement queue patterns; or, the music interval following the third announcement on  
three-announcement queue patterns. Each music timer can be individually set from 000  
seconds to 16 minutes, 39 seconds (see Flowcharts 6-8~6-10 on Pages 6-48~6-51).  
Code 6: Call Waiting Alarm Timer 1  
Defines the first alarm threshold time for the ACD calls waiting in queue (ranges from 000~255  
seconds). If a defined number of ACD calls (per Program 14-72) are in queue longer than the time  
defined in Program 11-6, the ACD Supervisor telephone is sent a beeping alarm indication (2400  
Hz/10 Hz, 0.75 second OFF, 0.75 second ON). Program 14-8 DATA must be set to “2” for the Call  
Waiting Alarm Timer 1 to operate.  
Code 7: Call Waiting Alarm Timer 2  
Defines the second alarm threshold time for ACD calls waiting in queue (ranges from 000~600  
seconds). If a defined number of ACD calls (per Program 14-73) are in queue longer than the time  
defined in Program 11-7, the ACD Supervisor telephone is sent a beeping alarm indication (2400  
Hz/10 Hz, one continuous sound). Program 14-8 DATA must be set to “2” for the Call Waiting  
Alarm Timer 2 to operate.  
Code 8: Alarm Guard Timer  
Defines the minimum time interval between queue alarm signals sent to the Supervisor telephone.  
The timer can be set from 01~30 minutes. If the timer is set to 00, the 5HVHWꢃ4XHXHꢃ$ODUP  
button does not function to end a queue alarm indication on the Supervisor telephone.  
Example: If the queue alarm sounds at the Supervisor telephone and the Supervisor resets the  
alarm by pressing the flashing 5HVHWꢃ4XHXHꢃ$ODUP button, the Alarm Guard Timer begins to  
count down from the time set in this program. If the number of calls in the ACD queue still  
exceeds the queue size (set in Program 14-71, 72, or 73) after the Alarm Guard Timer expires, the  
alarm sounds again on the Supervisor telephone.  
6-10  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
Automatic Call Distribution  
Program 11 – ACD Timing Assignments  
Code 9: Call Disconnect Timer  
Defines the maximum time an ACD call can remain in queue (ranges from 01~60 minutes). This  
timer should be used when using loop start, Tie, or DID, DNIS, ANI on ACD lines. This prevents  
CO lines from being connected to an ACD queue for an indefinite period of time after the outside  
caller hangs up and the CO line does not provide the Calling Party Control (CPC or AR)  
disconnect signal. This timer only disconnects calls in queue; it does not disconnect calls that are  
answered by Agent telephones or other telephones/devices. If 00 data is entered, the disconnect  
feature is disabled.  
The disconnect feature is always disabled for ground start CO lines (see Flowchart 6-2 on Page  
6-42, later in this chapter).  
Note 255 sec. is 4 minutes and 15 seconds.  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
6-11  
Automatic Call Distribution  
Program 14-0 – Loop/Ground Start Line Direct to ACD Group Assignments  
Program 14-0 – Loop/Ground Start Line Direct to ACD  
Group Assignments  
Initialized Default: No CO lines assigned to direct ring to ACD Groups (all LEDS OFF)  
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ  
SELECT = 0  
Light Button/LEDs of CO lines that should be  
assigned to the ACD Group.  
ACD Group Number  
Press Scroll to advance or  
Page to go back.  
ACD Group  
Number  
Processor  
CO Line Range  
RCTUBA/BB  
RCTUC/D  
RCTUE/F  
01~08  
01~16  
01~16  
001~048  
001~144  
001~200  
ACD Group  
Number  
ACD CO Line Assignments  
(Write in CO lines assigned to direct ring each ACD Group on incoming calls.)  
Program 14-0 Overview  
Assigns ground and loop start CO lines to directly ring a designated ACD Group. CO lines that are  
assigned to an ACD Group should also be assigned as a line group in Program 16. A CO line can  
only be assigned to one ACD Group.  
Important! Agent telephones that should receive calls from lines assigned to an ACD Group,  
should not be assigned a 3RROHGꢃ/LQHꢃ*US button or individual CO /LQH buttons  
(Program 39) for lines that are in the ACD Group.  
ACD line calls ring Agent $&'ꢃ&DOO buttons [PhDNs] and ACD calls that overflow ring the  
overflow destination telephone [DN] buttons or CO /LQH/3RROHGꢃ/LQHꢃ*US button.  
See Programs *09, 17 (LED 05) and 71-1 for DID/Tie/DNIS/ANI line digit to ACD Group  
assignments. Also see Program 11 (Code 1~9)—ACD Timing Assignments.)  
Note Program assignment 78-61~63 overrides Program 14-0 CO line assignments.  
6-12  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
Automatic Call Distribution  
Program 14-1 – ACD Agent Identification Code Assignments  
Program 14-1 – ACD Agent Identification Code  
Assignments  
Initialized Default: blank  
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ  
SELECT = 1  
DATA = Agent ID Log in Code (0000~9999)  
DATA = ACD Group Number  
SELECT = Agent ID Number (000~255)  
Use the Record Sheet that follows Program 18.  
Program 14-1 Overview  
This program assigns Agent Identification (ID) codes to each ACD Group. To receive an ACD call  
from a specific ACD line group, the Agent must log in to the ACD Group by dialing the ID code  
(four digits) assigned in this program.  
Note A telephone can be logged in as either an Agent or Supervisor telephone in any ACD  
Group, but it cannot be logged in as an Agent and a Supervisor simultaneously. Agents can  
only log in to one ACD Group at a time. See Program 14-2 for more information.  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
6-13  
Automatic Call Distribution  
Program *14-1 – Auto Answer with Zip Tone Assigned to Agent ID  
Program *14-1 – Auto Answer with Zip Tone Assigned  
to Agent ID  
Initialized Default: Group Number = 01. Agent ID Code = blank. DATA 0 = No Auto Answer.  
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ  
ꢀ
SELECT = 1  
DATA =  
SELECT = Agent ID Number  
(000~255)  
0 = No Auto Answer  
1 = Auto Answer  
Press # for single port entry.  
Use the Record Sheet that follows Program 18.  
Program *14-1 Overview  
This program assigns Auto Answer to Agent telephones. When Auto Answer is enabled, the  
telephone generates a zip tone (one-half second burst of dial tone) into the handset and the Agent  
can automatically answer ACD calls.  
If the Agent telephone is off-hook, the headset receiver or if on-hook, the telephone speaker  
receives zip tone when an ACD call is sent to the Agent. Auto Answer applies to direct and  
transferred ACD calls, but not to incoming PBX calls to the Agent $&'ꢃ&DOO [PhDN] button.  
6-14  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
Automatic Call Distribution  
Program 18 – Agent Names for SMIS/MIS Assignments  
Program 18 – Agent Names for SMIS/MIS Assignments  
Initialized Default: blank  
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ  
SELECT = Agent ID Number (000~255)  
DATA = Agent Name (8 characters maximum)  
Agent ID  
ACD Group  
Numbers  
Maximum Number of  
Agent ID Codes  
Processor  
Numbers  
RCTUBA/BB  
RCTUC/D  
RCTUE/F  
000~199  
000~255  
000~255  
01~08  
200  
256  
256  
01~16  
01~16  
Program 14-1  
Program *14-1  
Program 18  
Agent Name  
(8 characters max.)  
Agent ID  
Code  
(4 digits  
max.)  
Auto Answer with  
Zip Tone  
Agent ID  
Number  
ACD Group  
Number  
Program 18 Overview  
Each Agent ID number (set in Program 14-1) can be assigned an alphanumeric name (8 characters  
maximum) that displays on the ACD SMIS displays and reports.  
The name for each Agent is entered in this program from a terminal or the programming telephone  
(use the Program Record Sheet following Program *14-1).  
➤ To enter an Agent ID name or number  
1. Enter Program 18, then select the desired Agent ID Number.  
2. Enter the Agent name (eight characters maximum, see dial pad callouts below).  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
6-15  
Automatic Call Distribution  
Program 18 – Agent Names for SMIS/MIS Assignments  
➤ To erase data  
➤ Press LED button 01.  
Numeric Mode  
0 to 9 are treated as numerals.  
Note Dial pad starts out in Numeric Mode. Press ꢄ button to switch to Alpha Mode.  
QZ  
1
ABC  
2
DEF  
3
Moves cursor to  
right, and starts  
special character  
entry when in  
GHI  
4
JKL  
5
MNO  
6
the Alpha Mode.  
PRS  
7
TUV  
8
WXY  
9
Cursor  
Left  
Scroll  
Mode  
Moves cursor  
to left.  
Changes from  
Numeric to  
0
Alpha Mode  
and vice versa.  
Scrolls alpha and  
special characters.  
Alpha Entry (Example):  
A
Special Character Entry:  
“Q”  
“Z”  
“:”  
B
C
“–”  
“+”  
“/”  
Alpha  
Character  
Entry  
Sequence  
Special  
Entry  
1936  
Character  
Sequence  
Figure 6-1 Alpha Mode  
6-16  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
Automatic Call Distribution  
Program 14-2 – ACD Supervisor Passwords  
Program 14-2 – ACD Supervisor Passwords  
Initialized Default: All blanks  
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ  
SELECT = 2  
DATA = Supervisor ID Code (0000~9999)  
GROUP = ACD Group Number  
Processor  
ACD Group Numbers  
RCTUBA/BB  
RCTUC/D  
RCTUE/F  
01~08  
01~16  
01~16  
ACD Group Number  
Supervisor ID Code  
Name  
Program 14-2 Overview  
Assigns a Supervisor ID code to each ACD Group. Only one code is allowed per Group. When a  
Supervisor ID code is logged into the system, the telephone is assigned (with all Supervisor  
features) to the ACD Group with that Supervisor ID code.  
If the telephone has an LCD, it can be used to monitor Agent and Queue Status for all ACD  
Groups by using special access codes ꢄꢋꢁꢋ;; and ꢄꢋꢁꢌ;; (where XX = ACD Group number).  
If a code is assigned to a non-existing ACD Group, the code can be used by a Manager (for  
example) to check the Agent and/or Queue Status of any ACD Group.  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
6-17  
Automatic Call Distribution  
Program *14-2 – DID, Tie, DNIS, ANI Line After Shift/Overflow Substitution Destinations  
Program *14-2 – DID, Tie, DNIS, ANI Line After Shift/  
Overflow Substitution Destinations  
Initialized Default: Port 000  
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ  
ꢀ
SELECT = 2  
DATA =  
SELECT = ACD Group Number  
DID/Tie/DNIS/ANI Overflow Substitution  
Processor  
RCTUBA/BB  
RCTUC/D  
ACD Group Numbers  
01~08  
01~16  
01~16  
RCTUE/F  
RCTUBA/BB  
RCTUC/D  
000~239  
500~739  
900~915  
RCTUE/F  
000~335  
500~835  
900~915  
DID/Tie/DNIS/ANI Overflow Substitution Destination  
Station or Attendant Console [PDN] Program 04 Port Number  
[PhDN] Program *04 Port Number  
000~079  
500~579  
900~915  
Distributed Hunt Group Program 04 Port Number  
*
ACD Group Number  
Destination  
Program *14-2 Overview  
Assigns a Normal Ringing or AA substitute destination for DID and/or Tie lines.  
If an ACD Group is assigned to overflow (in Program 14-4 or 14-5) or route after shift service  
(Program 14-6) to the DK built-in AA or to Normal Ringing assignments (code 320 or 321), these  
assignments only apply to loop/ground start CO line calls. DID/Tie/DNIS/ANI line calls are  
directed to the port assigned in this Program (*14-2).  
This is because only loop and ground start CO lines (not Tie or DID lines) can be routed to DK AA  
and/or Normal Ringing assignments.  
6-18  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
Automatic Call Distribution  
Program *14-2 – DID, Tie, DNIS, ANI Line After Shift/Overflow Substitution Destinations  
Notes  
●
If the assignments for an ACD Group: Overflow Queue Timer (Program 14-4), Overflow  
Queue Point (Program 14-5), and/or After Shift (Program 14-6) destinations are programmed  
as Normal Ringing or AA, DID/Tie/DNIS/ANI lines will be routed to the destination [DN]  
assigned in this program. This is because DID/Tie/DNIS/ANI lines cannot be assigned to AA  
or Normal CO line ringing.  
●
If the destination [DN] assigned in this program is busy when one of the following occurs  
(Ring No Answer, All Agents Unavailable, End of ACD Shift), the overflowing DID/Tie/  
DNIS/ANI line will camp on to the [DN]. Call Forward and/or Hunt from the destination  
assigned will occur if set on the destination station.  
●
DID, DNIS, ANI, and Tie line calls in queue do not overflow to busy ACD Groups, Intercom  
numbers, [PDNs], [PhDNs], or Distributed Hunt Groups; they remain in queue until the  
destination becomes idle.  
●
Call Forward No Answer will occur if set on the destination assignment. If the overflow  
destination is a Strata DK Attendant Console, calls will exit queue and overflow to the  
Attendant Console when the console is idle or busy.  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
6-19  
Automatic Call Distribution  
Program 14-3 – Announcement/Music Port and Queue Pattern  
Program 14-3 – Announcement/Music Port and Queue  
Pattern  
Initialized Default: all blanks  
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ  
SELECT = 3  
DATA = Port number of Music or Announcement  
Source  
Code (1~5)  
Enter blanks with Button/LED 01.  
ACD Group Number  
Processor  
RCTUBA/BB  
ACD Group Numbers  
Port Numbers  
000~079  
01~08  
01~16  
01~16  
RCTUC/D  
RCTUE/F  
000~239  
000~335  
Code 1  
Code 2  
Enter the RSTU or RSTU2 (or equivalent) port number of the first announcement.  
Enter the RSTU or RSTU2 (or equivalent) port number of the second announcement if queue pattern has three announcements.  
(Enter Code 2 assignment only if there are three announcements. Skip to Code 3 if only two announcements are used for the ACD  
Group queue.  
Enter the second announcement port for two-announcement queue patterns or enter the third announcement port for three-  
announcement queue patterns.  
Code 3  
Code 4  
Code 5  
Enter the RSTU, RSTU2 or PEKU Music Source port number or enter 999 if the music source is a Music-on-Hold (MOH) source.  
Enter the announcement number (1~3) of the first announcement that should repeat to calls in queue.  
Code 5  
Code 1  
Announcement  
1 Port  
Code 2  
Announcement  
2 Port  
Code 3  
Announcement  
2 or 3 Port  
ACD Group  
Number  
Code 4  
Music Source Port  
Repeat  
Announcement  
Number  
Program 14-3 Overview  
This program is used to make announcement/music port and queue pattern assignments. All  
announcement devices (digital announcers) must connect to standard telephone ports (RSTU,  
RSTU2, RDSU/RSTS, PSTU, PESU).  
The music source can be the MOH source connected to the RCTU RCA jack, another source  
connected to a standard telephone port or an electronic telephone port (voice pair).  
6-20  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
Automatic Call Distribution  
Program 14-3 – Announcement/Music Port and Queue Pattern  
Each ACD Group can have from one to three announcements and a separate music source.  
Announcements and/or music sources can also be shared in any combination between ACD  
Groups (see Flowcharts 6-8~6-10 on Pages 6-48~6-51).  
Code 1: Announcement Port One  
Assigns the port that will be connected to the digital announcer that should be activated first when  
a CO line call enters the ACD Group queue. Code 1 always assigns the first announcements in a  
queue pattern. Skip Code 2 and Code 3 programming if only one announcement is used for the  
ACD Group queue.  
Code 2: Announcement Port Two  
Assigns the port to which the second announcement device connects in a three-announcement  
queue pattern. If only two announcements are used for the ACD Group queue, skip to Code 3.  
Code 3: Assigns Port for Second or Third Announcement Device  
Assigns the port to which the second announcement device connects in a two-announcement  
queue pattern. Or, it is the port connected to the third announcement device in a three-  
announcement queue pattern.  
Code4: ACD Queue Music Source Port  
Assigns the station port or RCTU MOH jack to which the ACD queue music source is connected.  
The music is sent to callers in the ACD Group queue during the time intervals set in Programs 11-  
51, -52, and -53, or continuously until an Agent answers or the call overflows (see Non-repeating  
Queue Announcement following Program 14-5).  
Code 5: Select Repeat Enactment for Queue Pattern  
After the last music timer (11-51, -52, or -53) in the queue pattern expires, the queue pattern  
announcements and music can be repeated to callers starting with announcement 1, 2, or 3. Use  
Code 5 to select which announcement to start the repeat queue pattern process. The queue pattern  
is repeated until an Agent answers, the call overflows per Program 14-4, the caller hangs up, or the  
disconnect timer expires (Program 11-9). The queue pattern can be set to repeat or not repeat  
announcements, depending on the options set in Program 14-5 (see Flowcharts 6-8~6-10 on Pages  
6-48~6-51).  
Queue Pattern Options 1, 2, and 3 are shown in the following diagram. For more details, ee  
Flowcharts 6-8~6-10 on Pages 6-48~6-51.  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
6-21  
Automatic Call Distribution  
Program 14-3 – Announcement/Music Port and Queue Pattern  
Code 4  
Music Source  
QUEUE  
Announcement 1  
Code 1  
PATTERN 1  
Program 11-51  
Timer  
Go back to repeat announcement 1  
assigned in Code 5 above, no  
overflow point OP0 in Program 14-5XX0.  
Or  
Overflow point OP1  
in (Program 14-5XX1).  
Code 4  
Music Source  
Code 4  
Music Source  
QUEUE  
Announcement 1  
Code 1  
Announcement 2  
PATTERN 2  
Program 11-51 Code 3  
Program 11-53  
Timer  
Timer  
Go back to repeat announcement 1 or 2  
assigned in Code 5 above, no  
overflow point OP0 in Program 14-5XX0.  
Or  
Overflow point OP2  
in (Program 14-5XX2).  
Code 4  
Music Source  
Code 4  
Music Source  
Code 4  
Music Source  
QUEUE  
Announcement 1  
Code 1  
Announcement 2  
Announcement 3  
PATTERN 3  
Program 11-51 Code 2  
Program 11-52 Code 3  
Program 11-53  
Timer  
Timer  
Timer  
Go back to repeat announcement 1, 2 or 3  
assigned in Code 5 above, no  
overflow point OP0 in Program 14-5XX0.  
Or  
Overflow point OP3  
in (Program 14-5XX3).  
1940  
XX=ACD Group Number  
Figure 6-2 ACD Queue Announcement and Music Patterns  
6-22  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
Automatic Call Distribution  
Program 14-4 – Queue Time Out Overflow Destination  
Program 14-4 – Queue Time Out Overflow Destination  
Initialized Default: Port 000  
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ  
SELECT = 4  
DATA = Queue Timeout Overflow Destination  
SELECT = ACD Group Number  
ACD Group  
Numbers  
[PDN] Port  
Range  
[PhDN] Port  
Range  
Processor  
DATA  
Queue Timeout Overflow Destination  
See [PDN] Port  
Range  
RCTUBA/BB  
01~08  
000~079  
500~079  
Station or Attendant Console (See [PDN] Port Range)  
RCTUC/D  
RCTUE/F  
01~16  
01~16  
000~239  
000~335  
500~739  
500~835  
301~316  
401~416  
ACD Group (RCTUBA/BB, RCTUC/D)  
ACD Group (RCTUE/F)  
320 (RCTUBA/  
RCTUBB,  
RCTUC/D)  
Auto Attendant (DK Built-in)  
420 (RCTUE/F)  
321 (RCTUBA/  
RCTUBB,  
RCTUC/D)  
Normal CO line; Ring assignments not including delayed  
ringing assignments  
421 (RCTUE/F)  
See [PhDN] Port  
Range  
[PhDN] Program *04 Port Number  
900~915  
Distributed Hunt Group Program *04 Port Number  
ACD Group Number  
Overall Queue Time Out Destination  
Program 14-4 Overview  
This program sets the overflow point destination for CO line calls that are in an ACD queue for  
longer than the queue time set in Program 11-1. Calls only overflow when the overflow destination  
is idle or when it becomes idle if the overflow destination is a [PDN], [PhDN], Distributed Hunt  
[DH] Group, port or another ACD Group (see Flowchart 6-3 on Page 6-43).  
If the overflow destination is an ACD Group or a station port [DN] and it is busy, the call remains  
in queue.  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
6-23  
Automatic Call Distribution  
Program 14-4 – Queue Time Out Overflow Destination  
If the overflow destination is to a Normal Ring assignment (Programs 81~89 and *81, *84, and  
*87), Attendant Console or the built-in AA, calls will exit queue and overflow if the destination is  
idle or busy. This assignment is not necessary if the overflow queue timer is set to infinity (infinity  
= 0000 in Program 11-1).  
Only ground and loop start ACD calls will overflow to the Strata DK AA or Normal Ringing. DID,  
DNIS, and Tie lines will overflow to the assignment set in Program *14-2 if codes 320, 321, 440 or  
441 is set in this program.  
If the overflow destination is busy when overflow time occurs, the following options are available:  
♦
If the call(s) should exit the ACD queue and mute ring the busy overflow station, assign Code  
321 (normal ringing) in Program 14-4 and assign the ACD lines to ring the overflow station  
[DN] in Programs 81, 84, 87, *81, *84, and *87.  
Note Delay ring assignments do not apply to Program 14-4 for delay ring.  
♦
If the overflow destination is the DK Built-in AA or an Attendant Console, calls will always  
exit queue when the overflow timer expires (Program 11-1) – even if the AA or Attendant  
Console is busy.  
♦
If the call(s) should remain in queue until the busy overflow station or [DN] becomes idle,  
assign the overflow destination [DN] or another ACD Group in Program 14-4 as the overflow  
point.  
♦
♦
If the overflow destination is a busy Distributed Hunt Group, the ACD call will not exit the  
ACD queue and enter the Distributed Hunt Group queue.  
If it is required to route “Queue Time Out” overflow calls to a Voice Mail box (see the  
Program 14-6 record sheet).  
6-24  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
Automatic Call Distribution  
Program 14-5 – Overflow Point and Ring No Answer Routing Destination  
Program 14-5 – Overflow Point and Ring No Answer  
Routing Destination  
Initialized Default: Overflow point=0, no overflow point  
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ  
SELECT = 5  
DATA = Destination  
SELECT = ACD Group Number  
SELECT = Overflow Point (1~3)  
= Queue Timer (0)  
Processor  
RCTUBA/BB  
ACD Group Numbers  
[PDN] Port Range  
[PhDN] Port Range  
500~079  
01~08  
01~16  
01~16  
000~079  
000~239  
000~335  
RCTUC/D  
RCTUE/F  
500~739  
500~835  
DATA  
Destination  
Overflow Point (OP) Destination (Incoming Port 000). Only one  
OP can be programmed. For No Overflow, select DATA=0.  
OP0, OP1, OP2, OP3  
See [PDN] Port Range  
301~316  
Station or Attendant Console [PDN] Program 04 Port Number  
ACD Group (RCTUBA/BB, RCTUC/D)  
ACD Group (RCTUE/F)  
401~416  
320 (RCTUBA/BB, C/D)  
420 (RCTUE/F)  
Auto Attendant (DK Built-in)  
321 (RCTUBA/BB, C/D)  
421 (RCTUE/F)  
Normal CO line; Ring assignments not including delayed  
ringing assignments  
See [PhDN] Port Range  
900~915  
[PhDN] Program *04 Port Number  
Distributed Hunt Group Program *04 Port Number  
ACD Group  
Number  
RNA and Overflow  
Point Destination  
ACD Group  
Number  
RNA and Overflow  
Point Destination  
Overflow Point  
Overflow Point  
Program 14-5 Overview  
There are two basic options for call overflow:  
Overflow Point: Calls in queue can overflow when they reach a particular point in the queue  
pattern (after the first, second, or third music timer expires). DATA = 1, 2, or 3 sets the music timer  
overflow point.  
Queue Timer Expiration: Calls can cycle in the queue pattern and the same announcement(s) and  
music repeats until the overall queue timer expires (no overflow point). DATA = 0 selects the  
queue timer expiration. (See Program 14-3, Code 5, also see Flowcharts 6-2 and 6-8 on Pages 6-42  
and 6-48).  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
6-25  
Automatic Call Distribution  
Program 14-5 – Overflow Point and Ring No Answer Routing Destination  
Calls in queue can overflow when they reach a particular point in the queue pattern (after the first,  
second, or third music timer expires) or calls can cycle in the queue pattern and the same  
announcement(s) and music are repeatedly sent to the destination set in Program 14-4 until the  
overall queue timer expires (see diagram later in this section). For further details, see Program 14-  
3, Code 5 or Flowcharts 6-4 and 6-8 on Pages 6-44 and 6-48.  
♦
If all Agents are Unavailable and the LED 04 is turned ON in Program 10-4, calls route to the  
destination set in Program 14-5.  
♦
If the overflow station(s) or [DNs] are busy when overflow time occurs, the following options  
are available:  
♦
If the call(s) should exit the ACD queue and mute ring the busy overflow station, assign  
Code 321 (normal ringing) in Program 14-5 and assign the ACD lines to ring the overflow  
station [DN] in Programs 81, 84, 87, *81,*84, and *87. Delay Ring assignments do not  
apply to Program 14-5 for delay ring.  
♦
♦
If the overflow destination is the Strata DK System built-in AA or Attendant Console,  
calls will always exit queue when the overflow point is reached – even if the AA or  
Attendant Console is busy.  
If the call(s) should remain in queue until the busy overflow destination becomes idle  
assign the overflow destination as a [DN] (000~239 or 500~739, except Attendant  
Console ports) or ACD Group (01~16) in Program 14-5.  
If the Program 14-5 overflow destination is a DH Group, calls will not exit the ACD queue and  
enter the busy DH Group queue.  
Only ground and loop start ACD calls overflow to the DK AA or normal ringing. DID, DNIS, ANI  
and Tie lines will overflow to the assignment set in Program *14-2 if code 320 or 321 is set in this  
program.  
If announcements should not be repeated, see Flowcharts 6-8~6-10 on Pages 6-48~6-51 and “Non-  
Repeating Queue Announcement” explanation under Program 14-5.  
Call Queue Overflow Point (OP) Guide  
OP1  
OP2  
OP3  
A1  
M1  
A2  
M2  
A3  
M3  
OP0  
or  
Calls in Queue go back to the announcement (1~3) selected in Program 14-3, Code 5  
and continue to repeat until overall overflow Queue Time (Program 11-1). When the  
Overflow Queue Timer expires, the call attempts to overflow to the destinations set in  
Program 14-4.  
A1~A3 = Announcement Device 1~3.  
OP1~OP3 can be  
announcement device, but not A1~A3), ACD Group, built-in AA, or ring telephone [DNs]  
per the normal ringing assignment (Programs 81, 84, 87, 81, 84, and 87).  
a
station or Attendant Console port (including an additional  
*
*
*
M = Music Source  
M1 Time = Program 11-51  
M2 Time = Program 11-52  
M3 Time = Program 11-53  
1943  
Notes  
♦
Unanswered ACD calls to Agent telephones will be routed to the destination assigned in  
Program 14-5.  
♦
If it is desired to route Overflow Point/RNA calls to a Voice Mail box, see Program 14-6  
record sheet for instructions.  
6-26  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
Automatic Call Distribution  
Program 14-5 – Overflow Point and Ring No Answer Routing Destination  
♦
♦
♦
♦
If no overflow point is selected (DATA = 0) and the queue overflow time is set to infinity  
(Program 11-1), calls do not overflow.  
If the overflow operation is at overflow points 1, 2, or 3, assign the overflow destination in this  
program.  
If the overflow occurs after the queue timer expires, assign the overflow destination in  
Program 14-4.  
If all Agents are in the Unavailable mode, CO calls to the ACD Group can be routed to the  
assigned overflow destination in this program as an option (see Program 10-4 LED 04).  
ACD calls that ring Agent telephones and are not answered route to the destination set in Program  
14-5 (see Flowchart 6-7).  
Overflow Operation  
If the Program 14-5 overflow destination is a station [PDN], [PhDN], another ACD Group, or, a  
Distributed Hunt Group and it is busy when a call overflow point is reached, the call remains in  
queue until the overflow point destination becomes idle. (See Flowcharts 6-2, 6-3 and 6-4.)  
When the overall queue timer expires, the call also attempts to overflow to the destination set in  
Program 14-4. The call is sent to an idle Agent or to the overflow point set in Programs 14-4 or 14-  
5, whichever becomes idle first.  
If the overflow destination is the Normal Ring assignment (Programs 81, 84, and 89), the DK  
Attendant Console, or AA, overflow occurs even if the destination is busy. See Flowchart 6-4 on  
Page 6-44.)  
If the overflow destination is the DK AA or Normal Ringing assignments, DID/Tie/DNIS/ANI  
line calls overflow to Program *14-2 assignment only when the destination is idle.)  
Non-Repeating Queue Announcement  
Case 1—Provide callers with one announcement, followed by music until the call is answered by  
an Agent or until the call overflows — refer to Flowchart 6-8 on Page 6-48. (Overflow time is  
determined by the overall queue timer; Program 11-1, one second to one hour or no overflow.)  
♦
Assign Announcement 1 to the appropriate digital announcer standard telephone port  
(Program 14-31).  
♦
Assign Announcements 2 and 3 to any vacant PDKU or PEKU port. (Program 14-32 and 14-  
33 , DATA = XXX vacant port. See Notes.)  
♦
♦
Assign music in Program 14-34.  
See Notes, following Case 2.  
Case 2—Provide the following sequence to callers: Announcement 1, followed by Music 1,  
Announcement 2, and then continuous music until the call is answered by an Agent or until the call  
overflows — refer to Flowchart 6-10 on Page 6-51. (Overflow time is determined by the overall  
queue timer; Program 11-1, one second to one hour or no overflow.)  
♦
Assigns Announcements 1 and 2 to the appropriate digital announcer, standard telephone port  
(Programs 14-31 and 14-32).  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
6-27  
Automatic Call Distribution  
Program 14-5 – Overflow Point and Ring No Answer Routing Destination  
♦
♦
Assign Announcement 3 to any vacant PDKU or PEKU port (Program 14-33). XX = ACD  
Group number, DATA = Vacant Port Number ZZZ.  
Assign music in Program 14-34.  
Notes  
In both Cases 1 and 2 above:  
♦
The vacant port is a digital or electronic telephone port. It must not be connected to a  
telephone when assigned as an announcement port in Program 14-3. A station PCB does not  
have to be installed for the vacant announcement port.  
♦
♦
Set overflow point to “0” and the destination to the desired Ring No Answer port XXX  
(Program 14-5XX-0-XXX).  
Set overall queue overflow time (Program 11-1) and the overall queue overflow destination  
(Program 14-4XX-YYY) as appropriate for overflow or no-overflow.  
6-28  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
Automatic Call Distribution  
Program 14-6 – After Shift Service Destination  
Program 14-6 – After Shift Service Destination  
Initialized Default: Destination = Incoming port 000  
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ  
SELECT = 6  
DATA = Destination  
SELECT = ACD Group Number  
ACD Group  
Numbers  
Processor  
RCTUBA/BB  
[PDN] Port Range  
[PhDN] Port Range  
01~08  
000~079  
000~239  
000~335  
500~079  
500~739  
500~835  
RCTUC/D  
RCTUE/F  
01~16  
01~16  
DATA  
Destination  
See [PDN] Port Range  
301~316  
Station or Attendant Console [PDN] Program 04 Port Number  
ACD Group (RCTUBA/BB, RCTUC/D)  
ACD Group (RCTUE/F)  
401~416  
320 (RCTUBA/BB, C/D)  
420 (RCTUE/F)  
Auto Attendant (DK Built-in)  
321 (RCTUBA/BB, C/D)  
421 (RCTUE/F)  
Normal CO line; Ring assignments not including delayed  
ringing assignments  
See [PhDN] Port Range  
900~915  
[PhDN] Program *04 Port Number  
Distributed Hunt Group Program *04 Port Number  
ACD Group  
Numbers  
After Shift  
Destination  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
6-29  
Automatic Call Distribution  
Program 14-6 – After Shift Service Destination  
Program 14-6 Overview  
This program assigns the destination for ACD calls, or calls transferred to an ACD group, that  
come in after the ACD shift has ended.  
After Shift begins when the Supervisor presses the (QGꢃRIꢃ$&'ꢃ6KLIW button or when the last  
Agent logs off (see Flowchart 6-5 on Page 6-45).  
If a station port is assigned, only one call at a time is serviced by the End of ACD Shift telephone  
or answering device (lowest CO line first if calls are waiting). Waiting calls camp on and receive  
ring-back tone.  
If all Agents are in the Unavailable mode, calls to the ACD Group can be routed to the After Shift  
destination, set in Program 14-6, or to the queue overflow point destination set in Program 14-5  
(see Program 10-4, LED 04).  
If the End of ACD Shift destination is the Normal Ring assignment (Program 81~89), loop and  
ground start lines mute ring busy stations and DID/Tie/DNIS/ANI lines camp on to busy End of  
ACD Shift stations assigned in Program *14-2.  
If the End of ACD Shift destination is another ACD Group, calls are directed to the Group as if  
they were new ACD calls to the Group.  
➤ To Program ACD loop and/or ground start CO lines to night ring over external page  
A PIOU, PEPU, or PIOUS is required.  
1. Assign normal ringing (321 or 441) in Program 14-6.  
2. Assign ACD lines to night ring over external page in Program 78-13.  
3. Assign 1LJKWꢃ7UDQVIHU button to appropriate telephone(s) in Program 39.  
4. Assign Night Relay operation in Program 77-1, LED 06.  
If the destination port assigned in this program is busy when After Shift (or all Agents log out) is  
set, DID and Tie lines will camp on to the port while ground and loop start lines will busy override  
(mute) ring the port. If the destination station has Call Forward or Hunt set, these features will  
operate.  
Notes  
●
DID, DNIS, ANI, and Tie lines cannot be directed to the Strata DK System AA or Normal ring  
assignments (321) if code 320, 321, 440, or 441 is assigned in Program 14-6. DID, DNIS, ANI  
and Tie line calls will be routed to the destination assigned in Program ꢀ14-2.  
●
●
Assign all Groups (even if not used) to a destination. This is in case a transferred call is sent to  
an unused ACD Group, the call will be sent to the destination assigned in Program 14-6.  
If it is required to route calls to a Voice Mail box during the After Shift mode, you may  
designate a Group announcement (A1~A3) port as the After Shift destination – temporarily  
use a standard telephone to Call Forward All Calls from the announcement port to the Voice  
Mail device and set the VMID code of the announcement port (#656 digits) to the desired After  
Shift Mailbox.  
●
During normal operation, the announcement port will play messages to callers in queue;  
during the After Shift mode, calls will forward from the announcement port to the After Shift  
Voice Mail box. This operation is also allowed for Programs 14-4 and 14-5 assignments.  
6-30  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
Automatic Call Distribution  
Program 14-71 – Queue Size for Alarm, Immediate Assignments  
Program 14-71 – Queue Size for Alarm, Immediate  
Assignments  
Initialized Default: Queue Size = 010  
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ  
SELECT = 71  
DATA = Queue Size  
SELECT = ACD Group Number  
ACD Group  
Numbers  
Processor  
Queue Size  
RCTUBA/BB  
RCTUC/D  
RCTUE/F  
01~08  
01~16  
01~16  
001~048  
001~144  
001~200  
ACD Group Number  
Queue Size  
Program 14-71 Overview  
The system causes the Supervisor 5HVHWꢃ4XHXHꢃ$ODUP button to flash and the Supervisor  
telephone sounds immediately a one second ON, one-half OFF beeping alarm when the number of  
calls in the ACD queue exceeds the number set in this program. Program 14-8 DATA must be set  
to “1” if using this option (see Program 14-8 for more information).  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
6-31  
Automatic Call Distribution  
Program 14-72 – Queue Size for Alarm 1  
Program 14-72 – Queue Size for Alarm 1  
Initialized Default: Queue Size = 010  
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ  
SELECT = 72  
DATA = Queue Size  
SELECT = ACD Group No.  
ACD Group  
Numbers  
Processor  
Queue Size  
RCTUBA/BB  
RCTUC/D  
RCTUE/F  
01~08  
01~16  
01~16  
001~048  
001~144  
001~200  
ACD Group Number  
Queue Size  
Program 14-72 Overview  
The system causes the Supervisor 5HVHWꢃ4XHXHꢃ$ODUP button to flash and the Supervisor  
telephone to sound a one second ON, one second OFF beeping alarm when the number of calls in  
the ACD queue exceeds the number of calls set in this program for a time duration set in Program  
11-6.  
Program 14-8 DATA must be set to “2” if using this option (see Program 11-6 and Program 14-8  
for more information).  
6-32  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
Automatic Call Distribution  
Program 14-73 – Queue Size for Alarm 2  
Program 14-73 – Queue Size for Alarm 2  
Initialized Default: Queue Size = 010  
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ  
SELECT = 73  
DATA = Queue Size  
SELECT = ACD Group No.  
Processor  
RCTUBA/BB  
ACD Group Numbers  
Queue Size  
001~048  
001~144  
001~200  
01~08  
01~16  
01~16  
RCTUC/D  
RCTUE/F  
ACD Group Number  
Queue Size  
Program 14-73 Overview  
The system causes the Supervisor 5HVHWꢃ4XHXHꢃ$ODUP button to flash and the Supervisor  
telephone to sound a continuous beeping alarm when the number of calls in the ACD queue  
exceeds the number of calls set in this program for a time duration set in Program 11-7.  
Program 14-8 DATA must be set to “2” if using this option (see Program 11-7 and Program 14-8  
for more information).  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
6-33  
Automatic Call Distribution  
Program 14-8 – Alarm Pattern Assignments  
Program 14-8 – Alarm Pattern Assignments  
Initialized Default: 0 for each group  
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ  
SELECT = 8  
DATA = Pattern (0, 1, or 2)  
0 = None  
SELECT = ACD Group No.  
1 = Immediate Alarm (Program 14-71)  
2 = Alarm Timer 1 and 2 (Program 14-72, 11-6  
and Program 14-73, 11-7)  
Processor  
RCTUBA/BB  
RCTUC/D  
ACD Group Numbers  
ACD Group Number  
Alarm Pattern  
01~08  
01~16  
01~16  
RCTUE/F  
Program 14-8 Overview  
This program selects the type of queue alarm that is sent to the Supervisor telephone for each ACD  
Group. Only one alarm type is allowed for a given ACD Group. The Supervisor can reset the alarm  
by pressing the flashing 5HVHWꢃ4XHXHꢃ$ODUP button.  
DATA = 0: No Alarm  
This selection disables the queue alarm.  
DATA = 1: Immediate Alarm  
This selection causes the system to send immediately a queue alarm to the Supervisor telephone  
when the number of calls in the ACD queue exceeds the number set in Program 14-71.  
DATA = 2: Call Waiting Alarm 1 and 2  
This selection allows two timed alarms to be set. Alarm 1 sounds when (X + 1) number of calls are  
in the ACD queue longer than the time period set in Program 11-6 (X is set in Program 14-72).  
Alarm 2 sounds when (Y + 1) number of calls are in the ACD queue longer the time period set in  
Program 11-7 (Y is set in Program 14-73). Normally, Alarm 1 is used as a caution alarm to indicate  
a less critical alarm than Alarm 2.  
Example:  
Alarm 1 may be set to alert the Supervisor when five calls are in queue for longer than three  
minutes; and Alarm 2 may be set to alert the Supervisor when ten calls are in queue for five  
minutes. Once alarm 2 is activated, Alarm 1 is inactive until Alarm 2 thresholds are no longer  
exceeded. Alarm 1 is an interrupted beeping tone; Alarm 2 is a continuous beeping tone.  
6-34  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
Automatic Call Distribution  
Program 14-9 – Work Unit Assignments  
Program 14-9 – Work Unit Assignments  
Initialized Default: account digits for each Group = 02  
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ  
SELECT = 9  
DATA = Account Digits (01~15)  
SELECT = ACD Group No.  
Processor  
RCTUBA/BB  
RCTUC/D  
ACD Group Numbers  
ACD Group Number  
Number of Work Unit Digits  
01~08  
01~16  
01~16  
RCTUE/F  
Program 14-9 Overview  
This program selects the length of the Work Unit code for each ACD Group.  
Agents talking on an ACD call can press the :RUNꢃ8QLW button and enter a Work Unit code (1~15  
digits) for each call. The outside caller cannot hear the code, so conversation is not interrupted.  
SMIS only records (Peg) one or two digit Work Unit codes. SMDR can record 1~15 digit Work  
Unit codes. If multiple work unit codes are entered on the same ACD call, only the last code  
entered will be sent to SMDR; however, SMIS will register all Work Unit codes entered.  
The Strata DK SMDR data will send up to 15 Work Unit digits in the Account Code data field of  
the standard DK SMDR output. MIS (TTY) data will send only 1- or 2-digit Work Unit codes.  
When the :RUNꢃ8QLW button is pressed on the Agent telephone, the LCD shows “ENTER STRK  
DIAL”. The Agent must enter the number of digits assigned in this program to allow a work unit  
peg to be sent to SMIS. Any number of digits entered (even if less than assigned in this program)  
will be sent to SMDR when the ACD call is ended.  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
6-35  
Automatic Call Distribution  
Program 15 – Ground/Loop/Tie/DID Line Options  
Program 15 – Ground/Loop/Tie/DID Line Options  
If loop start lines are routed to ACD Groups, set each line to automatically release when the CO  
sends the AR signal after the outside party hangs up. Use Program 15 Code 1 and Code 3 to set  
auto release detection for each CO line.  
See 3-44 for the programming record sheet.  
Program 17 – DID/Tie Line Options  
If DID/Tie lines must be routed to ACD Groups, use Program 17 to set the appropriate options for  
each DID/Tie line.  
See 3-50 for the programming record sheet.  
Program 35 – Station Class of Service  
To allow Agent Help (assistance) calls to busy Supervisor telephones, enable Busy-Station-  
Transfer (LED 20-ON) on Agent telephones and Busy-Station-Ring (LED 19-ON) on Supervisor  
telephones. Supervisor telephones should have more than one [PDN] (Program 39) to receive  
Agent Help calls when the Supervisor telephone is busy.  
See 3-97 for the programming record sheets.  
Program 71 – DID/Tie/DNIS/ANI Lines  
If DID/Tie/DNIS/ANI lines route to ACD Groups and provide DNIS line features (such as the  
DNIS name, night/day routing, etc.), use Program 71 to assign the DID/Tie/DNIS digits or ANI  
lines to route the appropriate ACD Group (see Program 17, LED 05).  
Also see “Program 17 – DID/Tie Line Options” on Page 3-50.  
6-36  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
Automatic Call Distribution  
Program 39 – Flexible Button Assignments for ACD Telephones  
Program 39 – Flexible Button Assignments for ACD  
Telephones  
Initialized Default: Logical port number = physical port number  
Program 90, 91-1, or 91-9 initializes Program 02  
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ  
SELECT = Port Number or Range.  
CODE =  
To add a port range, enter  
Enter the appropriate feature code. See the  
Feature Code Table below.  
XXXꢀXXX (low port ꢀ high port)  
Press Button/LED to be defined.  
Processor  
RCTUBA/BB  
RCTUC/D  
[PDN] Port Range  
000~079  
[PhDN] Port Range  
500~079  
500~739  
500~835  
000~239  
RCTUE/F  
000~255  
Toshiba highly recommends that you enter the button keystrip names exactly as shown in the left  
column, since these button names are used in the ACD Agent and Supervisor Guides.  
Program  
on Agent  
Telephone  
Program on  
Supervisor  
Telephone  
ACD Feature Button  
Designation  
Feature Code  
Notes  
Used by Agents to Log In/Out.  
[PhDN] + Log In/Out + ZZZZ  
(ZZZZ = Agent ID code)  
X
(Agent)  
Used by Supervisor to Log In/Out  
Log In/Out + YYYY  
X
(Supervisor)  
(YYYY = Agent ID code)  
Each Agent telephone must have a unique, single-  
appearing [PhDN] button to receive and originate  
ACD calls.  
Program  
[PhDN] in  
Program 39  
When the Agent logs into an ACD Group from any  
single-appearing [PhDN], that [PhDN] is the active  
on the Agent telephone.  
X
(Supervisor telephones do not require a unique  
[PhDN] button unless the Supervisor telephone will  
be used as an Agent telephone periodically.)  
Enables the Agent to peg an ACD call with an  
account number that will be sent to a SMIS personal  
computer and/or SMDR device.  
X
X
X
Provides ACD call pickup within the Group. The  
Agent must be logged into the same Group in order  
to pick up the ACD call. The Pickup call is considered  
an ACD call on the MIS status report.  
X
Turns the Agent’s availability off and on. While in this  
mode, the Agent does not receive any new incoming  
ACD calls.  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
6-37  
Automatic Call Distribution  
Program 39 – Flexible Button Assignments for ACD Telephones  
Program  
on Agent  
Telephone  
Program on  
Supervisor  
Telephone  
ACD Feature Button  
Designation  
Feature Code  
Notes  
Rings a Supervisor [DN] button, enabling an Agent to  
request assistance while talking on an ACD call.  
Calls the highest numbered Supervisor telephone or  
[PDN]  
X
X
Manually cancels unused wrap-up time. This enables  
an Agent to receive another ACD call.  
Enables the Supervisor to stop new calls from  
entering the ACD Group queue or from ringing  
Agents. The End of ACD Shift mode routes new calls  
to the After Shift destination set in Program 14-6. A  
Supervisor must be logged in to use this button.  
X
Program this Speed Dial sequence on telephones  
that must transfer calls to ACD Groups. This enables  
one-touch transfer of CO lines (ground/loop start or  
DID/Tie) to ACD Group  
01~16.  
.
= ACD Group  
Transfer to an ACD Group is always blind and  
immediate and does not recall the transferring  
station.  
X
X
If the ACD Group shift is ended or all Agents are  
unavailable, the transferred call is routed per the  
called Group’s After Shift or All Agents Unavailable  
destination.  
Used by Supervisor to monitor Agent calls  
(Supervisor telephone only). Enables the Supervisor  
to listen to any Agent’s ACD calls (not non-ACD or  
PBX calls) by pressing the Monitor ACD Call button and  
then entering the Agent’s ID code.  
During Agent monitoring, a one-way talk path  
enables the Supervisor to listen to the Agent/outside  
party conversation without the Agent/caller hearing  
the Supervisor.  
X
An optional “Call Monitor” tone (dial tone burst) can  
be sent to the Agent/caller every 15 seconds (see  
Program 10-4, LED 03) while the Supervisor is  
monitoring the ACD call. The Agent LCD displays  
MONITOR BY SUPRV when this option is enabled.  
[PDN] +  
[PDN] +  
Program these speed dial buttons on the  
Supervisor’s telephone to enable quick access to  
Queue Status, Agent Status, and one-touch  
Supervisor log in.  
X
X
(XX = ACD Group 01~16)  
Used to reset a queue alarm that is sent to the  
Supervisor telephone when the number of calls in  
queue exceeds the limits of queue alarm parameters  
(see Programs 14-71~73, 14-8, 11-6, and 11-7 for  
queue alarm parameters).  
448  
X
6-38  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
Automatic Call Distribution  
Program 39 – Flexible Button Assignments for ACD Telephones  
Program  
on Agent  
Telephone  
Program on  
Supervisor  
Telephone  
ACD Feature Button  
Designation  
Feature Code  
Notes  
This is the [PDN] of the Supervisor telephone.  
Supervisor telephones do not require a unique  
[PhDN] like Agent telephones.  
Toshiba recommends programming more than one  
[PDN] onto Supervisor telephones to enable Agent  
Help (assistance) calls to ring busy Supervisor  
telephones.  
Program  
[PDN] in  
Program 39  
X
Also program Agents with Busy Station Transfer and  
Supervisors with Busy Station Ring (see Program 35  
BST and BSR).  
Program on  
Agent  
Telephone  
Program on  
Supervisor  
Telephone  
Speed Dial  
Code  
Speed Dial Codes  
Notes  
RCTUBA/BB, C/D  
(station)  
All of the above ACD Features can be programmed  
onto SD buttons or onto speed dial codes. This table  
shows the range of Station and System Speed Dial  
Codes by processor.  
~
X
X
X
X
ꢀ ꢀ  
RCTUBA/BB, C/D  
(system)  
ꢀ
~ꢀ  
X
X
X
X
~ꢀ  
~ꢀ  
RCTUE/F (station)  
RCTUE/F (system)  
ꢀ
ꢀ
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
6-39  
Automatic Call Distribution  
Program 39 – Flexible Button Assignments for ACD Telephones  
Program 39 Overview  
This program assigns ACD Agent and Supervisor buttons for Toshiba digital and/or electronic  
telephones. All other button codes (see Program 39 Record Sheet in Chapter 10—Record Sheets in  
this manual) are allowed on Agent and Supervisor telephones. Telephones can be programmed  
with both Agent and Supervisor buttons to enable dual functions, however, a telephone cannot  
function as a Supervisor and Agent station simultaneously.  
If both Agent and Supervisor buttons are assigned to a telephone, the type of log in code (Agent or  
Supervisor) determines how the telephone will function (see Program 14-1 and 14-2).  
Agent and Supervisor Telephone Programming Considerations  
ACD Agent telephones must be programmed with a [PhDN] button (called the $&'ꢃ&DOO button)  
to receive ACD calls. This button must be a unique [PhDN] that appears only on that Agent  
telephone.  
The $&'ꢃ&DOO button is used to originate and receive PBX calls that register on SMIS when the  
Agent is logged into an ACD Group with the $&'ꢃ&DOO button. PBX calls are calls that originate  
from or ring the Agent $&'ꢃ&DOO button when the $&'ꢃ&DOO button [PhDN] is dialed or when a  
CO line is programmed to ring the $&'ꢃ&DOO button [PhDN].  
If the Agent’s telephone is not logged into an ACD Group, calls originated or received by the $&'ꢃ  
&DOO button are considered non-ACD calls.  
Do not program ACD CO /LQH or 3RROHGꢃ/LQHꢃ*US buttons on Agent telephones. Supervisor  
telephones do not require an ACD [PhDN].  
If the ACD call is placed on hold while the Supervisor is monitoring it, there is only silence until  
the Agent takes the call off-hold and monitoring resumes. The Supervisor telephone is busy to new  
calls when in the Monitor mode. (Busy Override, Off-hook Call Announce, and Camp-on are  
available to callers that call a Supervisor in the Monitor or Verify Status mode.)  
Important! The Monitor mode is automatically cancelled if an Agent transfers an ACD call.  
Related Programs  
♦
Programs ground/loop start CO line ringing assignments (Programs 81~89) for use with  
Overflow/After Shift destinations in Programs 14-4, 14-5, and 14-6.  
♦
Programs CO line Group assignments (Program 16) for lines that are assigned to an ACD  
Group in Program 14-0.  
6-40  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
Automatic Call Distribution  
Program 39 – Flexible Button Assignments for ACD Telephones  
Flowchart 6-1  
ACD Group Call Routing  
Possible ways to route CO line calls to ACD group.  
DK built-in Auto  
Attendant “one digit  
prompts” are  
assigned to ACD  
groups in Program  
09.  
CO line transferred to  
ACD Group  
Loop and ground start  
CO lines are assigned  
to ACD groups in  
DID/tie/DNIS/ANI  
line incoming digits  
are assigned to  
ACD Groups in  
Program *09 or  
Program 71.  
From another ACD  
group: call overflow  
attempt, or all agents  
unavailable, or in  
After Shift mode.  
(XX = 01~16). Internal  
[DN] calls cannot be  
transferred to ACD groups.  
Program 14-0.  
Call is  
routed to  
ACD  
Notes  
Group.  
Ring idle agent telephone  
per ring agent timer in  
♦ Internal [DN] and external DISA  
callers cannot direct dial into ACD  
Groups.  
Program 11-2; if agent  
does not answer, ring next  
idle agent per timer and  
continue until all idle agent  
telephones are rung or an  
agent answers the call.  
Is  
♦ If an Agent ACD Call button is idle,  
ACD calls will busy override and ring  
the button even if an Agent is busy on  
an Agent  
button  
idle?  
Yes  
another [DN] or CO  
button.  
No  
Do not overflow. Remain in  
original queue and continue  
to look for an idle Agent in the  
overflow group and in the  
original group.  
Is the  
call attempting to  
overflow from another  
ACD Group  
No  
Does an Agent  
answer?  
Yes  
queue?  
Yes  
No  
Talk on ACD call.  
Are all  
Agents logged  
out or has the supervisor  
ended the shift?  
Call routes to ACD Group's  
After Shift destination. See  
ACD Flowchart 6-5.  
Yes  
Ring No Answer (RNA)  
overflow to destination set  
in Program 14-5. See  
ACD Flowchart 6-7.  
No  
Call routes to ACD Group's  
After Shift destination or  
Overflow Point destination.  
See ACD Flowchart 6-6.  
Send call to ACD Group  
queue: go to ACD  
Flowchart 6-2.  
Yes  
Are all Agents  
unavailable?  
No  
No  
If the answer to all the above questions is no,  
then one or more agents are in the available  
mode but are talking on other calls or in After  
Call Work mode.  
Does an  
agent become idle  
before Program 11-4 timer  
expires?  
Continue  
Yes  
Continue  
Is the call a direct CO line  
call, or other type: transferred from a  
station or Auto Attendant, routed from  
another ACD group because all agents  
are unavailable or in After Shift  
Mode?  
Send ring back tone to the  
caller for the time duration  
set in Program 11-4 or until  
an agent becomes idle.  
Send call to ACD Group queue:  
go to ACD Flowchart 6-2.  
Direct  
Other  
0875  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
6-41  
Automatic Call Distribution  
Program 39 – Flexible Button Assignments for ACD Telephones  
Flowchart 6-2  
ACD Group Queue/Overflow Operation  
Call enters ACD group queue because: agents are logged in, but are busy on other calls; or are in “After Call  
Work” mode when the call is directed to the ACD group. Call is sent to ACD group directly by Program 14-0, *09,  
or 71; or, the call is transferred to the group from a station or Auto Attendant (see ACD Flowchart 6-1).  
Yes  
Call routed from another ACD  
Call enters ACD group queue because all  
agents are busy on calls or in the After Call  
Work mode. While a call is in queue, the  
Strata DK continuously monitors points A, B,  
and C below simultaneously.  
Call routed from another ACD  
group because the group is in  
the after shift mode,  
group because all agents in  
that group are not available  
(see ACD Flowchart 6-6).  
Yes  
Yes  
(see ACD Flowchart 6-5).  
If the queue disconnect timer set in Program  
11-9 expires before the call is answered by  
an Agent that goes idle, or the call  
overflows, the Strata DK will disconnects the  
call.  
1
Strata DK Continuously monitors points A, B, and C below.  
A
B
C
Has  
agent ACD  
Call button in ACD  
group become idle before  
overflow occurs?  
Has  
the call  
reached the overflow  
point in Program  
14-5?  
Has the  
overall queue  
timer in Program 11-1  
expired?  
No  
No  
No  
Go  
Go  
Go  
back to  
1 above.  
back to  
1 above.  
back to  
1 above.  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Go to ACD Flowchart 6-4  
“Queue Point” and  
Flowcharts 6-8 ~ 6-11  
Ring agent  
ACD call button.  
Go to ACD Flowchart 6-3  
“Queue Overflow Time Out.”  
“Queue Pattern Configurations.”  
Continue  
Overflow To Busy Destination Operation:  
Overflow Ground/loop Tie/DID/DNIS/ANI  
Does  
the agent answer  
before the Ring No Answer  
timer in Program 11-3  
expires?  
Destination (Busy)  
System [DN]3  
Start Line  
No Overflow1  
No Overflow4  
Overflow2  
Overflow  
Lines  
No  
No Overflow  
No Overflow4  
Distributed Hunt Group  
Normal Ring Stations  
Auto Attendant  
See 14-2 Port  
*
See 14-2 Port  
Yes  
*
GO to ACD Flowchart 6-7  
"Ring No Answer."  
Attendant Console  
Another ACD Group  
Overflow  
Overflow  
No Overflow  
N/A  
No Overflow  
No Overflow  
14-2 [DN]  
*
Talk on ACD call.  
Notes  
0846  
1. “No overflow” means the call will not exit queue to ring the busy overflow  
destination. The call exits queue and rings the busy overflow destination as  
soon as the destination goes idle.  
2. “Overflow” means the call will exit an ACD queue and busy override or mute  
ring the busy destination.  
3. System [DNs] include: Program 04 [PDNs]/[SDNs], and Program *04  
[PhDNs].  
4. The call will not overflow into a DH queue when all DH Group members are  
busy or in DND.  
6-42  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
Automatic Call Distribution  
Program 39 – Flexible Button Assignments for ACD Telephones  
Flowchart 6-3  
ACD Time Out Overflow  
Call enters ACD queue: calls waiting in an ACD group’s queue can be sent to  
an overflow destination if they have been in queue longer than the time  
duration set in Program 11-1 (Queue Over ow Timer).  
Call remains in queue: the Strata DK  
Notes  
Has the queue  
overflow timer in Program  
11-1 expired?  
continuously monitors for an idle agent,  
queue overflow timer – time out, or  
overflow point per Program 14-5 (See  
ACD Flowchart 6-2).  
System [DNs] include:  
Program 04 [PDNs]/[SDNs]  
No  
Program 04 [PhDNs]  
*
DH = Distributed Hunt Group  
Yes  
CO lines will atttempt to exit the ACD group’s queue and will route to the group’s “Queue Time-out Overflow Destination”  
set in Program 14-4.  
In some cases, if that destination is busy, the call remains in queue as shown below:  
Only one destnation can be assigned in Program 14-4 per ACD group.  
Or  
Or  
Or  
Queue Timeout Overflow  
Queue Timeout Overflow  
Destination is normal CO line  
ringing assignment. Program  
14-4 (321, 441)  
Queue Timeout Overflow  
Destination is Strata DK  
built-in Auto Attendant.  
Program 14-4 (320, 440)  
Queue Timeout Overflow  
Destination is another ACD  
group. Program 14-4:  
RCTUBA/BB, RCTUC/D  
(301~316), RCTUE/F (401~416)  
Destination is a system  
[DN], DH, or attendant port  
number. Program 14-4 (see  
record sheet )  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Is  
the line  
Is an agent ACD  
Call button idle in the  
overflow group?  
Is destination  
busy?  
Is destination  
busy? (See Note.)  
ground/loop start  
or Tie/DID/  
DNIS/ANI?  
No  
No  
Ground/ No  
Loop  
Note If the  
station port is  
Yes  
Yes  
Ground/loop start:  
ring system [DN] Per  
Programs 81, 84, 87  
and 81, 84, 87  
Ring system, DH, [DN],  
or console port  
assigned in Program  
14-4.  
Yes  
an RATU  
Attendant Console  
port, the call overflows  
to the console: idle or  
busy.  
Ring idle agent ACD Call  
button: if agent answers, talk  
on ACD call. if no answer,  
ring another idle agent ACD  
Call button or go to RNA  
destination (ACD Flowcharts  
6-8~6-11).  
*
*
*
(no delayed ring).  
Tie/DID/DNIS/ANI  
RING system [DN]  
The call will remain in queue  
until an agent or an overflow  
destination assigned in  
Program 14-4 or 14-5  
becomes idle.  
per Program 14-2.  
*
Is the line  
ground/loop or  
Ground/Loop  
Tie/DID/DNIS/ANI?  
No  
The call remains in  
original queue until an  
agent ACD C all  
button or an overflow  
destination assigned in  
Programs 14-4 or 14-5  
becomes idle.  
Ground/loop start: busy  
override ring system [DNs] per  
Programs 81, 84, 87 and 81,  
Is the  
destination in  
Program 14-5 an idle  
DH, ACD group, or  
Tie/DID/  
DNIS/ANI  
*
84, 87 (no delayed ring).  
*
*
Is  
the  
system [DN]  
port?  
system [DN] port  
assigned in  
Tie/DID/DNIS/ANI  
Busy  
Yes  
Program 14-2  
*
idle?  
Call connects to the DK  
Auto Attendant calls  
routed per AA assignment  
programs.  
Ring an idle agent in the  
overflow group or idle system  
[DN] or DH assigned in  
Program 14-5.  
Ring the idle system [DN]  
Idle  
assigned in Program 14-2.  
*
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
6-43  
Automatic Call Distribution  
Program 39 – Flexible Button Assignments for ACD Telephones  
Flowchart 6-4  
ACD Overflow Point  
Call enters ACD queue: calls waiting in an ACD group’s queue can  
be sent to an overflow destination if they have received a specified  
number of announcement messages and music sequences (overflow  
point) determined by Program 14-5 (see ACD Flowchart 6-8~6-11).  
Call remains in queue. The Strata DK  
Notes  
continuously monitors for an idle agent,  
queue overflow timer – timeout per  
Programs 11-1, and 14-4, or overflow  
point Per program 14-5 (see ACD  
Flowchart 6-2).  
Has the call  
received the number of  
announcements and  
music  
System [DNs] include:  
Program 04 [PDNs]/[SDNs]  
Program 04 [PhDNs]  
No  
*
DH = Distributed Hunt Group  
Yes  
CO lines will attempt to exit the ACD group’s queue and route to the group’s “Overflow Point Destination” set in Program 14-5 (see ACD  
Flowchart 6-8~6-11). If that destination is busy, the call remains in queue as shown below.  
Only one destination can be assigned in Program 14-5 per ACD group.  
Note The destination assigned in Program 14-5 will also be the RNA destination of the ACD group (see ACD Flowchart 6-7).  
Or  
Or  
Or  
OP Destination is a system  
[DN], DH or attendant  
console port number.  
Program 14-5 (see record  
sheet)  
OP Destination is normal  
CO line ringing  
assignments.  
Queue Timeout Overflow  
Destination is DK  
built-in AA.  
Queue Timeout Overflow  
Destination is another ACD  
group. Program 14-5:  
RCTUBA/BB, RCTUC/D  
(301~316), RCTUE/F (401~416)  
Program 14-5 (321, 441)  
Program 14-5 (320, 440)  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Is  
the line  
ground/loop start or  
tie/DID/  
Is an  
Is  
agent ACD Call  
button idle in the  
group?  
Is destination  
busy? (See Note.)  
destination  
busy?  
NO  
DNIS/ANI?  
No  
Ground/ NO  
Loop  
Note If the  
station port is  
an RATU  
Attendant Console  
port, the call overflows  
to the console: idle or  
busy.  
Yes  
Yes  
Ground/loop start: ring  
system [DN] per  
Yes  
Ring system DH,  
[DN], or console  
port assigned in  
Program 14-5.  
programs 81, 84, 87,  
and 81, 84, 87 (no  
Ring idle agent ACD Call  
button: if agent answers, talk  
on ACD call. If no answer,  
ring another idle agent ACD  
Call button or go to RNA  
destination  
*
*
*
delayed ring).  
Tie/DID/DNIS/ANI  
RING System [DN]  
The call will remain in  
queue until an agent or an  
overflow destination  
per Program 14-2.  
*
(ACD Flowchart 6-3).  
assigned in Program 14-4  
or 14-5 becomes idle.  
Is  
the line  
Ground/loop  
ground/loop or  
tie/DID/DNIS/ANI?  
The call remains in queue  
until an agent ACD Call  
button or an overflow  
destination assigned in  
Program 14-4 or 14-5  
becomes idle.  
Ground/loop start: busy  
override ring system [DN]*  
per Programs 81, 84, 87, and  
81, 84, 87 (no delayed  
Tie/DID/DNIS/ANI  
*
*
*
ring).  
Is the  
system [DN], DH  
assigned in  
Tie/DID/DNIS/ANI  
Busy  
Program 14-2  
busy or idle?  
*
Call connects to the DK  
AA, call routed per AA  
assignment programs.  
Ring the idle system [DN], DH  
Idle  
or assigned in Program 14-2.  
*
0877  
6-44  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
Automatic Call Distribution  
Program 39 – Flexible Button Assignments for ACD Telephones  
Flowchart 6-5  
After Shift Operation  
End of ACD Shift Conditions  
Or  
Or  
Or  
All agents  
logged out.  
Supervisor presses End of ACD  
Shift button.  
All agents Unavailable and  
Program 10-4 LED 4 OFF.  
Notes  
System [DNs] include:  
Program 04 [PDNs]/[SDNs]  
Program 04 [PhDNs]  
*
DH = Distributed Hunt Group  
CO lines that normally route to the ACD group will only route to the group's After  
Shift Destination set in Program 14-6.  
Only one destination per ACD group can be assigned in Program 14-6.  
Or  
Or  
Or  
After Shift Destination is a  
system [DN] or DH or  
attendant console port  
number.  
Program 14-6 (see record  
sheet)  
After Shift Destination is  
Normal CO line ringing  
assignments.  
After Shift Destination is  
another ACD group.  
Program 14-6: RCTUBA/BB,  
RCTUC/D (301~316),  
RCTUE/F (401~416)  
After Shift Destination is  
DK built-in Auto Attendant.  
Program 14-6 (320, 440)  
Program 14-6 (321, 441)  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Ground/loop start: connect to  
DK built-in Auto Attendant and  
route call per AA programming  
DID/tie/DNIS/ANI line:  
Is  
Is  
Is an agent  
ACD Call button idle  
in the group?  
Ring or Camp-on to station as  
No  
No  
Yes  
destination busy?  
destination busy?  
programmed in Program 14-2.  
*
Yes  
Yes  
No  
Ground/loop start:  
ring system [DN] per  
Programs 81~89 and  
81, 84, 87.  
Ring system [DN],  
DH, or console port  
assigned in  
If agent answers,  
*
*
*
Program 14-5.  
Ring idle agent  
talk on ACD call if  
no answer, ring  
another idle agent  
ACD Call button or  
go to RNA  
TIE/DID ring system  
[DN] per  
Program 14-2.  
*
destination (see  
ACD Flowchart 6-7)  
Ground/loop start: Busy  
Override ring the system  
[DN] or attendant console  
port assigned.  
Ground/loop start: Busy  
Override ringing all busy  
system [DN] assigned in  
Are all  
agents Busy or in the  
After Call Work  
Mode?  
No  
Programs 81~89 and 81,  
*
84, 87  
The group’s shift is ended or all  
agents are not available:  
*
*
DID/tie/DNIS/ANI line:  
Camp-on Busy to the  
system [DN], DH, or  
console port assigned.  
DID/tie/DNIS/ANI line:  
Camp-on Busy to system  
[DN]* assigned in  
Route call to the group's “EOS” or  
“All agents unavailable”  
destination.  
Yes  
Program 14-2 or console  
*
port assigned.  
Call enters the back of the  
group's queue and follows  
the queue pattern and  
overflow assignments for  
the group.  
Important! If this destination is the  
same ACD Group from  
which the call originated  
(including back to  
Note Calls that are already in queue when the shift is  
ended remain in queue until answered by an idle  
agent, they overflow, the caller hangs up, or the  
disconnect timer (Program 11-9) expires.  
itself), the call will be  
routed as follows:  
ground/loop lines to  
0878  
Programs 81~89 and  
81, 84, 87 [DNs] and  
DID/tie/DNIS/ ANI  
*
*
*
lines to Program 14-2  
*
System [DNs]* assigned  
to this Group.  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
6-45  
Automatic Call Distribution  
Program 39 – Flexible Button Assignments for ACD Telephones  
Flowchart 6-6  
All Agents Unavailable Operation  
All agents in ACD group are unavailable when a call is transferred to the group from a station or Auto Attendant, or  
routed to the group directly by Programs 14-0 or 09.  
*
Notes  
Call routes to the ACD  
group’s After Shift  
Destination set in Program  
14-6 (see ACD Flowchart  
6-5).  
Is LED 04  
in Program 10-4  
turned off or on?  
System [DNs] include:  
Program 04 [PDNs]/[SDNs]  
Program *04 [PhDNs]  
DH = Distributed Hunt Group  
LED 04 OFF  
LED 04 ON  
CO lines that normally route to the ACD group will route to the overflow point  
destination set in Program 14-5 (see ACD Flowchart 6-4).  
Only one destination per ACD group can be assigned in Program 14-5.  
Or  
Or  
Or  
All Agents Unavailable:  
All Agents Unavailable:  
Destination is normal CO  
line ringing assignments.  
Program 14-5 (321, 441)  
All Agents Unavailable:  
Destination is another ACD  
group.  
Program 14-5: RCTUBA/BB,  
RCTUC/D (301~316),  
RCTUE/F (401~416).  
All Agents Unavailable:  
Destination is Strata DK  
built-in AA.  
Destination is a system  
[DN], DH, or attendant  
console port number.  
Program 14-5 (000~255)  
Program 14-5 (320, 440)  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Ground/loop start:  
connect to Strata DK AA  
and route call per AA  
programming.  
Is  
Is  
Is an  
No  
No  
Yes  
destination  
busy?  
destination  
busy?  
agent ACD Call  
button idle in the  
group?  
DID/tie/DNIS/ANI line:  
ring or camp-on to station  
programmed in Program  
14-2.  
*
Yes  
Yes  
No  
Ring system  
[DN], DH or  
console port  
assigned in  
Program 14-5.  
Ground/loop start:  
ring system [DN] per  
Programs 81~89, and  
81, 84, 87  
tie/DID/DNIS/ANI ring  
station port per  
If agent answers,  
talk on ACD call. If  
No Answer, ring  
another idle agent  
ACD Ca ll button  
or go to RNA  
*
*
*
Ring idle agent.  
Program 14-2.  
*
destination (see  
ACD Flowchart  
6-3).  
Loop/ground start: busy  
override ring system [DN]*  
per programs 81, 84, 87,  
Loop/ground start: busy  
Are  
all agents  
busy or in after call work  
mode?  
override ringing the busy  
system [DN] assigned in  
programs 81 ~ 89, and  
No  
and 81, 84, 87.  
*
*
*
81, 84, 87.  
*
*
*
DID/tie/DNIS/ANI line:  
camp-on busy to system  
[DN]*, DH, or attendant  
console port assigned.  
DID/tie/DNIS/ANI line:  
camp-on busy to system  
[DN] assigned in Program  
The group’s shift is ended or all agents  
are not available:  
Yes  
Route call to group’s “EOS” or “All Agents  
Unavailable” destination.  
14-2.  
*
Call will enter the  
back of the  
group’s queue  
and follow the  
queue pattern and  
overflow  
Important! If this destination is the same  
ACD Group from which the  
Note Calls that are already in queue when all agents go Unavailable are  
treated as any other call in queue. A call remains in queue until it  
is answered by an idle agent, it overflows, the caller hangs-up, or  
the Strata DK disconnect timer set in Program 11-9 expires and  
releases the call.  
call originated from (including  
back to itself), the call will be  
routed as follows: ground/loop  
lines to Program 81 ~ 89 and  
assignments for  
the group.  
81, 84, 87 [DNs] and  
*
*
*
DID/tie/DNIS/ANI lines to  
0879  
Program 14-2 system [DN]*  
*
assigned to this group.  
6-46  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
Automatic Call Distribution  
Program 39 – Flexible Button Assignments for ACD Telephones  
Flowchart 6-7  
Agent Telephone Ring No Answer Operation  
An ACD call routes to an idle agent telephone, but it is not answered when it rings.  
Notes  
●
●
●
If two consecutive ACD calls sent to  
an idle agent telephone are not  
answered, the telephone will be placed  
in the Unavailable mode automatically.  
Ring agent telephone for the  
time duration of the “Ring  
Agent Timer” Set in Program  
11-2 (see Notes).  
If the agent presses a [DN] or another  
CO Line button, while the ACD line  
is ringing, the ACD call will mute ring  
the Agent telephone.  
If the call entered the ACD queue prior  
to Ring No Answer operation, delay  
ringing assignments will not ring; only  
immediate ring assignments (Programs  
Does agent  
answer ACD Call  
button before ring agent  
timer expires?  
Is  
Yes  
No  
Yes  
another agent  
idle?  
81, 84, 87 and 81, 84, 87) will ring.  
*
*
*
Talk on ACD call.  
No  
CO lines that normally route to the ACD group will route to the group’s overflow point destination set in  
Program 14-5 (see ACD Flowchart 6-8~6-11). Only one destination per ACD group can be assigned in  
Program 14-5.  
The destination assigned in Program 14-5 will also be the overflow point destination.  
Or  
Or  
Or  
Ring no answer destination  
is a system [DN] or DH  
attendant console or DH port  
number. Program 14-5  
Ring No Answer  
Ring No Answer destination  
is another ACD group.  
Program 14-5: RCTUBA/BB,  
RCTUC/D (301~316),  
Ring No Answer  
destination is Strata DK  
built-in AA.  
destination is normal CO  
line ringing assignments.  
Program 14-5 (321, 441)  
Program 14-5 (320, 440)  
RCTUE/F (401~416)  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Loop/ground start: ring or  
busy override ring the  
system [DN] in normal  
ringing assignments per  
Ground/loop start:  
connect to Strata DK AA  
and route call per AA  
programming.  
Is an  
No  
Is  
agent ACD Call  
button idle in the  
group?  
No  
destination  
busy?  
Programs 81~89, and 81,  
*
DID/tie/DNIS/ANI line:  
ring or camp-on to station  
programmed in  
84, 87 (see Notes).  
*
*
DID/tie/DNIS/ANI LINE:  
ring or camp-on to system  
[DN] assigned in Program  
Program 14-2.  
*
Yes  
Yes  
14-2 of original ACD  
group.  
*
Ring idle agent  
ACD Call button.  
Ring system [DN], DH, or  
console port assigned in  
Program 14-5.  
If an agent answers, talk on ACD call. If no  
answer, ring another idle agent or go to RNA  
destination of this group.  
Notes  
System [DNs] include:  
Program 04 [PDNs]/[SDNs]  
Program 04 [PhDNs]  
Loop/ground start: busy override ring  
system [DN] per Programs 81, 84, 87,  
and 81, 84, 87 (see Notes).  
If the RNA destination of this group is the  
ACD group from which the call originated, the  
call will be sent to the line's normal ring  
pattern in Programs 81~89, and 81, 84, 87  
*
*
*
*
DID/tie/DNIS/ANI line: camp-on busy to  
system [DN], DH, or console port  
assigned.  
*
*
*
DH = Distributed Hunt Group  
[DN]; or, if tie/DID/DNIS/ANI line, to the  
system [DN] assigned in Program 14-2.  
*
0880  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
6-47  
Automatic Call Distribution  
Program 39 – Flexible Button Assignments for ACD Telephones  
Flowchart 6-8  
ACD Queue Pattern Configuration – One Announcement Only  
♦ Overflow after announcement/music  
...or  
♦ Repeat announcement/music  
...or  
♦ One announcement then continous music  
Start: call enters queue from ACD Flowchart 6-1.  
Note The call will attempt to exit queue  
Caller is connected to 1st announcement port.  
this port is assigned in Program 14-3.  
when:  
♦ an Agent telephone goes idle.  
♦ the queue timer in Program  
11-1 expires.  
♦ the call reaches the overflow  
point.  
After the 1st announcement ends and hangs  
up, the caller is connected to the music  
source assigned in Program 14-34; the caller  
will hear music from this source for the time  
duration set in Program 11-51.  
♦ the disconnect timer in  
Program 11-9 expires.  
♦ the caller hangs up.  
Has the  
No  
Caller continues to hear  
music source.  
In Program 14-35, set the repeat  
announcement data to “1”.  
Program 11-51 music timer  
expired?  
The caller will be reconnected to the 1st  
announcement. When the announcement  
ends, the caller will be reconnected to the  
music source for the time duration set in  
Program 11-51. This sequence will  
continue to repeat until the call exits  
queue. the call will exit queue when:  
Yes  
In Program 14-5, set the overflow  
point data to “1” and set the desired  
overflow destination.  
Yes, overflow  
Should the call  
point 1.  
♦ an agent goes idle.  
overflow after the Program  
11-51 music timer  
♦ the call overflows when the overflow  
timer in Program 11-1 expires.  
The call will attempt to overflow per  
ACD Flowchart 6-4 at this point.  
♦ the caller hangs up.  
♦ the disconnect timer in Program 11-9  
expires.  
No  
In Program 14-5, set overflow  
point data to “0”.  
To continue to send music to the  
caller until the call exits queue: in  
Program 14-32, program a vacant  
station port as Announcement 2. A  
circuit card does not have to be  
installed for the vacant port.  
Continue  
Should the  
caller receive the 1st  
announcement again when  
The caller will continue to hear  
uninterrupted music until the call  
exits queue. The call will exit queue  
when:  
the music time in  
Program 11-51  
expires?  
No, send  
continuous  
music.  
Yes, continue to repeat  
announcement/music.  
♦ an agent goes idle.  
♦ the call overflows when the  
overflow timer in Program 11-1  
expires.  
♦ the caller hangs up.  
♦ the disconnect timer in Program  
11-9 expires.  
0881  
6-48  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
Automatic Call Distribution  
Program 39 – Flexible Button Assignments for ACD Telephones  
Flowchart 6-9  
ACD Queue Pattern Configuration – Two Announcements  
♦ Overflow after second announcement/music  
...or  
♦ Repeat announcement/music  
Start: call enters queue from ACD Flowchart 6-1.  
Notes The call will attempt to exit  
queue when:  
Caller is connected to first announcement port.  
This port is assigned in Program 14-3.  
♦
♦
♦
an Agent telephone goes  
idle.  
the queue timer in Program  
11-1 expires.  
After the first announcement ends and hangs up,  
the caller is connected to the music source  
assigned in Program 14-34; the caller will hear  
music from this source for the time duration set in  
Program 11-51.  
the call reaches the overflow  
point.  
♦
♦
the caller hangs up.  
the disconnect timer in  
Program 11-9 expires.  
In Program 14-32, set the  
announcement port data to  
blanks using K01 on the  
programming telephone.  
Has the Program  
11-51 music timer expired?  
No  
Caller continues to hear  
music source.  
Yes  
Caller is connected to second announcement port.  
This port is assigned in program 14-33 (not  
Program 14-32).  
After the second announcement ends and hangs  
up, the caller is connected to the music source  
assigned in Program 14-34; the caller will hear  
music from this source for the time duration set in  
Program 11-53 (not Program 11-52).  
Has the  
Program 11-53  
music timer expired?  
Caller continues to hear  
music source.  
No  
Yes  
Yes,  
Overflow  
Point 2  
Should  
the call  
overflow after the  
Program 11-53 music  
timer expires?  
In Program 14-5, set the overflow  
point data to “3” and set the desired  
overflow destination.  
The call will attempt to overflow per  
ACD Flowchart 6-4 at this point.  
No  
In Program 14-35,  
set the repeat  
announcement data  
to “3”.  
In Program 14-35,  
set the repeat  
announcement data  
to “1”.  
In Program 14-5, set overflow point data to “0”.  
Continue  
Should the call  
continue to receive the  
first and second announcement  
or only the second when the music  
timer in Program 11-53  
expires?  
Repeat second  
announcement  
and music only.  
Repeat first and second announcment and music until:  
♦
♦
an agent goes idle.  
the call overflows when the overflow timer in Program  
11-1 expires.  
0847  
♦
♦
the caller hangs up.  
the disconnect timer in program 11-9 expires.  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
6-49  
Automatic Call Distribution  
Program 39 – Flexible Button Assignments for ACD Telephones  
ACD Queue Pattern Configuration – Two Announcements (continued)  
♦ Two announcements, then continued music  
Start: call enters queue from ACD Flowchart 6-1.  
Notes The call will attempt to exit queue  
Caller is connected to first announcement port.  
This Port Is Assigned In Program 14-3.  
when:  
♦ an agent telephone goes idle.  
♦ the queue timer in Program 11-1  
expires.  
After the first announcement ends and hangs up,  
the caller is connected to the music source  
assigned in Program 14-34; the caller will hear  
music from this source for the time duration set in  
Program 11-51.  
♦ the call reaches the overflow  
point.  
♦ the caller hangs up.  
♦
the disconnect timer in Program  
11-9 expires.  
Has the  
Program 11-51  
music timer expired?  
Caller continues to hear  
music source.  
No  
Yes  
Caller is connected to second announcement port.  
this port is assigned in Program 14-32 (not  
Program 14-33).  
After the second announcement ends and hangs  
up, the caller is connected to the music source  
assigned in Program 14-34; the caller will hear  
music from this source for the time duration set in  
Program 11-52 (not Program 11-53).  
Continue  
Has the  
Program 11-52  
music timer  
expired?  
Caller continues to hear  
music source.  
No  
Yes  
To continue to send music to the caller until the call exits queue:  
1. In Program 14-33, program a vacant station port as Announcement 3. A circuit  
card does not have to be installed for vacant port.  
2. In Program 14-5, set overflow point data to “0”.  
The caller will continue to hear uninterrupted music until the call exits queue. The  
call will exit queue when:  
♦ an agent goes idle.  
♦ the call overflows when the overflow timer in Program 11-1 expires.  
♦ the caller hangs up.  
♦ the disconnect timer in Program 11-9 expires.  
0848  
6-50  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
Automatic Call Distribution  
Program 39 – Flexible Button Assignments for ACD Telephones  
Flowchart 6-10 ACD Queue Pattern Configuration – Three Announcements  
Start: call enters queue from ACD Flowchart 6-1.  
Caller is connected to 1st announcement port. This  
port is assigned in Program 14-31.  
In Program 14-35, set the repeat  
announcement data to “1”.  
Notes The call will attempt to exit queue  
After the 1st announcement ends and hangs up, the caller is connected to the music  
source assigned in Program 14-34; the caller will hear music from this source for the time  
duration set in Program 11-51.  
when:  
•
•
an agent telephone goes idle.  
the queue timer in Program 11-1  
expires.  
•
•
•
the call reaches the overflow  
point.  
Has the  
Program 11-51 music timer  
expired?  
Caller continues to hear  
music source.  
No  
the disconnect timer in Program  
11-9 expires.  
the caller hangs up.  
Yes  
In Program 14-35, set the  
repeat announcement data to  
“2”.  
Caller is connected to 2nd announcement port.  
This port is assigned in Program 14-32.  
After the 2nd announcement ends and hangs up the caller is connected to the music source  
assigned in Program 14-34; the caller will hear music from this source for the time duration set  
in Program 11-52.  
Has the  
Program 11-52 music timer  
expired?  
Caller continues to  
hear music source.  
No  
Yes  
Caller is connected to 3rd announcement port. This port  
is assigned in Program 14-33.  
After the 3rd announcement ends and hangs up the caller is connected to the music source  
assigned in Program 14-34; the caller will hear music from this source for the duration set in  
Program 11-53.  
In Program 14-35, set the  
repeat announcement  
data to “3”.  
3rd only  
Has the  
Program 11-53 music timer  
expired?  
Caller continues to hear  
music source.  
No  
Should the  
caller continue to  
receive the 1st, 2nd and 3rd  
announcements, or 2nd and 3rd  
announcements, or only the 3rd  
announcement when the music  
timer in Program 11-53  
expires?  
Yes  
2nd and 3rd  
In Program 14-5, set the overflow point  
data to “3” and set the desired overflow  
destination.  
Should  
the call  
overflow after the  
Program 11-53 music  
timer expires?  
Yes  
The call will attempt to overflow per ACD  
Flowchart 6-4 at this point in queue.  
1st, 2nd, and 3rd  
In Program 14-5, set  
overflow point data to “0”.  
Overflow  
point 3  
No  
0882  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
6-51  
Automatic Call Distribution  
Program 39 – Flexible Button Assignments for ACD Telephones  
6-52  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
ISDN  
7
This chapter provides you with an overview of Integrated Systems Digital Networking (ISDN) and  
provides step-by-step instructions to fill in the ISDN record sheets. Included is an overview of  
system and trunk programming for ISDN.  
System Programs Overview  
System programming for ISDN has some commonalities with T1 programming. ISDN  
programming follows two different paths, depending on whether Basic Rate Interface (BRI) or  
Primary Rate Interface (PRI) is being installed. Refer to Flowchart 7-1 and the following steps for  
an overview of each program’s purpose.  
ISDN features can be programmed onto the following systems as described:  
♦
♦
♦
DK40i and DK424 – support BRI S/T  
DK40i and DK424 – will support BRI U basic features in Release 4.2  
DK424 supports PRI  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
7-1  
ISDN  
System Programs Overview  
Program 03  
Assign BRI or  
PRI card slots.  
T1  
PRI  
BRI  
Program *60  
Assign BRI circuits  
for CO line (TE)  
or Station (NT)  
operation.  
System power must cycle OFF and ON to effect changes.  
*41 T1 Assignments  
Program *43  
Assign the PRI  
D-channel and  
network interface.  
Program *44  
Initialize BRI  
Service Profile ID  
(SPID) number.  
2934  
*42 Clock Source  
*42 Clock Source  
Program *63  
Set ISDN dialing  
timers.  
Flowchart 7-1  
ISDN System Programs  
➤ To record and enter the data for ISDN system programs  
1. Run Program 03-Assign the RPTU (PRI) PCB slot position as type 79. (See “Program 03 for  
DK424 – Flexible PCB Cabinet Slot Assignments” on Page 3-6.) Assign the RBSU without  
the RBSS piggy-back board as type 77 and the RBSU with the RBSS piggy-back as type 78.  
2. For BRI, run Program *60 to assign each circuit for CO line (TE) or Station (NT) operation.  
3. Turn system power supply OFF (five seconds) and ON to activate Program 03 and *60  
program data.  
Note These are the only programs relating to RPTU operation that require system power to be  
cycled OFF and ON.  
4. For PRI, run Program *43 to assign which channel on the PRI link is used for the  
D-channel. The second assignment specifies the card slot of additional PRI links that are  
dependent on the master D-channel PRI. The third assignment sets the ID code for the PRI  
link. For BRI, skip to Step 5.  
7-2  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
ISDN  
ISDN Related Programs  
5. For BRI, run Program *44 to initialize the Service Profile Identifier (SPID) interface. The TE  
initializes the SPID and sends it to the network. Once the SPID is confirmed from the CO, it  
does not have to be sent to the switch again.  
6. For BRI and PRI, run Program *42 to assign the PRI or BRI, or T1, circuits to be used for  
Primary and Secondary Clock Source. To enter the program, enter the card slot number  
followed by the circuit number. When using the RPTU PRI or RDTU T1 interface then the  
circuit number is always 1.  
7. For BRI and PRI, run Program *63 to assign the timer for sending dialed digits. Also use this  
program to enable sub-address dialing. (*63-1 is not zero).  
8. See the following section, “ISDN Related Programs”, and make the appropriate programming  
assignments.  
ISDN Related Programs  
♦
Program 10-1–System Assignments: LED 16 determines the initialization process for BRI  
lines connected to the ISDN network (see 3-27).  
♦
Program 10-4–ACD/ISDN Parameters: LEDs 11 and 12 set the T-Wait ISDN PRI and BRI  
timers, respectively. T-wait timers are used for reducting overloading ISDN terminals during  
concurrent initialization, such as following a wide-area power failure. LED 13 specifies  
whether or not 3.1 kHz audio calls can be received as speech calls. LED 14 enables the ISDN  
“Start” code to be sent when the Speed Dial button is pressed (see 6-6).  
♦
Program 39–Telephone Feature Buttons and Program 59–Attendant Console Feature  
Buttons: A new button is provided called the 6WDUW button in both Program 39 (see 3-135)  
and 59 (see 3-111) to defeat the timeout when dialing is complete. Also a 6XE button is  
provided for entering sub-address information.  
♦
♦
Programs 55-1 and 55-2–Least Cost Routing Modified Digits: Enables a sub-address  
separator (see 5-21).  
Program 30 – Station Class of Service: LED 12 defines whether the ꢄ button is used for  
dialing a sub-address or as a dialing separator. When LED 12 is ON, only the standard stations  
are affected. The DKT and EKT ports are ignored (see 3-73).  
If the first dialed digit is ꢄ, the ꢄꢃwill be treated as a feature access code. If ꢄꢃis entered at any  
point after that (in other words, as long as it is not the first digit dialed), then the system will  
treat the following numbers as a subaddress. A second ꢄꢃshould then be entered to indicate the  
end of the subaddress.  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
7-3  
ISDN  
ISDN Related Programs  
Program *16  
Define ISDN Trunk Group  
Type (non-ISDN,PRI, BRI).  
Standard Trunks  
Program 16  
BRI  
PRI  
Program 16  
Assign Trunk Groups.  
Program *65  
Define the number  
of B-channels per  
channel group.  
Assign Trunk Groups.  
Programs *66-1~3  
Assign channel and  
trunk group parameters.  
Programs *66-2, -4  
Assign call-by-call  
service parameters  
Program *67  
Assign call direction for  
each ISDN trunk group.  
Programs *66-5~7  
Assign LDNs to channel groups  
and indexes. Assign LDN channel  
groups to ISDN trunk ports.  
Programs *68-1~2  
Define and enable Called  
Number ID Service (CNIS)  
Program *69  
Assign CNIS indexes and  
DID or LDN.  
Program *64  
Assign ISDN trunk groups  
to use DID, DNIS or DIL for  
incoming calls.  
2933  
Program 17  
LEDs DID/DNIS  
Programs 81~89,  
*81~*87 Direct  
Ringing Lines  
Programs*09, *17,  
Programs 71 and 72  
DNIS Ringing  
*71~*73  
DID Ringing  
Flowchart 7-2  
ISDN Trunk Programs  
7-4  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
ISDN  
Trunk Programs Overview  
Trunk Programs Overview  
See Flowchart 7-2 for an overview of the ISDN trunk programming procedure.  
♦
♦
♦
If you are installing all standard trunk groups, skip Program *16 (the default is for all standard  
TGs).  
If you are installing BRI ISDN, use Program *16 to assign BRI type and Program 16 to assign  
BRI CO lines into trunk groups.  
If you are installing PRI, use Program *16 to assign PRI types. Do not use Program 16. Do not  
change settings in Program 16 for trunk groups marked for PRI.  
Primary Rate Interface (PRI) Programming  
1. Run Program *16 to define the ISDN trunk group type as: non-ISDN, Primary Rate Interface  
(PRI), or Basic Rate Interface (BRI).  
2. For BRI trunk groups, run Program 16 to assign the trunk groups. Then, skip to Step 7.  
3. For PRI, run Program *65 to assign B-channels.  
4. For PRI, run Programs *66-1, *66-3 to define trunk groups parameters and channels. (Program  
16 will be assigned automatically.)  
5. To assign Call-by-call features (PRI only), run Programs *66-2, *66-4 to assign Call-by- call  
trunk groups codes and network ID.  
6. For PRI, run Program *67 to assign call direction for ISDN trunk groups and call type  
capabilities allowed for each trunk group.  
7. For BRI and PRI, run Program *68 to define the parameters for Calling Number to be  
presented for a call depending upon whether the ISDN trunk group uses DID, private numbers  
or use default number programmed in *68-2.  
8. For BRI and PRI, run Program *66-5 to assign Listed Directory Numbers (LDNs) to channel  
groups and index numbers. Then run Program *66-6 to assign LDN channel groups to ISDN  
trunk ports. Then run Program *66-7 to assign trunk groups to each LDN.  
9. Run Program *68-2 to define whether or not the system presents a “user” Caller ID when calls  
are made using ISDN services. This program also enables users to dial a code to send Caller  
ID or to block it.  
10. For BRI and PRI, run Program *69 to define the parameters for Calling Number to be  
presented. Each phone can present a unique Caller ID number, such as DID or a private  
number. If neither is chosen, the default is the Directory Number entered in Program *68-2 for  
outgoing calls.  
11. Run Program *64 to assign each ISDN trunk group to use DID/DNIS programming, or to  
provide Direct in Line (DIL) ringing for incoming calls.  
12. See “ISDN Related Programs” on Page 7-3, and make the appropriate programming  
assignments.  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
7-5  
ISDN  
Program 16 – Assign CO Line Groups  
Program 16 – Assign CO Line Groups  
This program assigns CO line groups (or Dial 9 groups). Refer to this program only for BRI lines.  
Do not make changes to trunk groups assigned in Program *16 as PRI type. These will be assigned  
automatically when PRI programming is entered. The system record sheet is on Page 3-48 of this  
manual.  
7-6  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
ISDN  
Program *16 – ISDN Trunk Group Type Assignment  
Program *16 – ISDN Trunk Group Type Assignment  
Processor Type: DK40i, All RCTUs (Release 4.0 or higher)  
Program Type: Trunk, PRI, BRI  
Initialized Default: Type 1 (non-ISDN)  
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ  
ꢀ
SEL = Trunk Group Number  
TYPE = 1~3 (see below)  
1 - non-ISDN Trunk Group (default)  
2 - PRI Trunk Group  
3 - BRI Trunk Group  
Trunk Groups  
Value  
Trunk Group Type  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10 11 12 13 14 15 16  
1
2
3
Non-ISDN  
Primary Rate Interface (PRI)  
Basic Rate Interface (BRI)  
Program *16 Overview  
This program must be entered prior to Program 16. Each trunk group in the system must be  
defined whether it is used for non-ISDN trunks, PRI trunks, or BRI trunks. Do not make changes  
in Program 16 for PRI trunk groups. This may cause unexpected operations.  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
7-7  
ISDN  
Program *42 – Clock Source  
Program *42 – Clock Source  
Processor Type: DK40i, All RCTUs (Release 4.0 or higher). For Release 3.1 and earlier programming,  
see below.  
Program Type:  
System, T1, PRI, BRI  
Initialized Default: Blank  
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ  
ꢀ
SEL = 1 or 2  
Circuit Number  
1 - Primary Source  
2 - Secondary Source  
PRIMARY = or SECONDARY =  
Slot Number (Release 4.0 entry. Not used  
for release 3.1 or earlier versions.)  
Clock Source  
Primary  
Slot Number  
Circuit No.  
Secondary  
Program *42 Series Overview  
This program assigns the T1, PRI or BRI interface RPTU PCB as a Primary or Secondary timing  
source. The DK424 is synchronized to the Public Network. If the Primary synchronization is lost,  
it switches to the secondary timing source.  
When a T1 or PRI slot number is assigned, the DK424 only accepts a “1” for the circuit number.  
The circuit number is only used for BRI interfaces to specify which circuit is to be used for the  
Clock Source. If the PCB in this slot is not a T1 or ISDN PCB, the system will not accept data and  
any entries will be cleared.  
BRI interfaces should be used as a clock source only when a T1 or PRI interface is not equipped  
Set T1 parameters and assignments with the Program ꢀ41 (Part 1) and ꢀ42 (Part 2) series. See the  
Strata DK Installation and Maintenance Manual for additional T1 information. RDTU/RPTU  
support is as follows:  
Number of RDTU/  
RPTU’s Supported  
Number of RBUU/  
RBUS’s Supported  
Processor  
RCTUA  
RCTUBA/BB  
RCTUC/D  
RCTUE/F  
0
2
6
8
4
8
14  
20  
For proper T1 or ISDN operation, the equipment at each end of a digital T1 span line must be  
synchronized. The DK424 is synchronized (as slave) to the equipment on the other end of the  
digital line by the RDTU/RPTU, RBUU/RBUS PCB designated as the Primary Reference in  
Program ꢀ42-1.  
If a malfunction occurs and Primary Synchronization is lost, the DK424 automatically switches  
modes and synchronizes to the equipment connected to the secondary PCB designated as the  
Secondary Reference. If the equipment on the other end of the DK424 digital lines should  
synchronize to the DK424 clock source, then enter blanks in Program ꢀ42-1 and 2. In this case, the  
DK424 clock runs free and is considered the Master Synchronization source.  
7-8  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
ISDN  
Program *42-1 – Primary Timing Reference Assignments (Release 3.1 and earlier)  
Program *42-1 – Primary Timing Reference  
Assignments (Release 3.1 and earlier)  
Initialized Default: Primary = 1, Secondary = 2  
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ  
ꢀ
SEL = 1 or 2  
RDTU PCB Number (1~8)  
1 - Primary Source  
2 - Secondary Source  
Enter the RDTU PCB number that is connected to the  
primary reference T1 (span line) clock source.  
Press LED Button 01 (blank) if the DK424 T1 is the  
master (free run) clock source.  
Select  
Primary  
RDTU PCB Number  
Secondary  
Program *42-1 Overview (Release 3.1 and earlier)  
Assign the Primary Timing Reference with this program.  
Note RDTU No.1 is the RDTU PCB installed in the lowest slot number of all RDTU PCBs,  
RDTU No. 2 is the RDTU PCB installed in the next highest slot number of all RDTUs and  
so on.  
DK424  
Span Line  
(Primary clock source)  
Program Data  
4 2 - 1 1  
Program Data  
4 2 - 2 2  
Central Office  
RBOC CO lines  
RDTU in  
Slot 13  
T1 – Primary PCB  
>
Span Line  
(Secondary clock source)  
AT&T or MCI  
Long Distance Lines  
RDTU in  
Slot 25  
T1 – Secondary PCB  
>
1863  
Primary/Back-Up Assignments Example  
Note A second RBOC T1 span line can also be used as the secondary clock source.  
DK424 Master (free run) Assignment Example  
DK424  
Span Line  
(DK424 clock source)  
Other DK424  
or PBX, etc  
Slot 13  
T1 – PCB  
Program Data = blank button (Button 01)  
for 4 2 - 1 and 4 2 - 2  
1864  
Program *42-2 Overview (Release 3.1 and earlier)  
Assign the Secondary (Backup) Timing Reference with this program.  
Note To assign RDTUs as the Master Clock Reference (free run), leave Programs ꢀ42-1 and  
ꢀ42-2 blank. Press button/LED 01 to enter blanks.  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
7-9  
ISDN  
Program *43-1~3 – D-Channel Control and NFAS Assignments  
Program *43-1~3 – D-Channel Control and NFAS  
Assignments  
Processor Type: All RCTUs (Release 4.0 or higher)  
Program Type:  
System, PRI  
Initialized Default: Blank (see Important! below)  
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ  
ꢀ
SEL = 1  
DCH = D-channel circuit number (01~24)  
LED Button 01 deletes a digit  
Enter PRI Index Number (1~8)  
*43-1  
*43-2  
*43-3  
PRI Index  
D-Channel  
Master  
Network PRI  
Circuit Number  
PRI Index  
Interface ID Code  
Program *43-1~3 Overview  
Programs *43-1~3 are related in that there is a correspondence between Program *43-1 and *43-2.  
Program *43-1 determines which channel acts as the master. Program *43-2 points back to the  
master channel by using the corresponding index number.  
Program *43-1 Overview  
This program (*43-1) assigns which channel on the PRI link is used for D-channel (the data master  
control channel). The default setting is none.  
Important! For most carriers, channel 24 is assigned to the D-channel (default). NFAS  
D-channel assignments are negotiated with the carrier.  
7-10  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
ISDN  
Program *43-2 – Non-Facility Associated Signaling (NFAS) Assignment  
Program *43-2 – Non-Facility Associated Signaling  
(NFAS) Assignment  
Processor Type: All RCTUs (Release 4.0 or higher)  
Program Type:  
System, PRI  
Initialized Default: Blank (see Important! below)  
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ  
ꢀ
SEL = 2  
PRI = Master PRI Index  
Number with D-channel (1~8)  
Enter the dependent PRI Index  
Number without D-channel (1~8)  
Program *43-2 Overview  
This program specifies the card slot of additional PRI links that are dependent upon the D-channel  
of the master D-channel PRI. This setting is for Non-Facility Associated Signaling (NFAS).  
Use the Record Sheet for *43-1.  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
7-11  
ISDN  
Program *43-3 – Network PRI Interface Assignment  
Program *43-3 – Network PRI Interface Assignment  
Processor Type: All RCTUs (Release 4.0 or higher)  
Program Type:  
System, PRI  
Initialized Default: Blank (see Important! below)  
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ  
ꢀ
SEL = 3  
ID = Network PRI Interface Code,  
supplied by public provider (0~19)  
Enter the PRI Index Number (1~8)  
Program *43-3 Overview  
Program *43-3 assigns each PRI interface and ID code for communicating with the ISDN provider  
to identify the B-channels to be used with NFAS.  
Use the Record Sheet for *43-1.  
7-12  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
ISDN  
Program *44 – BRI Service Profile Identifier (SPID) Parameters  
Program *44 – BRI Service Profile Identifier (SPID)  
Parameters  
Processor Type: DK40i, All RCTUs (Release 4.0 or higher)  
Program Type: Trunk, BRI  
Initialized Default: Blank  
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ  
ꢀ
SEL = BRI Trunk Number  
Enter SPID Value (20 digits max.).  
Use Button LED 01 to enter a blank.  
DATA = SPID Type (0~2)  
0 - Non-initializing trunk (NIT)  
1 - one SPID for the interface  
2 - one SPID for each B-channel  
BRI Trunk SPID  
Number Type  
SPID Value  
Program *44 Overview  
BRI interfaces generally require entering an Service Profile Identifier (SPID) intialization value to  
activate the interface. This program assigns the initialization interface.  
When ISDN service is ordered, a SPID is issued from the carrier. A SPID usually includes a 10-  
digit directory number along with additional digits, which notify the switch as to the type of  
devices connected to the line and what services/features the switch is to provide.  
There are three possible initialization processes, including a non-initializing terminal, one SPID,  
or two SPID interfaces. These numbers are entered into the system to allow the interface to  
automatically initialize the link. The type of initialization needed depends on the type of PSTN  
equipment.  
The basic procedure includes configuring a SPID, then the TE performs the initialization /  
identification process and sends the SPID to the network. Once the SPID is confirmed from the  
CO, the SPID does not have to be sent to the switch again.  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
7-13  
ISDN  
Program *60 – BRI Line/Station Operation Assignment  
Program *60 – BRI Line/Station Operation Assignment  
Processor Type: DK40i, All RCTUs (Release 4.0 or higher)  
Program Type:  
System, BRI  
Initialized Default: All LEDs OFF  
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ  
ꢀ
SEL = Slot No.  
LEDs 1~4 = Circuits 1~4 (see legend below)  
LED  
RBSU Circuit  
LED ON  
CO Line (TE)  
CO Line (TE)  
—
LED OFF  
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
Station Operation  
(NT) (default)  
—
Note Power must be cycled OFF, then ON before changes take effect.  
Slot 1  
Slot 2  
Slot 3  
Slot 4  
Slot 5  
Slot 6  
Slot 7  
LEDs  
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
Program *60 Overview  
This program assigns each circuit for CO Line (TE) or ISDN Station (NT) operation. Circuits 1 or  
2 can be used for either CO line or ISDN station operation, while circuits 3 and 4 can only be used  
for ISDN station operation.  
7-14  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
ISDN  
Program *61 – Analog Trunk Services for ISDN  
Program *61 – Analog Trunk Services for ISDN  
Processor Type: DK40i, All RCTUs (Release 4.0 or higher)  
Program Type: Trunk, PRI and BRI  
Initialized Default: see below  
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ  
ꢀ
SEL = Type of Service (1~3)  
Enter the Bearer Service:  
0 = 3.1 kHz Audio  
1 = Speech (default)  
1 - Bearer Service  
2 - Outgoing Call Pad Level  
3 - Incoming Call Pad Level  
Enter the trunk number(s) being defined.  
DATA = For *61-2 and *61-3, enter Pad  
Level (default is 2). See legend below.  
To add a range, enter XXXꢀXXX (low  
trunk number ꢀ high trunk number).  
Data  
Pad Level (db)  
Data  
Pad Level (db)  
0
1
2
3
0
4
5
6
7
-12  
-15  
-18  
+3  
-3  
-6  
-9  
Trunk  
Number  
Bearer Service Outgoing Pad Incoming Pad  
*61-1 Level *61-2 Level *61-3  
Program *61 Overview  
When analog CO lines use ISDN facilities, each analog CO Line needs to be assigned the type of  
service expected to be used when originating calls. The choices are Speech or 3.1 kHz (used for  
modem and fax connections). Set the transmission level for outgoing and incoming paths for calls.  
The default is set for -6 dB.  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
7-15  
ISDN  
Program *62 – Non-ISDN Station Bearer Service  
Program *62 – Non-ISDN Station Bearer Service  
Processor Type: DK40i, All RCTUs (Release 4.0 or higher)  
Program Type:  
System, PRI and BRI  
Initialized Default: see below  
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ  
ꢀ
SEL = 1~3  
DATA = Bearer Service (0 or 1)  
1 - Bearer Service  
2 - Outgoing Call  
3 - Incoming Call  
0 - 3.1 kHz Audio (faxes)  
1 - Speech  
For options 2 and 3, enter the  
Pad Level. See legend below.  
Station Logical Port Number  
Enter the port number(s) being defined.  
To add a port range, enter XXXꢀXXX  
(low port ꢀ high port).  
Data  
Pad Level (db)  
Data  
Pad Level (db)  
0
1
2
3
0
4
5
6
7
-12  
-15  
-18  
+3  
-3  
-6  
-9  
*62-1  
Bearer  
Service  
*62-2  
Outgoing  
Pad Level  
*62-3  
Incoming  
Pad Level  
Station Ports  
Program *62 Overview  
When Strata DK stations, except ISDN stations, use ISDN facilities, each station needs to be  
assigned the type of service expected to be used. The choices are Speech or 3.1 kHz (used for  
modem and fax connections). Set the transmission level for outgoing paths for calls. Default value  
is -6 db.  
Phones marked as “Speech” bearer service can receive calls marked “Speech” or “3.1 KHz audio.”  
Phones marked as “3.1 KHz Audio” can only receive calls marked with same bearer service.  
7-16  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
ISDN  
Program *63 – ISDN Dialing Parameters  
Program *63 – ISDN Dialing Parameters  
Processor Type: DK40i, All RCTUs (Release 4.0 or higher)  
Program Type:  
System, PRI and BRI  
Initialized Default: 4 seconds  
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ  
ꢀ
SEL = 1 or 2  
(see table below)  
DATA = Seconds  
(see table below)  
Select  
Timeout Parameter  
Sub-address dialing  
Outdialing  
Value  
Comments  
1
2
Value 00 to 10 seconds (default 04)  
Value 02 to 10 second (default 04)  
Program *63 Overview  
This program sets the timer for sending dialed digits if the user does not press the 6WDUW button or  
if the dialed number does not meet the established dialing plan number of digits.  
When the sub-address dialing timer is set to 00, subaddress dialing is not supported.  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
7-17  
ISDN  
Program *64-1 – Direct Inward Dialing Parameters  
Program *64-1 – Direct Inward Dialing Parameters  
Processor Type: DK40i, All RCTUs (Release 4.0 or higher)  
Program Type:  
Trunk, PRI and BRI  
Initialized Default: LED 01 ON for DID or DNIS programming  
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ  
ꢀ
SEL = 1  
LED 01: ON = Use DID/DNIS tables in  
Programs *09 or 71  
Enter the trunk group(s)  
OFF = Use direct ringing tables in  
Programs 81~89, *81, *84, *87  
To add a range of trunk  
groups, enter XX*XX (low  
trunk group * high trunk group)  
LED  
LED ON  
LED OFF  
01  
Use DID/DNIS for incoming calls.  
Direct ring the called station.  
LEDs  
01  
Trunk  
Groups  
Ports  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
Program *64-1 Overview  
Program *64-1 assigns each ISDN trunk group to use DID/DNIS programming or provide Direct  
in Line (DIL) ringing for incoming calls.  
7-18  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
ISDN  
Program *64-2 – Number of DID/DNIS Digits for Trunk Groups  
Program *64-2 – Number of DID/DNIS Digits for Trunk  
Groups  
Processor Type: DK40i, All RCTUs (Release 4.0 or higher)  
Program Type:  
System, PRI and BRI  
Initialized Default: Blank  
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ  
ꢀ
SEL = 2  
DATA = Enter the number of digits to  
use for incoming call DID digits (2~5)  
Enter Trunk Group Number  
To add a range of trunk groups,  
enter XX*XX (low trunk group *  
high trunk group)  
Trunk  
Groups  
Number of DID Incoming Call  
Digits per Trunk Group  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
Program *64-2 Overview  
This program establishes the number of digits to be used for DID or DNIS table interpretation for  
each ISDN trunk group.  
The DK424 uses the last two to four digits of the incoming listed directory number (LDN) to  
determine the DID call destination. If Program 17 was assigned for DNIS, the DK424 uses the last  
two to five digits of an incoming LDN to determine the DNIS call destination.  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
7-19  
ISDN  
Program *65 – ISDN Channel Group Assignment  
Program *65 – ISDN Channel Group Assignment  
Processor Type: All RCTUs (Release 4.0 or higher)  
Program Type:  
System, PRI  
Initialized Default: All LEDS OFF (see Important! below)  
Note Program *65 must be assigned before entering Program*66.  
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ  
ꢀ
SEL = Channel Group (1~8)  
GRP = Light LEDs to select PRI  
B-channels for the channel group.  
Press  
to advance or  
to go back.  
RCTUE/F  
188  
ISDN  
RCTUA  
RCTUBA/BB  
RCTUC/D  
B-channel Lines  
PRI (T)  
23  
47  
141  
Chann  
el  
Group  
CO Line Ports (B-Channels)  
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Program *65 Overview  
This program assigns an ISDN group number and its PRI B-channel members. All B-channels  
assigned to an ISDN channel group must use the same D-channel. The B-channels on the same  
DS-1 interface can belong to different channel groups.  
All ISDN connections require the active B-channels to be assigned to a channel group. The B-  
channels appear as CO ports assigned in sequence when the PRI card type is entered.  
Note Do not include the channels used as D-channels.  
Important! B-channels 1~23 are active (by default from the public carrier) in a standard PRI  
interface.  
7-20  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
ISDN  
Program *66-1 – Channel Group Number Parameters  
Program *66-1 – Channel Group Number Parameters  
Processor Type: All RCTUs (Release 4.0 or higher)  
Program Type:  
Trunk, PRI  
Initialized Default: Blank  
Note Program *65 must be assigned before entering Program *66. If Program *65 changes, then  
this program will be affected. Program *66 defaults back to the settings in Program *65.  
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ  
ꢀ
SEL = 1  
CHGP = Channel Group Number (1~8)  
Enter the ISDN  
Trunk Group Number  
Trunk Groups  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
Program *66-1 Overview  
This program assigns PRI ISDN trunk groups to a channel group.  
ISDN Trunk Groups are assigned based upon all available trunk groups in Program *16, identified  
as PRI trunk groups.  
This program must be entered after Program *65 or anytime a change is made to *65.  
The channels assigned in *65 will be transferred into the last trunk group entered in *66-1 for that  
channel group.  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
7-21  
ISDN  
Programs *66-2 and *66-4 – Call-by-Call Trunk Group Codes and Network ID  
Programs *66-2 and *66-4 – Call-by-Call Trunk Group  
Codes and Network ID  
Processor Type: All RCTUs (Release 4.0 or higher)  
Program Type:  
Trunk, PRI  
Initialized Default: Blank  
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ  
ꢀ
SEL = 2  
SV = Service Parameters  
Enter ISDN Trunk Group  
FA = Enter the Facility Code  
Trunk  
Group  
Facility  
Code  
Service  
Parameters  
Carrier Code  
(Prog. *66-4)  
Trunk  
Group  
Facility  
Code  
Service  
Parameters  
Carrier Code  
(Prog. *66-4)  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
Program *66-2 Overview  
The facility code and service parameters will be supplied by the ISDN carrier at the time the ISDN  
lines are ordered. Standard telephone services (POTS) will not have a Facility Code, nor a Service  
Parameter.  
The Call-by-call feature enables individual PRI B-channels to be shared among various types of  
services specified by the customer, rather than having to dedicate each channel to a particular type  
of service. The Call-by-Call feature can reduce the number of circuits required to access various  
services, especially if various services have different peak busy periods.  
In a future release, the minimum and maximum number of B-channels allocatable to any type of  
service can be assigned. Each of these values can be set for three time periods during the day. With  
these values, calls can be rejected if they exceed the maximum number subscribed for that service  
or they can ensure that a minimum number of channels remain available for incoming calls. Thus,  
the system can be used to provide an optimum service to meet the objectives of the business.  
Call-by-Call services can be specified to map Strata DK capabilities to network services such as  
DID, Tie, FX, WATS, 800, etc. These services could be provided via the local telephone carrier or  
be connected to any ISDN inter-exchange carrier.  
A table listing all valid DNs is provided for identifying the outgoing calls or alternatively a  
specific number or DID number. These may be used for identifying the call on a per station basis  
to allow calls to be billed to a selected service or station. All numbers used for identifying the call  
must be subscribed from the providing service or the call will be rejected by the provider.  
7-22  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
ISDN  
Programs *66-2 and *66-4 – Call-by-Call Trunk Group Codes and Network ID  
Program *66-4 Call-by-Call Network ID  
Processor Type: All RCTUs (Release 4.0 or higher)  
Program Type: Trunk, PRI  
Initialized Default: Blank  
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ  
ꢀ
SEL = 4  
ID = Network ID Code  
(3 or 4 digits)  
Enter ISDN Trunk  
Group Number  
Program *66-4 Overview  
Some Call-by-Call services are provided by inter-exchange carriers. These services need a  
network ID code for call setup. When a Network ID Code is entered, the service parameters in  
*66-2 must be blank.  
If both the Service Parameter and the Network ID are programmed, Service Parameter has priority  
and Network ID will be ignored.  
Record Sheet  
Use the record sheet for Program *66-2.  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
7-23  
ISDN  
Program *66-3 – Channel Group/Trunk Parameters  
Program *66-3 – Channel Group/Trunk Parameters  
Processor Type: All RCTUs (Release 4.0 or higher)  
Program Type:  
Trunk, PRI  
Initialized Default: Blank  
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ  
ꢀ
SEL = 3  
DATA = Light LEDS to assign  
features. See tables below.  
Enter the ISDN Trunk  
Group Number (01~16)  
LEDs 03~06 specify the trunk types shown in the following table.  
Tie  
Tie  
OutWATS  
(IntraLATA)  
ON  
OutWATS  
(InterLATA)  
ON  
LEDs  
POTS  
FX  
InWATS  
(senderized) (cutthrough)  
03  
04  
05  
06  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
Trunk Groups  
10 11 12 13 14 15 16  
LEDs  
Setting  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
ON: Operator Calls Allowed/  
OFF: Not allowed  
01  
02  
ON: Carrier Access allowed  
OFF: Not allowed  
03  
04  
Trunk Group Type (see above table).  
Trunk Group Type (see above table).  
Trunk Group Type (see above table).  
Trunk Group Type (see above table).  
Not Used  
05  
06  
07~10  
ON: Called Party Number Type Unknown  
OFF: Standard Called Party Number Type  
11  
12  
13  
ON: DK sends Ringback Tone to Network  
OFF: No RBT to Network.  
(Default is ON.)  
ON: DMS CO switches only  
OFF: Belcore (Default is OFF.)  
Program *66-3 Overview  
This program assigns special call treatment and defines the ISDN service. Call treatment includes  
whether or not operator calls are allowed, if carrier access is allowed, etc. The ISDN service is  
similar to trunk type, such as POTS, FX, Tie, outWATS and inWATS.  
Program *66-4 Call-by-Call Network ID  
See “Programs *66-2 and *66-4 – Call-by-Call Trunk Group Codes and Network ID” on Page  
7-22. Use the record sheet for Program *66-2.  
7-24  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
ISDN  
Program *66-5 – Line Directory Number (LDN) Registration  
Program *66-5 – Line Directory Number (LDN)  
Registration  
Processor Type: DK40i, All RCTUs (Release 4.0 or higher)  
Program Type: Trunk, PRI and BRI  
Initialized Default: Blank  
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ  
ꢀ
SEL = 5  
LDN = Listed Directory Number  
Enter the Channel Group  
Use LED Button 01 to enter a blank.  
Wild card (*) entries are valid.  
0 = BRI  
1~8 = PRI  
Enter LDN Index (01~48)  
Ch.  
LDN  
Ch.  
LDN  
Ch.  
LDN  
LDN  
LDN  
LDN  
Group Index  
Group Index  
Group Index  
Program *66-5 Overview  
This program is used to assign seven-digit listed directory numbers per channel group. The index  
number assigned is correlated to a CO line port number in Program *66-6 for direct inward ringing  
assignments and to trunk groups in Program *66-7.  
ISDN calls are originated and terminated using a listed directory number and call type (bearer  
service). The Strata DK must know the listed directory numbers subscribed from the PSTN to  
determine how to handle the call.  
Wild card entries (*) are allowed for handling a larger number of LDNs. For example, a DID group  
using 583-3700 through 583-3799 can be entered as a single LDN entry: 583-37**. To handle a  
single number differently that falls within this range, enter that number in a lower number index.  
e.g., Index 01 = 5833769 and Index 02 = 58337**. If a match occurs on Index 01, the call will be  
handled based upon Index 01.  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
7-25  
ISDN  
Program *66-6 – LDN/Trunk Group to Channel Group Assignments  
Program *66-6 – LDN/Trunk Group to Channel Group  
Assignments  
Processor Type: DK40i, All RCTUs (Release 4.0 or higher)  
Program Type:  
Trunk, PRI and BRI  
Initialized Default: Blank  
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ  
ꢀ
SEL = 6  
GRP = Select ISDN trunk ports for each LDN index.  
Enter the Channel Group Number:  
0 = BRI; 1~8 = PRI  
Press  
or  
for the next CO line ports.  
Enter the LDN Index (1~48)  
Channe  
l Group  
Channe  
l Group  
Channe  
l Group  
CO Line Ports  
CO Line Ports  
CO Line Ports  
Index  
Index  
Index  
Program *66-6 Overview  
This program assigns Listed Directory Numbers (LDNs) trunk groups to the member’s channel  
group.  
Note The number of direct appearing CO lines cannot exceed the number of CO ports allocated  
in Program 03. One PRI card, Type 79, assigns 24 B-channels; thus allowing 24 direct  
appearances.  
For Programs *66-5 and *66-6:  
Multiple calls can be received with the same LDN. The LDN and Channel Group information in  
*66-5 and *66-6 must match. Calls are assigned the next available non-busy port as follows:  
♦
♦
♦
For PRI: Choose the highest available port to the lowest.  
For BRI: Choose the lowest available the highest.  
Multiple LDNs can be assigned to the same CO appearances.  
7-26  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
ISDN  
Program *66-7 – LDN/Trunk Group Assignments  
Program *66-7 – LDN/Trunk Group Assignments  
Processor Type: All RCTUs (Release 4.0 or higher)  
Program Type: Trunk, PRI  
Initialized Default: Blank  
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ  
ꢀ
SEL = 7  
DIR = Trunk Group (1~16).  
0 = blank. The lowest POTS trunk  
group is used.  
Enter the Channel  
Group Number (1~8)  
Enter the LDN Index (1~48).  
See Program *66-5  
Trunk Groups  
Channel LDN  
Group Index  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
Program *66-7 Overview  
This program assigns Listed Directory Numbers (LDNs) to each ISDN trunk group.  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
7-27  
ISDN  
Program *67-1 – Trunk Group Call Direction  
Program *67-1 – Trunk Group Call Direction  
Processor Type: All RCTUs (Release 4.0 or higher)  
Program Type:  
Trunk, PRI  
Initialized Default: Both Way  
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ  
ꢀ
SEL = 1  
DIR = Call Direction  
1 = Incoming  
2 = Outgoing  
Enter the Trunk Group  
(01~16)  
3 = Both Way  
Trunk Groups  
10 11 12 13 14 15 16  
Value  
Call Direction  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
2
3
Incoming  
Outgoing  
Both Way  
Program *67-1 Overview  
This program assigns the call direction for each ISDN trunk group.  
7-28  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
ISDN  
Program *67-2 – Call Types for ISDN Trunk Group Supported  
Program *67-2 – Call Types for ISDN Trunk Group  
Supported  
Processor Type: All RCTUs (Release 4.0 or higher)  
Program Type: Trunk, PRI  
Initialized Default: Blank  
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ  
ꢀ
SEL = 2  
Turn on LEDs 01~04 to select the  
call type. See table below.  
Enter the Trunk Group (01~16)  
Enter the Time Zone (1~3)  
For Rel. 4.0, enter 1  
Trunk  
Groups  
Speech  
Time Zone  
64 kbps. Data 56 kbps. Data  
3.1 kHz Audio  
LED 02  
LED 01  
LED 03  
LED 04  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
Program *67-2 Overview  
This program defines the call type or “Bearer Services” allowed for each ISDN trunk group. These  
settings will be set for three different time zones in an upcoming release. All of the call types that  
will be used should be turned on. Normally, Speech and 3.1 kHz Audio (non-ISDN voice calls and  
fax calls), should be turned on.  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
7-29  
ISDN  
Program *67-3 – ISDN Trunk Group Minimum Channel Reservation  
Program *67-3 – ISDN Trunk Group Minimum Channel  
Reservation  
Processor Type: All RCTUs (Release 4.1)  
Program Type:  
Trunk, PRI  
Initialized Default: Default = 00  
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ  
ꢀ
SEL = 3  
MIN = Minimum number of  
B-channels reserved.  
Max. 47 when sharing D-channels.  
Enter the Trunk Group (01~16)  
Enter the Time Zone (1~3)  
For Rel. 4.0, enter 1  
Time Zone 1  
B-channels reserved  
Time Zone 2  
B-channels reserved  
Min. Max.  
Time Zone 3  
B-channels reserved  
Trunk  
Groups  
Min. Max.  
Min.  
Max.  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
Program *67-3 Overview  
This program defines the minimum number of B-channels reserved for this service. Each of the  
three time zones may have a different value.  
➤ Enter the minimum and maximum number of B-channels reserved for each Time Zone.  
7-30  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
ISDN  
Program *67-4 – ISDN Trunk Groups Maximum Channel Reservation  
Program *67-4 – ISDN Trunk Groups Maximum Channel  
Reservation  
Processor Type: All RCTUs (Release 4.1 or higher)  
Program Type:  
Trunk, PRI  
Initialized Default: 23 maximum default channels  
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ  
ꢀ
SEL = 4  
MAX = Maximum number of  
B-channels reserved.  
(0047) when sharing D-channels,  
Max. = 47.  
Enter the Trunk Group (01~16)  
Enter the Time Zone (1~3)  
Program *67-4 Overview  
This program specifies the maximum number of B-channels that can be used to carry calls with  
this service. Each of the three time zones may have a different value.  
Use the record sheet with Program *67-3.  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
7-31  
ISDN  
Program *67-5 – Multiple Time Zone Settings  
Program *67-5 – Multiple Time Zone Settings  
Processor Type: All RCTUs (Release 4.1 or higher)  
Program Type:  
Trunk, PRI  
Initialized Default: Default = 0000  
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ  
ꢀ
SEL = 5  
Enter the Time Zone Starting.  
Time (0000~2359)  
Enter the Channel Group (1~8)  
Enter the Time Zone (1~3)  
Program *67-5 Overview  
This program enables setting three different time zones. In Release 4.1, the maximum number of  
lines that can be obtained by each trunk group and the minimum number of lines that can be  
sequred is programmable. By programming the max. and min. number of lines that can be used by  
a trunk group, this prevents a trunk group from monopolizing all the lines.  
7-32  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
ISDN  
Program *68-1 – Calling Number ID Presentation Parameters  
Program *68-1 – Calling Number ID Presentation  
Parameters  
Processor Type: DK40i, All RCTUs (Release 4.0 or higher)  
Program Type: Trunk, PRI and BRI  
Initialized Default: all LEDs OFF  
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ  
ꢀ
SEL = 1  
DATA = Press LED Buttons 01~03 for the  
desired Calling Number ID parameters.  
See table below.  
Enter the Trunk Group  
(01~16)  
Trunk Groups  
LED  
Caller ID Setting  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10 11 12 13 14 15 16  
Outgoing Caller ID  
(ON = Allowed / OFF = Not Allowed)  
1
2
3
Outgoing Caller ID Status Change:  
ON = Allowed / OFF = Not Allowed  
Incoming Caller ID Source:  
ON = Network Provided OFF = Caller Provided  
Program *68-1 Overview  
This program assigns the Number Privacy feature, which allows the caller to prevent the public  
network from delivering the Calling Number to the called party on a per-call basis. The Public  
Switched Telephone Network (PSTN) may still provide a network-based Caller ID, even when the  
outgoing Caller ID is OFF Only a subscription parameter can change that.  
LED 01: Outgoing Caller ID  
Service subscribers can request from the public network that the number be presented or not as a  
default.  
LED 02: Outgoing Caller ID Status Change  
If a public telco service allows changes to be made, then a user can enter change a code to the  
setting for that call after selecting a trunk group.  
LED 03: Incoming Caller ID Source  
When LED 03 is ON, the calling number with the call setup message is provided by the network;  
OFF indicates that this information is sent from the caller. The Strata DK handles the number the  
same way that ANI information from T1 trunks is handled. For instance, the number can display  
on the called telephone’s LCD, or it can be used by TAPI interfaces, or it can be recorded in  
SMDR data records.  
The PSTN may send one or two Caller ID messages for incoming calls. One message is the Caller  
ID supplied by the network, which is generally the billing number, while the second is the user  
generated number. The Strata DK will use the user-supplied number, if required.  
Note Individual callers can choose to block this information, regardless of this setting.  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
7-33  
ISDN  
Program *68-2 – Outbound CNIS Parameters  
Program *68-2 – Outbound CNIS Parameters  
Processor Type: DK40i, All RCTUs (Release 4.0 or higher)  
Program Type:  
Trunk, PRI and BRI  
Initialized Default: Blank  
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ  
ꢀ
CPN = Enter the Calling Party  
Number (CPN) 10 or 11 digits.  
SEL = 2  
Enter the Trunk Group  
(01~16)  
Trunk Groups  
Calling Party Number  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
Program *68-2 Overview  
This program defines the default Calling Party Number (CPN) for the ISDN trunk group used for  
placing a call. The PSTN uses this Calling Party Number for the user provider Caller ID and  
optionally may use it for billing the call.  
The number sent is based on the call originator. The originator can be a tandem call, a station (with  
or without DID), or a station with a designated number:  
♦
♦
For a tandem call, the CPN digits received are the digits that will be sent.  
For a direct station call, the default number assigned to the selected service and which is  
programmed into the Strata DK as the CPN will be the number sent.  
♦
For a fixed number, the system sends the number assigned in the system (in this program) or it  
can use the DID programming to determine the number to be sent. Program *69 (DATA=Type  
1 or 2) defines whether fixed numbers from this program are sent or if DID digits from  
Program *09 are sent.  
7-34  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
ISDN  
Program *69-1 – CNIS Presentation Parameters  
Program *69-1 – CNIS Presentation Parameters  
Processor Type: DK40i, All RCTUs (Release 4.0 or higher)  
Program Type: Trunk, PRI and BRI  
Initialized Default: none  
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ  
ꢀ
SEL = 1  
INDX = Index Number (00~32)  
Index 00 uses default value assigned in*68-2.  
All others use values assigned in *69-2  
Enter Station Port(s)  
To add a range, enter  
XXX*XXX (low port * high port)  
CG = Channel Group (1~8)  
Station Ports  
Channel  
Group  
Index  
Program *69-1 Overview  
This program defaults all ports to the 00 index, which means that outgoing calls will present the  
Directory Number entered in Program *68-2 as the Calling Number for outbound calls. Each  
station on the Strata DK can send a unique number based on the station making the call assigning  
an index other than 00, and entering the number as Type 2 to be used in Program *69-2 or send a  
Type 1 DID number by entering a prefix code to create a complete number.  
Note If the PSTN is to use this number for billing the call, the number sent must match those  
provided by the PSTN.  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
7-35  
ISDN  
Program *69-2 – Special Number Assignment  
Program *69-2 – Special Number Assignment  
Processor Type: DK40i, All RCTUs (Release 4.0 or higher)  
Program Type:  
Trunk, PRI and BRI  
Initialized Default: none  
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ  
ꢀ
SEL = 2  
Enter Calling Party Numbers (11 digits)  
DATA = Type (1, 2)  
Enter Index Number (1~32)  
or enter 00 for the ISDN  
service default number  
1 = Prefix plus *09 DID digits  
2 = Fixed Number  
Index Type  
Calling Party Number  
Index Type  
Calling Party Number  
Index Type  
Calling Party Number  
Program *69-2 Overview  
This program defines the parameters for the Calling Party Number (CPN) to be presented for a call  
depending upon whether the ISDN trunk group uses DID, private numbers or a default number  
from Program *68-2. Calling Number Presentation for outbound calls is used by the public  
network to send the telephone number to the called location.  
For each phone in the system, assign an index value to define the Calling Number to be sent to the  
public network. Each index value can be defined to provide a specific 10 digit telephone number  
(DATA=Type 2) or a DID prefix value with the final digits to be programmed in *09 (DATA=Type  
1) to complete the 10 digit telephone number.  
The number of indexes is 32 maximum and an index value of zero (0) will cause the ISDN systems  
to send the default number.  
Program *69 provides a method to present the call back number that can be used to reach that  
station. This number can either be a DID number or a designated number that is programmed to  
ring that particular station. Through subscription options from the public service provider, this  
Calling Party Number can be used for billing calls.  
This capability may be required for office suites and certain contracted obligations needing  
independent accounting for the telephone service. This subscription can require number screening.  
When screened, calls not presenting a valid billing number will be rejected by the service local  
provider. If optional, calls will always be placed and a number sent that does not match will be  
billed to the main number for that site.  
7-36  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
E911  
8
This chapter contains programming record sheets, along with specific instructions for  
programming E911 CAMA trunks.  
Enhanced 911 CAMA trunks apply only to the DK424, Release 4.0. The RMCU/RCMS PCBs  
provide up to four CAMA trunk circuits. The RMCU/RCMS eliminates the need for adjunct  
terminal adapter equipment for connecting to E911 CAMA trunks. For more information on  
hardware, refer to the Strata DK Installation and Maintenance Manual.  
Operation Overview  
The DK424 E911 feature provides flexible dialing of 911 emergency calls. This allows users who  
are not familiar with DK424 dialing sequences to make an emergency call regardless of how they  
dial 911 from Toshiba telephones. In all of the sequences below, the DK will seize an idle CAMA  
trunk and send 911 plus the dialing station’s Caller Emergency Service Identification (CESID)  
over the CAMA trunk via MF tones.  
Note Once a 911 call is started, most other buttons/keys on a telephone are disabled to prevent  
accidentally dropping the 911 call attempt. This includes the +ROG button, so that the 911  
call cannot be put on hold.  
♦
♦
♦
Press DN button and dial 911. When the user dials 911, the PDN releases from the internal  
connection and seizes the CAMA trunk.  
Off Hook and dial 911 (station has off hook selection of PDN in Program 32). When the user  
dials 911, the PDN releases from the internal connection and seizes the CAMA trunk.  
Off Hook and dial 911 (station has off hook selection of a CO line or line group in Program 32  
and has a CO /LQH or 3RROHGꢃ/LQH buttons). When the user goes off-hook, the station will  
seize the normal CO line on the appropriate CO /LQH/3RROHGꢃ/LQH button. When the user  
dials 911, the normal CO line is dropped and an idle PDN or CAMA CO button connects to  
the CAMA trunk. If an idle PDN or CAMA CO button is not available, the 911 call will be  
sent out the originally selected line without the station’s CESID information.  
♦
Press DN button and dial 9+911 (no LCR, 9 is line group access code, station does not have  
CO /LQH, 3RROHGꢃ/LQH or &$0$ CO buttons). When the user dials 9, the station will seize  
a “dial 9” CO line on its PDN button. When the user dials 911, the 911 call will be sent one of  
two ways:  
♦
If the station does not have another idle PDN or &$0$ CO button, the 911 call will be  
sent out the normal CO line in the dial 9 line group without the station’s CESID.  
♦
If the telephone has another PDN or &$0$ CO button, and it is idle, the first PDN will  
drop and the second PDN or CAMA CO button will be connected to the CAMA trunk.  
911 plus the station’s CESID will be sent out the CAMA trunk.  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
8-1  
E911  
SMDR  
♦
♦
♦
Press DN button and dial 9+911 (with LCR). When the user dials 9, the station will seize LCR  
on its PDN, when the user dials 911, the PDN will drop LCR and the same PDN will connect  
to the CAMA trunk. 911 plus the station’s CESID will be sent out the CAMA trunk.  
Press INT button and dial 911 (attendant console). When the user dials 911, the INT button  
releases from the internal connection and seizes the CAMA trunk. 911 plus the Attendant  
Console CESID is sent out the CAMA trunk.  
Press CO /LQH, 3RROHGꢃ/LQH or &$0$ CO button and dial 911 (attendant console). When  
the user dials 911 from an outgoing line button, the outgoing line button drops and the CAMA  
trunk is seized on the INT button. 911 plus the Attendant Console CESID is sent out the  
CAMA trunk.  
SMDR  
Two packets are sent out the SMDR port on each E911 call. The first packet will be sent  
immediately at the start of the call and the second will be sent at the end of the call when the  
CAMA trunk releases. See Figures 8-1 and 8-2 for E911 SMDR packet samples.  
11111111112222222222333333333344444444445555555555666666666677777777778  
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890  
S004 3710 3710 08:14  
5833710  
911 MARY M  
NO.200  
LCD User Name  
(65~80)  
Originating number -  
always 911 (61~63)  
Time of Day at start of call (19~21)  
Originating DN (12~15)  
Station ID  
(10D maximum characters 43~52)  
PDN of originating station (7~10)  
Originating trunk number (2~4)  
“S” for start of call  
“E” for end of call (1)  
2997  
Notes  
●
●
●
●
●
●
This record is similar to a normal OG record except that:  
The first character “S” indicates “Start of Call.”  
Time of Day shows start time.  
There is no call duration.  
Station ID is substituted for the first ten characters of the outgoing dialed number field.  
The account code field is used for Name/Location data from the Table XXX.  
Figure 8-1 SMDR Start of Call  
8-2  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
E911  
Programming Overview  
11111111112222222222333333333344444444445555555555666666666677777777778  
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890  
E004 3710 3710 08:14 00:05;32 5833710 911 MARY M NO.200  
LCD User Name  
(65~80)  
Call duration (23~30)  
Time of day at end of call (19~21)  
Originating DN (12~15)  
Originating number -  
always 911 (61~63)  
Station ID  
(10D maximum characters 43~52)  
PDN of originating station (7~10)  
Originating trunk number (2~4)  
2998  
“S” for start of call  
“E” for end of call (1)  
Notes  
●
●
●
●
This record is similar to a Start record except that:  
The first character “E” indicates “End of Call.”  
Call duration is provided.  
Time of day shows disconnect time.  
Figure 8-2 SMDR End of Call  
Programming Overview  
The basic programming for the E911 CAMA trunks feature is accomplished using Programs *11,  
*12, and *13. Program *10 is not used for RMCU/RCMS CAMA trunks, it is only used when  
E911 is provided using an adjunct E911 device.  
Program 39 tips:  
♦
When a user presses a normal CO line button and dials 911, the telephone drops the normal  
line button and connects a CAMA trunk to an idle [PDN[ or &$0$ CO button on the  
telephone. Then, the DK sends 911 + plus the telephone’s CESID on the CAMA trunk. If there  
is no idle [PDN[, 911 is sent on the originally selected CO line without CESID.  
♦
To ensure that here is an idle PDN when a telephone is assigned to auto-off-hook, select a CO  
line or CO line group in Program 32. The telephone should have a button appearance of this  
CO (or pooled) line. Or, if the telephone does not have these line buttons it should have  
another [PDN] button appearance to connect to the CAMA trunk in case 911 is dialed.  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
8-3  
E911  
Program *11-0 – E911/CAMA Trunk Assignments  
Program *11-0 – E911/CAMA Trunk Assignments  
Processor Type: All RCTUs (Release 4.0)  
Program Type:  
System  
Initialized Default: all LEDs OFF  
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ  
ꢀ
SELECT = 0  
Light the LED Buttons that are  
marked with an X in the table below.  
ON=Enabled. OFF=Disabled.  
LED/  
Button  
X
LED ON  
LED OFF  
11  
10  
09  
08  
07  
06  
05  
04  
03  
02  
01  
E911 enabled  
E911 disabled  
CAMA trunk 4 not used  
CAMA trunk 3 not used  
CAMA trunk 2 not used  
CAMA trunk 1 not used  
CAMA trunk 4 used  
CAMA trunk 3 used  
CAMA trunk 2 used  
CAMA trunk 1 used  
No internal notification  
Internal notification provided  
Normal disconnect  
CAMA trunk Control Disconnect  
Seven CESID Digits  
Ten CESID Digits  
Program *11-0 Overview  
This program enables E911 calls to be analyzed by the system for appropriate handling. The  
following assignments in Program *11-0 must be enabled to allow Enhanced 911 (E911) CAMA  
trunks to operate:  
LED 11: CAMA Operation Enabled/Disabled  
Led 11 must be turned ON to enable the E911 feature to operate.  
LED 10~07: CAMA Trunk Circuits Enabled/Disabled  
Up to four CAMA (RMCU/RCMS) trunks can be installed on Release 4.0 DK424 systems. Turn  
LEDs 07-10 ON to enable the appropriate CAMA trunks (1-4). RMCU/RCMS CAMA trunk  
circuit are numbered 1~4 from the bottom-up (see the front of the installed RMCU/RCMS). If only  
one RCMS is to be installed, place it on the bottom position of the RCMU. The Universal Slot  
PCB and Universal PCB Wiring chapters of the DK14/40/424 Installation and Maintenance  
Manual provides details regarding RMCU/RCMS PCB installation and circuit numbering.  
LED 03: Internal Notification of E911 Calls Enabled/Disabled  
To allow Attendant consoles and station DNs to be called along with the E911 CAMA trunk when  
a 911 call is made, LED 03 must be turned OFF. With this feature enabled, E911 calls will ring the  
CAMA trunk plus the Incoming Emergency (,1ꢒ(UPJ) button on all Attendant consoles and the  
[DN] button ([PDN] or [PhDN]) designated in Program *11-8. The designated DN must be  
programmed to ring telephones in *71, *72, and *73, as required for each telephone on which the  
designated [DN]appears.  
8-4  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
E911  
Program *11-0 – E911/CAMA Trunk Assignments  
When this feature is used, the station or Attendant console that answers the E911 notification call  
will be connected in a three party conference with the E911 calling telephone and the E911 CAMA  
trunk (E911 dispatch person who answers the 911 call). The CESID information and user name of  
the 911 calling station displays on all Attendant Console monitors and E911 notification telephone  
LCDs when the E911 notification call rings.  
LED 02: CAMA Trunk Disconnect Operation Options  
After an E911 call is established, disconnecting the calling or notified telephone (or notified  
telephone/console) from the CAMA trunk can be controlled exclusively by the E911 trunk  
(dispatch person receiving the 911 call).  
The disconnect operation for each option is:  
♦
LED 02 OFF: Allows either the E911 call originating telephone or 911 dispatcher to  
disconnect the CAMA trunk. In the following example, conversation exists between  
originating telephone, notified telephone/console and the E911 CAMA trunk dispatch person.  
E911 originator hangs up  
and disconnects.  
The E911 notified station and the E911 CAMA trunk remain  
connected. The notified station can disconnect from the CAMA trunk.  
E911 notified station hangs  
up and disconnects.  
The E911 originating station and the E911 CAMA trunk remain  
connected. Originating station can disconnect from the CAMA trunk.  
E911 dispatcher hangs up  
and disconnects.  
All parties are disconnected, CAMA trunk goes idle.  
♦
LED 02 ON: Enables E911 call disconnect to be exclusively controlled by the dispatch person  
receiving the call on the E911 CAMA trunk. In the following table, conversation exists  
between originating telephone, notified telephone/console and the E911 CAMA trunk dispatch  
person.  
E911 originator hangs up  
and disconnects.  
The E911 notified station cannot disconnect from the E911 CAMA  
trunk.  
E911 notified station hangs  
up and disconnects.  
The E911 originating station cannot disconnect from the E911 CAMA  
trunk.  
E911 dispatcher hangs up  
and disconnects.  
All parties are disconnected, CAM trunk goes idle.  
LED 01: Number of CESID location digits sent with E911 Calls  
After 911 is sent out the CAMA trunk, Automatic Number Identification (CESID) location digits  
are sent out the CAMA trunk to identify the location of the station. The maximum number of  
CESID digits sent with each E911 call can be either 7-digits (LED 01 ON) or 10-digits LED 01  
OFF). CESID location digits are individually set in Program *12 for each station. Contact your  
local E911 CAMA trunk provider to determine the number of CESID digits required.  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
8-5  
E911  
Program *11-1 – CAMA Trunk Group Line Assignments  
Program *11-1 – CAMA Trunk Group Line Assignments  
Processor Type: All RCTUs (Release 4.0)  
Program Type:  
System  
Initialized Default: all LEDs OFF  
ꢀ ꢀꢃ ꢀꢃ ꢀꢃ  
ꢀ
CAMA Trunk Group (01~08)  
Line circuit number of CAMA trunk: Turn ON  
LED of line that corresponds to the CAMA trunk  
position in the system.  
Processor  
DK14  
CO Line Range  
Processor  
CO Line Range  
001~048  
001~004  
001~012  
001~016  
RCTUBA/BB  
RCTUC/D  
RCTUE/F  
DK40i  
001~144  
RCTUA  
001~200  
CAMA Trunk  
Group  
CO Line Numbers of CAMA Trunks  
01  
02  
03  
04  
05  
06  
07  
08  
Program *11-1 Overview  
This program assigns lines to CAMA trunk groups. Each RCMU/RMCS line used must be  
assigned to one of the eight CAMA trunk groups using Program *11-1. The RCMU/RMCS system  
line number (not the CAMA trunk number, 1~4) is entered into the appropriate CAMA trunk  
group in this program. If CAMA trunks are not assigned in this program, the E911 CAMA feature  
will not operate.  
When the RCMU/RMCS PCBs are installed, they assume the next four consecutive system CO  
line numbers. For example if a normal ground start line PCB, RGLU, is installed in slot 12, its  
system line numbers are 01~04. And, if the RCMU/RMCS is installed in slot 13, its line numbers  
are 05~08.  
This program also allows any type (ground, loop, Tie, DID) line to be assigned in CAMA Trunk  
Groups. This is to allow 911 calls to be routed out normal CO lines in case the CAMA trunk(s) can  
not be accessed (busy or out of service). If the 911 call hunts from the CAMA trunk(s) in a CAMA  
Trunk Group to a normal CO line in a CAMA Trunk Group, the 911digits (dial pulses or DTMF  
tones) will be sent out the normal line without the station CESID information digits. The normal  
lines assigned in CAMA trunk groups can be assigned in Program 16 line groups as well.  
It is recommended to always assign normal lines in CAMA Trunk groups to back CAMA trunks.  
8-6  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
E911  
Program *11-2 – CAMA Trunk Group Hunting Assignments  
Program *11-2 – CAMA Trunk Group Hunting  
Assignments  
Processor Type: All RCTUs (Release 4.0)  
Program Type: System  
Initialized Default: Blank  
ꢀ ꢀꢃ ꢀꢃ ꢀꢃ  
ꢀ
Hunt from CAMA Trunk Group (01~08)  
DATA = Hunt to CAMA Trunk Group (01~08)  
Hunt from CAMA  
Trunk Group  
Hunt to CAMA Trunk  
Group  
01  
02  
03  
04  
05  
06  
07  
08  
Program *11-2 Overview  
This program enables E911 calls to hunt for an idle line in a CAMA trunk group in the order  
assigned in this program.  
If all lines in a CAMA trunk group are in use, a new 911 call that attempts to connect to a busy  
trunk group can hunt to another trunk group. If that group is busy, the call will hunt to another  
CAMA trunk group until an idle group is found. E911 calls will hunt for an idle line in a CAMA  
trunk group in the order assigned in this program. Within each CAMA trunk group, E911 calls will  
hunt the lines in that group from the lowest numbered line to the highest numbered line. This  
hunting operation is true if the lines in a CAMA trunk Group are CAMA trunks or normal CO  
lines.  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
8-7  
E911  
Program *11-5 – CAMA Digits Sent on 911 Calls  
Program *11-5 – CAMA Digits Sent on 911 Calls  
Processor Type: All RCTUs (Release 4.0)  
Program Type:  
System  
Initialized Default: 911  
ꢀꢃ ꢀꢃ ꢀꢃ ꢀꢃ  
ꢀ
SELECT = 5  
CAMA digits sent if user dials 911 (911, 11, 1)  
Use LED button 01 to blank out 9 or 91  
X (choose 1)  
CAMA Digits Sent  
911  
11  
1
Program *11-5 Overview  
This program specifies which digits (“911” or “11” or “1”) will be sent to the to CAMA trunk,  
when a user dials 911 or 9+911.  
When a caller dials 911, the DK can send 911, 11, or 1 out the CAMA trunk before sending the  
CESID location digits set in Program *12. Normally it is required to send 911, but this will vary so  
you must check with the CAMA trunk provider to identify what to enter into this program. Digits  
sent on the CAMA trunk are multi-frequency (MF) tones, so they cannot be checked with a DTMF  
test set.  
8-8  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
E911  
Program *11-6 – E911 Interdigital Timer  
Program *11-6 – E911 Interdigital Timer  
Processor Type: All RCTUs (Release 4.0)  
Program Type:  
System  
Initialized Default: Data, 2 seconds  
ꢀ ꢀꢃ ꢀꢃ ꢀꢃ  
ꢀ
SELECT = 6  
DATA = interdigital time delay before routing calls after  
9XX (01~15 seconds).  
If X=1, timer resets  
If X=0, 2~9, digits are routed/sent normally  
DATA (01~15 secs.)  
Program *11-6 Overview  
This program assigns the amount of time allotted for the E911 interdigital timer. When the E911  
feature is enabled, the DK applies the E911 interdigital timer any time a user dials “9” as the first  
digit. This applies to any type of call originated from a [DN] when you dial 9XX or 9 + 9XX. After  
9 is dialed as the first digit, the DK will wait the number of seconds set in this program before  
processing the dialed digit.  
If “91” or “99” is dialed as the first and second digit, the system will wait the number of seconds  
set in this program before processing the dialed digits. If 91X is dialed, the system will route the  
call out the CAMA trunk if X=1 or it will process the call as a normal call if X=0 or 2-9.  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
8-9  
E911  
Program *11-8 – 911 Special [DN] Notification Assignments  
Program *11-8 – 911 Special [DN] Notification  
Assignments  
Processor Type: All RCTUs (Release 4.0)  
Program Type:  
System  
Initialized Default: Data, Blank  
ꢀ ꢀꢃ ꢀꢃ ꢀꢃ  
ꢀ
SELECT = 8  
[PDN] or [PhDN] port number that should ring to be  
notified when 911 is dialed by a station (*71, *72 or  
*73 required for ringing)  
1 = Day Mode  
4 = Day2 Mode  
7 = Night Mode  
Processor  
DK14  
[PDN] Port Range  
000~009  
[PhDN] Port Range  
Processor  
RCTUBA/BB  
RCTUC/D  
RCTUE/F  
[PDN] Port Range  
000~079  
[PhDN] Port Range  
500~579  
500~509  
500~527  
500~531  
DK40i  
000~027  
000~239  
500~739  
RCTUA  
000~031  
000~335  
500~835  
Mode  
Day  
[DN] Port Number  
Day2  
Night  
Program *11-8 Overview  
This program designates which [PDN] or PhDN] should have ringing notification on 911 calls (all  
installed consoles are always notified). A unique (or the same) [DN] can be designated as the E911  
notification DN in each system ring mode: Day, Day2, and Night.  
The E911 Internal Notification option is enabled/disabled in Program *11-0, LED 03. When this  
option is enabled, 911 calls will be sent on the CAMA trunk normally and will also ring on  
attendant consoles’ Emergency ICI buttons and a designated telephone’s [DN] ([PDN] or  
[PhDN]), if assigned in this program. Special CESID information regarding the E911 caller will  
display on attendant consoles monitors and/or on notification telephone LCDs to help identify the  
location of the telephone that dialed 911.  
All telephones that must be notified when a 911 call is made must have an appearance of the  
notification [DN] button (Program 39) and the Notification DN must be programmed to ring  
(immediate or delayed) the notification telephones (Programs *71, *72 and/or *73).  
If the notification [DN] has Call Forward set, the call will follow the call forward process as a  
normal internal call.  
When the notification [DN] is answered, a three-party conference is established between the E911  
originating station, the E911 dispatcher (on CAMA trunk), and the E911notification station/  
console answering party. After the E911 notification call is answered, it stops ringing on all  
stations/consoles where it was presented.  
8-10  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
E911  
Program *12 – CESID Station Information  
Program *12 – CESID Station Information  
Processor Type: All RCTUs (Release 4.0)  
Program Type: System  
Initialized Default: Data Blank  
ꢀ ꢀꢃ ꢀꢃ ꢀꢃ  
ꢀ
Station Port Number (see legend)  
X = Location CESID digits to send on  
CAMA trunk when station dials 911  
(0~10 digits max.) See Program *11,  
LED 01 for 7 or 10 digits.  
Processor Type  
DK14  
Port Range  
Processor Type  
Port Range  
000~079  
000~239  
000~335  
008~009  
008~027  
000~031  
RCTUBA/BB  
RCTUC/D  
RCTUE/F  
DK40i  
RCTUA  
Location CESID  
Digits  
Location CESID  
Digits  
Location CESID  
Digits  
Location CESID  
Digits  
Port  
Port  
Port  
Port  
Program *12 Overview  
This program assigns the Caller Emergency Service Identification (CESID) information that will  
be sent to the CAMA trunk using Multi-Frequency (MF) signals.  
When a station dials 911, the E911 feature causes the DK to seize the CAMA trunk and send 911,  
11 or 1 (per Program *11-5) plus the station’s unique CESID information entered in this program.  
This CESID information is also sent to the displays of internal notification consoles and stations.  
The CESID information can be 7 or 10-digits maximum (per Program *11-0, LED 01). Note that  
the digits sent on the CAMA trunk are MF tones, so they cannot be checked with a DTMF test set.  
The digits entered in this program for each station is normally a unique telephone number for each  
station or station location (i.e., office, room, building, etc.). The exact CESID digit format required  
will vary, so you must get the format from the CAMA trunk provider in order to set the CESID  
information in this program.  
Example formats in which the DK is expected to send digits out the CAMA trunk on E911 calls  
are as follows:  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
8-11  
E911  
Program *12 – CESID Station Information  
1. When the CAMA trunk is connected to the Public Switched Telephone Network:  
CESID digits may be: 0-NYY-XXXX  
Note The hyphens are for clarity - do not try to program them in *12  
0 = Information code expected from a PBX on E911 calls. This multi-frequency (MF) “0”  
digit is sent automatically by the DK digits are entered for the calling port in Program *12.  
NYY = Office Code  
XXXX = Station Directory Number  
2. When the CAMA trunk is connected directly to the Public Safety Answering Point (PSAP) the  
CESID digits may be: NXX-NYY-XXXX  
NXX = Area Code  
...or the PSAP serving multiple area codes will substitute a single digit representing an area  
code.  
NYY = Office Code  
XXXX = Station Directory Number  
3. If no digits are entered for a port in Program *12, the DK sends an MF digit of “2.”  
8-12  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
E911  
Program *13 – Station To CAMA Trunk Group Assignment  
Program *13 – Station To CAMA Trunk Group  
Assignment  
Processor Type: All RCTUs (Release 4.0)  
Program Type: System  
Initialized Default: Data Blank  
ꢀ ꢀꢃ ꢀꢃ ꢀꢃ  
ꢀ
Station Port Number  
E911 Station CAMA Trunk Group Number  
(01~08)  
(see legend)  
Group Number  
Location  
Group Number  
Location  
Group Number  
Port  
Location  
Number  
Station Group  
Port  
Information Digits  
Port  
Information Digits  
Port  
Information Digits  
Program *13 Overview  
This program assign stations to different CAMA trunks groups (if more than one CAMA trunk is  
installed). This can be used to divide services for multi-users (Tenants) or distribute traffic during  
an emergency.  
If only one CAMA trunk is installed all stations must be assigned to the CAMA trunk group in  
which the CAMA trunk is assigned (in Program *11-1). If a station dials 911 and the trunk group  
to which it is assigned is busy, the call will hunt to the next trunk group(s) per Program *11-2.  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
8-13  
E911  
Program *13 – Station To CAMA Trunk Group Assignment  
8-14  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
Glossary  
Term  
Definition  
AA  
Auto Attendant (built-in or external). This feature acts as an automatic operator that  
directs incoming callers to stations by offering a menu of dialing prompts.  
ACD  
Automatic Call Distribution. Allows incoming calls to be distributed to a group of  
ACD agents. The ACD supervisor’s LCD telephone displays ACD Agent and  
Group information which allows the supervisor to monitor calls and assist agents.  
ACD/MIS  
ADM  
Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) with Management Information System (MIS).  
Add-on Module—See DADM.  
Amphenol  
Connector  
A 25-pair connector typically used on a multi-button telephone set for interfacing  
cables to many electronic key and PBX systems.  
ANI  
Automatic Number Identification—Telephone number of the calling party is sent to  
the Strata DK system over incoming DID or tie lines. This feature is provided by  
some long distance telephone service companies.  
B-channel  
Used in ISDN. Data or voice information is transmitted on the B-channels of an  
ISDN line at 64kpbs. The B-channel refers to the frequency range of transmissions  
on a copper pair; it is a logical, rather than a physical channel. Also see BRI and  
PRI.  
B8ZS  
BGM  
Bipolar 8 Zero Substitution.  
Background Music—Allows customer-supplied music to be sent to telephone  
speakers and external speakers.  
bps  
Bits Per Second—Unit of measure that refers to the transmission speed (baud rate)  
of electronic signals. It is used when describing data interface unit and modem  
operation.  
BRI  
Basic Rate Interface—ISDN line with 2B + 1D channel. BRI lines can have a  
U-interface with RJ-11 jacks and single twisted pair wiring, or RJ-45 four pair S/T  
interface wiring.  
CAMA  
CESID  
Centralized Automatic Message Accounting. A special trunk provided by the phone  
company or the E911 Public Safety Answering Point Agency.  
Caller’s Emergency Service Identification—Telephone number for specific station  
or station location which is sent to the CAMA trunk.  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
GL-1  
Glossary  
CCVY ~ DK  
Term  
CCVY  
Definition  
Call Center Viewer “Y” Connector—Enables two-way transmissions between the  
Strata DK and a host PC, or SMIS equipment, and one-way transmissions to other  
PCs. There are four ports on the Call Center Viewer Connector for one Strata DK,  
another master port, and two additional ports.  
CLASS  
Custom Local Area Signaling Services—Defines a number of features offered by  
local telephone companies.  
CLID or CND  
Calling Line Identification or Calling Number Delivery—Telephone number or  
name of the calling party sent to the Strata DK system over incoming ground or  
loop start CO lines. This feature is one of the “CLASS” features offered by some  
local telephone companies.  
CO  
Central Office—The facility which houses switching equipment that provides  
telephone service (CO lines, E & M tie lines, DID lines, Centrex lines, etc.) for the  
immediate geographical area.  
CO Line  
A term used to define the Strata DK system hardware circuits that connect to the  
Central Office network line pair. Each CO line, DID and tie line circuit is assigned a  
CO line number in system software.  
CODECs  
DADM  
Coder/Decoder—Semiconductors that allow the system to process analog-to-digital  
and digital-to-analog conversions.  
Digital Add-on-Module—Optional device that connects to 2000-series digital  
telephones to provide the telephones with 20 flexible feature buttons that can be  
assigned individually for Direct Station Selection, System and Personal Speed Dial,  
and CO line access.  
D-channel  
DDCB  
Used in ISDN. This channel transmits call control information (out-of-band  
signaling) for B-channels. The D-channel is a logical, not a physical channel.  
Digital Door Phone/Lock Control Unit—A peripheral hardware unit compatible  
with designated digital telephone circuits that supports optional door phones  
(MDFBs) and provides door lock control.  
DDSS  
DIL  
Digital Direct Station Selection Console—A device that helps facilitate the  
processing of a heavy load of incoming calls. The DDSS connects only to  
designated digital telephone circuits, and is associated with a digital telephone.  
Direct In Line—Refers to two-way, standard CO trunk lines that are assigned to a  
particular extension or hunt group.  
DID Line  
DISA  
Direct Inward Dialing line.  
Direct Inward System Access—A feature that allows an outside party to access the  
Strata DK system internal stations or outgoing CO lines without having to go  
through an operator or automated attendant. An optional security code may be set to  
prevent unauthorized access to outgoing CO lines for through system calling.  
DK  
Digital Key.  
GL-2  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
Glossary  
DKAdmin ~ DVSU  
Term  
Definition  
DKAdmin  
Toshiba's customer database programming and upload/download software package  
for Strata DK systems.  
DKBackup  
DKT  
Toshiba’s customer database upload/download software package for Strata DK  
systems.  
Digital Telephone.  
DKT2000 series Toshiba proprietary digital telephones consisting of four models: two 10-button  
models with handsfree answerback and/or LCD display and two 20 button  
telephones with speakerphone or a speakerphone with LCD display.  
DKSU14A  
Strata DK14 Key Service Unit (KSU) with power supply. Equipped with two loop  
start CO line circuits and four digital telephone circuits built-in. Includes external  
page interface, MOH/BGM interface, power failure transfer and miscellaneous  
relay control.  
DKSUB280 or  
DKSUB424  
Base Cabinet—Unit that houses the Common Control Unit (RCTU), as well as six  
universal slots for station, line, and option PCBs. The Base Cabinet also contains a  
power supply that provides power for all of the stations and peripherals connected  
to the base cabinet PCBs.  
DKSUE280 or  
DKSUE424  
Expansion Cabinet—Optional unit that has six universal slots for station, line, and  
option PCBs. The expansion cabinet has a power supply that furnishes power for all  
of the stations and peripherals connected to the expansion cabinet PCBs. As many  
as five expansion cabinets can be added to the system.  
DKSUBI40  
Strata DK40i Base Key Service Unit (KSU) with power supply and battery charger.  
Equipped with eight digital telephone circuits built-in, and no CO line circuits.  
Includes external page interface, MOH/BGM interface, power failure transfer and  
miscellaneous relay control.  
[DN]  
Directory Number.  
DNIS  
Dialed Number Identification Service—Telephone number of called party is sent to  
the Strata DK over incoming DID or tie lines. This feature is provided by some long  
distance telephone companies.  
DPFT  
DSS  
Power Failure/Emergency Transfer Unit—An optional backup unit that provides  
emergency service during power failures by automatically connecting up to eight  
standard telephones to designated CO lines.  
Direct Station Selection—Feature which allows a telephone user (as well as a DSS  
console and ADM user) to call another station with the touch of a flexible feature  
button.  
DTMF  
DVSU  
Dual-tone Multi-frequency—Push-button tone dialing.  
A subassembly that equips a digital telephone with the capability to receive Speaker  
Off-hook Call Announce (OCA) calls. DVSU is not required to receive Handset  
OCA (HS-OCA).  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
GL-3  
Glossary  
E911 ~ ISDN  
Term  
Definition  
E911  
Enhanced 911 operation that provides more complete locator information to the  
responding agency.  
EKT  
ESF  
Electronic Telephone.  
Extended Super Frame.  
EOCU  
Off-hook Call Announce Subassembly—An optional upgrade to the Electronic  
Telephone Interface Unit (PEKU) or Electronic Telephone/Standard Telephone  
Interface Unit (PESU) that enables properly configured telephones (see HVSU2) to  
receive Off-hook Call Announce (OCA) calls.  
FCC  
Federal Communications Commission—The federal agency which regulates the  
telecommunication industry. All Toshiba hardware is FCC listed or approved.  
HDCB  
Electronic Door Phone/Lock Control Unit—A peripheral hardware unit compatible  
with designated electronic telephone circuits that supports optional door phones  
(MDFBs) and provides door lock control.  
HDSS  
Electronic Direct Station Selection Console—A device that helps facilitate the  
processing of a heavy load of incoming calls. The HDSS console connects only to  
designated electronic telephone circuits, and is associated with electronic  
telephones.  
HESB  
External Speaker Box—A speaker/amplifier that can be configured with the system  
to provide a variety of functions, such as a paging speaker and/or Background  
Music (BGM) speaker.  
HESC-65A  
HHEU  
A cable used to connect an HHEU-equipped digital telephone or an HHEU-  
equipped electronic telephone to the external speaker box (HESB) for the Loud  
Ringing Bell feature.  
Headset/Loud Ringing Bell Interface—Subassembly that fits inside a digital  
telephone or a 6500-series electronic telephone to allow a headset or an external  
speaker box (HESB) to be connected to the telephone.  
HPFB  
Optional Reserve Power Battery Charger (DK14)—One or two can be connected to  
the power supply to maintain normal operation during a power failure.  
HVSU2  
Subassembly that fits into a 6500-series electronic telephone enabling it to receive  
Off-hook Call Announce (OCA) calls. The telephone must be connected to an  
Electronic Telephone Interface Unit (PEKU) or a Standard Telephone/Electronic  
Telephone Interface Unit (PESU) equipped with an Off-hook Call Announce  
Subassembly (EOCU) to receive OCA, and must have three-pair wiring.  
IMDU  
ISDN  
Remote Maintenance Modem Subassembly—A subassembly installed on an Option  
Interface Unit (PIOU or PIOUS) that allows the system to be connected with a  
remote administration/maintenance terminal or DK Admin/DK Backup personal  
computer.  
Integrated Services Digital Network.  
GL-4  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
Glossary  
K4RCU3 ~ OCA  
Term  
K4RCU3  
Definition  
Dual-Tone Multi-Frequency (DTMF) Receiver/ABR Tone Detector Unit—An  
optional PCB installed on the TMAU motherboard. The K4RCU3A must be  
installed to recognize Dual-Tone Multi-Frequency (DTMF) tones generated by a  
standard telephone (or any other device connected to a standard telephone circuit)  
and it is required for Direct Inward System Access (DISA) and DID. The  
K4RCU3A circuits are also used to detect busy tone for the Automatic Busy Redial  
(ABR) feature and must be installed to allow ABR to operate.  
KCDU  
CO Line/Digital Telephone Interface Unit (DK40i)—The KCDU has two loop start  
CO line circuits and four digital telephone circuits. The KCDU digital telephone  
circuits can support all but one of the devices supported by either the PDKU or  
Base Unit integrated digital telephone circuits: digital telephones, PDIU-DIs/PDIU-  
D12s, PDIU-DSs, ADMs, DDCBs and RPCIs.  
KKYS  
Modular add-on key or integrated circuit that installs onto the K4RCU3 to add the  
auto attendant feature to the DK40i.  
KSTU2  
The optional PCB provides four standard telephone circuits and it can only be  
installed in the base unit. The KSTU2 supports the two-wire devices such as  
standard telephones, Auto Attendant devices, voice mail machines, and facsimile  
machines. The KSTU2 can also support an alternate Background Music (BGM)  
source on circuit four.  
LATA  
LCD  
Local Access and Transport Area.  
Liquid Crystal Display—The optional display on digital and electronic telephones  
that displays calling information.  
LCR  
LDI  
Least Cost Routing.  
Long Distance Information.  
LED  
Light Emitting Diode—Status indicators located on printed circuit boards (PCBs),  
digital telephones, and electronic telephones.  
LSI  
Large Scale Integration—Related to circuit design technology. Strata DK system  
printed circuit boards (PCBs) use LSI circuit design.  
MDF  
Main Distribution Frame—The wiring frame usually located in a phone closet.  
Door Phone Box—A peripheral two-way speaker box option.  
MDFB  
MOH  
Music-on-Hold—Customer-supplied music or announcements can be sent to parties  
on-hold on CO lines or the intercom.  
NDTU  
NT-1  
Toshiba 30-foot cable that connects the RDTU to the KSU.  
Used in ISDN. Network Termination device that powers a U-interface ISDN line  
and enables multiple S/T ISDN devices to connect to it. The NT-1 must be  
UL-listed (U.S.) or CSA-certified (Canada).  
OCA  
Off-hook Call Announce. There are two types: Handset OCA and Speaker OCA.  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
GL-5  
Glossary  
OPS ~ PEPU  
Term  
Definition  
OPS  
Off-premises Station.  
PBTC  
A Toshiba-supplied cable used to connect customer-supplied batteries to a cabinet  
power supply in a one- or two-cabinet system for emergency reserve power for the  
entire system.  
PBX  
Private Branch Exchange—Industry-standard term which refers to a telephone  
switch, usually on-premises, which serves an individual company, and is connected  
to a public telephone exchange through the Central Office (CO).  
PCB  
Printed Circuit Board.  
PCM  
Pulse Code Modulation—A widely-used form of digital telephone switching.  
PCOU  
CO Line Interface Unit—An optional PCB (an older version of RCOU) that  
provides the system with four loop start CO lines. Supports Caller ID when used  
with RCIU/RCIS circuits.  
PDIU-DI2  
Integrated Data Interface Unit—Replaces the normal digital telephone base so that  
the telephone can be used for the transmission and reception of data between a  
terminal/personal computer connected to the telephone and devices connected to  
other PDIU-DIs or to modems, printers, and computers which are in turn connected  
to PDIU-DSs. The PDIU-DI is also used to provide personal computer auto dialing  
of voice calls without a modem; and, access to outside dial-up data services and/or  
bulletin boards via modem pooling.  
Note Replaced by RPCI-DI.  
PDIU-DS  
PDKU2  
Stand-alone Data Interface Unit—Used for modem pooling, printer sharing, and  
accessing host/mainframe computer.  
Digital Telephone Interface Unit—An optional PCB that provides the system with  
eight digital telephone circuits. In addition to digital telephones, the PDKU can  
support data interface units (stand-alone and integrated), a digital DSS console  
(DDSS), RPCI, ADM, and a digital door phone/lock control unit (DDCB).  
[PDN]  
PEKU  
Primary Directory Number.  
Electronic Telephone Interface Unit—An optional PCB that provides the system  
with eight electronic telephone circuits, which can support electronic telephones, a  
Background Music source, a door phone/lock control unit (HDCB), an electronic  
DSS console (HDSS), and amplifiers for two CO-line conference calls. The PEKU  
is also used with older Strata systems.  
PEMU  
PEPU  
E & M Tie Line Unit—An optional PCB (an older version of REMU) that provides  
the system with support for four E & M Type I tie lines. The PEMU is also used  
with older Strata systems.  
External Page Interface Unit—An optional PCB that provides support and/or circuit  
interface mainly for optional hardware peripherals and upgrades associated with  
external paging functions.  
GL-6  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
Glossary  
PESU ~ QCDU2  
Term  
PESU  
Definition  
Standard/Electronic Telephone Interface Unit—An optional PCB that provides the  
system with a combination of two standard and four electronic telephone circuits.  
The standard telephone circuits can support standard telephones and optional  
hardware peripherals, such as voice mail devices and fax machines. Except for the  
electronic DSS console, the PESU electronic telephone circuits can support the  
same stations and peripherals that the PEKU does. The PESU is also used with  
older Strata systems.  
[PhDN]  
PIOU  
Phantom Directory Number.  
Option Interface Unit—An optional PCB that provides support and/or circuit  
interface for optional hardware peripherals and upgrades.  
PIOUS  
The same as the PIOU, with some exceptions; most notably, the PIOUS has one  
external paging interface zone, while the PIOU has four.  
PORT  
A term used to identify a station circuit or CO line circuit location.  
PBTC1A-3M  
Battery cable that connects reserve power batteries to cabinet RPSU280 power  
supplies (102 cabinet installations).  
PPTC  
PPTC  
A Toshiba-supplied adapter—An adapter that is used to connect: an SMDR device,  
ASCII maintenance terminal, or remote maintenance external modem.  
A Toshiba-supplied adapter—An adapter that is used to connect: the modular  
SMDR, SMDI, MIS for ACD, Open Architecture (OA), maintenance ports of the  
PIOU, PIOUS, RSSU, RSIU, or RSIS to the DB-9 (PPTC-9) connector of a call  
accounting machine, DK Admin, DK Backup personal computer (PC), SMIS  
personal computer or Open Architecture personal computer.  
PPTC-9  
Designed to connect directly to the DB9 connector of PC COM ports, while PPTC  
connects directly to an ASCII terminal female DB25, not a PC COM port male  
DB25.  
PPTC-25F  
Used to connect a Call Center Viewer PC or SMIS PC to the RS-232 Strata DK424  
MIS port on the PIOU, PIOUS, RSIU, or RSSU.  
PRI  
Primary Rate Interface.  
PSTU2  
Standard Telephone Interface Unit—An optional PCB (an older version of RSTU2)  
with a built-in ring generator that provides interface for eight standard telephones or  
optional hardware peripherals (voice mail devices, Background Music source, fax  
machines, etc.). The PSTU2 has a square wave ring generator that can be set for  
190V peak-to-peak or 130V peak-to-peak. The PSTU2 is also used with older  
Strata systems.  
PSTN  
Public Switched Telephone Network.  
QCDU2  
CO Line Digital Telephone Interface Unit (DK14)—Provides one CO line (loop  
start) circuit and two digital telephone circuits on each PCB. The QCDU2 interfaces  
with digital telephones, PDIU-DIs/PDIU-DI2s/RPCI-DI, ADMs connected to the  
telephones and PDIU-DSs, but does not support a DDSS or DDCB console.  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
GL-7  
Glossary  
QKYS ~ RCMS  
Term  
Definition  
QKYS  
Auto Attendant Feature Key (DK14)—Provides built-in Auto Attendant software  
without Program 03 assignments and installs directly onto the QRCU3 PCB.  
QSTU2  
Standard Telephone Interface Unit (DK14)—Provides two standard telephone  
circuits (ports) and interfaces with standard telephones, Auto Attendant devices,  
separate BGM source connections, voice mail machines, and facsimile machines.  
QRCU2  
RAM  
DTMF Receiver/ABR Tone Detector Unit (DK14)—Provides three circuits to  
receive DTMF tones (required for DISA and devices connected to QSTU2s), and  
three circuits to detect busy tone (required for the ABR feature).  
Random Access Memory—Refers to the type of system memory that holds  
individual system configuration and feature programming. RAM is read/write  
memory, and can be easily revised in programming.  
RATU  
RBDB  
Attendant Console Interface Unit—Optional PCB that can support up to four  
attendant consoles and/or PC attendant consoles.  
Battery Distribution Box—Interface used to connect reserve power batteries to  
systems with three or more cabinets (also provides six RBTC1A-1.5M cables to  
connect RBDB to cabinet RPSU280 power supplies).  
RBSU  
RBSS  
ISDN Basic Rate Interface (BRI) Unit—Provides two circuits, each of which  
provide two simultaneous voice and/or data connections with a single interface.  
BRI uses the 2B+D transmission format which is defined as two 64-kbps bearer  
channels and one 16-kbps data (control channel). Available for DK424 with  
Release 4.1.  
ISDN Basic Rate Interface (BRI) Subassembly—Attaches to the RBSU to provide  
two additional BRI “U” circuits that can be used to connect to Network BRI lines  
and/or station-side connections only. Available for DK424 with Release 4.1.  
RBTC1A-2M  
RBUU  
Battery cable that connects reserve power batteries to RBDB battery distribution  
box (3 or more cabinet installations).  
ISDN Basic Rate Interface (BRI) Unit—Provides two BRI “U” circuits. Each  
circuit provides two simultaneous voice and/or data connections with a single  
interface. BRI uses the 2B+D transmission format which is defined as two 64-kbps  
bearer channels and one 16-kbps data (control) channel. Available for DK424 with  
Release 4.2.  
RBUS  
ISDN Basic Rate Interface (BRI) Subassembly—Attaches to the RBUU to provide  
two additional BRI “U” circuits that can be used to connect to Network BRI lines  
and/or station-side connections only. An RBUU with the RBUS subassembly  
provides four BRI “U” circuits in one card slot. Available for DK424 with Release  
4.2.  
RCMS  
Enhanced 911 (E911) CAMA Trunk Direct Subassembly—Enables the DK424  
(Release 4.0 and above) to connect to one or two CAMA trunks. Two RCMS PCBs  
enable connection to four CAMA trunks.  
GL-8  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
Glossary  
RMCU ~ RGLU  
Term  
RMCU  
Definition  
Enhanced 911 (E911) CAMA Trunk Direct Interface—Enables connection from the  
DK424 (Release 4.0 and above) to E911 locator services without third-party  
equipment. The RMCU supports two subassemblies (RCMS) that provide a total of  
up to four ports.  
RCCB  
Conduit Connection Box—Device required for floor-mounted systems with three or  
more cabinets to connect AC power and reserve power battery cabling to the  
system. Cabling from the AC power source and from the reserve power battery  
source can only be installed by a licensed electrician.  
RCIU2/RCIS  
Four-circuit plug-in PCB/four-circuit piggy-back PCB, each of which receives and  
decodes FSK Caller ID (CLID or CND) information from the Central Office ground  
or loops Caller ID lines. Each RCIU/RCIS circuit works in conjunction with a  
DK424 RGLU/RCOU/RCOS line PCB circuit.  
RCOS  
RCOU  
Loop Start CO Line Interface Subassembly—Optional subassembly that attaches to  
the RCOU PCB to provide four additional CO analog line circuits to the PCB.  
Supports Caller ID when used with RCIU/RCIS circuits.  
CO Line Interface Unit—An optional PCB that provides the system with four loop  
start CO lines. An optional RCOS subassembly can be attached to the RCOU for  
four more loop start analog CO lines. Supports Caller ID when used with RCIU/  
RCIS circuits.  
RCTU  
Common Control Unit—The system’s controller PCB that contains the system's  
main microprocessor and microprocessor bus, ROM, RAM, time switch logic, busy  
tone detectors, system tones and MOH/BGM Interface. RCTUs include: RCTUA,  
RCTUB, RCTUBA/BB, RCTUC/D, and RCTUE/F. Each RCTU supports different  
station and line capacities. The RCTU PCBs also provide interface for the optional  
RRCS PCB and RKYS key.  
RDDU  
RDSU  
Direct Inward Dialing Interface Unit—Optional PCB that provides four analog  
Direct Inward Dialing line circuits. Supports ANI and DNIS.  
Digital/Standard Telephone Interface Unit—Optional PCB that provides two  
standard telephone and four digital telephone circuits in its basic configuration. An  
RSTS can be attached to the RDSU for two additional standard telephone circuits.  
RDTU  
REMU  
T1/DS-1 Interface Unit—Optional PCB that provides up to 24-digital channels that  
can individually be assigned for loop start CO line, ground start CO line, E & M tie  
line, or DID line operation. Supports ANI and DNIS.  
E & M Tie Line Unit—An optional PCB that provides the system with support for  
four E & M Type I or Type II, Immediate or Wink Start tie lines. Supports ANI and  
DNIS.  
RFIF  
Floor Mount Installation Kit—Kit that is used to floor mount systems.  
RGLU  
Analog Ground/Loop Start CO Line Interface Unit—Provides four CO line circuits  
that can be individually configured for loop start or ground start CO line operation.  
Supports Caller ID when used with RCIU/RCIS circuits.  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
GL-9  
Glossary  
RKYS ~ RSIS  
Term  
RKYS  
Definition  
Feature Key Upgrade—Subassembly that attaches to the common control unit to  
provide the system with optional features. There are four versions of the RKYS: the  
RKYS1, the RKYS2, the RKYS3 and the RKYS4, each of which provides a distinct  
set of features.  
RMDS  
Remote Maintenance Modem Subassembly—A subassembly installed on the RSIU  
Optional Interface Unit that allows the system to be connected with a remote  
administration/maintenance terminal or DK Admin/DK Backup personal computer.  
RPCI-DI  
Computer Data Interface Unit—Replaces the normal telephone base and provides  
all the functions of PDIU-D12. In addition, it can be switched to a second mode  
automatically and used with a Telephone Application Program Interface (TAPI)  
software application.  
RPTU  
ISDN Primary Rate Interface (PRI) Unit—Provides 1 data (control) channel and 23  
bearer channels.All B-channels appear and program as CO lines in the DK424  
system and can be individually configured for local service, FX, WATS, DID, tie,  
etc., service operation. Supported by the RCTUBA3/BB4, RCTUC3/D4 and  
RCTUE3/F4.  
ROM  
Read Only Memory—Refers to the type of system memory that holds static  
software that comprises the mechanics of the features’ functions. ROM is only  
revised by Toshiba software engineers.  
RPSB (1 and 2)  
Power Strip—Interface between cabinet power supplies and the commercial AC  
power source. The RPSB provides outlets for three power supplies. One RSPS is  
required for systems with three or four cabinets, two or three RSPSs for five- or six-  
cabinet systems.  
RPSU280  
RRCS  
Cabinet Power Supply—Furnishes power to all of the stations and peripherals  
connected to the cabinet PCBs. Each Base and optional expansion cabinet has a  
separate power supply.  
Dual-tone Multi-frequency Receiver—An optional upgrade to the system common  
control unit (RCTU) that provides Dual-tone Multi-Frequency (DTMF) receivers  
for system Direct Inward System Access (DISA) CO lines, E&M tie lines, DID,  
DNIS and ANI lines, Auto attendant announcement devices, remote change of call  
forward-external destination, DNIS external call routing, and stations and other  
peripherals that connect to standard telephone circuits. The RRCS comes in three  
models: the RRCS-4 (provides four DTMF receivers), the RRCS-8 (eight DTMF  
receivers), and the RRCS-12 (12 DTMF receivers).  
RSIS  
Optional RS-232 Serial Interface Unit—A subassembly installed on the RSIU  
optional interface unit that allows the system to be connected to any of the  
following features: voice mail SMDI, MIS for ACD, SMDR, local DK Admin/DK  
Backup personal computer, external maintenance modem, Open Architecture  
personal computer.  
GL-10  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
Glossary  
RSIU ~ TAPI  
Term  
Definition  
RSIU  
Optional RS-232 Serial Interface Unit—An optional PCB that provides interface to  
any of the following features: voice mail SMDI, MIS for ACD, SMDR, local or  
remote DK Admin/DK Backup Personal computer, built-in (RMDS) or external  
system maintenance modem, Open Architecture personal computer. By itself, the  
RSIU PCB provides one interface port. With up to three RSIU/RMDS  
subassemblies, it can provide up to four interface ports.  
RSTU  
Standard Telephone Interface Unit—An optional PCB (an older version of RSTU2)  
with a built-in ring generator that provides interface for eight-standard telephones  
or optional hardware peripherals (voice mail devices, Background music source,  
fax machines, etc.). The RSTU has a built-in 80V RMS sine wave ring generator.  
The RSTU also has connectors for the R48S, which extends station loop length and  
is described in this section.  
RSTU2  
Standard Telephone Interface Unit—An optional PCB functionally identical to the  
RSTU. RSTU2 also contains a 90-volt DC message waiting/generator/switching  
circuit to operate standard telephone message waiting lamps.  
RWBF1  
RWIU/WWIS  
RFMF  
Wall bracket Fixture—Bracket that is part of an installation kit (RFIF) that is used  
to floor mount systems.  
Strata AirLink Wireless System Interface Unit—A proprietary PCB that enables  
wireless telephone functionality to Strata DK systems.  
Floor Mount Fixture—Fixture that is part of an installation kit (RFIF) that is used to  
floor mount systems.  
R48S  
Optional 48V Power Supply—Subassembly that can be connected to the RSTU or  
RDSU to extend the loop length of standard telephone circuits (including the  
resistance of the phone) from 600 ohms to 1200 ohms.  
[SDN]  
SF  
Secondary Directory Number.  
Super Frame.  
SLT  
Single-line Telephone.  
SMDI  
Simplified Message Desk Interface: RS-232 link from PIOU, PIOUS, RSSU, RSIS,  
or RSIU modular jack connected to a voice mail machine to provide Strata DK  
voice mail integration.  
SMIS  
Software MIS for ACD.  
SSTU  
Factory-installed sub-unit board that is “piggy-backed” onto the PSTU or PSTU2.  
S/T Interface  
Reference interface points (“S” or “T”) of an ISDN network. S/T interfaces are  
RJ-45, 8-wire connection interfaces for ISDN equipment. An NT-1 is needed to  
network U-type BRI lines to S/T type interfaces.  
TAPI  
Telephone Application Programming Interface.  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
GL-11  
Glossary  
TA ~ WSIU  
Term  
Definition  
TA  
Terminal Adapter or ISDN modem that converts PC and other types of protocol into  
a signal that works with ISDN. Generally, TAs support RJ-11 voice ports and RS-  
232C or V.35 or V.449 data interfaces.  
T1/DS-1  
TCIU1  
See RDTU.  
Caller ID—An optional PCB that provides the Caller ID option in the Strata  
DK424.  
TCIU2  
TCOU  
Caller ID—An optional PCB that provides the Caller ID option in the Strata DK40i.  
Four-Circuit Loop Start CO Line Board— An optional PCB providing four loop  
start CO line circuits in the Strata DK40i.  
TDDU  
TE  
Four-Circuit DID Line Digital Telephone Interface Unit— An optional PCB  
providing four DID line circuits in the Strata DK40i.  
Terminal Equipment. This refers to devices using ISDN service (telephones, faxes,  
computers, etc.). TE1 supports ISDN formats with S/T or U-type intefaces.  
TSPI  
TSIU  
Telephony Service Provider Interface.  
RS-232 Ports—An optional PCB that provides up to two RS-232 interface ports  
(modular jacks) enabling the DK40i to connect to various hardware devices.  
TTY  
Flexible RS-232 port which can be used for maintenance SMDI and MIS (ACD).  
U Interface  
A single twisted pair of copper wire on an RJ-11 jack. The wiring is identical to  
POTS, with different signaling. Only one U-interface device can be attached per  
line.  
Universal slot  
WSIU  
Slots in a telephone KSU/cabinet that are used for a variety of optional PCBs.  
Serial Interface Board (DK14)—Provides two serial ports for either a Station  
Message Detail Recording (SMDR) device or a maintenance terminal or modem, or  
Caller ID interface.  
GL-12  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
Index  
caller ID circuit assignments to CO line PCBs  
A
(see Program 50)  
alert signal  
*
CAMA trunks  
button assignments, 3-118  
911 (enhanced) trunks, 8-1  
CO line  
button programming example, 3-119  
alternate background music source  
slot assignment (see Program 19)  
attendant console  
assign groups (see Program 16)  
special ringing assignments (see Program 78)  
tenant assignments (see Program 15)  
answer button priority assignments, 3-133  
display type, 3-132  
flexible button codes (see Program 59)  
overflow destination assignments, 3-134  
overflow timer, 3-132  
*
CO, DID, and tie line ring transfer (see Program 37)  
computer and data interface unit configuration (see  
Program 20)  
computer and DIU station hunting for data calls  
(see Program 22)  
credit card dialing (0+) (see Program 43)  
series (DK424, see Program 58)  
auto attendant  
built-in prompt/station assignments (see  
Program 09)  
automatic PCB recognition and port renumber (see  
Program 91-1)  
D
data transfer  
from temporary memory to working memory  
(see Program 91-2)  
date, 1-15  
automatic preference (see Program 32)  
day, 1-15  
B
DID intercept port number (see Program 17)  
backup RAM initialization (see Program 92)  
*
DID/tie line options (see Program 17)  
direct inward dialing parameters (see Program  
*64-1)  
directory number button assignments, 3-115  
distributed hunt group member assignments  
(DK424, see Program 40)  
[DN] to [DN], tie to [DN], and DID to [DN] ringing  
assignments (see Program 71~ 73)  
C
cabinet type identification (DK424, see Program  
03)  
*
call forward external (remote change, security) ID  
code (see Program 60-8)  
call forward station ring assignment (see Program  
*80), 3-174  
*
*
*
DNIS (see Program 71)  
DNIS number network table assignments (see  
Program 72)  
call park pickup abbreviated dialing (see Program  
05)  
*
caller emergency service identification  
(CESID), 8-1  
caller ID / ANI  
abandoned call number station owner  
assignments (see Program 52)  
*
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
IN-1  
Index  
E ~ I  
door phone  
busy signal/door lock assignments (see  
H
hardware requirements (minimum), 1-14  
hold recall timing (see Program 34)  
Program 77-2)  
to [DN] flashing assignments (see Program  
79)  
*
I
door phone ringing (see Program 79)  
initialization (system), 1-14  
initialize Programs 00~ 99 (see Program 90)  
Integrated Systems Digital Networking (ISDN),  
7-1  
internal and tie line call assignments, 3-17  
ISDN  
*
E
E911, 8-1  
CAMA  
digits sent on 911 calls (see Program *11-5)  
DK424 operation overview, 8-1  
trunk group  
ACD and ISDN parameters, including BRI,  
PRI T-Wait and 3.1k audio (see Program  
10-4)  
line assignments (see Program *11-1)  
trunk group hunting (see Program *11-2)  
CESID station information (see Program  
*12), 8-11  
E911/CAMA trunks (see Program *11-0)  
interdigital timer (see Program 10-91)  
analog trunk services (see Program *61)  
assign CO line groups (see Program 16)  
BRI line/station operation (see Program *60)  
BRI SPID parameters (see Program *44)  
call types for ISDN trunk group  
(see Programs *67-2 and *67-3)  
call types for ISDN trunk groups (see Program  
*67-3)  
call-by-call trunk group codes and network ID  
(see Programs *66-2, *66-4)  
calling number ID presentation parameters (see  
Program *68-1)  
channel group number parameters (see  
Program *66-1)  
channel group/trunk parameters (see Program  
*66-3)  
channel groups (see Program *65)  
clock source (see Program *42)  
CNIS presentation parameters (see Program  
*69-1)  
*
interdigital timer (see Program *11-6)  
pause before send timer (see Program 10-92)  
*
programming overview, 8-3  
SMDR, 8-2  
special [DN] notification (see Program *11-8)  
standard telephone ports assignment (see  
Programs 10-11 and 10-12)  
*
*
station to CAMA trunk group (see Program  
*13)  
EKT and DKT ringing tones (CO line calls) (see  
Program 80)  
emergency bypass of forced/verified account codes  
(see Program 44-91~93)  
enhanced 911 (see Program 10)  
extension assignments (see Program 09)  
*
*
D-channel control and NFAS (see Program  
*43-1~3)  
dialing parameters (see Program *63)  
DID/DNIS digits for trunk groups (see Program  
*64-2)  
F
first-time programming, 1-14  
fixed call forward (see Program 36)  
flexible access code numbering (see Program 05)  
flexible button assignments (see Program 39)  
flexible PCB cabinet slot assignments  
DK424 (see Program 03)  
LDN  
registrations (see Program *66-5)  
trunk group (see Program *66-7)  
trunk group to channel group (see Program  
*66-6)  
G
line directory number (see LDN)  
network PRI interface (see Program *43-3)  
ground/loop/tie/DID line options (see Program 15)  
group pickup assignments (see Program 31)  
*
IN-2  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
Index  
K ~ P  
non-facility associated signaling (see Program  
*43-2)  
schedule assignments for LCR plans (see  
Program 53)  
non-ISDN station bearer service (see Program  
*62)  
outbound CNIS parameters (see Program  
*68-2)  
special codes (see Program 50-3)  
station group assignments (see Program 56)  
LCR/toll restriction  
bypass for special numbers  
related programs  
(see Program 45-2 (1~6))  
*
ACD/ISDN parameters (see Program 10-4)  
attendant console feature buttons (see  
Program 59)  
(see Program 45-3 (1~9))  
*
dial plan (see Program 45-1)  
special code dialing sequence with LCR (see  
least cost routing modified digits (see  
Programs 55-1 and 55-2)  
Program 45-4)  
least cost routing (see LCR)  
*
station class of service (see Program 30)  
system assignments, BRI lines (see  
Program 10-1)  
M
message center  
telephone feature buttons (see Program 39)  
special number assignment (see Program *69-  
2)  
defining (see Program 13)  
minimum hardware requirements, 1-14  
modem pool port assignments (see Program 21)  
trunk groups  
call direction (see Program *67-1)  
maximum channel reservation (see  
Program *67-4)  
N
night ringing over PIOU external page zones (see  
Program 77-3)  
trunk groups (see Program *16)  
numerical program listing, 1-1  
K
P
keystrip  
assignments  
2000-series digital telephone, 3-106  
park recall training (see Program 37)  
*
PBX centrex access codes (see Program 42-1~8)  
peripheral options (door phones), RSIU / RSIS /  
RMDS, PIOU/PIOUS / IMDU, PEPU (see  
Program 77-1)  
template, 1-13  
types (see Program 38)  
[PhDN] owner telephone assignment (see Program  
L
33)  
*
LCR, 4-28  
area codes (see Program 51)  
Program 03 – DK424 cabinet type  
*
identification, 3-11  
CO line programming reference table, 5-3  
conditions, 5-2  
Program 04 – [PhDN] assignments for internal and  
*
tie line calls, 3-17  
dial 0 (zero) time-out (see Program 50-6)  
features, 5-1  
Program 05 – call park pickup abbreviated  
*
dialing, 3-22  
home area code (see Program 50-2)  
local call plan number (see Program 50-5)  
long distance information (LDI) plan number  
(see Program 50-4)  
Program 09 – [PDN], [PhDN], DH, ACD or  
*
modem DID extension assignments, 3-25  
Program *09 – ACD group DID/tie line digit  
assignments, 6-5  
modified digits table (see Program 55-0)  
modified digits table (see Program 55-1)  
office code exceptions for specified area code  
(see Program 52)  
parameters (see Program 50-1)  
route definition tables (see Program 54)  
Program 10-11 – E911 standard telephone ports  
*
assignment, 3-39  
Program 10-12  
*
E911 standard telephone ports assignment,  
3-39  
Program 10-91 – E911 interdigital timer, 3-40  
*
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
IN-3  
Index  
P ~ P  
Program 10-92 – E911 pause before send timer,  
Program 45-3 (1~9) – LCR/toll restriction bypass  
*
*
3-40  
for special numbers, 4-26  
Program 10 – enhanced 911 operation, 3-39  
Program 45-4 – special code dialing sequence with  
*
*
Program *11-0 – E911/CAMA trunks, 8-4  
Program *11-1 – CAMA trunk group line  
assignments, 8-6  
LCR, 4-28  
Program 50 – caller ID circuit assignments to CO  
*
line PCBs, 3-126  
Program *11-2 – CAMA trunk group hunting  
assignments, 8-7  
Program 51 – station memory allocation for store  
*
caller ID / ANI, 3-128  
Program *11-5 – CAMA digits sent on 911  
calls, 8-8  
Program *11-6 – E911 interdigital timer, 8-9  
Program *11-8 – 911 special [DN] notification  
assignments, 8-10  
Program *12 – CESID station information, 8-11  
Program *13 – station to CAMA trunk group, 8-13  
Program *14-1 – auto answer with zip tone, 6-14  
Program *14-2 – DID, tie, DNIS, ANI line after  
shift/overflow substitution destinations, 6-18  
Program 52 – caller ID / ANI abandoned call  
*
number station owner assignments, 3-130  
Program *60 – BRI Line/station operation  
assignment, 7-14  
Program *61 – analog trunk services for ISDN,  
7-15  
Program *62 – non-ISDN station bearer service,  
7-16  
Program *63 – ISDN dialing parameters, 7-17  
Program *64-1 – direct inward dialing  
parameters, 7-18  
Program 15 – CO line tenant assignments, 3-47  
*
Program *16 – ISDN trunk group type  
assignment, 7-7  
Program *64-2 – number of DID/DNIS Digits for  
trunk groups, 7-19  
Program 17 – DID intercept port number (vacant  
Program *65 – ISDN channel group assignment,  
7-20  
*
or wrong number), 3-53  
Program 31 – group pickup assignments, 3-86  
Program *66-1 – channel group number  
parameters, 7-21  
Program *66-3 – channel group/trunk  
parameters, 7-24  
Program *66-5 – line directory number (LDN)  
registrations, 7-25  
Program *66-6 – LDN/trunk group to channel  
group assignments, 7-26  
*
Program 32 – RS-232 voice mail message center  
*
port, 3-89  
Program 33 – [PhDN] owner telephone  
*
assignment, 3-92  
Program 34 – station class of service, 3-95  
*
*
Program 36 – system NT button lock password  
changing station assignment, 3-102  
Program 37 – park recall timing, 3-104  
Program *66-7 – LDN/trunk group assignment,  
7-27  
Program *67-1 – trunk group call direction, 7-28  
Program *67-2 – call types for ISDN trunk group  
supported, 7-29  
*
Program 40 for DK424 – distributed hunt group  
*
member assignments, 3-120  
Program 41 for DK424 – T1 assignment series  
*
(part 1), 3-122  
Program *42 – clock source for T1, ISDN –  
Program *43-1~3 – D-channel control and  
NFAS assignments, 7-10  
Program *43-2 – non-facility associated signaling  
(NFAS) assignment, 7-11  
Program *43-3 – network PRI interface  
assignment, 7-12  
Program *44 – BRI service profile iIdentifier  
(SPID) parameters, 7-13  
Program *67-3 – call types for ISDN trunk  
groups, 7-30  
Program *67-4 – ISDN trunk groups maximum  
channel reservation, 7-31  
Program *68-1 – calling number ID presentation  
parameters, 7-33  
Program *68-2 – outbound CNIS parameters, 7-34  
Program *69-1 – CNIS presentation parameters,  
7-35  
Program 45-1 – toll restriction for office codes,  
Program *69-2 – special number assignment, 7-36  
Program 71~ 73 – [DN] to [DN], tie to [DN], and  
*
4-23  
*
*
Program 45-2 (1~6) – LCR/toll restriction bypass  
DID to [DN] ringing assignments, 3-152  
*
for special numbers, 4-24  
Program 79 – door phone to [DN] flashing  
*
assignments, 3-172  
IN-4  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
Index  
P ~ P  
Program *80 – call forward station ring  
assignment, 3-174  
Program 15 – ground/loop/tie/DID line options,  
3-44, 6-36  
Program 00-part 1 – software check, 2-12  
Program 00-part 2 – RCTU RAM test, 2-15  
Program 01-station logical port display and/or  
change, 3-1  
Program 02 – station physical port display and/or  
change, 3-2, 6-3, 6-5  
Program 03 – DK424 flexible PCB cabinet slot  
assignments, 3-6  
RSIU, RSSU, PIOU, PIOUS ACD/MIS slot  
assignments, 6-2  
Program 04 – station logical port [PDN]  
assignment, 3-12  
Program 16 – assign CO line groups (dial 9 or  
801~816), 3-48  
Program 17 – DID/tie line options, 3-50, 6-36  
Program 18 – agent names for SMIS/MIS  
assignments, 6-15  
Program 19 – alternate background music source  
slot assignment, 3-54  
Program 20 – computer and data interface unit  
configuration, 3-55  
Program 21 – modem pool port assignments, 3-58  
Program 22 – computer and DIU station hunting for  
data calls, 3-60  
Program 05 – flexible access code numbering,  
3-19  
Program 09 – auto attendant prompt/ACD  
group, 6-3  
built-in auto attendant prompt/station  
assignments, 3-23  
Program 10-1 – system assignments – part 1 of  
3, 3-27  
Program 32 – automatic preference, 3-87  
Program 33 – [PDN]/ [PhDN] station hunting  
(voice calls only), 3-90  
Program 34 – hold recall timing, 3-94  
Program 35 – station class of service, 3-97, 6-36  
Program 36 – fixed call forward, 3-101, 3-109  
Program 37 – CO, DID, and tie line ring transfer  
(camp-on) recall time, 3-103  
Program 10-2 – system assignments – part 2 of  
3, 3-30  
Program 38 – digital and electronic telephone  
keystrip type, 3-105  
Program 10-3 – system assignments – part 3 of  
3, 3-35  
Program 10-4 – ACD/ISDN parameters, 6-6  
Program 11 – ACD timing assignments, 6-8  
Program 12 – system assignments, basic timing,  
3-41  
Program 13 – defining the message center, 3-43  
Program 14-0 – loop/ground start line direct to  
ACD group assignments, 6-12  
Program 14-1 – ACD agent ID code  
assignments, 6-13  
Program 39 – flexible button assignments, 3-111  
Program 40 – station CO line access, 4-4  
Program 41 – station outgoing call restriction, 4-6  
Program 42-0 – CO line to PBX/centrex connection  
& access codes, 4-8  
Program 42-1~8 – PBX/centrex access codes, 4-10  
Program 43 – 0 + credit card dialing, 4-11  
Program 44-1~8 – toll restriction/traveling class  
override codes, 4-13  
Program 44-91~93 – emergency bypass of forced/  
verified account codes, 4-14  
Program 14-2 – ACD supervisor passwords, 6-17  
Program 14-3 – announcement/music port and  
queue pattern, 6-20  
Program 14-4 – queue time out overflow  
destination, 6-23  
Program 45-1 – LCR/toll restriction dial plan,  
4-14, 4-15  
Program 45-2 – toll restriction disable, 4-19  
Program 45-3~6 – special common carrier numbers  
& authorization code digit length, 4-20  
Program 45-8~9 – toll restriction override code,  
4-22  
Program 14-5 – overflow point and ring no answer  
routing destination, 6-25  
Program 14-6 – after shift service destination, 6-29  
Program 14-71 – queue size for alarm, immediate  
assignments, 6-31  
Program 14-72 – queue size for alarm 1, 6-32  
Program 14-73 – queue size for alarm 2, 6-33  
Program 14-8 – alarm pattern assignments, 6-34  
Program 14-9 – work unit assignments, 6-35  
Program 46-10~80 – toll restriction class  
parameters, 4-33  
Program 46-11~46-81 – toll restriction class (1~8)  
parameters, 4-35  
Program 46-2~4 – toll restriction allowed/denied  
area codes assigned by class, 4-30  
Program 47 – toll restriction exception office codes  
assigned by area codes (tables 1~16), 4-36  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
IN-5  
Index  
R ~ S  
Program 48 – station toll restriction  
classification, 4-38  
Program 77-4 – RSIU open architecture (OA) data  
output assignments, 3-166  
Program 50-1 – LCR parameters, 5-4  
Program 50-2 – LCR home area code, 5-5  
Program 50-3 (1~5) – LCR special codes, 5-6  
Program 50-4 – LCR long distance information  
(LDI) plan number, 5-7  
Program 78 – CO line special ringing  
assignments, 3-168  
Program 79 – door phone ringing, 3-170  
Program 80 – EKT and DKT ringing tones (CO line  
calls), 3-173  
Program 50-5 – LCR local call plan number, 5-8  
Program 50-6 – LCR dial 0 (zero) time-out, 5-9  
Program 51 – LCR area codes, 5-10  
Program 52 – LCR office code exceptions for  
specified area code, 5-12  
Program 53 – LCR schedule assignments for LCR  
plans, 5-14  
Program 54 – LCR route definition tables, 5-17  
Program 55-0 – LCR modified digits table, 5-19  
Program 55-1 – LCR modified digits table –  
add, 5-21  
Program 90-initialize programs 00~ 99, 2-4  
Program 91-1-automatic PCB recognition and port  
renumber, 2-6  
Program 91-2 – data transfer from temporary  
memory to working memory, 2-8  
Program 91-9-system initialization, 2-2  
Program 92-initializing misc. backup RAM, 2-9  
program listing  
*
numerical, 1-1  
program sequence, 1-11  
programming  
Program 56 – LCR station group assignments,  
5-23  
data variations, 1-12  
first-time, 1-14  
Program 58 – DK424 attendant console series (part  
1), 3-132  
keystrip template, 1-13  
overview, 1-1  
Program 59 – attendant console flexible button  
codes, 3-135  
section layout, 1-10  
programs  
Program 60 – SMDR data output options, 3-139  
Program 60-2~7 – SMDR output/account code digit  
length, 3-140  
system and station, 3-1  
Programs *66-2 and *66-4-call-by-call trunk group  
codes and network ID, 7-22  
Program 60-8 – call forward external (remote  
change, security) ID code, 3-142  
Program 69 – verified account codes, 3-143  
Program 70 – verified account code toll restriction  
assignments, 3-145  
R
RAM test  
RCTU (see Program 00)  
RDDU, 6-1  
Program 71 – DID/tie/DNIS/ANI lines, 6-36  
DNIS, 3-147  
Program 72 – DNIS number network table  
assignments, 3-154  
RSIU open architecture (OA) data output  
assignments (see Program 77-4)  
RSIU, RSSU, PIOU, PIOUS ACD/MIS slot  
assignments (see Program 03)  
Program 74 – system NT button lock password,  
3-156  
S
Program 76-1(X-Y) – TSIU and RSIU / RSIS /  
RMDS port assignments, 3-157  
Program 76-2 (X-Z) – TSIU and RSIU / RSIS /  
RMDS port assignments, 3-158  
Program 77-1 – peripheral options (door phones) –  
RSIU / RSIS / RMDS, PIOU/PIOUS / IMDU,  
PEPU, 3-159  
set date, time and day, 1-15  
SMDR  
data output options (see Program 60)  
output/account code digit length (see Program  
60-2~7)  
software check (see Program 00)  
special common carrier numbers and authorization  
code digit length (see Program 45-3~6)  
Program 77-2 – door phone busy signal/door lock  
assignments, 3-163  
Program 77-3 – night ringing over PIOU external  
page zones, 3-165  
IN-6  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
Index  
T ~ V  
station  
class of service  
(see Program 34)  
allowed/denied area codes assigned by class  
(see Program 46-2~4)  
allowed/denied local office codes assigned by  
class (see Program 46-6~8)  
*
(see Program 35)  
CO line access (see Program 40)  
hunting (voice calls only, see Program 33)  
logical port  
class (1~8, see Program 46-11~46-81)  
class parameters (see Program 46-10~80)  
disable (see Program 45-2)  
[PDN] assignment (see Program 04)  
display and/or change (see Program 01)  
memory allocation for store caller ID/ANI (see  
exception office codes assigned by area codes  
(tables 1~16) (see Program 47)  
for office codes (see Program 45-1)  
*
Program 51)  
override code (see Program 45-8~9)  
toll restriction/traveling class override codes (see  
Program 44-1~8)  
*
outgoing call restriction (see Program 41)  
physical port display and or change (see  
Program 02)  
TSIU and RSIU / RSIS / RMDS port assignments  
(see Program 76-1)  
toll restriction classification (see Program 48)  
Strata AirLink  
(see Program 76-2 X-Y)  
Alert Signal, 3-118  
DK424 PCB Codes, 3-7  
Program 32, 3-88  
V
verified account code (see Program 69)  
verified account code toll restriction assignments  
(see Program 70)  
Program 39, 3-112  
Strata DK  
how to program, 1-10  
system  
voice mail message center port (see Program 32)  
*
and station programs, 3-1  
assignments  
basic timing (see Program 12)  
part 1 of 3 (see Program 10-1)  
part 2 of 3 (see Program 10-2)  
part 3 of 3 (see Program 10-3)  
initialization, 1-14  
(see Program 91-9)  
NT button lock  
(see Program 36)  
*
password (see Program 74)  
T
T1  
assignment series  
(DK424, see Program 41)  
*
channel assignments, 3-123  
clock source (see Program *42)  
span (RDTU) frame and line code  
assignments, 3-122  
span primary timing reference assignments,  
7-9  
span receive level pad assignments, 3-125  
span transmit level pad assignments, 3-124  
time, 1-15  
toll restriction  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  
IN-7  
Index  
V ~ V  
IN-8  
Strata DK Programming 5/99  

Nutone Heat A Vent Combination 9905 User Manual
Olympus Camedia Bu 200 User Manual
Samsung Um18b1c2 User Manual
Sears 53ds900077 User Manual
Spectralink Ptc400 User Manual
Whirlpool Ace244pt3 User Manual
Xerox Workcentre 3119 User Manual
Xerox Workcentre M45 User Manual
York Sunline 2000 48 User Manual
Zebra Technologies 17080100000 User Manual